JP2020054852A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can easily discharge foreign substances entered a ball putout passage section.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a door frame, a main body frame located behind the door frame, a ball putout passage section that connects a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a putout device provided on the side of the main body frame and that is bent in a substantially inverted L-shape, and a plurality of drop openings 553h that is provided at the corners of a passage bottom wall 553z of the ball putout passage section and capable of discharging foreign substances. When the side close to the door frame is defined as the front and the opposite side is defined as the rear, the ball putout passage section forms an inner radius arc-shaped portion 553r in at least a part of the front corners of the passage bottom wall 553z and at least forms a valley-fold corner part 553t on the rear corner corresponding to the arc-shaped portion 553r. At least a part of the plurality of drop openings 553h of the passage bottom wall 553z is arranged at the rear corner part 553t.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98D

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a game using a game ball (for example, a “pachinko ball”) as a game medium.

A gaming machine (pachinko machine) using a game ball as a game medium includes, for example, a door frame located at the forefront (“front frame 2” in Patent Document 1) and the door frame, as described in Patent Document 1. , A game board (same as the “game board 30”) removably mounted on the body frame, and a ball tank (same as the “game board 30”) provided above the body frame. A "ball tank 65"), a payout device (same as the "ball payout device 92") provided on the side of the main body frame, and a payout ball passage portion bent in a substantially inverted L-shape connecting the ball tank and the payout device. And The payout ball passage portion includes a horizontal tank rail (the upstream portion of the "ball alignment rail 69" and the "curve gutter 74") for guiding the game ball of the ball tank to the downstream, and a vertical passage leading to the payout device. A guide passage (the downstream portion of the "curve gutter 74" and the "prize ball passages 86a, 86b") is formed, and the ball tank and the tank rail of the payout ball passage portion are connected to the tank unit mounting portion of the main frame (the "upper base"). Unit 61 ").
In addition, when the game machine further touches a ball stopping member (the “ball stopper 71”) that can open and close the flow path of the payout ball passage portion (specifically, the tank rail) and the game ball flowing through the tank rail, A ball rectifying member (the "ball leveling member 70") that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball, and a wire connection terminal for wiring (the "terminal board 78") above the tank rail. ").

  In addition, troublesome foreign substances such as metal powder generated by rubbing between game balls and resin powder generated by rubbing between the game balls and the cleaning pellets enter the payout ball passage portion of the gaming machine. For example, as described in Patent Document 2, a drop hole for dropping the foreign matter and discharging the foreign matter to the outside (in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163,086) 232a1 to 232a4...) Are provided.

JP-A-08-10413 (page 6, FIG. 4) JP-A-2002-66051

It is conventionally known that foreign matter such as metal powder or resin powder enters the dispensing ball passage, and as a countermeasure, a plurality of gaps for dropping foreign substances are provided mainly on the bottom wall of the tank rail in the dispensing ball passage. It was provided open (see Patent Document 2).
However, the conventional tank rail has a problem in that the front and rear corners of the passage bottom wall are substantially perpendicular to the valley-folded shape, and it is difficult to discharge foreign substances smoothly.
That is, it is considered that an airflow is generated by the movement of the game ball inside the tank rail, and foreign matter not attached to the game ball naturally moves due to generation of fine vibration. At the right and left corners of the bottom wall, air tends to stagnate, so that foreign matter entering such corners tends to stay.
Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to discharge the foreign matter smoothly, the accumulated foreign matter adheres to the inner surface of the tank rail and is easily stained, and the right-angled corners are not easily cleaned, so that the stain is accumulated. .

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which foreign substances that have entered a payout ball passage can be easily discharged.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides, as set forth in claim 1,
Door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank provided above the main body frame and for supplying game balls to a payout device provided on the side of the main body frame,
A tank rail communicating with the ball tank and causing game balls in the ball tank to flow toward the payout device;
In a gaming machine comprising: a plurality of drop openings capable of discharging foreign substances, which are opened in the tank rail;
The tank rail,
A passage bottom wall forming a bottom;
When the side close to the door frame is the front and the opposite side is the back, a gutter front wall provided on the front side of the passage bottom wall,
A gutter rear wall provided on the rear side of the passage bottom wall,
The corner of the bottom wall of the passage and the front wall of the gutter are formed into an arcuate portion with an inner radius so that foreign matter that has entered the tank rail is easily moved, and the bottom wall of the passage is formed so that the foreign matter is difficult to move. The corner with the gutter rear wall is a valley-folded corner,
Further, there is provided a gaming machine in which at least a part of the plurality of falling ports is arranged on the corner side of the valley-folding shape which is a corner between the passage bottom wall and the gutter rear wall.
In the above description, the “ball tank provided above the main body frame” includes the case where the ball tank is mounted above the rear surface of the main body frame, the case where the ball tank is mounted on the upper surface of the main body frame, and both. The same applies to the case where the dispensing device is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame. And the case where it is attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
Further, the ball tank and the dispensing ball passage may be integrated or separate.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if foreign matter enters the arc-shaped portion on the front wall side of the gutter of the tank rail, the foreign material easily flows on the arc-shaped portion because the air is unlikely to stagnate, and the foreign matter easily flows in the arc-shaped portion. Due to the accompanying vibration, the foreign matter easily moves to the corner on the back wall side of the gutter along the inner radius shape of the arc-shaped portion, and is efficiently discharged from the fall port at the corner. In addition, as described above, foreign matter hardly remains on the arc-shaped portion on the gutter front wall side of the tank rail, and since the inner surface of the arc-shaped portion having an inner radius is easy to clean, it is easy to maintain a clean state. (For example, refer to paragraphs 0622 to 0685, 0770 to 0837, FIG. 91, FIG. 98A to FIG. 98D, FIG. 101, FIG. 111 to FIG. 117, etc.).

In addition, in the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The dispensing ball passage portion includes a substantially horizontal tank rail connected to the ball tank, and a substantially vertical guiding passage leading to the dispensing device,
The arc-shaped portion is formed at least at an upstream portion of the tank rail on the ball tank side,
Further, it is preferable that at least one of the drop openings formed at the corners is located at the uppermost stream of all the drop openings (solution means A).
This is because the joint between the ball tank and the tank rail is provided with a shooter-shaped step that suddenly descends from the ball tank side to the tank rail side in order to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail. And the vibration promotes the fall of foreign matter from the drop port. In addition, the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port located at the uppermost stream and is diffused throughout the tank rail. This is because it becomes difficult.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the above solution A,
The upstream side of the tank rail may be formed in a crank shape in a plan view, and the drop port may be formed in a corner portion of the crank (preferably on an out-course side of the corner portion) (solution means B).
In such a case, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner of the crank of the tank rail due to inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop hole provided therein.
In addition, the technical idea of the above-mentioned solution B in which a fall port is provided at a corner of a crank of a tank rail can be applied to a normal tank rail in which an arc-shaped portion and a corner portion are not mixed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the above solution A or B,
One of the drop ports may be provided at a front corner downstream of the tank rail (solution C).
By doing so, the foreign matter that has flowed down the arc-shaped portion on the front side of the tank rail and has not been discharged and remains can be reliably discharged here.

Further, in the game machine according to any one of claims 1 and 2,
The main body frame has a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the ball tank and the tank rail on an upper part thereof,
The tank rail is formed transparent, and the outside of the arc-shaped portion is also formed in a round shape,
Further, a window hole is formed in at least a portion of the tank unit mounting portion corresponding to the arc-shaped portion of the tank rail, or at least a corresponding portion is formed transparent so that the tank unit mounting portion can be mounted from the front side of the main body frame. The inside of the tank rail may be made visible through the section (solution D).
According to such a gaming machine, when the game board is removed from the main frame and replaced, the foreign matter and the game balls in the tank rail can be visually confirmed through the tank unit mounting portion from the front side of the main frame, so that maintenance is easy. Particularly, since the inside and outside on the front side of the tank rail are formed in a round shape, the visibility is further improved.

Furthermore, in the game machine according to any one of claims 1 and 2,
The main body frame has a back cover that can be opened and closed on a rear surface thereof, and an upper edge of the back cover covers a lower edge of a rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion,
On the other hand, an eave-shaped ridge may be formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion at a position along the upper edge of the back cover (solution means E).
According to such a gaming machine, the foreign matter discharged from the fall opening at the rear corner of the tank rail falls on the eave-shaped ridge or accumulates on the ridge. There is almost no risk of foreign matter entering the inside of the main body frame from the joint of the main body frame. Incidentally, since the foreign matter contains the metal powder as described above, the operation of the electronic components inside the main body frame may be adversely affected, which is not preferable.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily discharge foreign matter that has entered the payout ball passage.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the front and rear, and (c) is a cylinder in the conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. 34A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34A disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing a movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown by being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle cover unit from the disassembly. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the handle unit from disassembly from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the air line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at a portion of the lower counter ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of the conventional door frame by cutting the same part as (a). FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit in the plate unit of a door frame. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from the front upper part. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in a state where the rendering operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting / lowering spring holding member is at the position of the moving end, and (b) is a rendering operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which moved to the raising position. It is a sectional view of a production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board, the decoration board outside a button, and the decoration board in a button in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a production operation part unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detection bodies in the production operation part unit of the production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected several contact detection bodies to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is (a) of the contact detection sensor main body and several contact detection bodies in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is a production operation unit which makes a dish left decoration unit, a dish right decoration unit, a production operation unit, etc. of a plate unit movable forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and the back side of etc. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has decorativeness, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another embodiment of the effect operation unit typically. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line wu in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and (b) is an outer layer transparent in (a) while keeping the inner layer as it is. FIG. 5 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state shown in FIG. It is a front view which shows each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of the effect operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a top view of a main-body frame. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the B2-B2 line in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a sectional view taken along line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from behind. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including a cross-sectional view of a main part of FIG. 100 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site | part of a tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of another embodiment is seen from back. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is ( It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the tank rail etc. cut | disconnected by the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross-section, a flow of a game ball in the tank rail in FIG. 107. (A), (b) is sectional drawing which shows another form which provided the protective wall of FIG. 109 on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of a tank rail. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like in another embodiment corresponding to the cross-section taken along the cake line in FIG. FIG. 98B is a sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like corresponding to a section taken along line B3-B3 of FIG. 98A. It is a perspective view of the ball stopping member of another form. It is the longitudinal section of the tank rail of another form which cut | disconnected the vicinity of the bending part. FIG. 115 is a longitudinal sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like showing a state in which the ball stopping member in FIG. 115 at the retracted position is moved to the projecting position. (A) is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. (A) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view seen. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the lower right back. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 118A is a cross-sectional view taken along a cut line in FIG. 118A, FIG. 118B is a cross-sectional view taken along a cool line in FIG. 118A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the cake line. FIG. 118 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 118 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which made the out sensor detachable, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the out sensor in (a). It is a front view of the game board in which the center role etc. were made opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 126 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 126 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the center role etc. were made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 126. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 126. It is a front view of the game board which cuts a front unit in parallel with the surface of a game panel, and shows the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the upper left side unit, and the attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is the starting port unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the center role and the opening of the game panel. (A) is a perspective view showing a relationship between a center role, a game panel, and a back left decorative body of a back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). (A) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center role, and (b) is a perspective view of the third sorting device in the center role as viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the 3rd distribution device of the center role thing and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd distribution device of the center role thing and looked at from the front lower part. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a third distribution device in a center role. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the protrusion part provided in the 2nd V winning opening and the 3rd loss opening in the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center role, (b) is the 2nd V winning opening and the 2nd winning opening. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a game ball when a projection part is not provided in a three losing mouth. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right game ball in a front unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of game balls flowing through a first guide passage in a guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of game balls flowing through a second guide passage in a guide passage group. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball received in a bonus winning opening, (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion of the third sorting device in (a) from a plan view, and (c). FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the second distribution device in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the timing of the operation of the bonus winning port and the first distribution device and the second distribution device according to the type of “small hit”. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in an attacker unit, and is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of the guide path group different from FIG. (E) And (f) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of a further different guide path group. It is a front view of a back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and looked at from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the light guide plate effect unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and the board | substrate for pictures in a light guide plate effecting unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a first pattern of the light guide plate emits light, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a second pattern of the light guide plate emits light. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of each decoration board of the back front effecting unit in a back unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decoration board of a back front effecting unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the right part of a center role by a left side cross section, (b) is (a) It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the relationship between the back right decoration board of a back front effect unit in a back unit, a sub status display, and the right part of a center role. It is a wiring diagram which shows the wiring of some LED of the sub state LED in a back right decorative board. (A) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d) is It is the perspective view which looked at the out-ball detection unit from the front, (e) is the perspective view which looked at the out-ball detection unit from the back, (f) is the perspective which looked at the out-ball detection unit and the lower right front lower position. It is a figure, (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view showing a relationship between a game panel and an out ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state where the out ball detection unit is in contact with the game panel. FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the assembly of the game board, which is cut up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out-mouth and viewed from the right side. It is a perspective view showing the neighborhood of an out mouth from the front in the state where it was assembled to a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 2nd design in the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of a back unit in the state light-embellished. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the 1st design light emitting decoration in the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of a back unit. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection structure of each board | substrate, a motor, etc. in a game board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 189 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 181. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the processing at the time of payment control part power-on following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prior judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type, and (C) is a type of a small hit It is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is an example of a mode of error notification. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table showing a winning probability and the like according to a set value of a gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing a set value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in a first guide passage. It is an example of a specific effect at the time of performing the warning effect using the right detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. It is a specific production example at the time of executing a warning production using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a first custody passage and a second custody passage are provided with a clogging clearance hole. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a first custody passage and a second custody passage are provided with a clogging clearance hole. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port is provided near entrances of a first guide passage and a second guide passage. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port is provided near an outlet inside the first guide passage. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an execution state of an operation when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an execution state of an operation when an abnormality occurs. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port and a third out port are provided separately from the out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of a calculation when a 2nd out port and a 3rd out port are provided separately from an out port. It is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate are set. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a plurality of decorative bodies are provided around the display area of the effect display device. It is an example of a specific effect with a light guide plate and a plurality of decorative bodies at the time of performing a light emission effect. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is an example of a specific effect by the light guide plate and the effect display device at the time of performing the imitation effect. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the setting information determination processing performed by the main control MPU. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a set value suspension suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display mode of the hold notice effect and the display mode of the setting value suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a set value continuation suggestion effect. It is a table showing a winning probability and the like according to a set value of a gaming machine. It is a table showing a winning probability and the like according to a set value of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the fraudulent act during the setting change of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent behavior when fraudulent behavior is not monitored during the setting value confirmation display. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraudulent act when a fraudulent act is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraudulent act when a fraudulent act is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. It is an example of a table used in the lottery process. It is a modification of the setting value suggestion effect. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit of other forms. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of other forms. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of other forms. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part enlarged partial front view of a main control unit. FIG. 269 is a sectional view taken along line ZZ of FIG. 263. FIG. 269 is an enlarged partial front view of the main control unit, showing a state where the change suppression unit has changed to the second state from FIG. 263. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged sectional view of a main part of a main control unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged sectional view of a main part of a main control unit. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 195. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a payout control board 63 , A back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the space between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. And a locking unit 650 for locking.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to a rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311; a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310; The peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged and a predetermined effect image arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying includes a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units that can perform a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The game ball B can be driven by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Thereby, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the game area 5a. Thus, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the light guide plate effect unit 3100, It is possible to entertain a player by causing a light emitting effect by the effect unit 3200 or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, respectively, and are arranged left and right apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to the right. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixed portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixed portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixed portion 23b behind the horizontal fixed portion 23a, and a rear side of the upper horizontal fixed portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing portions 12b and the upper and lower fixing portions 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively, while the upper and lower fixing portions 12b and 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutouts 41a that are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is in the form of a strip extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state such that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (the curtain plate internal space 40a) to communicate with the outside through the gap between the blade portions 46b so as to be able to ventilate.

  The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

  According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the curtain plate is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 obliquely upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. Through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295, the handle cover 180 can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated. Thereby, when the player pushes his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) to rotate the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame is formed. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front tube portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Accordingly, the port member 47 is also released to a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players traveling in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The effect sound can be heard, the attention of the player can be attracted by the effect sound, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass sound, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 for mounting the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 , A handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a plate unit 200 mounted on the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the plate unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 with the The door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit, and the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose front view is extended vertically and having a door window 101a penetrating forward and backward, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. , A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in rear view at a lower rear portion of the door frame base 101, and a back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. Door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side as viewed from the side, handle rear relay board 106 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear, a handle relay board cover 108 that covers the handle relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable that covers the wiring cable. It includes a cover 109, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player. The handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery to fire the game ball B in the upper plate 201. The device 540 is used to play a game to be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a left side in front view rotatably mounted on the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable with hinges, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4. Of the game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear of the door frame base 101 in rear view. .

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 are provided at a lower front corner, a plate unit 200 is provided at a lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 is provided at a left outer front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outside front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the top outside front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and a front left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. And a ball feed opening 101e for allowing the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140 to face forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thus, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 82) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 83) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an external shape is combined with a rectangular shape extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically and extending vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. This is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation sensor 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to form a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hooking member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. As a result, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is located on the upper side. A portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The hinge member 125 below the door frame is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 inserts the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 1 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34A disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state where the movable mechanism is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

  The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to connect the outer frame 2 to the main body. It is used to open and close the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole provided in the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotating together with rotation of a regular key inserted into the key hole 132; , A second cam member 135 rotatably mounted around the axis in the front-rear direction at a position below the cylinder body 131 and an upper end rotated at a position to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 has a strip shape and is rotatably mounted at a lower end side of the second cam member 135 so as to be rotatable at a position on the right side of the rotation center. It is rotatably mounted at a position below the center and the lower end is rotatable at a position below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. A second arm 137 strip-shaped mounted, and a.

  In addition, the cylinder lock 130 covers the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (the rotation transmitting member 133). Rivets for rotatably mounting the rear cover 138 attached to the upper and lower ends 115 of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

  The first cam member 134 has an upper end of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and an upper end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmitting member 133 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 across the front surface. The second cam member 135 has the lower end of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side of the first arm 136.

  In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion where the first arm 136 is attached and a portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated at an angle of 90 degrees about the respective rotation axes. doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion where the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion where the second arm 137 is attached. .

  The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape and is locked in an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Thus, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  In the cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmitting member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430.

  Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from behind and the rear end is attached to the front piece. I have. In the cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder main body 131.

  Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of a cylinder main body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is different from the conventional cylinder lock 130. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder main body 131.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 at the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. Both the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower part of each rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated from a normal state by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction by a regular key.

  In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second arm 135 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, a force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. , And the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is caused by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 decreases, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 acts. The force to do it increases.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting on the second arm 137 upward from the first arm 136 increases. The second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise from a normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36B).

  In addition, when returning from a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a normal state to a normal state by clockwise rotation with a key, the opposite operation to the above is performed. It will work.

  On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder main body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end becomes rightward of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first arm 136 moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached at the upper end below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. The second arm 137 has its upper end mounted below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 while the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. Is hardly applied.

  In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, a force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves clockwise. The rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is a portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 decreases, whereas In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 increases.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. , The second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly through the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 36 (c)).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to the normal state, the key is rotated 90 degrees from the normal state to return to the normal state. Will be done.

  As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are attached to each other at a phase of 90 degrees are attached. The first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are connected regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the key hole 132). By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be improved.

  Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. Since the cylinder body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

  Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 does not need to be changed, so that the locking unit 650 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 Cost increase can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided behind the cylinder main body 131, a wrongdoer who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front into the rear of the cylinder main body 131. If the rotation transmission member 133 is illegally rotated by the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to perform an illegal act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder main body 131, a tool is inserted into the rear of the cylinder main body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmitting member 133, the rotation transmitting member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmitting member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and an unauthorized act of opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, or the like. Can be prevented from being performed.

  Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 is connected to the first arm 136 and the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees are connected to each other. A portion attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 to each other. State. Accordingly, when one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transmitted to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, There is no large resistance to rotation, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated, unlocking and locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted into the keyhole is forcibly rotated. The key can be prevented from being broken, and the key can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, since the rotation of the key inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Accordingly, even if one arm is broken, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

  In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, in the case where the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear to rotate the gear and rotate the rotation transmitting member 133. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth bar shape, the tip of the tool can be hardly caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. As a result, the rotation transmission member 133 can be prevented from being rotated, and the locking unit 650 is illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. It can be reliably prevented from being provided.

  In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the one using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, and a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , Etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, a ball feeding member 144 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and a ball removing member 143 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 173) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl removing button 222 of the bowl unit 200 downward, the upper bowl removing slider 242 slides down together with the operation transmitting section 242b, and the operation transmitting section 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the ball removing member 143 with which the operating rod 143c is in contact is formed is urged upward by a spring, the game ball B is placed on the partitioning portion 143a. Even if supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball-pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being separated by the partition 143a. Bouncing can be prevented.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left, and A lower piece 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the anti-fraud member 148, the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal action is performed such that the illegally operated game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B fired (hit by the ball) by the ball launching device 540 is performed. The V-shaped formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B by the momentum between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211 a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full tank receiver which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and which can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 150b, and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (a foul ball), and a game ball B opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received in a full tank receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking pieces 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 96).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is an enlarged front view showing a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit exploded from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II in FIG. FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

  The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

  First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to a handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, and to a front end of the handle base 181. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover base 183, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184 a mounted on the front surface, and a handle mounted on the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. Front lens 185 , And a.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 at the rear side of the handle 195, and a handle 195 mounted on the front end and rotatably mounted on the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, and the ridges 291d are respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. Is inserted, the handle base 181 is in a state of being unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

  The handle 195 includes a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in a circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b to each other, and two annular outer ring portions 195c extending in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (the shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It has a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general handle outer peripheral surface of a conventional pachinko machine.

  The three spokes 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke 195b extending leftward horizontally from the central hub 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from the portions each having an angle of 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The three spokes 195b extend so long that a gap is formed between the central hub 195a and the outer peripheral ring 195c into which a player's finger can be inserted.

  The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped round side facing forward.

  The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Thus, even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the touch of the handle 195. Therefore, even when the outer ring portion 195c is turned, the game ball B can be driven.

  The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b extending from the front end of the guide 196a to the center. I have. The three stay guides 196 have an attachment stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction when a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later is inserted into the guide portion 196a.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 pieces, one piece at the center, three pieces at regular intervals on the middle circumference, and six pieces at regular intervals along the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric manner. These LEDs 184a are divided into five sets: one at the center, three at the center, two at the upper left of the outer circumference, two at the upper right of the outer circumference, and two at the lower side of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). On the handle decoration board 184, a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems at maximum, and controls 10 systems of LED 184a divided into 5 groups each with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each of them can emit full color light. Like that.

  Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. And the like, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring cable composed of four electric wires. . When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, it is divided into five sets according to the command. The ten LEDs 184a can emit light of an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger than the number of the wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, is individually (here, set). Control), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

  The front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has a light-transmitting property. The lens 185 in front of the handle is provided with a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The front lens 185 of the handle is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player comes into contact with the handle 195, the static electricity applied from the player is detected, and the contact of the player with the handle 195 is detected. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

  Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 by some method without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped by the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633. Accordingly, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 during the rotation operation of the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button 193 can be stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

  Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end of the handle cover unit 291 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner cover 292 having a cover and a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface; An annular substrate cover 294 covering the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

  The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending substantially forward and backward with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and an inner diameter that decreases from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a toward the front. A middle rear wall portion 291c extending through the middle wall portion 291b, a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c extending back and forth with an inner diameter capable of inserting the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder portion 291c And a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion behind the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. And a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a position between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. And an opening 291h penetrating below the portion 291a.

  The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181 and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and the handle base 181 cannot be relatively rotated by being inserted into the grooves 181c. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

  The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylinder 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylinder 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylinder 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 of the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g and rotating the handle 195 through the space between the guide pieces 291g, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. By positioning the guide piece 291g in the 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (the handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and a circumferential direction having a size of an angle of about 90 degrees and penetrating the front cylindrical portion 291a. .

  The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg 292b and a plurality (four in this case) of cutouts 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e with the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and a rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at upper and lower portions and left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

  The handle cover decorative board 293 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and is formed in an annular shape having the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decoration board 293 has 12 LEDs 293a mounted thereon and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into six pairs of two at the lower left from the center, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, two at the right, and two at the lower right. (See FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems at maximum, and each of the 10 sets of LEDs 293a divided into 6 sets can be controlled to emit full color light, so that each set is controlled by a total of 18 sets of 3 sets. I have to.

  Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and commands. One control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to a wiring cable composed of four electric wires. I have. When the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, it is divided into six sets according to the command. The twelve LEDs 293a can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate portion 294a. And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward shortly. The board cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to a base portion 292a of the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and a spindle mount (kamakura type or bowl type) which bulges rearward. , Etc.), and a plurality (four in this case) of notched openings 295b cut out from the rear end toward the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and is formed such that the plurality of cutout openings 295b coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 is formed of two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is formed by two colors of two kinds of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , A circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is provided inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. The rear part is inserted, and the handle 195, the front lens 185, and the like are located forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291. It is attached to 101b.

  In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, a central central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 has an outer peripheral ring portion 195c outside the central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by a handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front tubular portion 291a and the outer tubular portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

  The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have a light-transmitting property, and light the LEDs 293 a of the handle cover decorative board 293. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated.

  Since the handle cover unit 290 has the cutout opening 295b and the cutout 292c that are coincident with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side. It can be seen that a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a is opened. This alleviates the player from mental anxiety that his or her hands (fingers) are pushed into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Can be.

  The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is formed through the opening 291h so that the lower portion of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 can be formed. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, Through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch 295b.

  Also, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the liquid or the game ball B passes through the gap between the front cylinder 291a and the leg 292b of the inner 292, and the lower side. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed as a lower set of the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional body 40 in the inclination direction. Thereby, the wind (wind pressure) discharged obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b through the front cylinder. It can enter into the part 291a. Therefore, when the player is pushing his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotating the handle 195 (playing device for the game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Further, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, it is possible to hook and pull the right cutout opening 295b to pull the door frame 3 or the like. Can be used as a handle when opening.

  Further, in the handle 195, since the plating portion is provided up to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when the player touches only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the game ball B Can be typed.

  In addition, since the handle cover 295 has the notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by hooking the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. As described above, since the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a hitting operation suitable for a player.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward from the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle area is provided to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195 a, a plurality of spoke portions 195 b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195 a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195 b A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, so that a handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. You can see the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 in a form that has never been seen before. As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the player's willingness to play with the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. Further, it is possible to make it easy for a player who is traveling in the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed to select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can play the game. When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a different feeling to the operation of the handle 195 from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and to entertain the player by performing the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. Can be suppressed.

  When the player operates the handle 195 to produce an effect sound from the main frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to sound. The air in the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is caused by the sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40 a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624. (Sound wind) is emitted forward. At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 is reduced by the plurality of blades 46 b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the notch opening 295 b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. A stimulus by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, by supplying the sound pressure from the port member 47 to the finger of the player inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. Can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, can entertain the player, and can make the player hard to get tired of In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover is provided. The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, so that the stress applied to the player can be reduced and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the handle 195 and the finger of the player operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided. The sound pressure (sound wind) released forward from the port member 47 provided on the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is transmitted to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is applied by being guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various types of sensors (a handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with a case where a vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism. It is possible to make it difficult to break the 180, it can be avoided that uncomfortable feeling to the player by the breakage of the handle unit 180, a drop in interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the present pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the present pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and as a pachinko machine that plays the game without hesitating the player. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 through which a player's finger can be inserted through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part than the handle cover unit 290 passes through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This makes it possible to give a sense of opening to the tubular handle cover unit 290, so that the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and the player The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h penetrating therethrough are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (the outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower cutout 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid and the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

  Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and a plurality of handle covers 295 of a handle cover unit 290 having a front end having the same diameter as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the center hub 195a can be operated by grasping with a hand in the same manner as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke 195b can be operated only by a finger, or the outer peripheral ring can be operated. An operation like a steering wheel of an automobile is performed by the portion 195c, an operation of putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening portion 295b, and a handle cover unit is provided so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can perform operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with your fingers. Can be various hammering operation of the gaming balls B (steering) provides pachinko machine 1 as possible. Therefore, the player can hit the game ball B into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like. In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be grasped by putting a finger on the outer periphery ring portion 195c, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be grasped with fingers by straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operation position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, a handle operation that cannot be performed by the conventional pachinko machine can be performed, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. In this way, the steering wheel operation can be enjoyed and the player can be hardly bored.

  In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and can improve the appearance and attract the player's interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming unnecessarily large. By suppressing the upward pressure on the game area 5a (the door window 101a), the game area 5a can be prevented from being narrowed, and the game area 5a can be relatively enlarged. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be a highly appealing pachinko machine that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is appropriately made to emit light, so that the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are made to stand out. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

  Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when the door frame 3 is opened and closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the appearance worse on the door frame 3, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

  In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also controls the flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction. Since the guide piece 291g is provided, even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be regulated by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, so that the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, so that only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are provided. Even if the handle 195 is operated while touching, the game ball B can be hit, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing various hitting operations (handle operations) as described above can be provided. The hitting of the game ball B without touching the handle 195 can be prevented, and the operation of the handle using the tool can be prevented, so that the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) protruding forward, a plate unit relay board (not shown) mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. A lending operation unit 220, a unit for removing the upper tray ball (not shown) attached below the mounting base, a unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball attached behind the unit for removing the upper tray ball, It has.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252 and separated from each other left and right, and And a dish right decoration unit 275.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. Unit relay board unit 330.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is capable of protruding upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and is attached to the effect operation unit 350 provided with the effect operation unit 301 and the operation unit base 315 to effect operation operation. Effect unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 that supports the unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projection output adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward output of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the effect operation unit lifting / lowering mechanism 360. I have.

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape which bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 at the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball B The static electricity that has been charged can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at a portion of the lower counter ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows a principal part. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower plate hole 202 a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate cover 265 so as to be openable and closable.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. When the lower dish 202 is assembled with the dish unit 200, the lower dish ball hole 202a is located to the left of the front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower bowl 202b is provided in front of the center axis of the lower bowl 202. The lower counter ball supply port 211j is formed in a tubular shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight toward the lower counter ball ejection hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

  By the way, when the game ball B is directed straight toward the lower ball hole 202b by the lower ball hole supply port 211j, if the lower ball hole 202b is closed by the lower ball hole cover 265, the lower Since the bowling hole 202b and the bowling hole supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the bowl 202, the pool of the game balls B may be concentrated in a region on the right side of the center in the bowl 202. There is. When the game balls B concentrated on the right region in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are moved from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. The lower plate 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room in the left area in the lower plate 202 due to the fact that the lower plate 202 is not fully discharged. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally left forward. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position immediately behind the lower dish ball hole 202a allows at least one game ball B to be distributed. It is inclined diagonally left forward so as to be at a distance.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis (line indicated by a dashed line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower countersink supply port 211c. Has been moved to.

  As a result, by moving the lower dish hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower dish 202 (the part of the lower dish hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower dish hole is removed. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B concentrated on the right side in the lower plate 202. In the lower plate 202, a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower plate hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211). Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends obliquely to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow with the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game balls B released from the unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower dish ball supply port 211c side are guided to the left inside the lower dish 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and emitted. Thus, the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire inside of the lower plate 202.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the full-battery detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the user of the full-battery, even though there is a sufficient area in the lower plate 202 where the game balls B can be stored.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. The apparatus includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 mounted near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and an upper plate ball mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. The unit includes a unit before removal (not shown), and a unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. Thereby, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the operation of the upper plate ball release button 222, and the upper plate ball supply port, the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper plate The ball is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the ball is removed, and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl feeding port is located in front of a ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 in a state assembled with the bowl base unit 210. Is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receptacle of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper part and the rear part are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed at the upper portion near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. This is for returning the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B for the borrowed game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the light amount.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the upper plate ball extraction button 222 and has translucency; a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223; A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display unit 226 disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It has a volume control button 227 arranged at the front and a light quantity control button 228 arranged to the left of the volume control button 227.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a letter “ball” on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section 226 displays the amount of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for staging such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a double circular gourd like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a “+” character at the center of one (upper) circle and a “−” character at the center of the other (lower) circle. Is provided with a pattern that sounds from the speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The volume of the volume control button 227 increases when the “+” side is pressed, and decreases when the “−” side is pressed.

  The light amount adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amount of the LEDs on the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd-like shape obtained by combining two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a “+” character at the center of one (upper) circle and a “−” character at the center of the other (lower) circle. Is painted with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the “+” side is pressed, and becomes darker when the “−” side is pressed.

  The volume control button 227 and the light level control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume level control button 227 is white and the light level control button 228 is black), so that the player is less likely to make a mistake.

  By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At times, the effect display unit 1600 displays a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light amount, and the like by appropriately operating the effect operation unit 301, selects an item to be adjusted, and then operates the contact operation unit 302. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the light amount are changed, it takes time (time) to adjust the sound volume and the light amount. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light amount can be directly (directly) adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and the time and effort required for adjusting the volume and light amount are reduced. Can be provided and the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit for removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game ball stored in the upper plate 201 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper ball pull-out button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, when the upper ball pull-out unit 240 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

  The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to the rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port from the rear, and to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper bowl removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to allow a game ball B to pass therethrough (not shown); A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving port downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b. And a ball guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B rightward in rear view.

  The ball receiving port is opened forward at the downstream end (right end in a front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 through the upper plate feeding port of the plate unit base 211 in a state assembled in the plate base unit 210. Formed at the location. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper plate 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner, and a rearward side from a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion. And a projecting operation transmitting portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state in which the slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion protrudes forward through the dish unit base 211 from the rear side, and the upper receiving portion is formed on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242 to urge the upper counterslider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring.

  In the unit 240 for removing the high-ball counter, the slider 242 for the high-ball counter is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-ball counter is removed via the operation receiving portion of the slider 242 for the high-ball counter. The ejection button 222 is located at the upper moving end. In addition, since the upper ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the ball can be moved downward, and the weight of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143 causes the ball removing member 143 to rotate, so that the partitioning portion 143a and the ball entrance 141a are removed. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper counter ball removing button 222 is released, the upper counter ball removing button 222 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring, and the upper counter ball removing button 222 is raised, and is brought into contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b. The ball removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to return to the original state.

  In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removing unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front of the dish unit main body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a have a dish left decorative unit 270 and a dish right decorative unit 275 attached to their front surfaces, respectively.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, although not shown, the plate unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a at the center in the left-right direction and has a rendering operation unit mounting portion to which the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted. . The effect operation unit attachment portion is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower bowl removing unit 260 includes a lower bowl removing button 263 and a lower bowl removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower bowl removing button 263.

  In the state in which the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate removing button 263 matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate removing cover is provided. Reference numeral 265 closes the lower dish hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B.

  In a normal state, when the lower bowl removing button 263 is pressed backward, the lower bowl removing lid 265 moves, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a is opened, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a passes through the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The game balls B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

  In addition, when the lower bowl removing button 265 is moved by pressing the lower bowl removing button 263, the lower bowl removing lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed rearward and then released, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 is released. Is returned to the position of the normal state, and the lower saucer hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish left decoration unit and Dish right decoration unit]
The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a light-transmitting dish left decoration 271, and a light-transmitting dish left decoration penetrating the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front face of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative board 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction in the dish left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative board 273 emit light, the entire front of the dish left decorative body 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a light transmissive dish right decoration 276, and a light transmissive dish right decoration penetrating the dish right decoration 276. A lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface are provided.

  The dish right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front face of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decoration 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish right decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front of the dish right decoration 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 are partially protruded upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 when assembled in the door frame 3. Thus, a step can be formed in which the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side are higher than the upper side bulging portion 252a. This allows the player to hook the finger by utilizing the steps between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 are leveled. It can be used as a fingerhold when performing, or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Also, due to a step between the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in a state where the rendering operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting / lowering spring holding member is at the position of the moving end, and (b) is a rendering operation from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit of the state in which the unit moved to the raising position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in a state where the rendering operation unit unit is at the lowered position and the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that allows a player to perform a contact operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that allows a player to perform a pressing operation. The rendering operation unit 301 accepts a player's operation and moves the rendering operation unit 301. (Vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the effect during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, a contact operation unit 302 is provided above a pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about ／ of the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical shape. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside. An operation unit base 315 to be attached and a rendering operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for emitting and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the rendering operation unit cover unit 310. Outer peripheral decoration board 320, outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to operation section base 315 so as to cover effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and operation section relay board unit attached to the rear surface of operation section base 315 330.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the projection output of the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that moves the production operation unit unit 350 up and down, and the production operation unit unit 350. And a projection output adjustment mechanism 380 that performs the adjustment. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to be able to move up and down from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a ring shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. And a unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state such that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  At least the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a light-transmitting property, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 described later.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected such that the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative body 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rear of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 has its front and lower parts covered by a unit lower cover 311, and its upper part is covered by a unit upper cover 312 and a staging operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a whose upper part is open, and a flange 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a houses the effect operation unit 350 therein. The lower end of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit unit 350 described below is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

  On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

  When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 315 b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315, the rear surface of the body unit 315 a, the operation unit relay board 332 mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from behind. And a substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331 as described above.

  The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), a decoration board 355 outside a button, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a decoration board 364 in a button, and an operation button. The connection between the elevation drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, the projection output detection sensor 375, and the projection output adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rendering operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is.

  The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detector 352 mounted on the upper part of the button body 351, and a button-shaped body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and arranged above the button base 354 And a ring-shaped external decoration board 355 on the upper surface of which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

  The effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 for attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. And a contact detection sensor main body 358 connected to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

  The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a cylindrical portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface 351a is formed in a shape that forms a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (the cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately ／ of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about ／ of the diameter of the upper surface 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

  The contact detection body 352 is formed in a dish shape in which the outer periphery is circular and the inside of a certain width from the outer periphery bulges upward. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and swells obliquely upward and has a flat inside. Thus, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat downward extending piece 352a extending downward from both left and right ends and a rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The contact detector 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, light from the LED 364a of the in-button decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is excellent. Luminous decoration can be performed in an appropriate state.

  The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connection connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be. That is, the button main body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

  The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending cylindrical sleeve body 353a, and an annular flange 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve main body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button main body 351, and the length is substantially the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button main body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the out-of-button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

  The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at a symmetrical portion with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protrudes from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. And a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shaft 362 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is slidably inserted into each of the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b has an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked on the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved up and down by the pair of guide pins 354 c being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371. On the lower surface of the button base 354, the upper ends of a pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact, and are urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

  The LED decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in rows on a double concentric circle. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided in a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve main body 353a and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LED 355a of the button-side decorative substrate 355, a portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated.

  The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged such that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the effect operation unit 301 advances and retreats. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a position on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 for guiding the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the effect operation unit 301 in a favorable manner. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

  The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor body 358 supplies a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. A constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of a sensor electrode provided inside. Further, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with a sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance. However, a signal in a plurality of stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

  The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the detection target (the hand of the player) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect contact or approach of the detection target (the player's hand) to the side surface 351. For this reason, in the effect operation unit 350, the button main body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

  The production operation unit 350 is supported by a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowermost position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 matches the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a single sphere. Then, in a state in which the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 projects upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downwardly against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

  More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move further downward, so that the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operating unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing. It is detected by the sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  Further, the effect operation unit unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, and thus, when operating the contact operation unit 302, touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal having the unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, minute irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to provide an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. Can be provided, the degree of design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided.

  In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button body 351 may be opaque or translucent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. When the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 be translucent. Thus, the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the decoration board 355 outside the button provided below and the LED 364a of the decoration board 364 inside the button, and the player can be illuminated by the light emission effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Direction operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can move the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted below the effect operation unit unit 350 in the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315, and has a substantially circular outer periphery as an elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of columnar cylinders symmetrically arranged, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other, and has a disk-shaped upper base 363 whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and is mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 363 to transmit light upward. A decorative board 364 on the button on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. A central shaft 366 penetrating vertically and having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

  Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted on the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft projects upward, and to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. A spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368, and rotatably mounted above the elevating mechanism base 361, and rotated by the driven gear 369. And an elevating cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an elevating cam drive gear member 370 having a lower end connected thereto, and a rotatable mounting through which a central shaft 366 is inserted. The elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. A member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevating sensor 374 for detecting the elevation of the staging operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating and lowering spring holding member of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 which is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. And a projection output detection sensor 375 for detecting the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385.

  The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and an elevating spring with a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. And a pair of through-holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projection output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. An operation button elevating / lowering drive motor 367, an elevating / lowering detection sensor 374, and a projection output adjustment driving motor 381 are attached to a lower surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower ends of the legs 361 b are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a in the operation unit base 315. Accordingly, a space is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 forward and backward from the center at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided at a position half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and backward from the center in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection that projects downward. The upper base 363 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the lower protruding portion into contact with the upper protruding portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the in-button decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button decoration board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

  The pair of elevating springs 365 is a coil spring, and the guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The lower ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 are in contact with the elevating and lowering spring holding members 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper ends are in contact with the button base 354.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertically detecting piece 370 c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other and detected by a vertically detecting sensor 374. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (the effect operation unit unit 350) urged upward by the elevating spring 365. Can be raised and lowered.

  The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 has an upper protruding portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 has a space in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding part into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding part of the upper base 363. be able to.

  The pressure detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 always detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). When the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the pressing detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. Can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

  The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, and via the connected portion 371f connected to the connection portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, detects the elevation cam member 371. The rotational position of is detected.

  The projection output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the projection output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and can also move the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the effect. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be done. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the in-button decoration board 364.

  In the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with an engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the lower moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. In the normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit unit cover 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 match, and the effect operation unit unit cover 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

  In a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion. While rolling from 371c to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  When the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

  It should be noted that the elevation lowering spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevation spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projection output adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. it can. Since the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 can be changed in accordance with the vertical position of the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385, the staging operation unit 350 is raised with a projection output corresponding to the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. Position.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55B, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is connected to the second cam 371d of the one cam 371a and the third cam 371a of the remaining cam 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 is positioned above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also project upward.

  When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved up and down. And the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

  When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 in this manner, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  To return the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, as shown in FIG. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  Note that when the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the lowered position, the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward by the projection output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the compression amount of the lifting / lowering spring 365. State (see FIG. 56). Accordingly, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit unit 350 upwards becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also reduced. Thus, the load on the operation button elevating drive motor 367 for rotating the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, an inexpensive motor with a low torque can be used as the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367.

  Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

  In the above description, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so that the first cam 371b ( The example in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the lower position to the upper position by moving from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d at once is described, but the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is connected to the vertical cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371, the elevation cam member 371 is clocked in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. You may make it rotate in a surrounding direction. Incidentally, the vertical movement distance of the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

  When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to move the third cam 371e. Will move upwards along the line. Then, when the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is at a position in the middle of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 is caused to protrude upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be stopped. By projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as

  When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 of the lifting / lowering spring of the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to reduce the urging force of the lifting / lowering spring 365. Is desirable. Thus, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of the pressing operation of the button body 351 can be reduced.

  As described above, the protrusion amount of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be changed in accordance with the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371. Therefore, according to the game state (for example, the first starting port 2002, By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 according to the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

  Note that at least one shallow concave portion that can lock the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thus, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably protruded to the position of the same protruding amount, and variation in the protruding amount can be prevented. When a concave portion is provided at least at one point in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the concave portion, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops rotation of the elevating cam member 371. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The salient output adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The projection output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) projects upward ( (Sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation section base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

  The protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 having a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on an outer periphery thereof, and having a central shaft 366 inserted therein and rotatably supported; 384, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate therethrough. The lower end of the spring 365 is provided with an elevating unsprung holding member 385 abutting the.

  The protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The rotation shaft of the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 projects into a gap between the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

  The adjustment screw 384 is formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation section base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

  The elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b vertically penetrating at the center of the main body 385a, and screwing with the screw 384b. It has a spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and recessed to receive the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat detecting piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . The lifting shaft lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 passing therethrough at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the projection output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

  When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 to move the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

  The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held by the spring holding concave portion 385c upward when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 moves upward, and the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 increases. Become. On the other hand, when the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting / lowering spring 365 held by the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lifting / lowering spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit unit 350 by the lifting / lowering spring 365 can be increased, and the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward. Thus, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. Thus, the upward output of the effect operation unit 350 can be adjusted by the outward output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The detection piece 385d of the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the lifting and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is most raised. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes maximum, the detection piece 385 d is detected by the projection output detection sensor 375. Thus, when the projection output detection sensor 375 detects the detecting piece 385d while the projection output adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the projection output adjustment driving motor 381 uses the lifting unsprung holding member. By stopping the upward movement of the 385, further compression of the elevating spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection output of the rendering operation unit 350, the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 when the rendering operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. By detecting contact or approach of the detection target (for example, a finger of the player) to the detection target 351, the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to contact the object to be detected. At this time, the vertical position of the lifting / lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protrusion output of the button body 351 is made different. Thus, when the button body 351 projects upward, the strength of the player's finger or the like can be made different, so that if the button body 351 comes in strong contact, there is something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not in progress, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is pressed according to the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the protruding output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

  By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to make the effect operation unit unit 350 protrude. If the biasing force is changed by adding a twist to the compression coil spring, it is impossible to use the compression coil spring differently from the original use. Stress may act on the compression coil spring, and the internal tissue may be degraded early and damaged. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is changed by moving the holding member 385 in the vertical direction in the vertical direction, so that the projection output of the effect operation unit 350 ( The biasing force) is adjusted, so that no unreasonable stress acts on the lifting / lowering spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the lifting / lowering spring 365. It is possible to stably protrude over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship among the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate, the button outer decorative substrate, and the button inner decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of a player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (the button body 351).

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (producing operation unit unit 350) that can protrude upward is inclined so that the upper side is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the rendering operation unit 301 is located forward of the vertex of the spherical rendering operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the effect operation unit 301.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is in effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. In a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (the effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament and is operable.

  In the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). The ring-shaped decorative board 355 outside the button is arranged inside the vicinity of the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and the decoration board 364 in the button is further arranged inside the ring-shaped decorative board 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outwardly around the in-button decoration substrate 364 in the order of the out-of-button decoration substrate 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. The LED 355a inside the button decoration board 364 and the button outside decoration board 355 is disposed below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is formed of a punching metal, light transmission is achieved. As a result, light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (on the player side).

  The effect operation unit 300 can make the annular unit upper cover 312 emit light by the LED 320 a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. In addition, the LED 355a of the decorative board 355 outside the button allows the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface to be illuminated. Furthermore, the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 allows the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 to be illuminated.

  Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decoration board 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decoration board 364 inside the button are arranged in a circle on the circumference, respectively, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, the player can see a light emission effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LED355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emission effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. A luminous effect that converges can be shown to the player.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58A, effect operation unit 300 is in the lowered position where pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of unit upper cover 312. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 cannot be performed. On the other hand, in the contact operation unit 302, a contact operation can be enabled according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

  As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) is not protruded, for example, an effect image that prompts the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. The information is displayed on the device 1600, and a sound or a sound effect is output. When the contact (or approach) to the button body 351 is detected by the contact detector 352, the process proceeds to the next effect stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the out-of-button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the in-button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation has been accepted by the player. And an operation feeling for the contact operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which a player such as a “big hit” game is advantageous) is given to the player based on the emission color, emission luminance, emission pattern, and the like of the button body 351. You may make it suggest.

  Alternatively, when contact (or approaching) to the button body 351 is detected by the contact detection body 352, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. Thereby, it is possible to give an operational feeling to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been received. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm by using the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

  In addition, as an effect in a normal state (a player-participation-type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound or sound effect is output. After that, if the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button main body 351 is detected by the contact detection body 352, the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved up and down by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360. It is made to protrude upward (pop up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 is vigorously protruded upward by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to the state of the ascending position (FIG. 55 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the button main body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button main body 351 protrudes upward. When the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised, It can be very interesting.

  After that, the process shifts to an effect in which the button body 351 (the pressing operation section 303) is pressed, and the player can enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. More specifically, when the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button main body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button main body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) is activated. The button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. Thus, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (the pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed by the pressing operation to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

  At the time of the above-mentioned effect, the surge output adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the surge output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to project, so that the player's expectation for the game is determined by the strength of the surge output. May be suggested. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

  In the effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the finger or the like of the player has approached the moving range (in the protruding range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is pressed. The main body 351 (producing operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. Thereby, since the button body 351 comes into contact with a finger or the like of the player and is given an impact, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the protrusion output from which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the player can indicate the degree of expectation for the game based on the strength of the protrusion output.

  Further, in the effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the finger or the like of the player is out of the projecting range of the button body 351 projecting upward and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351 by the contact detection body 352. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user has approached the. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the finger or the like of the player, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Also in this case, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion output from which the button body 351 protrudes, and suggests the degree of expectation to the game by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the finger or the like of the player. You may do it.

  Further, as the effect of making the effect operation unit 350 protrude, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the finger of the player by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding output by the protruding output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (protruding sound) is generated. Can be. In addition, when the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding output by the protruding output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protruding of the button body 351. By suddenly protruding the button body 351, the player can be surprised.

  As the effect after the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is protruded, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (the pressing operation unit 303) is generally pressed. An effect such as performing a pressing operation similar to a simple pressing button may be executed. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 so that the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

  In addition, as the effect after the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is protruded, an effect of performing a contact operation on the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated to contact. At this time, it is desirable that the urging force of the elevating spring 365 be increased by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be hardly moved, and the button body 351 (contact operation) can be performed. The contact operation of the section 302) can be easily performed.

  Note that, in the above description, the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded by rotating the elevation cam member 371 in the effect operation unit elevation mechanism 360 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, thereby forming the button base 354. In this example, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at a stretch. It is not limited to this.

  For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the lifting / lowering cam member 371 and the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is moved up and down. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. May be stopped to stop the button body 351 from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is reduced by moving the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 downward.

  As described above, even when the button main body 351 is protruded partway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed, and the button main body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303. Therefore, the player can enjoy the player-participating type effect. In this case, the amount of protrusion above the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotational position of the lifting / lowering cam member 371. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a game can be indicated according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting / lowering spring 365. To a minimum state. Thus, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, it is possible to press the staging operation unit 350 with a light (weak) force, and to increase the operability of the pressing operation to perform the pressing operation. You can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 (the button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is set by setting the elevating and lowering spring holding member 385 to an appropriate position in the vertical direction in accordance with the special lottery result. May be any one of the strongest to weakest. This allows the player to strongly or weakly press the staging operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the staging operation unit 350, and a more versatile An effect can be presented, and the player can be hardly bored.

  In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that a contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the finger or the like of the player approaches the button body 351 (the contact detection body 352), and a plurality of thresholds are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. May be used to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for production. Specifically, for example, a stage in which the finger or the like of the player is separated from the button main body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage in which the finger or the like of the player is not in contact with the button main body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button main body 351, The stage is divided into stages where the finger of the user is in contact with the button body 351 and the effect is changed according to each stage, so that even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents various effects to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 300 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the lowering spring lower holding member is set as the normal state of the effect operation unit 300. 385 has been moved upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the lowered position, and the lifting / lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be moved downward. Accordingly, in a normal state, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the elevating spring 365. Further, the urging force of the vertically compressed lifting spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the lifting and lowering spring holding member 385 from being quickly deteriorated (fatigue).

  As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, various effects can be used for the player participation type effects, so that various effects can be enjoyed by the player, and the player can be bored. It is difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 is provided above the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation unit outer periphery is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in a rendering operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, a button decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) Approaches the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the in-button decoration substrate 364, and the proximity of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the in-button decoration substrate 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may erroneously detect.

  Therefore, a conductive shield connected to ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button decoration substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, a punching metal, a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a metal foil, and the like) may be provided. By moving the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the in-button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 also changes. And a shield connected to a ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 and the button decoration substrate 364, The influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can be reduced, and erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be prevented.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of Dish Unit]
Subsequently, a plate unit 200 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection objects are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating the contact detection sensor main body and a plurality of contact detection objects in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example in which the switching part was provided between (c), the plate left decoration unit of the plate unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc., making it possible to advance and retreat in the front-back direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and the back side of the operation unit etc. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact detector, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into a left and right contact detection body 390 </ b> L and a right contact detection body 390 </ b> R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the rendering operation unit 350. A contact detection sensor main body left 391L and a contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his / her finger or the like from left to right, first, when the player's finger or the like is located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L changes to detect the contact detection sensor main body left 391L, and the capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R does not change and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains undetected. Becomes When the finger or the like of the player moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R changes, so that the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when a finger or the like of the player moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detection body left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L is not detected, and the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body right 390R is not detected. The capacitance has changed, and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detecting.

  In this manner, the combination of detection and non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's finger or the like. Can be detected. Thereby, it is possible to detect a contact operation of more various movements, and to present a player participation type effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations, as well as to the player. In this way, it is possible to more enjoy the player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302. In addition, if a contact detection body is added, a more complicated operation can be detected.

  The embodiment illustrated in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like with any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state where the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations from each other. can do.

  For example, by disposing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (the lower side) of the button body 351, even if a finger or the like of a player contacts any part of the surface of the button body 351, The contact can be detected by the contact detector 393, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be increased.

  In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may be placed in a portion of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a portion where the player may be injured, or a player may be inconvenienced to other players). (A certain part, a part where cheating is likely to be performed, etc.), and when any of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body, a warning or a warning may be notified.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60B, a switch for connecting any one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and the plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a unit 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (the contact detection body 352). . As the switching unit 394, “switching by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor”, “switching by another electronic circuit”, or “movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60C) Unit 270, dish right decoration unit 275, and effect switching unit 300).

  For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection objects 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type effect in which a part detected by each of the contact detection objects 393 is sequentially touched is executed. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not a finger or the like of the player has touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type effect having a high game property by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the rendering operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first rendering operation unit 300 is placed on the front side. When the contact detection body 393a is provided, the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the back side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, and the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted. May be switched.

  Thereby, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped from moving forward. To Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and the effect is performed in a state where the finger or the like of the player is inserted into the gap. When the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, there is a possibility that a finger or the like of the player may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the finger or the like of the player is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the effect operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the rear gap of the staging operation unit 300 and the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 for detecting the contact of the player's finger or the like is formed as a star and has a decorative property (design). Note that the shape of the contact detection body 395 having decorativeness is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item. The shape may be a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame shape, or the like. Thereby, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the contact detector 352 is formed by punching metal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The contact detector may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil pressing, or the like, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. The contact detector is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the finger or the like of the player does not touch directly, and it is possible to avoid abrasion of the contact detector and to provide a tactile sensation by the surface member. It can be smooth.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the in-button decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. The contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and the decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. Thereby, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 61 (b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the decorative body 398 provided below is invisible due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397. good.

  Further, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the non-recognizable contact detecting body include “formed with a transparent member”, “formed with a decoration of a surface member such as a button body or the like” and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and thus does not detect the contact of the finger or the like or perform the contact operation with respect to the player. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and a finger or the like of the player comes into contact with or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the player, the player becomes aware of the presence of the contact detection body 352 (the contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line wu in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface and a door frame left side base 421 mounted on a lower portion of the front surface. The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 are covered. The upper left reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame and the left side base 42 of the door frame to cover the front side of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. And the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425. Have.

  Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward, and an upper and lower portion of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction forward, and the first LED 423a below the center in the up-down direction of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. And a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

  The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side base 421 is formed by two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is formed of two colors of two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. By appearing on the outer surface through the layer 3b, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71A). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for emitting the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

  On the door frame upper left side decorative substrate 422, a total of 12 full-color LEDs of four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b are mounted. In addition, the first LED 422a in which the second LEDs 422b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view LED that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, namely, upper two, three from third to fifth from above, and three from sixth to eighth from above. Divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to a maximum of 24 systems, and can emit full-color each of the four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets. As described above, one system is controlled by a total of 15 systems of 3 systems.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected. When the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via a control signal line, two sets of the command are sent in accordance with the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 423a. The LED 423b is mounted. Also, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for emitting the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

  On this door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs of 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b are mounted. In addition, the first LED 423a in which the second LEDs 423b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view LED that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. And three from the 10th to the twelfth from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color each of the six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets. As described above, one system is controlled by a total of 21 systems of three systems.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected. When the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, three sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The upper left reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding tube 424b extending in the front and rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side of the through hole 424a is directed forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a columnar light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. It is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 that penetrates through the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing through the through holes 424a on the upper and lower sides. The light from the LED 422b is applied to the light guide shaft 427a with an equal amount of light from both the upper and lower sides, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

  Further, in the upper left side reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. Accordingly, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending in the front-back direction is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side of the through hole 425a is directed forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 is inserted with a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 described later. Thus, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. Thereby, in the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is applied to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration 426.

  In the lower left reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half tube shape opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the upper reflector 424 on the left side and the holding cylinder 425b of the lower reflector 425 on the left side. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the left lower light guide 429, Are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative part 426b having a constant shape depressed in an arc shape and extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. doing.

  The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in a front and rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the upper left reflector 424. The light guide shaft 427a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft 427a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  The left-side middle light guide member 428 includes three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-back direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The light guide shaft 428a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 forward by the light guide shaft 428a, and irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  The lower left lower light guide member 429 includes three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a front and rear direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically so as to correspond to the three lower holding cylinders 425b below the left side lower reflector 425. The light guide shaft portion 429a has a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b, and extends forward and backward. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. The state matches the surface of the side decorative body 426. This left side lower light guide member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light brightly.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction slightly protrudes forward from a lower portion, and the lower end portion is slightly curved to the right. The door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end located below the door window 101a and the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. Is located above the speaker port 211b. Further, the door frame left side unit 420 has an upper portion located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by a certain distance. Is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is radiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 in a state of being sufficiently spread. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly illuminated.

  Light from the first LED 422a of the upper door frame left side decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the lower door frame left side decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to the rear. Is guided forward (guided) by the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide 429. (Light), so that the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

  In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft 427a of the upper light guide member 427 on the left side, and the middle light guide member 428 on the left side. And the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left light guide member 429 are provided at the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and 423b. Accordingly, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with a uniform light amount. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows become hard to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly projected. Light emission decoration can be performed in a planar shape.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b. Since the shadow is projected on the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a can be made hard to see, and the door frame left The appearance of the side decoration 426 in the light-emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66A is a front view of a door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as exploded from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface, and a door frame right side base base 431 attached to a lower portion of the front surface. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a provided vertically at predetermined intervals are mounted on the front surface, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower. The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433 and the front side of the right side reflector 434 are covered. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 435 which is attached to the door frame right side base 431, to.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. And a right side lower light guide member 437 for guiding light from one LED 433a forward.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating right and left in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of light-transmitting right-side left lenses 439 having decorative portions 439a to be fitted, and a plurality of light-transmitting right-side bases 431 that cover the right side surface of the door frame right-side base 431 and penetrate right and left in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431, and the door frame right side right side surface. Decorative body 44 Includes a right side right lens 441, a having a decorative hole 440a translucent having a decorative portion 441a which is fitted to close the.

  The right side base 431 of the door frame extends vertically with a substantially constant left and right width. In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has the rear end side extending vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending obliquely backward, it curves vertically in the vicinity of the lower part and extends vertically to the lower end.

  The door frame right side base 431 includes a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and a right side right lens). At the portion where the decorative portion 441a) is provided, a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are depressed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end are provided. In these reflector portions 431a, the rear end sides inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a are inclined toward the side surfaces, and the bottom surfaces are curved.

  Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided at a rear side of a center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decoration portion 439a and the decoration portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (concave with left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

  These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 control the light radiated backward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

  The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432b is mounted. A plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for emitting the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

  On the right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs of four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. In addition, the first LED 432a in which the second LEDs 432b are provided on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs that can emit light in a range of 130 degrees around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, namely, upper two, three from third to fifth from above, and three from sixth to eighth from above. Divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, And the third LED 432c emits full color light, respectively, so that there are a total of 21 systems of three systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to be described later is used. A total of 24 systems of three systems for one set above the third LED 433c divided into two sets are controlled.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as a command and an address from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED One clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and a wiring cable composed of four electric wires are connected. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via a control signal line, two sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. , Four first LEDs 432a divided into three sets, eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and two on the right side lower decorative board 433 on the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c of the upper set of the set can emit light of an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 at a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. The LED 433b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals vertically. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

  On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs of 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c are mounted. In addition, the first LED 433a in which the second LEDs 433b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs that can emit light within a range of 130 degrees around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. And three from the 10th to the twelfth from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, And the third LED 433c emits full color light, respectively, so that there are a total of 27 systems of three systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at maximum, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, the upper one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side) Are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, an increase in the number of LED drivers can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 supplies two power supplies for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock cable and a distribution cable composed of four electric wires are connected. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via a control signal line, three sets of the command are received in accordance with the command. Each of the six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower set among the two sets Light can be emitted in an appropriate color and intensity every time.

  The right side reflector 434 has a through-hole 434a that penetrates forward and backward at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending forward and backward is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a is in contact with the front surface of the upper right side decorative board 432 or the lower side decorative board 433 of the door frame, and the front side of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 is inserted with a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later. Thus, the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides, and Light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is applied to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. The shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be prevented from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

  In the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. Thus, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The distal ends of the light guide shaft 436a of the right upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. The door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape depressed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. doing.

  The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Formed of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided at regular intervals up and down so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. The light guide shaft 436a has a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b and extends back and forth. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The state coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and radiate the light outward from the front end. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit light brightly.

  The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Formed of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals up and down so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from below the right side reflector 434. The light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. The state coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side lower light guide member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and irradiate the light outward from the front end, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit light brightly.

  The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed by two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed by two colors of two kinds of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. Since a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner side (right side) of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a coincides with the outside (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state fitted in the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located on the left side of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative. Light emission decoration can be performed by light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern of two colors formed in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a that penetrate in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. Further, the front right side decorative body 440 of the door frame right side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed of two colors of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The resin is molded in two colors with the above two types of resin, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along an inner side (right side) above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, protrudes rightward, and protrudes rightward. The decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer surface (right side) of the right side decorative member 440 on the right side of the door frame when fitted in the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. Light emission decoration can be performed by light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a radial pattern of two colors formed in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is different from the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the color of the portion of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. Are formed in the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the up-down direction projects farther forward than a portion at the same height in the opposite door frame left side unit 420. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height as from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper portion of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outside of the door frame top unit 450.

  The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded.

  The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes greatly from the top to a portion having a height of substantially half from the top, and forms a partition. This makes it difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a) in the island facility of the game hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a screen shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making the entire game area 5a difficult for other players to see. This makes it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation.

  According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is irradiated on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a state where the light is sufficiently spread. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly illuminated.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and a door frame right side lower decorative board provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to the rear. The light from the first LED 433a of the first light guide member 433 is guided forward (light guide) by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the upper right light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right light guide member 437. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner more brightly than other portions.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to emit light, and thereby the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be illuminated. In addition, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decoration part 439a and the decoration part 441a) of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 can be illuminated and decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be conspicuous and has a high appeal to a player.

  Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are formed. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b allow the front door side right side decorative body 435 to be decorated with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. The third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433 causes the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light. The first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, The light from the ED 433a and the second LED 433b irradiates the rear door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 to emit light, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c. Light can be prevented from irradiating the front door frame right side decorative body 435 with the light and decorating it. Thereby, since the door frame right side decorative body 435, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side can be completely independently light-emitting decorated, It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect with a higher effect to the player.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432 a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433 a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft 436 a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right light guide member 437 is provided at the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and 433b. Accordingly, the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even when the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows become hard to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a planar manner without unevenness.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has the door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . Accordingly, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadow is projected. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a have a decorative portion 435b at the portion where the door frame is located, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made harder to see, and the appearance of the light emission decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers the left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. (See FIG. 72).

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top central speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top central speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and a front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover above the door frame top base 451 are provided. I have.

  The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in plan view. In addition, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by decorating the plurality of LEDs 455a appropriately.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 456a.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front face are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 457a.

  The pair of top center speakers are provided to be separated from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers is a tweeter, and outputs a high range of sound such as voice or music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-unit of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front into a portion behind the inside of the upper portions of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Have been. In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in a state where the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71 (b) is an outer layer in FIG. It is a right view of the door frame right side unit which shows in the state which made transparent. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a half tube shape. Since it is formed, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decorative body 426, a door frame right side decorative body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame Since the upper right side decorative substrate 432, the lower right side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates are provided. By appropriately emitting the LED, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated, or a light emitting effect is shown to the player as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Door can be.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. Thus, in the plate unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be increased, and the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

  Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming one sphere. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to recognize the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) as being operable, and to use the effect operation unit 300 composed of a huge sphere to give the player a seemingly different effect. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Further, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is located ahead of the vertex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302). And the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the giant sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the staging operation unit 301 can easily see the entire contents of the staging operation unit 301, and You can look big. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, and to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can actively operate the effect operation unit 301. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface, as shown in FIGS. FIG. 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

  More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular or radial patterns provided on the outer surface are formed in two colors by using two kinds of synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior part of the door frame 3 where the pattern is provided is formed by two colors of two kinds of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

  For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when a honeycomb-shaped pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the inside of the circular pattern becomes The honeycomb-shaped pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen at a portion other than the pattern, so that the exterior has a circular or radial pattern emphasized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, a honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and a relatively circular or Radial patterns are hard to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-shaped pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

  In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a serves as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is transparent.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials (synthesis) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are used. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin, the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape is unchanged.

  Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen at the time of a minor change or the like, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without increasing costs.

  Alternatively, the color and the like of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island facilities, thereby giving a colorful feeling to the player. And the ability to appeal to them.

  In the above embodiment, the two-color molding is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side right side decorative body 440 of the two-color molding door frame. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case where a circular or radial pattern is formed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern having various shapes may be formed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape at the same time as the decorative body, the desired decoration is given to the decorative body. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after the formation, and it is possible to save the trouble of the decoration and suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when a polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, so that the polka dot circle becomes hard to see, and the appearance is such that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot pattern circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is caused by the difference in color. The polka dot circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the change of the external appearance is required. Costs can be reduced.

  In addition, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color) of the synthetic resin to be used. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a line in the island facility, the island facility becomes colorful. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to a player who is traveling in the game hall, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can attract the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the like are provided. Can be.

  Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the border of the decoration (polka dot pattern) constituted by the inner layer 3a becomes relatively clear, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

  Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made to have a low transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This makes it possible to greatly change the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body, and easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decorative body.

  Further, as described above, since the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a less visible, a pattern (a pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, or the like) is formed on the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and the outer layer 3b is transparent when the model is changed. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a suitable synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be largely changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for a model change.

  Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board capable of irradiating light are provided. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body are provided. When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed. The portion of the layer 3a (the portion of the polka dot) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance. Both the player to be able to entertain emission decoration door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c applied to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The whole of the left side decoration 438 and the right side decoration 440 of the door frame can be illuminated, and the door frame right side left decoration 438 and the right side decoration 440 of the door frame can be clearly displayed. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the interest of the user can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is performed by two-color molding (multicolor) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. (Molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, and the like. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit and the decoration that is visible when the LED is lit can be different, and the decoration can be changed to strongly attract the interest of the player. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as an example of multicolor molding, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence state, only the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly radiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the holes are formed, so that the inner layer 3a The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole become visible, so that a decoration different from when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light emission. It is possible to change the part to be decorated, and to change the decoration to be illuminated. As described above, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light in accordance with the game state, a change in the decoration of the decorative body allows the player to receive a chance or change the driving operation (for example, “right-hand”). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested, and that can perform various effects.

  Further, since the left and right door frame left side decorative bodies 426 and the right side door frame decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different amounts of protrusion in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can have different impressions (views) when viewed from the left front and right front, the pachinko machine 1 moves around in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if a player once passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 and approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that at the time of the previous excursion, attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1 The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is traveling in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to play to the pachinko machine 1 can be provided. .

[3-10. LED Arrangement and System in Door Frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by rotating the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, And has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel (steering).

  The handle 195 has a front side of a central hub portion 195a covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on a front surface between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. Is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

  The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 pieces, one piece at the center, three pieces at regular intervals on the middle circumference, and six pieces at regular intervals along the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric manner. These LEDs 184a are one at the center, the middle three connected by broken lines in FIG. 72, and the two upper left and outer right two connected respectively by broken lines in FIG. , And two on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five sets of LEDs 184a are controlled in 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, so that each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative board 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 72, these twelve LEDs 293a include two at the lower left, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, and two at the right from the center. It is divided into six sets, two at the lower right. These six sets of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, so that each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  As described above, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that light emission is produced such that light rotates around the handle 195, and the handle 195 moves toward the center of the handle 195. A light emission effect in which light is concentrated or a light emission effect in which light spreads out of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a vertically-extending substantially rectangular door window 101a which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271, a dish right decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, an effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a half tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible for a player to see a decoration in which substantially the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a dish left decorative board 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish right decorative board 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 behind door frame right side decorative body 435 and door frame right The side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided toward the front.

  More specifically, on the dish left decorative board 273, four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for emitting an LED 273a and an LED 273a of a dish right decorative board 278 described later. (Not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit full-color light as appropriate.

  The dish right decorative board 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the dish left decorative board 273, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit full-color light as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the up and down direction, and two first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets of the upper two pieces and the remaining two pieces as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b include two upper LEDs, three third to fifth LEDs from above, and sixth to eighth LEDs from above. It is divided into three sets of up to three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the up-down direction, and two are vertically mounted between the first LEDs 423a. It includes twelve second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as indicated by the two-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. And seven from the top to three from the ninth and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface with an interval in the vertical direction. Also, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b include two upper LEDs, three third to fifth LEDs from the top, and sixth to eighth LEDs from the top. It is divided into three sets of up to three. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as indicated by the chain line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third divided into two sets in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The upper set of third LEDs 433c of the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

  On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at an interval in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c And an LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, one set at a time, two by two from the top. Also, as shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top as shown by the dashed line in FIG. And seven from the top to three from the ninth and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. Further, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as indicated by the broken lines in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two lower third LEDs 433c divided into two sets , And the LED driver 433d is controlled by 24 systems, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light of a full color as appropriate.

  In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decorative board provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in an asymmetric shape with respect to the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 also have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

  Note that the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. The numbers of the one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. (A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LED for performing the light emission effect.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at an interval in the left-right direction, the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets, two from the left. The six LEDs 455a, which are divided into three sets, are controlled by an LED driver in nine systems, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light of a full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a that are mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. As shown by broken lines in FIG. 72, the four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a that are mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. As shown by broken lines in FIG. 72, the four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light of a full color of an appropriate color.

  According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is guided by the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft 436a of the upper right light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft 437a of the lower right light guide member 437 provide the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are guided outward (forward). Thereby, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect that emits bright light in a dot-like manner, and a dot-like shape not found in the conventional pachinko machine. The luminous effect that emits spot light brilliantly can make the player "hit".

  Also, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame upper side decorative board 422, the door frame lower left side. The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432, the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the LED 455a of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated, or the light moves so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

  That is, in the door frame 3, a light emission effect of performing spot light emission is executed on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the front side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In FIG. 72, the light emission effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface light emission) by the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. Can be.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transmitted to the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. As compared with the general surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the spots of the openings 426a and 435a can be brightly and brightly emitted with high luminance. . At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided. Even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the glare does not make the inside of the game area 5a facing the door window 101a difficult to see, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 project forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a) and emit light with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front edge of the ridge which is the front end of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protruding forward (connect the front ends protruding forward in an arc shape in plan view). (On the vertical line), the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (the door window 101a side). Therefore, the light of the spot emission in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the rear side of the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a does not become difficult to see, and the high-brightness spot emission allows the interest of other players to be directed to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward outside the door window 101 a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot emitting light is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot emitting light. Accordingly, when spot light emission is performed on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, high brightness spot light can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to appeal the existence of the present pachinko machine 1 to other players, to strongly attract the player's interest, and to select a pachinko machine to play in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power capable of attracting a player who is migrating to the present pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 or the door frame right side decorative body 435 are sandwiched. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. Thus, both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made more difficult to see.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation unit includes an outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for emitting 31 LEDs 320a. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

  Out of the 31 LEDs 320a, 18 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, six are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are spaced at an intermediate circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

  The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer decoration board 320. The thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322 are provided two at a time at both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference and three at the middle between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six pieces are provided at intervals on the circumference, and three pieces are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the eighteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are three sets of six on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, and three on the middle circumference. Are divided into three sets, one set each, and nine sets on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected to each other by two dashed lines on the inner circumference. The three sets are each divided into three sets, one set each, and the nine sets on the outer circumference are divided into two sets each having three sets near both ends, for a total of seven sets. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. These 16 sets of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the light emission effect such that the light rotates in the effect operation unit 301 and the light emission such that the light is concentrated on the center are provided by appropriately emitting the 31 LEDs and the 48 systems of LEDs 320a. An effect or a light emission effect in which light spreads outward can be shown to the player.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a faces up and down along the door window 101a so that the protrusion amounts in the front and rear directions are different from each other on one side and the other outside in the left and right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. A door frame left upper side decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and a door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind 435, respectively. A board 423, a decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LEDs 432b are mounted, the plurality of first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 4 3b is provided, and a lower right side decorative substrate 433 on which the door frame 3b is mounted is provided, and light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is supplied to the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, and the lower light guide of the left side guide the frame to the vicinity of the front surface of the right side decorative body 435 and radiate the light forward. Since the light guide shaft portion 429a of the member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate is provided. 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432 By emitting the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light (surface emission) in a planar manner, and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light, the light is emitted forward. The light is formed by the columnar light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a to form the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface, they are radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), and are guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. A portion corresponding to the tip of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be light-emitting decoration (spot light emission). .

  Accordingly, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided. The door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (the door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b. 426 and the entirety of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner, a part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and a part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated and decorated in the form of dots, and the door frame left side. The whole of the side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame can be luminously decorated in a planar shape while a part thereof can be luminously decorated. Because, it is possible to show the variety of emission effect to the player, it entertained while hardly get bored the player can be suppressed a decrease in interest in the game.

  At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated from each other. The system in which the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated from each other is symmetrical with each other. Since the first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, and the first LEDs 433a and the second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b have different systems from each other, the door frame left side. The first LED 422a and the second LED 4 on the decorative body 426 side When creating data of lighting patterns of the second LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, for example, the door The data for the frame left side decorative body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the same for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. Since it is possible to use the flow data, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data, and it is possible to construct more complicated lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This makes it easy for the player to show a variety of lighting effects with lighting patterns, and also allows the player to see a variety of lighting effects with high staging effects. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect against emission effect at the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 left and right outer sides of Tobiramado 101a.

  In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 433a have the same system. , The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a). , The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are always turned on at the same time, so that the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, Light is emitted from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, so that The shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a due to the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b. The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 436a, which are thinned so as to be canceled and projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made hard to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be light-emitting decoratively evenly.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which decorate and emit light in a planar shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, A part corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the front end of the light guide shaft 437a is decorated with one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This makes it possible to show the player a light emission effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light emission in a spot shape while emitting light in a plane shape, and emits bright light in a dot shape The lighting effect can attract the player's interest strongly, and the spot light can be emitted in a spot-like manner that is not available in conventional pachinko machines. The emission effect, the player can be a "hash" can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left and right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 and the decorative substrate 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower side of the door frame, the decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame seem to be right. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to prevent the right side lower decorative substrate 433 from being mistaken, thereby improving the workability of assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Subsequently, identification of various decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, taking the door frame 3 as an example. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, a dish left decorative board 273, a dish right decorative board 278, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423, a door frame right provided in the door frame 3 around the door window 101a. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and a non-white LED driver and a connector attached to the decorative board are mounted on the rear side of the board. Like that. Thereby, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected to the front side so that the front decoration body or the like can be lighted and decorated more brightly, and the front side (player side). Makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

  The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the plate material of the substrate may be white.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identifying portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And

  More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the character "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the character "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and the letter "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 are used. , The letter “lower left” on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letter “upper right” on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letter “lower right” on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The character is “upper middle” on the door frame top center decorative board 455, “upper left” on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and “upper right” on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each has been given.

  The color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is provided not on the entire rear surface but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

  The identification unit 7 is provided on the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying paint, or the like.

  In the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example. An identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a or a color identification unit 7b may be provided on the decorative substrate.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. Alternatively, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, a decoration board having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during the assembling operation, and to improve the assembling workability.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front surface of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. Can be reflected forward on the front surface of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and lighter, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (from the player side), thereby improving the appearance. Can be better.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b as the identification section 7 is applied to substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is possible to obtain a desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative substrates are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, a desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and time and labor required for the assembling work can be easily found. Can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is made different for each decorative board, the same color is used when preparing the decorative board necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color is not enough in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative board, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared, or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembling work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembling can be shortened, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrate is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the character of the character identification portion 7a. Thereby, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate is, and to achieve the same operation and effect as described above.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decorative substrate are white and the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate has high transparency. Also, the decorative substrate can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED can be reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. This makes it possible to make the decorative body light-emitting decorative more brightly, and it is possible to entertain the player with a light-emitting effect having a high effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional components such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional components are not seen from the front (from the player side). The appearance can be prevented from being degraded by being seen, and the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved. In addition, since the functional component is not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional component white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by eliminating the trouble of coloring the functional component.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facilities of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 is an aggregate of the following units and the like, and has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. Is attached to the upper left end of the body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. A hinge member 510 on the main body frame, and a hinge member 125 below the door frame of the door frame 3 that is attached to the lower end of the main frame base unit 500 on the left side in front view and rotatably attached to the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. And a hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame, which is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the one rail cover 554 to the left as viewed from the front, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to provide the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 with the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and is connected to the connection cable 503, and is provided to guide the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends back and forth, and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

[4-1a. Body frame base (1)]
The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ３ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side of the unit 501e when viewed from the front, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a front view, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j that is rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a to mount the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  The main body frame base 501 has a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from the pressing and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The body frame base 501 has a body frame opening switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface of the base body 501a below a position where the door frame opening switch is attached. I have. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released from the pressing, and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 pushes the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. The angle at which the tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 above the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view, and has a constant cross section and extends vertically. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that is opened to the right and extends vertically on the front side formed in a U-shape with the right side opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530 a. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in a plan view, and an incorrect tool is inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat-plate-like launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 195 is turned while the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

[4-6a. Payment base]
The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500.
The payout base 551 is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with the same width as that of the top plate portion, and a right side plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction extending from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction to be approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and shortly extending downward. 551c, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to a position near the lower end with a constant width; an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as a rear side of the left plate portion 551b; 551b Left side of backboard 5 from right front to bottom It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 1e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and a leftwardly extending groove-shaped groove mounted on the left side of the ball tank 552. And a tank unit including a tank rail 553. Therefore, the top plate portion 551a, the right side plate portion 551c, and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are mounted on the body frame 4 for mounting the tank unit including the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Make up the part.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member attached to the upper edge of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. 556, and a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end of the tank rail 553 at the front end in front view.

[4-6b. Ball tank (1)]
The spherical tank 552 constituting the tank unit is made of an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, and has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. At the same time, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a.
The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.
In the present embodiment, as shown in the broken line in FIG. 98A and the cross-sectional view in FIG. 98C, a through-hole-shaped opening notch 551ah is provided at a portion of the top plate portion 551a constituting the tank unit attachment portion overlapping the ball tank 552. The opening notch 551ah is closed by the ball tank 552. In the portion where the opening notch 551ah is provided, the space for accommodating the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded by the thickness of the top plate 551a, so that the degree of freedom in designing the back unit 3000 is increased. .
Generally, a transparent synthetic resin is more expensive than an opaque resin. However, even when the entire dispensing base 551 is not formed of a transparent synthetic resin but is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, the thickness of the sheet may be reduced. Only the space for accommodating the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded, and the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in the design of the back unit 3000 is obtained. It is good to form with a synthetic resin. In addition to the above effects, for example, when the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the state of the game ball rolling in the tank rail 553 via the opening notch 551ah can be confirmed from the front of the gaming machine. it can.
When the ball tank 552 is configured to be viewed from the opening notch 551ah, it is preferable that the ball tank 552 is formed of a conductive resin and is electrically grounded. Game balls flowing into the ball tank generally store high-voltage static electricity, but at that point, if the ball tank is grounded with conductive resin, it will always be discharged, and discharge will occur. EMI can be prevented from being emitted as much as possible. That is, the influence on the electronic circuit provided in the game board 5 can be suppressed.
Not only the ball tank 552, but also the tank rail 553 may be a conductive resin. Of course, both are a conductive resin regardless of whether they are integrated or separate, and a part thereof is seen through the opening notch 551ah. Just do it.

[4-6c. Tank rail (1)]
The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction.
The tank rail 553 is provided with a shooter-shaped step that rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side at the joint with the ball tank 552. The flow path is changed obliquely rearward at the corner portion, and the second flow path portion is formed in a crank shape in plan view so as to turn the flow path in the left-right direction.
The tank rail 553 has a gutter form in which a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y are raised before and after the passage bottom wall 553z, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D. An arc-shaped arc-shaped portion 553r is formed on the corner upstream of the ball stopping member 557, and a corner 553t having a substantially right-angled valley-folded shape is formed at a rear corner of the passage bottom wall 553z. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) drop ports 553h capable of discharging foreign matter are formed on the rear side of the bottom wall 553z so as to extend to the lower edge of the gutter rear wall 553y.

It should be noted that the number of the front and rear corners of the falling port 553h can be freely set. For example, all of the falling ports 553h are formed at the rear corner, a plurality of falling ports 553h are alternately formed at the rear and front corners, or the falling port 553h provided at the front corner is located at the end. Although it is formed downstream, at least the falling port 553h located at the uppermost stream is preferably formed at a corner 553t facing the arc-shaped portion 553r.
This is because even if there is foreign matter in the arc portion 553r of the tank rail 553, the air is unlikely to stagnate on the radius surface, so that it is easy to move on the airflow accompanying the flow of the ball, and the arc due to the vibration caused by the movement of the game ball. Since it is easy to move toward the opposite corner 553t along the radius surface of the portion 553r, the foreign matters eventually collect on the rear corner 553t and are efficiently discharged from the falling port 553h. Therefore, the foreign matter that has entered the tank rail 553 moves from the arc-shaped part 553r formed at the upstream part to the corner part 553t, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the most upstream falling port 553h provided at the corner part 553t. Therefore, the residence time of the foreign matter in the tank rail 553 can be shortened as much as possible. In addition, at the joint between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, a shooter-shaped step 553u that rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail 553 (FIG. 98A, FIG. 98B) is provided, and the vibration is likely to occur at the step 553u, and the vibration further promotes the fall of the foreign matter from the drop port 553h.
In addition, the falling port 553h of the tank rail 553 is preferably formed in a corner portion of the crank (preferably, on an out-course side where a moving foreign matter largely turns by inertia) as shown in FIG. 98A. By doing so, foreign matter moving in the tank rail 553 tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner of the crank of the tank rail 553 due to inertia, and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h provided there. .

The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view in which the width in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end connected to the ball tank 552 and the width in the front-rear direction is about one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After that, the width in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left.
The tank rail 553 is inclined so that the passage bottom wall 553z becomes lower toward the left side, and further has a rectangular vertical short tubular portion 553s extending at the left end, and a rail outlet 553p at the lower end of the short tubular portion 553s. Is open, and its rail outlet 553p communicates with a guiding inlet 570p that opens at the upper end of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Also, the height of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the portion extending straight to the left in the tank rail 553 is 4 to 5 of the diameter of the game ball B from the passage bottom wall 553z on the ball tank 552 side. On the other hand, on the left end (lower end) side, the diameter is about the diameter of the game ball B, and the left end side is inclined at a steeper angle than the passage bottom wall 553z.
The tank rail 553 has a portion that extends straight leftward and is attached to a passage seat 551z (see FIG. 98D) formed in the top plate 551a and having a substantially L-shaped cross section.
In addition, the tank rail 553 includes a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556 on the upper surfaces of the front gutter wall 553x and the rear gutter wall 553y that extend straight to the left. The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface on the left end side.

[4-6d. First rail cover and second rail cover]
The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached in a lid shape to upper ends of a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are fixed to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the depth (width) of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y is It prevents the game balls B in the tank rails 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure, and further prevents the game balls from jumping out of the tank rails 553 and invasion of foreign matter from the outside into the tank rails 553. Also prevent.

[4-6e. Ball rectifying member]
As shown in a partially enlarged view of FIG. 91, the ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, as shown in the partially enlarged view of FIG. A swing shaft 556b is supported on the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y corresponding to the ends, or is swingable by extending in a cantilever shape from the first rail cover 554 (not shown). Installed. The ball straightening member 556 includes a fin-shaped straightening piece 556a protruding into the tank rail 553 on the lower surface thereof. When a game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which flows in the tank rail 553 in a two-tiered manner, contacts the lower surface of the rectifying piece 556a, an appropriate load (resistance) due to its own weight is applied to the game ball B. (See the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 91), thereby delaying the flow so that the upper game balls B easily fall (merge) between the lower game balls B. Thus, the flow is rectified step by step so that clogging of the ball hardly occurs. Also, if ball clogging occurs in the upper and lower two-stage state, the ball rectifying member 556 is pressed down with a fingertip to press the upper game ball B with the rectifying piece 556a, thereby breaking the balance between the balls. It is also possible to eliminate clogged balls.

[4-6f. Ball stop member]
The ball stopping member 557 is slidably attached to the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction, and is slid to the left as shown by the imaginary line in the sectional view of FIG. By closing the flow path leading to the rail exit 553p of the rail 553 and the guidance entrance 570p of the guidance passage 570a, the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. This facilitates maintenance such as cleaning, replacement, and repair of the downstream guide passage 570a and the dispensing device 580.

Specifically, the ball retaining member 557 is slidably supported by a support cylinder 553m vertically provided outside the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b. 557c, a substantially beak-shaped ball stopper 557d projecting leftward from the left end of the sliding base 557c, and projecting rightward from the right end of the sliding base 557c. The operation knob 557e is provided with a cantilevered spring-shaped elastic lock piece 557f formed inside the operation knob 557e.
The elastic locking piece 557f is engaged with the left and right side slopes of the upside-down bulging portion 553q protruding from the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553, thereby engaging the ball-shaped anchoring portion 557g with the ball stopper member 557. Are anchored at a projecting position and a retreating position, which will be described later, thereby preventing blind movement of the ball stopping member 557.

  The switching between the projecting position and the retracted position of the ball stopping member 557 can be performed by an operation of putting a finger on the operation knob 557e and sliding the ball stopping member 557 in the left-right direction. Like the cam follower contacting the linear motion cam, the anchor portion 557g is in contact with the inverted bulging portion 553q and bends and slides in a bow-like manner, and when the anchor portion 557g reaches the destination side slope, it is engaged by its own elasticity. Combine. By the engagement and disengagement of the anchor portion 557g of the elastic lock piece 557f to the side slope of the inverted bulging portion 553q, the switching operation of the ball stopping member 557 is given a "click" and "click" to the switching operation.

The ball stopping member 557 starts from the bent portion K of the tank rail 553, and is located on the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) of the passage bottom wall 553z and on the downstream side (the rail outlet 553p side) of the passage side wall 553w constituting the short cylindrical portion 553s. ), A ball stopper 557d having a substantially beak-like shape as viewed from the front is inserted into and out of the short cylindrical portion 553s of the tank rail 553 from a ball stopper slit 553v formed in an approximately L-shape when viewed from the front. The ball is inserted into the short cylinder portion 553s from the ball stopper slit 553v into the short cylinder portion 553s to close the flow path of the game ball B (see the imaginary line in the sectional view of FIG. 101). By the action of the operation knob 557e and the elastic lock piece 557f described above, the retracted position (see the solid line in the sectional view of FIG. 101) in which the ball stopper 557d is retracted from the cylindrical portion 553s to open the flow path of the game ball B. It can be switched to one basis.
In the embodiment, the ball stopping member 557 is supported by the tank rail 553, but may be supported by, for example, the payout base 551 of the main body frame 4.

[4-6 g. External terminal board (1)]
Further, the payout base unit 550 includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of a portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off in the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b in which the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a vertically extending guiding path 570a in which the game ball B winds in a meandering shape, a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571. , A movable piece member 573 which is movable by the game ball B flowing through the guide path 570a, and a movable piece 573 which is movable by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. Ball detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball B (see FIG. 91).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a has a guide inlet 570p opened near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, and is open upward. After extending vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, The guide unit 571 is bent to the right, extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning between the widths of the guide unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion rotatably mounted around an axis extending frontward and rearward at a position on the right outside of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  In a state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the guiding inlet 570p at the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the rail outlet 553p at the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is The discharge device 580 communicates with the upstream end of the discharge passage 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

  As is clear from the description so far, the guide passage 570a and the tank rail 553 constitute a payout ball passage portion which is bent substantially in an inverted L-shape as a whole. Are connected to a ball tank 552 provided on the side of the main body frame 4 and a payout device 580 provided on the side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, although the bent portion K of the dispensing ball passage is in the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be on the guide passage 570a side. In this case, the downstream end of the tank rail 553 is up to just before the bent portion K, while the guide passage 570a is in the form of, for example, a periscope whose upper portion is bent at the bent portion K. The ball stopping member 557 is provided on the guide passage 570a side.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation axis protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that are integrally rotated with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detecting sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detecting piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the pay-out passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball-moving passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at a position where the ball-moving movable piece 592 closes the ball removing passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end downward, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Are formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to be formed, and extend vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in the rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b when viewed from the rear. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward as viewed from the rear at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the back view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are mounted coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view as viewed in rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted on the upper and lower ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a bead on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-passing passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is moved between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full spherical path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  An upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching the back cover 640.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end of the upper surface in the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 91).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream ends). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. Thus, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full fill payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the normal full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and passes through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from the 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow down to the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate is dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (e.g., “Please remove the ball!”) To the player that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Stop temporarily until

  When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a is mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board placement portion 501c, and forwards near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. Thus, a sufficient space on the right rear side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, the front recess 621b for the space bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the low frequency range, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the aperture of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thus, a sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball-pulling guiding unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball-pulling guiding unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guiding unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In a state in which the ball guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream end opening of the lower ball discharge passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the lower end guide portion 627 has the lower end. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover mounted on the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (FIG. 96). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. This is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the front is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.
98D, the upper edge of the back cover 640 covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit attachment portion (upper portion 551d of the back base 551) of the main body frame 4. On the other hand, a protrusion 551t that can cover the upper edge of the back cover 640 like an eave is formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
As a result, the foreign matter discharged from the falling port 553h of the rear corner 553t of the tank rail 553 falls on the ridge 551t or accumulates on the ridge 551t. Foreign matter hardly enters the inside of the main body frame 4 from the overlapping portion of the mounting portion. Incidentally, since the foreign matter contains the metal powder as described above, the operation of the electronic components inside the main body frame 4 may be adversely affected, which is not preferable.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, and depending on the rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Further details of the configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98A to 105.
98A is a plan view of the main frame, FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A, FIG. 98C is a cross-sectional view taken along line B2-B2 in FIG. 98A, and FIG. 98D is FIG. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along line B3-B3 in FIG. FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view from the lower front to (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including a cross-sectional view of a main part of FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box-like (container) shape extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553 at a position therebetween, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and dispensing. A payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the base 551 and downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out the game balls B to the player side.

[4-11a. Ball tank (2)]
The spherical tank 552 is formed in a square shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. Is formed. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and that is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

[4-11b. Tank rail (2)]
The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. .
The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In addition, as shown in FIG. 98A, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction from the right end in parallel to an axis extending leftward to the left from the right end in plan view. After extending, it extends obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as going to the left, and extends from the right end to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed in a crank shape.
The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the rear outside of the main body frame 4. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed.
Also, since the tank rail 553 and the tank unit mounting portion (payout base 551) for mounting the tank rail 553 are made transparent, the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from outside the rear of the main body frame 4 can be provided. Since the side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized, when a malfunction occurs in the movable rendering unit or the like of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, The status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, and the belt can be checked, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.
Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98D, the boundary between the front gutter wall 553x of the tank rail 553 and the passage bottom wall 553z is rounded, and the outside of the arc-shaped portion 553r is also rounded. When the game board 5 is removed from the front face of the main body frame 4, the tank unit mounting portion can be seen from the front face side as shown by an arrow in FIG.
Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 and replaced, the foreign matter in the tank rail 553 and the state of the game balls can be visually checked from the front side of the main body frame 4 through the tank unit mounting portion, so that maintenance can be performed. Easy to do. In particular, since the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 has a rounded chamfered shape, the inside can be clearly seen, thereby improving the accuracy of the visual check. When the tank unit mounting portion is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, a window may be provided in a corresponding portion.

  As shown in FIGS. 98A and 99, the main body frame 4 includes an overflow surface portion 501m along the front side of the ball tank 552, while the ball tank 552 is provided on the left side wall 552d as a bypass communicating with the overflow surface portion 501m. A passage 552g is provided.

[4-11c. Overflow surface of body frame]
The overflow surface portion 501m extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to have the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher.
Further, the overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 as shown in FIG. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501 m and the outer frame upper member 30. .

[4-11d. Detour path of ball tank (1)]
The bypass passage 552g extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m to above the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side becomes lower. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. It is guided to the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface overflows. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

[4-11e. Body frame base (2)]
The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o at the left and right outer sides of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front and rear direction like a strip, and the game ball B is left and right in the left and right directions. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

[4-11f. Detour path of ball tank (2)]
The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir portion 552i extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left wall 552d to the same height as the left wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g, when assembled to the main body frame 4, has a rear end extending along a front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIGS. 98A and 104, the detour passage 552g is formed. When the game ball B is released from the side to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow due to the rear end that extends diagonally. It can be discharged to the upstream side, and by discharging to a wide portion, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to an outer portion of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and up-down direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

[4-11 g. External terminal board (2)]
The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

[4-11h. Flow of game balls on the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the flow of the game balls mainly in the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined such that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined such that the left corner of the rear end is lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be caused to flow out of the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour path 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour path 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface 501m and flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is rearward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility is used for the ball 552. Even if the game ball B jumps on the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facilities bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, the ball stopping member 557, the dispensing ball passage section, and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 117. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine provided with a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment in an enlarged manner, showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind. FIG. 107 (a) is a plan view showing a state where the tank rails and the like of FIG. 106 are assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rails and the like of (a) viewed from the front, and (c). 3 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like cut along the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of a game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. FIGS. 111 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views showing another embodiment in which the protective wall of FIG. 109 is provided on the front wall and the rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail and the like in another form corresponding to the cross-section of the cake line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like corresponding to a cross section taken along line B3-B3 of FIG. 98A. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of a ball stopping member of another embodiment. FIG. 115 is a vertical sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like in which the vicinity of the bent portion is cut. FIG. 116 is a longitudinal sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like showing a state where the ball retaining member of FIG. 115 at the retracted position is moved to the protruding position. FIG. 117A is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and FIG. 117B is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. It is.
Note that, in addition to the tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, the ball rectifying member 556A, and the ball stopper member 557A are different from the tank rail 553A in the above embodiment. Are different from the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper member 557, but the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. There is also.

[4-12a. Another form of tank rail (meandering part and protective wall)]
Another form of the tank rail 553A is for rectifying the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivering them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to cover the upper end sides of the front gutter wall 553x and the rear gutter wall 553y, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the left of the first rail cover 554A in a front view. And a ball straightening member 556A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A, and a ball stopper member 557A capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is mounted on the downstream end of the tank rail 553A. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. By the meandering portion 553c, the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed. The first rail cover 554A is mounted on the upstream side (on the side of the ball tank 552) of the meandering portion 553c.

  The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A so as to cover from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes an upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protection walls extending upward from both front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a on the upstream side from the center in the left-right direction. 555b, and an opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a ball rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

  The ball rectifying member 556A is attached to the upstream end side so as to be vertically swingable by a swing shaft 556b protruding forward and backward. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protection walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and penetrates through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and projects into the tank rail 553A. It has a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A oscillates while applying an appropriate load to the game balls B by coming into contact with the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, whereby the game balls B The steps are broken to facilitate alignment, and the upper game ball B is prevented from moving quickly to the downstream side so as to prevent ball biting from occurring downstream of the tank rail 553A. I have.

According to the tank rail 553A of this alternative embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. I have. Specifically, the protective wall 555b is connected to the electric wire Y (FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided above the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached. Is indicated by a broken line), and the height is set so as not to enter the swing region of the ball rectifying member 556A. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wire Y from contacting from above.
If the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire Y causes the ball rectifying member 556A to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. The member 556A may not be able to swing upward, and the ball rectifying member 556A may not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying action of the game ball B.
On the other hand, in this alternative embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from contacting the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can swing upward, and the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted, and the ball rectifying member 556A can be used in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging can be prevented.

  Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed. In the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, the upper game ball B is affected by the ball pressure from the upstream and the like, so that the lower game ball B becomes the lower game ball. When the game ball B is first moved downstream in such a manner as to get over the ball, the game ball B is likely to be caught between the inner surface of the second rail cover 555A and the lower game ball B, for example. On the other hand, in the present alternative embodiment, as described above, since the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, the upper game balls B are prevented from moving to the downstream side first. And the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, since the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire Y from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the ball from clogging, the tank rail 553A can be increased. A terminal board (for example, an external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire Y is connected or a control board, or a terminal board or a control board to which many electric wires Y are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552) and the terminal board.

Although the protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A of the tank rail 553A, as shown in FIG. 111A, the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the upper edge of the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A. May be formed to extend upward, or may be provided on the main body frame 4 (specifically, the payout base 551) as shown by imaginary lines in FIG.
Further, the width of the protection wall 555b of the above another embodiment is substantially the same as the distance between the front gutter wall 553x and the rear gutter wall 553y of the tank rail 553A, as shown in FIG. 111 (b). Alternatively, the protection wall 555b corresponding to the gutter rear wall 553y may be provided so as to be displaced rearward from the gutter rear wall 553y. The same applies to the case where the protection wall 555b is provided not on the gutter rear wall 553y but on the second rail cover 555A.
According to such a configuration, the space above the ball rectifying member 556A expands in the width direction (front-rear direction) by the amount by which the protective wall 555b is displaced rearward. Even if the user rides on B and stops, a reset operation such as pushing back with a fingertip can be performed without inconvenience.
Further, in the above-described another embodiment, two protective walls 555b are provided at the same height before and after the ball rectifying member 556A. However, although not shown, the height of the two protective walls 555b is not shown (one of them is a ball rectifying member). 556A at the same level as the other and higher than the other), or as shown in FIG. 111 (b), provided on only one of the gutter rear wall 553y or the not shown gutter front wall 553x. Good. Even in such a case, the desired effect can be achieved by appropriately setting the height and the shape.

[4-12b. Another form of tank rail (mounting structure)]
In the tank rail 553 of the embodiment described with reference to the above section [4-6c] and mainly FIG. 98D, a portion extending straight leftward is a passage seat portion having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a. 551z in an aligned state.
On the other hand, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 112, another form of the tank rail 553A is provided on the opposing surface between the main body frame 4 (specifically, the passage seat 551z of the payout base 551) and the tank rail 553A. A gap SS is provided.
The tank rail 553A mounting structure can provide the following operation and effect in comparison with the tank rail 553 having no gap SS.

First, in recent years, in the gaming board 5, the back unit 3000 such as an image display device has been increased in size and the amount of rearward projection has increased.
The main frame 4 surrounding the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 also has an increased rearward extension, so that the tank unit mounting portion on the upper portion of the main body frame 4 also extends rearward. It extends to project below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 increases.
Needless to say, the current back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is an aggregate of electric components such as an image display device and a motor, and generates heat by operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the main body frame 4 to the outside. Since heat is easily trapped, the inside of the main body frame 4 may become hot.
On the other hand, by providing the gap SS on the surface facing the main body frame 4 like a tank rail 553A of another form, heat released mainly from the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 to the inside of the main body frame 4 is generated. Since it is released to the outside through the gap SS, it is difficult to get inside the main body frame 4. Further, by providing the gap SS on the opposing surface between the tank rail 553A and the main body frame 4, even if the tank rail 553A has a distortion or the like, rattling does not occur as long as it is within the range that can be absorbed by the gap SS. This also has the effect that the precision in forming the tank rail 553A can be reduced.
The gap SS is preferably provided on the entire surface of the tank rail 553A opposed to the main body frame 4. For example, the gap SS is provided only on a part of the front surface of the gutter front wall 553x opposed to the main body frame 4. There is an effect on the improvement.

[4-12c. Another form of dispensing ball passage (foreign matter discharge bypass passage)]
The tank rail 553 of the embodiment described with reference to the above section [4-6c] and mainly FIG. 98A has a plurality (for example, in the embodiment) capable of discharging foreign matter behind the passage bottom wall 553z as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D. (Three) drop ports 553h are formed.
However, if the fall port 553h for dropping foreign matter faces the outside, there is a possibility that a part of the electric wire Y wired on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 may enter the tank rail 553 from the fall port 553h. Depending on the degree of the entry, there is a possibility that the flow of the game ball may be hindered.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113, a tank rail 553A of another form is provided with a fall port 553h on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z, and is provided on the gutter rear wall 553y for receiving foreign matter falling from the fall port 553h. A foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 that can be discharged to the outside from the discharge port 5530 that opens backward.
According to the tank rail 553A, since the falling port 553h does not directly face the outside on the rear surface side, the transverse foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 is interposed between the falling port 553h and the outside on the rear surface side. Even if a part of the electric wire Y of the pachinko machine 1 enters the discharge port 5530 of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage section 5531, the electric wire Y passes through the fall port 553 h at the back of the foreign substance discharge bypass passage section 5531 to the inside of the tank rail 553 </ b> A. It is rarely reached. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game ball on the tank rail 553A is hindered by the erroneous intrusion of the electric wire Y or the like.
The foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 can also be applied to the guide passage 570a that forms the payout ball passage. In this case, the discharge port 5530 is disposed on the rear surface side of the guide passage 570a and the like. May be configured.
That is, in FIG. 113, the gutter front wall 553x does not extend downward from the falling port 553h, and instead, the passage seat portion 551z, which is a part of the discharge base 551, is discharged while the space of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 is left. The foreign matter may be guided to the exit 5530. Alternatively, a member corresponding to the bottom surface of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 formed by the gutter front wall 553x may be formed so as to extend a member located thereunder, for example, a back cover member 640 to the passage seat portion 551z. Alternatively, the top surface of the case member of the device located below may be used.

[4-12d. Ball stop member of another form]
The ball stopping member 557 of the embodiment described with reference to the above section [4-6f] and mainly in FIG. 101 passes the support cylinder 553m vertically provided outside the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b. A sliding base portion 557c slidably supported by the sliding base portion 557c, a substantially beak-shaped ball stopper 557d projecting leftward from a left end of the sliding base portion 557c, and a sliding base portion. An operation knob 557e protruding rightward from the right end of 557c and a cantilever spring-shaped elastic lock piece 557f formed inside the operation knob 557e are provided. The ball stopper 557d enters and exits the short cylinder portion 553s of the tank rail 553 from the ball stopper slit 553v formed in an approximately L-shape when viewed from the front with the bent portion K as a starting point, thereby opening and closing the flow path of the game ball. Than it is.
On the other hand, the ball stopper member 557A of another form shown in FIG. 114 is provided on the rear end of the ball stopper 557d and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553A in the state of the protruding position shown in FIG. A gap 557h in which a foreign matter can be dropped is formed between the ball stopper slit 553v and the start end of the ball stopper slit 553v. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, By providing a crank-shaped detour 557i between the ball stopper 557d and the sliding base 557c, the flow-break space 557h is formed.
In addition, since the detour part 557i shown does not have a bottom, the flow-break space 557h has a bottomless form penetrating the ball stopper 557A in the vertical direction, but the rear bottom part of the ball stopper 557d ( A flat receiving bottom (not shown) is provided between the ball stopper 557d and the sliding base 557c) to form a flow-break space 557h with a bottomed shape so that foreign matter can accumulate there. Good.

The ball stopper member 557A of the above-described another embodiment can exert the following operation and effect in comparison with the ball stopper member 557 of the embodiment having no flow break space 557h.
First, in the tank rail 553, there are foreign substances such as metal powder generated by rubbing between game balls and resin powder generated by rubbing between the game balls and cleaning pellets. Although dropped and discharged from the opening 553h, some foreign matter may reach the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v.
Then, in a state where even such a foreign substance is present at a small amount at the start end of the ball stopping slit 553v, when the ball stopping member 557 is switched from the retracted position indicated by the solid line in the sectional view of FIG. 101 to the projected position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. Then, the surroundings vibrate by the force, and the foreign matter that has stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v falls into the ball stopping slit 553v by the vibration, and travels along the upper surface of the ball stopping piece 557d. There is a possibility that it will fall near the center of the short cylindrical portion 553s.
On the other hand, in the ball stopper member 557A of another embodiment, the foreign matter that has been stopped at the edge of the start end of the ball stopper slit 553v when the ball stopper member 557A is at the retracted position in FIG. When it is switched to the protruding position as described above, even if it falls into the ball stopping slit 553v due to the vibration, a flow break space is provided between the rear end of the ball stopping piece 557d and the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v. Since 557h is facing, it falls down without being placed on the ball stopper 557d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that foreign matter existing at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit 553v enters the vicinity of the center of the short cylindrical portion 553s of the tank rail 553A.
In the case where the flow breaking space 557h of the ball stopping member 557A is in a bottomless form, foreign matter passes through the flow breaking space 557h and is discharged to the outside, and is hardly accumulated in the ball stopping member 557A. The ball stopping member 557A is hardly stained by the use of.
On the other hand, when the flow-break space 557h of the ball stopping member 557A is formed into a bottomed shape, for example, the density of parts below the tank rail 553A is high, and the obstacle is caused by the invasion / attachment of foreign matter like a control board. Even if the electronic components that may cause the unavoidable situation must be arranged directly below the break space 557h, the foreign matters are collected at the receiving bottom of the ball stopper 557A and are not discharged to the outside. A hole for heat radiation can be formed in a substrate box for housing a substrate without concern for intrusion of foreign matter.

[4-13. Technical idea included in the above embodiment and the above different embodiment]
The above-described embodiment and the above-mentioned another embodiment include the following problem and the following technical idea which is means for solving the problem.

[4-13-1a. Challenges: discharge of foreign matter]
The ball stopping member that opens and closes the flow path of the dispensing ball passage portion of Patent Literature 1 is provided above the tank rail that configures the dispensing ball passage portion. Is disposed under the tank rail at the bent portion of the payout ball passage where the flow of the game ball changes from sideways to downward, and the ball stopper is inserted into and taken out of the payout ball passage to open and close the flow path. You may do so.
However, on the other hand, in order to allow the ball stopper of the ball stopper member to enter and exit the bent portion of the dispensing ball passage portion, it is necessary to provide a slit for a ball stop at the bent portion. There is a possibility that the foreign matter that is present may fall from the ball-stopping slit through the ball-stopping piece of the ball-stopping member to the flow path flowing downwardly through the ball-stopping member due to the vibration when the ball-stopping member is operated.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is hardly affected by a foreign substance entering a payout ball passage.

[4-13-1b. Technical Thought: Discharge of Foreign Objects]
"The door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
A dispensing ball passage portion which is bent in a substantially inverted L-shape connecting a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a dispensing device provided on a side of the main body frame,
A ball stop member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the payout ball passage portion,
A ball-stop slit opened toward the upstream passage bottom wall and the downstream passage side wall, starting from the bent portion of the dispensing ball passage portion that is bent in a substantially inverted L-shape,
A rush position at which a ball stop piece is inserted into the payout ball passage from the ball stopping slit to close a flow path of the game ball, and a game ball is formed by retreating the ball stop from the inside of the payout ball passage. A retracting position that opens the flow path of the ball, and a ball stopper member slidably provided so as to be able to be switched to,
The ball stopping member is capable of dropping foreign matter between the rear end of the ball stopping piece and the starting end of the ball stopping slit provided on the upstream passage bottom wall in the state where the ball stopping member is at the protruding position. A gaming machine, wherein a break space is formed. "
In the above description, the “ball tank provided above the main body frame” includes the case where the ball tank is mounted above the rear surface of the main body frame, the case where the ball tank is mounted on the upper surface of the main body frame, and both. The same applies to the case where the dispensing device is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame. And the case where it is attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a foreign object that has stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit falls into the slit due to vibration when the ball stopping member is switched from the retracted position to the intruding position, even if the ball falls into the slit, Since the flow break space faces between the rear end of the stop piece and the start end of the ball stopping slit, there is no risk of the ball stopping on the ball stop. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that foreign matter existing at the edge of the starting end of the ball stopping slit enters the payout ball passage portion along the ball stopping piece of the ball stopping member. In particular, a fixed load ("click" or "click" at the time of switching) may be applied to the ball stopping member by engagement of an elastic lock piece or the like to prevent blinding. In this case, the surroundings vibrate more strongly each time the switching operation is performed.
Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the flow breaking space may have a bottomless form penetrating the ball stopping member in a vertical direction.
In such a case, the foreign matter is discharged to the outside through the flow breaking space and hardly accumulated in the ball stopping member, so that the ball stopping member is hardly stained even after long-term use.
Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the flow breaking space may have a bottomed form having a receiving bottom protruding from a rear bottom of the ball stopper of the ball stopper.
In such a case, for example, it is assumed that the electronic components which are likely to cause a failure due to the invasion / adhesion of a foreign substance, such as a control board, are disposed immediately below the flow gap due to a high component density below the tank rail. In addition, since the foreign matter stays in the receiving bottom of the ball stopping member and is not discharged to the outside, the heat dissipation hole can be opened in the substrate box for housing the substrate without concern for the invasion of the foreign matter from above.

[4-13-2a. Challenges: erroneous intrusion into the dropper]
It has been conventionally known that foreign matter such as metal powder or resin powder enters the dispensing ball passage, and as a countermeasure, a drop port for dropping foreign matter is provided on the passage bottom wall of the dispensing ball passage (Patent Document 1). 2).
However, when the dropout port for dropping foreign objects in the payout ball passage faces outside, a part of the large number of electric wires wired on the rear surface of the gaming machine enters the inside of the payout ball passage from the dropout port. There is a possibility that the flow of the game ball may be affected depending on the degree.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a payout ball passage portion capable of keeping a flow of gaming balls smooth.

[4-13-2b. Technical Thought ... Prevention of Intrusion into Falling Exit]
"The door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
In a gaming machine having a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout ball passage portion bent in a substantially inverted L-shape connecting a payout device provided on a side of the main body frame,
The dispensing ball passage portion, a fall port for foreign substances provided downward on its own passage bottom wall,
A gaming machine, comprising: a sideways foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion that can receive foreign matter falling from the dropping opening and discharge the rearward opening to the outside from its own discharge opening that opens rearward. "
According to such a gaming machine, the dropout port of the payout ball passage does not directly face the outside on the rear side, and a lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage is interposed between the dropout and the discharge opening that opens rearward. Therefore, even if a part of the electric wire of the gaming machine enters the discharge port of the foreign matter discharge bypass path, it hardly reaches the inside of the payout ball path through the drop port. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game ball in the payout ball passage portion is hindered by the erroneous intrusion of the electric wire or the like.

In the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The fall port for the foreign matter may be provided at an edge of the passage bottom wall farther from the discharge port.
By doing so, there is a distance between the drop port and the discharge port, so that the ends of the wires and the like are difficult to reach by the drop port, and the foreign substances dropped from the drop port are temporarily stored in the foreign substance discharge bypass passage. Therefore, for example, an electronic component or the like that may cause a failure due to invasion or adhesion of a foreign substance can be disposed without a problem below the drop opening.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a payout ball passage capable of maintaining a smooth flow of gaming balls.

[4-13-3a. Problem: Malfunction of ball rectifying member]
As described above, the conventional gaming machine is provided with a ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing on the tank rail comes into contact with the ball, so that the ball is clogged in the tank rail. It is hard to get up.
On the other hand, a gaming machine may be provided with an electric wire connection terminal for wiring ("Terminal board 78" in Patent Document 1) above a tank rail, specifically on the side of the ball tank in the main body frame. Some of the electric wires connected to the electric wire connection terminals cross the ball rectifying member in the vertical direction.
Thus, ball clogging can occur even in a tank rail provided with a ball straightening member. It is thought that there are multiple causes, one of which is that when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, part of the wire enters the swing region of the ball rectifying member and Was found to be able to inhibit As a result, the ball rectifying member does not operate normally, so that ball clogging is likely to occur.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a smooth flow of gaming balls in a tank rail.

[4-13-3b. Technical Thought: Securing the swing area of the ball rectifying member]
"The door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank for storing game balls provided at a high position of the main body frame,
A tank rail that guides the game ball of the ball tank downstream,
A ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing through the tank rail abuts;
An electric wire connection terminal for wiring disposed above the tank rail;
And an electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal,
A gaming machine comprising a fence-shaped protective wall capable of preventing the electric wire from entering the swing region of the ball rectifying member. "
Here, the swinging of the ball rectifying member is not limited to the case where one end is rotatably mounted on the shaft and the other end swings up and down, and of course, the free end is made up and down by the elasticity of the plate in a cantilever shape. Includes swinging.
According to such a gaming machine, even if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal traverses the ball rectifying member, the protection wall prevents entry into the swing area, so that the ball rectifying member is obstructed by the electric wire. Can rock normally. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the tank rail can be kept smooth.

In the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The tank rail includes a passage bottom wall, a gutter front wall and a gutter rear wall erected before and after the passage bottom wall,
The protection wall may be formed on at least the rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail.
According to such a gaming machine, the protection wall can be easily formed only by extending at least the gutter rear wall of the tank rail upward.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the paragraph before the preceding paragraph, the protection wall may be provided at a position displaced rearward from a gutter rear wall in a portion of the tank rail where the ball rectifying member is located. Good.
According to such a gaming machine, since the space above the ball rectifying member expands in the width direction by the amount of displacing the protective wall to the rear side, even if the ball rectifying member rides on the game ball in the ball biting state and stops, The reset operation of pushing back with a fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the paragraphs before and after the paragraph, the protection wall may be formed in the main body frame.
According to such a gaming machine, the formation of the tank rail and the mounting of the ball rectifying member can be simplified because the protective wall is not formed on the tank rail side.
According to the above technical idea, the flow of the game ball in the tank rail can be kept smooth.

[4-13-4a. Challenges: high temperature inside the body frame]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in game boards, back units such as image display devices have become larger, and the amount of rearward projection has increased.
In addition, as the amount of overhang of the back unit of the game board has increased, the amount of overhang of the body frame surrounding it has also increased. Or overhang the tank rail. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the tank unit mounting portion and the ball tank or the tank rail increases.
Needless to say, the back unit of the current game board is an aggregate of electric components, and generates heat by operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the main body frame to the outside. Therefore, the inside of the main body frame may be heated to a high temperature.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which heat is hardly trapped inside a main body frame.

[4-13-4b. Technical Thought ... Improvement of Heat Dissipation Performance of Main Frame]
"The door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank for storing game balls provided above the main body frame,
A tank rail disposed above the main body frame to guide the game ball of the ball tank downstream,
A gaming machine, wherein a gap is provided on a surface facing the main frame and the tank rail. "
According to such a gaming machine, heat released mainly from the back unit of the game board into the inside of the main body frame is radiated to the outside through the gap provided on the opposing surface of the main body frame and the tank rail. It is difficult for heat to stay inside.
Note that, in such a gaming machine, the gap may be provided on a part of a facing surface between the main body frame and the tank rail. Thereby, both stability and heat dissipation of the tank rail can be achieved.
In the gaming machine or the gaming machine described immediately before, the gap may be formed at least in a vertical direction so that an upper end is opened to the outside. As a result, the gap functions as a chimney and can efficiently radiate heat to the outside.
According to the above technical idea, since the heat generated inside the main body frame can be released to the outside, there is an effect that the heat is less likely to be trapped.

[4-13-5a. Challenges: increasing game boards]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in game boards, back units such as image display devices have become larger, and the amount of rearward projection has increased.
In addition, with the increase in the size of the back unit of the game board, the amount of overhang of the body frame surrounding it has also increased, but the space for installing the gaming machine is limited, making the design of the back unit difficult. Has become.
The following technical ideas have been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing a back unit of a gaming board.

[4-13-5b. Technical Thought ... Expansion space for tank unit mounting section]
"A tank unit comprising a ball tank for storing game balls, and a tank rail for guiding the game balls of the ball tank downstream,
And a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the tank unit above the main body frame,
A gaming machine, wherein a through-hole-shaped opening notch is formed in a part of the tank unit mounting portion overlapping the ball tank, and the opening notch is closed by the ball tank. "
According to such a gaming machine, the portion provided with the opening notch substantially expands the space for accommodating the back unit of the game board by the thickness of the tank unit mounting portion, so that the degree of freedom in the design of the back unit is increased. Increase. Further, since the opening notch is closed by the ball tank, there is no risk of foreign matter entering therethrough.
Note that, in such a gaming machine, the opening notch may be formed so as to correspond to a front wall and a bottom wall of the ball tank that are located on a side closer to a player.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a larger accommodation space connected in an L shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the ball tank.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing the back unit of the gaming board.

[4-14. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the lower right back. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled from the rear. FIG. 122 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cut line in FIG. 118 (a), FIG. 122 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the cut line in FIG. 118 (a), and FIG. FIG. FIG. 123 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in a pachinko machine including the board unit of FIG. 118 (a).

  The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 instead of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is greatly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the above-described substrate unit 620 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and the power unit 620c is attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. A rear base 662, an out-ball path 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game flowing through the out-ball path 663 An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, a ball-pulling guide unit 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball-pulling passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and guides the game balls B rightward in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 flows, and the ball removal provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662. And exits passage 665, and a passage wall member 666 is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball 抜排 out passage 665, a.

  The front base 661 is formed in a left and right long box shape opened forward. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, a ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape opened rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

  In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball extraction guide 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the inside of the ball guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660, and it is easy to check for clogged balls. I have.

  The out ball passage 663 is formed at the front side of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

  The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is opened upward at a substantially center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. An out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guiding portion 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b downward, and a lower end of the lower guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

  The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 has a depth in the front-rear direction approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

  The out ball rectifying portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle such that the left end side is lower from the position on the right side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the front-rear direction decreases toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is depth. In addition, the portion of the out ball rectifying portion 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (leftward). The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, in the out ball rectification unit 663b, the game balls B can be aligned in a line.

  The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the vertical direction. So that it is curved rearwardly in a small crank shape. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. Since the lower guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that a portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the lower guiding portion 663c is bent in a crank shape through the out sensor 664. Even if the game ball B abuts on the part where it is present, the ball does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent the out sensor 664 from detecting one game ball B twice.

  The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and a long life because the game ball B frequently passes.

  The ball extraction guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward at an upper portion of a left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream-side bent rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , Is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 122 (a) and the like).

  The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear base 662 on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 so as to be opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap equal to or more than one game ball B is formed between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

  The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is higher than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A horizontal guiding portion 665a extending rightward, a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guiding portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guiding portion 665b. ), And a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123).

  In addition, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d, which alternately project inward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball ejection path 665 allows the game balls B flowing in the vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag manner. An increase in the speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

  Since the ball ejection passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

  According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and the out sensor 664 is provided. And discharge it to the island facilities side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball release lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball-pull guide unit 627 and the ball-pull discharge passage 665 which are separate and independent from the game hall. As a result, only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 determine an accurate game ball B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (payout rate).

  The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is entered into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, The number of game balls B that have been accepted into the winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005 and the bonus winning opening 2006 and have been discharged from the game board 5, and are accepted into any winning opening after being driven into the gaming area 5a. The sum of the number of game balls B received from the game board 5 without being received by the out mouth 1008 without any change and the number of game balls B (the number of shot balls) hit into the game area 5a. That is.

  Note that the payout rate (payout rate) changes according to the game state, and is set as a payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as "number / number of out-balls in predetermined period = payout rate in predetermined period".

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out-ball path 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, and the out-ball path. A game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. There is no need to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Is formed, the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 move away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, and the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 are connected to many game balls B. Of the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to electric noise due to static electricity or induced current generated by the circulation of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B. It can be.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game ball B, whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out sensor 664 is worn out and damaged at an early stage.

  Further, when the payout rate (ball-out rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out-balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the payout rate, The player wants to pay out many game balls B, so that if the displayed payout rate is large, it is immediately recognized that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility of paying out many game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act of paying out a lot of game balls B is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent activities can easily hesitate to perform fraudulent activities, because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily recognize fraudulent activities. It can be.

  Also, if the payout ratio calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the same reason as described above can be seen by the staff at the game hall, etc. Can detect wrongdoing. When the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained or the like, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce a burden on the game hall side.

  Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, There is no need to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030), so that the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the game balls B to be discharged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining a player by providing the effect device in the secured space.

  In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has the vertical guiding portions 665b in which the plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game balls B flow through the vertical guiding portions 665b, so that the game balls B are distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the flowing game balls B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall receiving the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

  In addition, a meandering out ball straightening portion 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding portion 665b is provided in the ball ejection passage 665, from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude. Of the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 can be reduced, so that it is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B can be provided.

  Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path 665 are opened downward, respectively, the out ball path 663 and the ball discharge path are provided. Since the game balls B are discharged downward from the 665, the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines, walls and the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines are provided. It is possible to prevent the machine and the wall from being damaged. Further, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game balls B are hardly scattered, and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

  Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since it is possible to deliver the game ball B hit into the area 5a to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 only by discharging the ball downward, the configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is described. A simple (simple) configuration can be adopted, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball path 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball path 663 are not provided. Since the discharged game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B vigorously flowing through the ball-discharged discharge passage 665 and the out-ball passage 663 collide with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is hardly damaged.

  Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge path 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball path 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the pachinko machine 1 to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, so that the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-14a. Another embodiment of ball discharge in substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball outlet of the out-ball path. FIG. 125 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 125 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a position of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is provided a merging portion 663e merging with the ball discharge passage 665. The junction 663e is open downward, and the open end thereof is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects short backward from the front wall of the out ball discharge port 663d.

  According to the embodiment of FIG. 124, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward. . Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the portion (out receiving portion, bucket, Etc.), the game balls B can be easily released, and the island facilities can reliably collect the game balls B.

  In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, the release direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward by the guide piece 667. Even if it is provided at a position immediately below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position near the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged at a position as forward as possible, so that the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be increased. Since the out-ball path 663 moves away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like, the out-ball path 663 is caused by electric noise due to static electricity, induced current, and the like generated when many game balls B flow through the out-ball path 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B can be provided.

  Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from a portion of the out ball passage 663 at the out ball discharge port 663d from below. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f And a sensor cover 668 for restricting the downward movement of the 664.

  The sensor mounting concave portion 663f is formed at a lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in the present embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be viewed from above or below the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has a base end 668a rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end thereof, and detection of an out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a. A through-hole 668b through which the game ball B passes so as to be able to pass through at a position coinciding with the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw 668c provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body 668a. Have.

  The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the base end side of the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. The locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the side of the out ball rectifying portion 663b.

  The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f such that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664 to restrict the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 125 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is It is discharged downward through. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

  When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 about the base end of the main body 668a and opening the sensor cover 668 so that the locking claw 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is moved to the lower surface of the out sensor 664. Away, the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 125 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), in the present embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is opened by rotating the sensor cover 668, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact danger indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2). , The upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. Thus, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the contact danger, thereby preventing the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. be able to.

  According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 can be detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668 as described above, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 may come into contact with a contact danger such as the outer frame 2. However, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, although the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, so that many game balls B There is a possibility that the locking claws 668c of the sensor cover 668 may be disengaged due to the vibration caused by the vibration and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. If the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls down, the game sensor B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. By notifying the occurrence of the abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. The lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the contact feared object and the like, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact feared object, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at a position on the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out ball rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be viewed well from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball path 663, the inside of the out ball path 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and turned upside down, and the replacement of the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform operations such as checking the inside or the inside of the ball discharge passage 665.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted early. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and to suppress a decrease in interest, and also to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

  Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even when the sensor cover 668 is opened when exchanging the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is not moved from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is suspended and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

  Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 through which many game balls B flow, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the game ball B is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, the distribution of downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is determined on the side (one side) rotatably mounted on the base unit 660. Of the locking unit 663g of the base unit 660 (the other end side). Accordingly, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 by passing a large number of game balls B through the out sensor 664, the rotatable one end side of the sensor cover 668 has the same force. Since a large amount can be received, it is difficult to release the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is a front view of the game board in which the center role and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. 127 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 viewed from the front right, FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 130 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center role and the like are made transparent. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 134 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 126, and FIG. 135 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 126. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of a game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning A mouth 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a special winning opening 2006 and the like in the gaming area 5a. In order to be accepted, the game for performing the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a is performed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136 and the like) that are in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 134 and 173) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100. And further provided.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 below the effect display device 1600. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a special winning opening sensor 2513. , First V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first swing Distributing solenoid 2532, second distributing solenoid 2545, third distributing middle drive motor 2560, third distributing left drive motor 2561, third distributing right drive motor 2562, third distributing rotation detection sensor 2563, third Distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, magnetic sensor 2010, Movement sensor 3003 and out the sensor 664, is for relaying the connection with the like.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (three in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a further different position in the game area 5a. And a second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B in the normal winning opening 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port. A special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result selected by receiving game balls B to 2004, and a first start opening 2002 or a second start Mouth 2 The game ball winning opening 2006 which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the game ball 04, and the game ball winning opening 2006 The first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 in which an opportunity of receiving is given to the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting magnetism acting improperly in the game area 5a. Have.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left side unit mounted slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in front view Attacker 2300 and an attacker attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005. The unit 2400 is located above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and is substantially at the center in a front view in the game area 5a. And the upper attached to and character object winning opening to close 2006 includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 frame-shaped center won game 2500 has the.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005. The center role 2500 includes a role winning prize opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the role winning prize opening 2006, and a first V winning opening detecting the game ball B received in the first V prize opening 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first loss opening sensor 2516 for detecting the game ball B received in the first loss opening 2535 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second opening unit 2100 that is provided in the starting unit 2100. And a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting port 2002 (see FIG. 173).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the light guide plate effecting unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and is connected to the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower back ball discharge unit 3150 that receives game balls B and discharges them downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution device of the center role 2500 attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. And a back right ball discharging unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges the ball downward.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and the back front rendering unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100; A front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, a lower front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right front of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and a back decoration in the rear front effect unit 3200 3211 near the right end of the sub-display 3211.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the lower right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the gaming panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The game panel 1100 is formed of a wooden board such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 that is the lowest position in the game area 5a and that corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and that is recessed upward from the lower end. The game panel 1100 has a plurality of openings 1102 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the game panel 1100 has a cutout portion 1103 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1103 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward. Although not shown in detail, a decorative sheet provided with a pattern or decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below and the rear side in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 122). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control unit (1)]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 173) for controlling the content of the game and payout of the game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 130) for setting the game performance, A main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently formed, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration is performed, Or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, and a special winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first The distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, the third distribution right drive motor 2562, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, Strike left rotation detection sensor 2564, third right rotation detection sensor 2565, magnetic sensor 20 0, and it is connected to the vibration sensor 3003, and the out-sensor 664, etc.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a for switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and checking the setting value, a setting switching button 1311b for selecting and switching the setting value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 by a connector (connection between boards) (the harness connects the connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected to each other). By this connector connection (connection between boards), a signal from the setting key switch 1311a and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal dimension of the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 is the same. The center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. Agree.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at a position that is the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted to be rotated below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a setting having a pressing operation portion above the center line of the setting change board 1311 is provided. A setting change permission lamp on which a switching button 1311b is arranged and which can emit a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Below, a base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged, and the lower side of the main control board 1310 is closer to the center. , A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion hole extends in the vertical direction). , The setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be extracted from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot, other line-ups are arranged opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island facilities of the game hall) and the setting keys do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

  The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the signal of the setting key ON is set. The data is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing the second ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees in a counterclockwise direction and turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder with the ENTER key turned ON. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions that are completely different from the function of the setting key ON and the function of the determination key ON can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the determination key can be performed collectively by only the setting key switch 1311a alone.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are respectively formed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, the "gap" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, respectively. In order to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being modified by invading wires or the like from the outside, wire intrusion prevention portions are formed on the cover body with respect to these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, since the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of OFF of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are routed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. Also, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is formed at a distance, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. Is transmitted (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) A wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of OFF for the setting key switch 1311a) and the setting switching button 1311b The wiring from the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). Are formed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other).

  The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case where the setting of the set value is changed will be briefly described, and the case where the current set value is confirmed and displayed will be briefly described. In addition, the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current set value in addition to changing the set value. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

  When the setting of the set value is changed, the main frame is attached to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary to satisfy a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is ON. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 has not been powered on (the pachinko machine 1 has been turned off), The operation of opening the body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Note that the above-mentioned “predetermined set value change permission condition” may further be a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and The setting change of the set value may be made executable when the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then attaches the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Opening operation is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a of FIG. Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the unlit state to the lit state.

  When the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 changes the detection signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input to Each time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a executes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the control returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, increases again by one value, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  In order to determine the set value, the person who changes the set value rotates the set key cylinder 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (that is, turns the set key switch 1311a to the set key with the set key ON). A 60-degree counterclockwise rotation operation is performed to return the cylinder from the rotational position to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then to the OFF position. The setting key switch 1311a is set to the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation (by rotating the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a.

  The setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned from the turning position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder 1311a). When the switch 1311a is turned back to the setting key cylinder rotation position), the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined only by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. And workability is improved.

  The person who changes the setting of the set value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed, and a state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned on from off.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value extracts the setting key from the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, performs the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and performs the operation of changing the setting of the setting value. Complete.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set values is performed, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred), The operation of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the first operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees clockwise. Is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

  The person who confirms and displays the currently set values first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure), and then checks the outer frame 2. To open the main body frame 4, and then insert the setting key into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a and rotate it clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. This turns on the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. (Set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who performs a confirmation display of the currently set value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the currently set value completes the confirmation of the currently set value, and turns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by performing a 60-degree counterclockwise rotation operation so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF position. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set value, removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, performs the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and performs the current setting. Complete the work of confirming the displayed set value.

  The predetermined set value change permission condition is, as described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is determined when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While the setting key must be turned on by being turned 60 degrees and being turned on by the first ON operation, the predetermined set value display permission condition is, as described above, the pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs momentarily), the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Key cylinder Set jack key is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. There is a common requirement that the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires “at the time of power recovery”, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

  Here, the setting value will be briefly described. The “setting value” is a probability for lottery determination whether a big hit or not and a probability for lottery determination whether a small hit or not. It is possible to change the probability of determining a lottery when moving to time, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, and the like, which is advantageous to the player (that is, The probability (advantage) that the number of game balls B that can be increased can be increased is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are prepared in advance as set values. The probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table in which a ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol A big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the ratio of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined A small hit symbol determination table, a normal shift determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the shift determination from the probable change to the normal time is selected, and used at various distribution rates associated with the set values. Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like) That. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Note that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and various tables used in various sort rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. Others may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Although the above-described set values are six set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 6, the set values may be smaller than this range, or may be set in a larger range. It may be something. For example, four set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g displays the set value, and also checks the content of the RAM incorporated therein when the power is restored by the main control MPU 1310a to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main-control-side power-off process is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality (or trust) in the content stored in the RAM incorporated therein. Is not possible), and an error message to that effect is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 among the game balls B fired in the game area 5a. The number of played game balls B is displayed. Of the game balls B fired in the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 173 and the like), and the detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. This is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays the result on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. Rotate only the range up to the rotational position of the set key cylinder with the key turned ON It may be used as the setting key switch 1311a 'that can be. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'is returned counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311 a ′ can be turned ON by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF. The signal of this determination key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be described as "Modification (1) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention portion is provided on the cover body with respect to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded from a “gap” formed in the opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a label on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit as the determination key button may be employed. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. In the case where the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switch button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should be close to each other ( (Separated from each other). When the setting key button 1311 is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “Modification (2) of enter key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the palm of the handle 195 in the handle unit 180 is A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not a finger is A detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player is branched at the payout control board 633, and the main control is performed via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or the finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or the finger is touched on the handle 195. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194, the determination key is turned ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor). Good) may be described as “Modified example (3) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the firing control unit of the payout control board 633 described later is used. A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the Through the control board 633, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, but determines that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification (4) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the operation of the player sitting on the opposing face of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. A distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the distance is provided on the game board 5, and a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is used to control the surrounding area via a relay board. When the signal is input to the board 1510, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board, input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and determined based on the detection signal. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. The distance measuring sensor transmits the light emitted from the light emitting unit through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects the light on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, whereby the operation of the player can be detected. In this case, when a detection signal from the distance measurement sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal. While it can be determined that there is an operation, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as “Modification (5) of determination key”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of the OFF states is transmitted (in some cases, the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit is described as "variation example (6) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information is to convey the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms if it is the information to convey the decision key ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a outputs the setting key ON, the determination key ON, And OFF can be determined (in some cases, the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is described as "Modification (7) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing this, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (that is, the initial position), which is the original position from the rotational position of the The setting key cylinder 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the setting key cylinder turning position that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF. A signal of this OFF is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , The voltage level of the determination key ON signal, and the voltage level of the OFF signal are set to an intermediate potential (for example, from zero V to 5 V) between the boards ranging from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Out of 2 V to 3 V), a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, and the result of comparison by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a. ON / OFF, ON / OFF of the signal of the determination key ON, and ON / OFF of the OFF signal may be determined. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “Modified example (8) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button corresponds to the pressing operation unit. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening so that wires and the like cannot enter the “gap” formed in the opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is stuck at a position corresponding to each of the determination key button and the error release switch so that the determination key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers one of the press operation sections of the enter key button and the error release switch (a cover for pressing the press operation section). May be used.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the determination key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit. May be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with an enter key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the payout is performed as a routing of a wiring pattern to the enter key button and a wiring pattern to the error release switch. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should be kept close to each other (by separating them from each other). ) Is formed. When the payout control board 633 is provided with an enter key button, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "modified example (9) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633, Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. The error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on at the time of power-on). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation section of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while determining based on the signal from the error release switch. Thus, when the pressing operation section of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (10) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation section. The dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 outputs the logic of the signal from the error release switch to the dispensing control unit power supply described later. A command is created by monitoring in a port input process of the time process, a command created in a command transmission process of a payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 receiving the command is transmitted. Of the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON. The error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on at the time of power-on). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU has been operated based on the signal from the error release switch and informs the fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and receives a command notifying the fact. Then, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (11) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON. (Set rotation of key cylinder to turn off 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633 so that R An operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON based on an input operation signal. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. In That. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention portion is provided on the opening so as to prevent the wire and the like from penetrating through the “gap” formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. It becomes a structure to be molded into.

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, a seal printed with the name of each button is provided at a position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal.) Also, a button with a cover that covers one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or the pressing operation may be performed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation section may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the dispensing control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error clearing switch, the wiring pattern between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error clearing switch is routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. The dispensing control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the dispensing control board 633 to the connector terminal (the main control board 1310 connector terminal) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error clearing switch are also kept close to each other. (Separated). In the case where the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "variation (12) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON. (Set rotation of key cylinder to turn off 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633 so that R The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and generates a command when the payout control unit power-on described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command may determine whether the enter key is ON. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. The payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated, and when it receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the determination key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 determines Operation of It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine that RAM clear switch 1310f pressing element when is not being operated dispensing control MPU of based on No.. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included). ").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. To the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) from the above, the turning operation is performed by turning 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, and further turning in the counterclockwise direction. The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation (by rotating the head 60 degrees forward), and the signal of this determination key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control of the main control board 1310. Instead of being input to the MPU 1310a, instead of the 2 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via (via) the payout control board 633, and the left output sensor 3032 and the right out port sensor to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from 3033. The game balls B fired in the game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a as described above. The game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008 is detected by the out mouth left sensor 3032 or the out mouth right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a performs a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and the out mouth left sensor 3032 or the out mouth right sensor Based on the detection signal from 3033, when the out port 1008 has collected the game ball B, it can be determined that the determination key is ON. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (that is, closed) with respect to the main body frame 4 and / or based on a detection signal from the out mouth left sensor 3032 or the out mouth right sensor 3033, When the out port 1008 is not collecting the game ball B, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (out port switch). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be referred to as a "variation (14) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. To the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) from the above, the turning operation is performed by turning 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, and further turning in the counterclockwise direction. The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation (by rotating the head 60 degrees forward), and the signal of this determination key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control of the main control board 1310. Instead of being input to the MPU 1310a, instead of the The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signals from the second and out mouth right sensors 3033 in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and a payout control unit described later. The command created in the command transmission process at the time of power-on may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received the command may determine whether the enter key is ON. The game balls B fired in the game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a as described above. The game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008 is detected by the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects the game ball B by the out port 1008 based on a detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. The payout control MPU determines that the determination key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B has not been collected by the out port 1008 when it receives a command to that effect. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the out-port switch). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (15) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574 or a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a branches at the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the decision key is ON. Alternatively, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 uses the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutout detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 to perform a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later. And sends a command created in a command transmission process of a payout control unit power-on process to be described later to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received the command determines the command. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the payout unit). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (16) of determination key".

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal of While it is possible to, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (17) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn the determination key ON. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again, pull out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is determined to be ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal of While it is Rukoto can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (17) of the enter key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). (Rotational position), a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to turn off and a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to perform the second turn-on operation. Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is referred to as “modification of the determination key ( 8) "and there is a case to be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). (Rotational position), a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to turn off and a 60-degree turn in the counterclockwise direction to perform the second turn-on operation. Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 and a setting key in which a setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the cylinder from the rotational position to the initial position and then turned off. When the OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch). Mode 2 (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ') may be referred to as a "decision key modification (19)."

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation section. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation section of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the pressing operation section of the enter key button and the corresponding And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by intrusion of wire or the like from a “gap” formed in the cover. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a label on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. If the main control board 1310 is provided with the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (to be separated from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a '). The period during which the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have a function of an error release switch described later, the error release switch is not required on the payout control board 633 because it is input to the payout control MPU.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, a normal winning port provided on the game board 5 is provided. 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various winning opening sensors (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening) The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the sensor 2403, the bonus winning opening sensor 2513, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002), and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input, based on these detection signals. The presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (various sensors and the like). (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to turn the determination key ON, It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening or to send the game ball B to the out opening 1008.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a was replaced with a stepping motor, a DC motor, It controls the operation of a movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and When determining the original position, the operating position, and the like of the movable body (accessory) based on a detection signal from a sensor (a photo sensor, a distance measuring sensor, or the like), the main control MPU 1310a based on the detection signal from the optical sensor May determine whether the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the optical key combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as "Modification (23) of determination key". In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor moves the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the determination key ON can be inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input Whether the decision key ON based on the output signal may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be turned only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "decision key modification (24)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the gaming board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5. When a vibration sensor 3003 is provided on the game board 5 for detecting an illegal act of entering a ball or a gate (gate) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. , The presence or absence of a fraudulent act may be determined, and the presence or absence of a decision key ON may be determined based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be referred to as a "decision key modification (25)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. The game ball B is caused to malfunction by causing various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulently acquired right, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor. May be determined based on the detection signal. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (for a radio wave sensor). The mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ') may be referred to as a "decision key modification (26)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the counter key clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350 Signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 for detecting the pressing operation of the touch operation unit of the effect operation unit unit 350 The detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the contact of No. 02 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the production operation button). The mode of the unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "decision key modification (27)."

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 including the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at a caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism, and is provided with a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover cannot be removed from the base unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can be applied to a structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by entering a wire or the like from a “gap” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. In order to prevent this, a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover body with respect to the opening. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An open / close switch for a setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover open / close switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. May be configured. The case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (the setting change board box). May be described as a “decision key modification (28)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected. In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the setting of the setting key switch 1311a is set. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal, and a setting switching button 1311b. Are formed so as not to be close to each other (to be separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311 and to be connected to the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the The connection of the board 1310 to the terminal of the connector MSCN) is also formed at a distance. Also in the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) And the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b so as not to be close to each other ( (Separated from each other), a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a. , For one of the wiring patterns, the setting change board 1311 The connector is connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (an inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN. Alternatively, another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected to each other via a harness. "Variation of the decision key (29)" may be described.)

  In addition, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an aspect of appropriately selecting and combining may be adopted (the variation of the selection combination in the modification example is referred to as “the modification example (30) of the determination key. ").

  In addition, with the above-described set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a large hit is determined by lottery or the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is determined, a lottery determination is performed when shifting from a probable change time to a normal time. Can be changed, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous for the player, and the like can be changed, which is advantageous for the player (that is, the number of game balls B that can be acquired by the player is increased. (Probability) can be set in advance. In the present embodiment, set values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are prepared in advance as set values. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, but the other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage) that the player has an advantage. In some cases, there is a single set value that is set in advance. In other words, the probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player as in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment exists in advance as a plurality of set values, and is advantageous for the player in which the game needs to be changed and for the game specification. There is a game specification in which a probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design in accordance with such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed in design or is not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are not used. Is dependent on the game specifications, and therefore has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations according to the game specifications. Therefore, a board that can be used in common with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration is required.

  For example, in a game specification in which only a single setting value exists in advance and the setting value is not necessary at all in a game specification in which the probability (advantage degree) that the player has an advantage is a probability (advantage degree) in which the setting value is advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use the setting value, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 can be dealt with by a design change by software that assigns the following contents. Can be.

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine check operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area) (after the RAM is cleared). Variations can be given to the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the set value 1 is set to “all operations (movable body (accessory) Operation of the object, lighting of the light emitter) ”is assigned, and the actual device confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies“ movable (operation) operation ”as the set value 2 is assigned. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed operation (movable speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies “interference check with a structure or another movable body (accessory), operation order with another movable body (accessory), etc.)” is assigned. Light emitter 1 port unit (Main control MP The actual device confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating “lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (ie, for each output port)” of 1310 a is assigned, and the actual device confirmation designating “no operation” as the set value 6 is assigned. The operation pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual device checking operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as “Modification (1) by common hardware configuration”). The main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (the accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, of the actual device check operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 178) from the main control MPU 1310a performs the peripheral control with the contents (actual device confirmation operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light-emitting body can be performed. By changing the setting of the actual machine check operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 specifying “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 specifying “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “20 seconds” as the setting value 3 ", A time setting pattern 4 specifying" 25 seconds "is assigned as the setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 specifying" 30 seconds "is assigned as the setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 designating “35 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is referred to as “Modified example (2 ) ")). The peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of changing and setting the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the start of the demonstration can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to use the contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) performed after the symbol change ends as a set value capable of setting a plurality of contents. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the set value 1 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of movable body (accessory)” as the set value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates “serious effect” as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “serial effect, motion effect of movable body (accessory)” as a setting value 4 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that designates “era drama style effect” as a setting value 5 is set, and a demo effect setting that designates “era drama style effect, movable body (character)” as a set value 6 The pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the content of the demonstration effect may be described as “Modification (3) by common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of the change setting of the content of the demonstration effect, the content of the demonstration effect performed after the change of the symbol can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by a sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, a volume setting pattern 1 specifying “volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a volume setting pattern 2 specifying “volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “volume 3” is set as the setting value 3. ”, A volume setting pattern 4 specifying“ volume 4 ”is assigned as the setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 specifying“ volume 5 ”is assigned as the setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 designating “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default volume may be described as “Modification (4) by common hardware configuration”). The volume is set so that the volume increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets a default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to the set value 1 is such that the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the volume has been moved to the lower end of the volume. When the sound volume is adjusted to the minimum volume, the sound may be muted. Alternatively, the sound volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the set value 6 is such that the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the volume maximum end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume, or may be a volume at a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. According to the aspect of the change setting of the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can have a variation.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of error notification sound volumes in error notification of various kinds of troubles, goto, errors, and the like. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is set in the game hall. Although the clerk or the like is easy to notice, a player playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel harsh. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, an error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and an error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, an error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and “5” is assigned as the setting value 5. An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as the set value 6 (volume of error notification sound). The mode of the change setting may be described as “Modification (5) by common hardware configuration”). In addition, from the setting value 1 (a volume that does not become mute, the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound), from the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so as to increase toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even at a distance of several meters from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control for emitting an error notification sound at a volume of an error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the aspect of the change setting of the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can have a variation.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default luminances of a light-emitting body such as a lamp and an LED. The luminance of the luminous body to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 specifying “luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 specifying “luminance 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “3” is assigned as the setting value 3. A default luminance setting pattern 3 specifying “luminance 3” is allocated, a default luminance setting pattern 4 specifying “luminance 4” is allocated as a setting value 4, and a default luminance setting pattern specifying “luminance 5” as a setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned. (In some cases, the mode of the change setting of the default brightness is described as “Modification (6) by common hardware configuration”). is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly changing the default luminance by repeatedly executing a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and performs lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the illuminant. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitter can be performed by adjusting the luminance of the light emitter that is present. According to the mode of changing and setting the content of the default luminance, the default luminance of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in error notification of various defects, goto, and errors. For the lamps to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as the setting value 2. Error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, error notification luminance setting pattern 3 specifying “error notification luminance 3” is assigned as setting value 3, and error notification luminance 4 specifying “error notification luminance 4” is set value 4. A brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” is set as a setting value 5, and an error notification specifying “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” is set as a setting value 6. The luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification is referred to as “common hardware”). It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low, and when the user stops at the front of the pachinko machine, the brightness of the lamp can be recognized as an error notification) is changed from the setting value 6 to the setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to set the change of the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification so that the illuminator emits light, blinks, a gradation point, and the like. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a includes an object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on an error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the luminance of the illuminant, it is possible to perform lighting, blinking, gradation point and the like of the illuminant. By changing the setting of the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification, the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

  Also, with respect to various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration, a set value display permission condition predetermined in a set value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a described later is satisfied. The setting display 1310g is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, but may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to when the power is turned off (setting value display). May be described as “Modification (8) by common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  The predetermined set value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a executes a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-on processing described later. , And then proceed with the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. When the predetermined set value change permission condition described above is satisfied at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control side power-on process to be described later to execute the main control built-in RAM. The game is cleared by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in a main control-side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined set value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Accordingly, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (the case where “variation of the predetermined setting value change permission condition” is described). is there).

  In addition, the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in a set value confirmation display process performed as one process of a main control timer interrupt process described later. 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires the pressing operation unit to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the pressing operation period is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be performed in addition to the pressing operation of the setting key (in the case where "the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition" is described). There is). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later, but executes the main control power supply described later. In the processing at the time of the insertion, the game is performed before the initial setting and the activation setting of the built-in WDT are performed, and thereafter, the interrupt progression setting and the like are performed so that the game proceeds. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control timer interrupt process when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, since the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. Without this, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) in the clockwise direction, and the setting key is turned ON. A setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and the main control built-in RA Not stored in the input information storage area of the. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

  By adopting both the above-described modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-described modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on or a power failure (momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key has been turned ON by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been pressed. In some cases, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control-side power-on process to be described later and closes the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. Then, while the game proceeds by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like, while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the main control side power supply described later. In the time process, a set value confirmation display process is performed, and thereafter, a game is advanced by performing an interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display processing is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by making an interrupt permission setting or the like, the set current set value is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by an out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in a ball counting process of a main control side power-on process described later. The number of played game balls B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control-side power-on process described later, and the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 is counted as the base monitor 1310h. To be displayed. Therefore, the current setting value set by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (this may be described as “a modification of the method of using the base monitor”). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value during the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like after the power is restored, the number of the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately used. The selection key may be adopted in the above-described modification example (30) of the determination key.

  In addition, any one of the above-described modification examples of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-described modification example of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately used. It may be selected and adopted in the modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 126 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying a game state and a normal lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A normal symbol display including two LEDs, and a normal reservation display including two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the reception of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of the game balls B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 displays a round including five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. Display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 129 and FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 173 and 174) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board 1510. And a peripheral control board box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIGS. 173 and 174). ).

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side face, and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side face. The effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, upper left side unit, and attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is the starting port unit, side unit, upper left side unit of the front unit. , And an attacker unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the back.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. A front end protrudes forward from a front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of a rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. I have.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality (three in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and which is mounted at a further different position in the game area 5a and which is always open to receive the game ball B. A normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by receiving the gaming ball B in the normal winning port 2003, and a first starting port 2002. Or, a special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B in the second starting port 2004, and a first starting port. 002 or a bonus winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004; A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided with a chance of receiving the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006.

  A plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the up-down direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is located at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002. The special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the special winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged right above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left front view of the start port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning port 2005. Above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in front view in the game area 5a. And character object winning hole 2006 attached to Ri, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 has a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, the.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the left and right direction of the center role 2500 Located just below the center.

  The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state where the starting ball is attached to the game panel 1100, and the lower ball of the light guide plate effecting unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens upward and left.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the lower back ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate effecting unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower rightward.

  When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 148 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in a triangular shape such that the outer shape in a front view is higher from the lower side toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward at the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003 with a space larger than one game ball B, and is always open to the front. The big winning opening 2005 is provided near the lower left end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed forward.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball B, and the large winning opening 2005 is about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has an opening of width.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided (see FIG. 173 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery in which the second starting port door 2411 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning port 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, the special winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the special winning opening 2005, and the gaming ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 with the special winning opening door 2413. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is selected by acceptance.

  As shown in FIGS. 148, 149, and 152, the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower leftward. Of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421, the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 provided to the left of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421. A second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, and below the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, are provided to the right of the big winning opening 2005, A large winning opening guide shelf 2424 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

  The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 extends from a portion on the right side of the right end of the second starting port 2004 to the center of the second starting port 2004 and the special winning opening 2005 in the left-right direction beyond the left end of the second starting port 2004. It extends to the left to the vicinity. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the game balls B from being received into the second starting port 2004 from above.

  The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is provided leftward from the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 with an interval that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 vertically extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 has an upper end bent rightward.

  The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically from the right end of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the second starting port 2004 from receiving the game ball B from the right.

  The special winning opening guide shelf 2424 has a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 and is located at a position closer to the left than the left end of the second starting opening 2004, and one game ball B from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. At a height one minute below, the left-right direction extends to the left side of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and substantially the same as the right end of the special winning opening 2005 so that the left end side is lower in the left-right direction. As shown in the figure, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes steeper rightward.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 opens to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and guides the game ball B to a position below the special winning opening 2005 below the special winning opening guide shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is provided between the first opening 2431 which is long vertically upward and opens leftward above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 opening upward and to the left, a third opening 2433 opening upward below the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening below the special winning opening guide shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 which is long to the right and left of the winning opening 2005 and opens to the left, and a discharge opening communicating with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opening to the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and discharge port 2435. The game ball B can be released to the outside only from.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in a plurality of steps with the left side lowered. More specifically, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the normal winning opening 2003 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 to a position lower than the normal winning opening 2003 and is directed to the left. It bends below the normal winning opening 2003 and bends below the normal winning opening 2003 with the second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 as a part of the left wall. At the lower part of the height, it bends to the left again and bends downward below the part on the right side of the center of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 and extends to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

  In the attacker right passage 2430, a plurality of ridges 2436 projecting into the passage and extending left and right are provided on the inner walls on the front and rear sides of the vertically extending portion at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of ridges 2436 are provided so that the front and rear sides have alternate heights. The plurality of protrusions 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag manner while the game ball B abuts thereon, while suppressing an increase in the speed of the game ball B downward.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is located to the right of the special winning opening 2005 and is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2436 provided at a portion where the fourth opening 2434 is open vertically long, and an end on the side of the fourth opening 2434. (See FIG. 152 and the like). By the presence of the protrusion 2437, the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 can be prevented from being released from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (to the left), and can pass through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can enter the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005.

  In addition, since the attacker right passage 2430 has the fourth opening 2434 vertically long at a portion passing rightward of the special winning opening 2005, the game ball discharged to the left from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424. B touches a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the special winning opening 2005 and causes the game ball B flowing to the right of the special winning opening 2005 to the right of the special winning opening 2005 to the fourth position. It can be received by the opening 2434 and can enter the right attacker passage 2430. Then, as described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged to the outside only from the discharge port 2435 at the lower end, and is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B does not rebound toward the special winning opening 2005 due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Therefore, when the game ball B released from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right side of the special winning opening 2005 by the obstacle nail N when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the attacker right passage 2430 is formed. There is no entry to the special winning opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the special winning opening 2005, the wall (fourth opening 2434) of the passage may be provided on the side of the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B is not admitted to the special winning opening 2005 and the passage of the game ball B can be provided adjacent to the special winning opening 2005 while suppressing excessive reception of the game ball B to the special winning opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has not been seen in the past pachinko machines can be provided.

  The second starting port door 2411 is a plate-shaped member extending left and right from the lower side of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422, and moves forward and backward by a starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to become lower from the left end side toward the right side of the second starting port 2004, and at the position of the second starting port 2004 so as to become lower toward the rear. doing. The second starting port door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 falls onto the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 without abutting on the second starting port door 2411. Therefore, the vehicle does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422. Abuts on the second starting port door 2411, is guided by the second starting port door 2411 to the second starting port 2004 side, and enters (accepts) the second starting port 2004. As described above, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes as the second starting port door 2411 advances and retreats. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let open.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right directions, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction with the long side on one side as an axis. By setting the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, the special winning opening door 2413 can close the special winning opening 2005 opening forward, and the other long side is forward. By rotating so as to move, the special winning opening 2005 can be opened, and the game ball B can be received. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

  In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game balls B received in the second starting port 2004 are discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Further, the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start-up opening decorative board 2451 for illuminating and decorating the second start-up opening 2004, a large winning prize opening decorative board 2452 for illuminating and decorating the special winning opening 2005, and an attacker right passage 2430. And a decorative substrate 2453 at the lower right of the table for light-emitting decoration (see FIG. 174). The second starting port decorative board 2451 is provided behind the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon. When the “normal hit” is selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening decorative board 2451 changes the light emission mode to attract the interest of the player to the second starting opening 2004. I try to attract.

  The special winning opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the special winning opening 2005, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon. When the special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern due to a “big hit game” or the like, the special winning opening decoration substrate 2452 makes the special winning opening 2005 emit light and decorates the gaming balls received in the special winning opening 2005. B is easy to see. The lower right decorative board 2453 is provided below the attacker right passage 2430 below the second starting port 2004 and to the right of the special winning opening 2005, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon.

  This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and the normal winning opening 2003 is located below the two exits of the guide path group 2520 on the upper right side of the center role 2500 to be described later. The third starting device 2004 is located at a height higher than the third sorting device 2550 of the center role 2500, and the second starting port 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and is located at the third position of the third sorting device 2550 of the center role 2500. It is located at a slightly lower height than the strikeout table 2554, and the special winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Further, in a state attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a portion above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421), and the big winning opening 2005. Has been established.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147 and the like. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center role and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center role, the game panel board, and the back left decorative body of the back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). FIG. 143 (a) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center role, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of the third sorting device in the center role as viewed from the front. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device of the center role as exploded from the front and above, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the third sorting device in the center role. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the projections provided at the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center role, and FIG. 147 (b) is the second V winning opening. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a game ball at the time when a projection part is not provided in the third losing mouth.

  The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 and the back front rendering unit 3200 provided in the rendering display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 through the frame. , Front lower left effect unit 3300, rear lower right effect unit 3400, sub status display 3500, etc. can be visually recognized from the front.

  The center role 2500 includes a frame-shaped center base 2501 attached to the game panel 1100. The center base 2501 has a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 extending in a front-rear direction with a substantially constant thickness, and a flat plate shape extending from a rear end of the front frame portion 2502 in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. A flange portion 2503, a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 extending rearward in a plate shape with a substantially constant thickness from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503, and a center role item 2500 penetrating the flange portion 2503. And a mounting hole 2505 for mounting to the panel 1100.

  The center base 2501 of the center role 2500 has a flat flange 2503 extending in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction with respect to a front frame 2502 and a rear frame 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can be reinforced by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are hardly distorted. In the center role 2500, at least the center base 2501 is formed transparent.

  The front frame 2502 is formed in a frame shape with a smooth surface bent. The front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is linearly inclined so as to be lower rightward from a position closer to the left than a center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the frame. . The front frame upper right portion 2502a of the front frame portion 2502 has an upstream space portion 2506 of a predetermined size through which a game ball B can flow between the front frame member and the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 in a state where the front space portion is assembled to the game board 5. To form.

  In the rear frame 2504, a plurality of streaks extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in the circumferential direction on the inner peripheral surface side. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame portion 2504, and the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 of the back front rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It can be seen that light is emitted by irradiation with light from the like. The rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. By attaching the center role 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is formed on the player side. It can be difficult to see from (front).

  The center base 2501 has a mounting hole with the rear frame 2504 inserted from the front into the large opening 1102 at the center of the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange 2503 contacting the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the game panel 1100 by small screws screwed into the game panel 1100 through 2505. When the center base 2501 (center role 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. However, they cannot enter the frame.

  When the center base 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100, the rear frame 2504 is positioned so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100. The plurality of streak-shaped decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame 2504 makes the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 difficult to see from the player side (front).

  As shown in FIG. 141 and FIG. 142, a flange 2503 extends inside the front frame 2502 at the left portion of the frame of the center role 2500 (center base 2501). In addition, the front frame 2502 has an inner surface which substantially matches the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 as a whole, and a part of the front frame 2502 is located outside the opening 1102. . A mounting hole 2505 for mounting to the game panel 1100 is provided in the flange 2503 at a position outside the opening 1102 in the front frame 2502.

  In other words, in the portion on the left side of the frame of the center role 2500, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 protrudes more inward than the front frame 2502, and in that portion, The center role 2500 is attached to the panel 1100.

  As a result, the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 at the portion on the left side of the frame in the center base 2501 of the center role 2500, and nothing extends to the outside. Obstruction nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to 2502. Therefore, since the area in which the game balls B substantially circulate in the game area 5a can be set to a position in contact with the front frame 2502, the circulation area of the game balls B is made larger than in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself.

  In the center role 2500, the flange 2503 extends in a direction orthogonal to the front frame 2502 and the rear frame 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. 2502 and the rear frame 2504, that is, the entire center role 2500 can be reinforced, and the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503, so that the front frame 2502 and the rear frame 2504 can be reinforced. Strength can be further improved. Also, since the flange portion 2503 is attached to the game panel 1100 via the attachment hole 2505 even at a portion of the flange portion 2503 extending inside the front frame portion 2502, the game ball B in the game area 5a can be moved to the front frame portion. Even if the flange portion 2503 of the 2502 abuts on a portion extending inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by mounting the flange portion 2503 or the mounting hole 2505 to the game panel 1100 or the like. The deformation and breakage of the frame portion 2502 (the center role 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the strength and rigidity of the front frame 2502 of the center role 2500 can be increased by the flange 2503, so that when the game ball B abuts, the front frame 2502 is elastically deformed and elastically deformed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit like a (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing in the game area 5a from making an unusual movement different from the conventional one by abutting on the front frame 2502, thereby giving a player uncomfortable feeling. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the front frame 2502, the front frame 2502 of the center base 2501 of the center role 2500 can be obtained. , The substantial distribution area of the game balls B does not become smaller as in the case of the conventional pachinko machine. Accordingly, by increasing the inside of the frame of the center role product 2500 while suppressing the distribution area where the game balls B circulate in the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the effect display provided rearward through the frame. The effect image of the device 1600 and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 can be more easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the various effects seen through the frame of the center role 2500.

  Furthermore, in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as described above, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be increased by the flange portion 2503. At the time of removal, deformation of the molded product can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is illuminated and decorated by light from the LED mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, Although the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame 2504 of the center role 2500, a surface facing the center of the opening 1102 along the inner periphery of the opening 1102. May be provided with a decorative board for an opening on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Accordingly, the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved, and the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be hidden by the decorative substrate for the opening, so that the appearance in the game area 5a is improved. Can be. In this case, by making the surface of the decorative board for opening white, it is possible to make the decorative board for opening less noticeable, and to make the rear frame 2504 brighter and lighter when the LED is lit. Can be. Alternatively, the surface of the decorative board for an opening may be colored in a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved. Further, the decorative substrate for the opening may be provided over the entire circumference of the opening 1102, and the center role 2500 may be made to emit light in a frame shape (annular shape), or “right-handed” or “left-handed”. By emitting light so as to circulate in a predetermined direction so as to urge the player, various light emitting effects can be presented to the player for entertaining.

  The center role 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center base 2501 and includes a guide passage group 2520 including two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 is for guiding the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

  Also, the center role item 2500 is provided in the middle of one of the guide passage groups 2520, and the first special lottery is selected by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A game winning prize opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be received in accordance with the lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game ball B received in the game prize winning opening 2006 is provided with the receiving portion 2531a side (V winning side) and the A first sorting device 2530 for sorting to any one of the loss openings 2535, and a game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a by the first sorting device 2530 (distributed to the V winning side) to the first V winning opening. A second distribution device 2540 for distributing the game ball B to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540; And the struck component 2550 to distribute to any deviation port 2555, and a.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 receives the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 with the special winning port door 2511 capable of opening and closing the special winning port 2006 and the special winning port door 2511. A winning opening solenoid 2512 that opens and closes in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and a bonus opening sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006. , A first V winning opening sensor 2514 for detecting a game ball B distributed by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted by the first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning by sorting by the third sorting device 2550. The second V winning port sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2008, and the game ball B distributed in the first sorting device 2530 and received in the first loss port 2535. The first loss sensor 2516 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)) for detecting, and the second loss detecting the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the second loss port 2543. A mouth sensor 2517 and a third loss port sensor 2518 for detecting a game ball B distributed by the third distribution device 2550 and received by the third loss port 2555 are provided.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. And a second guide passage 2522 provided with an upper entrance adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

  The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and shortly downward from the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, then bends rightward at a right angle, and when hitting the right rail 1005, bends downward to form the right rail 1005. It extends along and bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from below the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lowered at a gentle angle, and plays the game more than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. After bending downward at the position on the left side of the ball B and extending to the height of the center of the game area 5a, bending to the right and extending to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bending downward and the outlet downward. It is formed in a shape that opens toward the front. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The prize winning opening 2006 is provided at a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521, extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. ing. The special winning opening door 2511 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right such that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The bonus winning opening door 2511 can close the bonus winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and in a state where the bonus winning opening 2006 is closed, a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521. , The game balls B flowing from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

  The special winning opening door 2511 is opened by opening the special winning opening 2006 by being retracted by the driving of the special winning opening solenoid 2512, and the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the special winning opening 2006. Can be accepted. The special winning opening door 2511 closes the special winning opening 2006 when the special winning opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and closes when the special winning opening solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). The winning opening 2006 is opened.

  The entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is open upward at a position on the right end side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame, which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, and bends rearward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends rightward. A portion that extends downward on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 in a state where it is bent downward on the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and is arranged in the front-rear direction with the first guide passage 2521; It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide with each other, bends rightward in a crank shape at a position at the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and then lowers rightward in the first guide passage 2521. After bending forward at a portion below the portion extending toward the right, the first guide passage 2521 extends to the lower right in the first guide passage 2521 with the front-rear direction being flush with the first guide passage 2521. Along the lower part of the site Bent rightward in the building so, then bent downwards so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is formed in a shape of the outlet is open downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located in a portion of the first guide passage 2521 that extends up and down on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006, so that the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap from the front by being arranged in the front-rear direction. It has a portion 2520a. In the heavy view portion 2520a, the game balls B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 and the game balls B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 can be both visually recognized from the front. It is difficult for the player to determine which path the game ball B flowing through the heavy view portion 2520a is flowing.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis above the heavy look portion 2520a, and below the heavy look portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees in the direction opposite to the upper side around the vertical axis. Each exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 opens downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the flow direction of the game ball B, and the flow speed of the game ball B is brought into contact with the protrusion 2520b. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 131).

  The first sorting device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and a portion extending rightward on the lower side of the first guide passage 2521, and the first sorting device 2530 (the game) (The front surface of the panel 1100).

  The first sorting device 2530 has an accommodation portion 2531a on its outer peripheral surface that can accommodate only one game ball B, and has a distributing rotator 2531 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a distributing rotator 2531. A first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 173 and the like) for rotating the distribution rotator 2531 between a state in which the storage section 2531a of the storage section 2531a faces rightward and a state in which the storage section 2531a faces upward; The cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 covering the outer circumference of the dividing rotator 2531 and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 penetrate the peripheral wall portion 2533 through a portion above the distribution rotator 2531. A first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the dividing rotator 2531, and opens rearward at a lower portion of the first distribution guide path 2534, and Games not contained B enters the first gap opening 2535 into which the ball B enters, and the ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 circulates, penetrates the peripheral wall portion 2533 through the right side of the distribution rotator 2531, and moves rightward. And a first loss opening sensor 2516 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)) for detecting a game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535.

  The distribution rotator 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape with the outer peripheral surface narrowed rearward. The right end side of the first Atari passage 2536 bends downward after bending backward, and communicates with the second sorting device 2540 side.

  In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 faces right. In this state, when the gaming ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 abuts on the upper portion of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotator 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer periphery of the distribution rotator 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone converging rearward, the game ball B is guided rearward due to the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first loss opening 2535.

  On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotator 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the storage portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 150 (a)). reference). In this state, when the gaming ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one of the gaming balls B is accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a. In a state where the game ball B is housed in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531, when the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the bonus winning opening 2006 side, the game ball is received. After B contacts the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the rear first loss opening 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first losing hole 2535 is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 after being transferred to the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000.

  When the distribution rotator 2531 is rotated clockwise by the first distribution solenoid 2532 in a state where the game ball B is stored in the storage portion 2531a, and the storage portion 2531a faces right, the storage portion The game ball B accommodated in 2531a rolls from the accommodation part 2531a to the right side of the first Atari passage 2536, and flows through the first Atari passage 2536. The game ball B flowing through the first atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540.

  As described above, in the first sorting device 2530, the game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is transferred to the second sorting device 2540 side (accommodating portion 2531a side) or the first losing opening 2535 side. Can be sorted to crabs.

  The second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and rearward near the exit of the guide passage group 2520, as shown in FIGS. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide path 2534 and the first Atari passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the second distribution device 2540 distributes the game balls B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 side. The second distribution guide path 2541 extends vertically, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side of the lower part of the second distribution guiding path 2541, and extends rightward from the first V winning opening 2007. A first V winning passage 2542 extending downward after the first V winning passage 2542 and a first V winning opening sensor provided in the first V winning passage 2542 for detecting a game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514.

  In addition, the second distribution device 2540 is provided above the second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541, and above the second loss port 2543. A sorting door 2544 capable of opening and closing the losing opening 2543, a second sorting solenoid 2545 for moving the sorting door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second losing opening 2543, and extending leftward from the second losing opening 2543. A second losing passage 2546 bent downward later, a second losing opening sensor 2517 provided at the downstream end of the second losing passage 2546 and detecting the game ball B received in the second losing opening 2543, It has. The sorting door 2544 is a flat plate that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

  In the second distribution device 2540, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted, and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it enters the second loss opening 2543, passes through the second loss passage 2546, and passes through the second loss passage 2546. It is sent to the three-divider 2550 side.

  On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second loss port 2543, and the second loss port 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544 to play the game. Ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guiding path 2541, the ball contacts the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and The vehicle is guided to the right by the inclination and enters the first V winning opening 2007 (accepted). Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 flows through the first V winning passage 2542, is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and is then the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. Through the substrate holder 1200.

  When the ball game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. A "big hit game" that opens and closes is executed. The second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

  As described above, in the second sorting device 2540, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 is transferred to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening. 2543 (third sorting device 2550).

  As shown in FIG. 140 and the like, the third distribution device 2550 is provided at a lower portion within the frame of the center base 2501 in the center role item 2500. The third distribution device 2550 is in communication with the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and guides the game ball B detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 to the left. A distribution guideway 2551, a clune 2553 provided at the left end of the third distribution guideway 2551 for discharging the game ball B downward while rotating the game ball B around the vertical axis, and provided below the clune 2553. A second V winning opening 2008 penetrating downward near the front end at the center in the left-right direction is provided, and the third sorting table 2554 in which the game ball B can roll and the third sorting table 2554 in the third sorting table 2554 are provided. Two third losing openings 2555 penetrating downward on both left and right sides of the 2V winning opening 2008, and a third opening provided near the rear end of the third sorting table 2554 in the left-right center. It includes a middle rotator 2556, and a third allocating left rotator 2557 and a third allocating right rotator 2558 provided near the front ends of the left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554, respectively (FIG. 143 to FIG. 146).

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the lower side of the third distribution table 2554 and is attached to the center base 2501 and the third distribution base 2559, and is attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559. And a third middle drive motor 2560 for rotating the third sorting rotator 2556 and a third sorting left rotator 2557 attached below the third sorting base 2559. And a third distribution right drive motor 2562 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 for rotating the third distribution right rotating body 2558. Have. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173). ).

  The third distribution drive motor 2560 has a rotation shaft protruding upward through the third distribution base 2559. The third distribution left drive motor 2561 has a rotation shaft protruding upward through the third distribution base 2559, and a third distribution left rotating body 2557 is attached to the rotation shaft. The third distribution right drive motor 2562 has a rotation shaft protruding upward through the third distribution base 2559, and a third distribution right rotating body 2558 is attached to the rotation shaft.

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the third distribution base 2559, and each of the third distribution devices 2550 includes a third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, A third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557, and a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558. A second V winning opening sensor 2515 detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, a third loss opening sensor 2518 detecting the gaming ball B received in the third loss opening 2555, It has. The second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 2518, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 include a panel. It is connected to the main control board 1310 via the relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 2566 attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution drive motor 2560 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. And a transmission gear 2567 in the form of a spur gear, which is attached to a shaft portion 2556a of the rotating body 2556 that protrudes downward and is in mesh with the driving gear 2566. The transmission gear 2567 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 2566, and reduces the rotation of the third distribution drive motor 2560 to transmit the rotation to the third distribution rotator 2556. The transmission gear 2567 has a detection piece 2567a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the rotation detection sensor 2563 during the third distribution.

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 includes a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. 2568, a spur gear-shaped left rotation detecting gear 2569 meshing with the left transmission gear 2568 and rotatably mounted by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559; Between the table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, a spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 attached to the rotating shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562, meshes with the right transmission gear 2570, and A spur gear-like right rotation detecting gear 2571 is rotatably mounted by the distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559.

  The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568, and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561. The left rotation detecting gear 2569 has a detection piece 2569a that protrudes downward from the middle in the radial direction in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570, and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The right rotation detection gear 2571 protrudes downward from the middle in the radial direction and has a detection piece 2571a that is detected by the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565.

  The third distribution device 2550 is provided below the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and can emit light upward. Between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, on which the third distribution intermediate rotation body 2556 and the second A third distribution table decorative board 2573 provided below a portion between the V winning opening 2008 and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.

  The third distribution device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third distribution base 2559 and cooperates with the third distribution base 2559 to receive the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555. A passage forming member 2575 forming a third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding the discharged game ball B and discharging it downward, a third sorting middle drive motor 2560, and a third sorting left drive motor 2561 and the lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third distribution base 2559 so as to cover the third distribution right drive motor 2562 from below, and the upper cover covers the clown 2553 and the third distribution table 2554 from above. And a transparent upper cover 2577 (see FIG. 134).

  The third distribution table 2554 is formed transparent. The third sorting table 2554 is formed in a shell shape having a semicircular shape on the rear end side in plan view and a length in the front-rear direction substantially equal to the diameter of the semicircular arc. The length in the front-rear direction of the third distribution table 2554 is 2.5 times the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. In other words, the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556 is 0.4 times the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction. The diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is about four times as large as the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is equal to the diameter of the game ball B. It is about 10.5 times. The center table 2554a of the third distribution table 2554 has a length (width) in the left-right direction that is slightly more than five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-rear direction of the game ball B. 5 to 7 times.

  The third sorting table 2554 is provided in front of the third sorting rotating body 2556 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a substantially square center table 2554a and a center table 2554a that are inclined so that the front end side is lower. A left table 2554b and a right table 2554c, which are provided on both left and right outer sides of the center table 2554a and are long before and after from a position behind the front end of the central table 2554a to a part behind the rear end of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution; It is provided in front of the center table 2554a, and is inclined so as to be lowered to the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction, and then bent rearward at the left and right outer sides of the center table 2554a to form a left table 2554b and a right table. The collection table 2554d is inclined so as to become lower toward 2554c, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554b. It provided one step higher in the left and right outer sides of the respective table 2554C, has a side table 2554e front end side and the inner is inclined to be lower, the.

  The third distribution table 2554 surrounds a weir 2554f projecting upward from both left and right sides of the central table 2554a, the rear ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. Peripheral wall portion 2554g extending upward higher than the diameter of the game ball B. The weir 2554f suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both left and right sides of the central table 2554a. The peripheral wall portion 2554g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game balls B from dropping from the third distribution table 2554.

  The length of the center table 2554a in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the center table 2554a has a rear end side extending to a portion forward of the center of the third sorting rotator 2556, and both left and right sides bend obliquely toward the third sorting rotator 2556. ing. The center table 2554a is only horizontal in the front-rear direction and horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of the center table 2554a, a third losing opening 2555 is opened on both left and right sides with a second V winning opening 2008 at the center in the left and right direction. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are round holes having the same diameter. In the second V winning opening 2008, the periphery of the hole is rounded and chamfered.

  The front end of the left table 2554b and the right end of the right table 2554c are the same as the front end of the second V winning opening 2008 and the front end of the third losing opening 2555, respectively. Is located at a lower height by the diameter of In addition, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined in the front-rear direction so that the distance from the front end to the same front-rear part as the rear end of the center table 2554a becomes lower toward the outside in the left-right direction. And the rear side is substantially horizontal. Further, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c have the same height as the general surface of the third sorting rotator 2556 in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the center of the third sorting rotator 2556. The rear side is higher than the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. A third sorting left rotating body 2557 and a third sorting right rotating body 2558 are provided on the left and right outer sides at the front end of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively.

  Further, the third distribution table 2554 extends from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V winning opening 2008 so as to become narrower toward the front at the center in the left-right direction of the center table 2554a, and extends back and forth. It has a bulging portion 2554h slightly bulging upward. By this bulging portion 2554h, the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling at the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction can be directed outward in the left-right direction. doing.

  The third distribution table 2554 protrudes upward from the front ends of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a, and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. Projection 2554i. The protruding portion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape at the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a bar shape having a narrow left and right width at the third losing opening 2555. In addition, the projection 2554i of the third losing opening 2555 slightly protrudes into the third losing opening 2555. Although the details will be described later, these projections 2554i are formed such that the game ball B rolls around the edge of the opening when the game ball B comes into contact with the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, and then outwards. This is for preventing the player from jumping out and entering another third losing opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008.

  Further, the third distribution table 2554 protrudes lower than the protrusion 2554i at a central portion between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 in the left-right direction at the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a projection 2554j.

  The third distribution rotating body 2556 protrudes downward from the center of the disk, is rotatably supported by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and has a shaft 2556a to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached. Have. In addition, the third distribution rotating body 2556 includes three inner protrusions 2556b protruding in a fan shape near the center and an outer protrusion 2556c protruding in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusion 2556b near the outer peripheral edge. ,have. The inner protrusion 2556b and the outer protrusion 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and each is provided on the same radiation. The outer protrusion 2556c has a constant width in the radial direction, the outer peripheral side thereof coincides with the general surface of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and is inclined in the radial direction so that the inner peripheral side is higher. I have. In a state where the third sorting rotator 2556 is assembled to the third sorting device 2550, the general surface is parallel to the surface of the center table 2554a in the third sorting table 2554, and slightly higher than the center table 2554a. It is located in. The third distributing rotator 2556 is rotated by the third distributing driving motor 2560 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view via the driving gear 2566 and the transmission gear 2567.

  The third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 have a protruding piece 2557a and a protruding piece 2558a that protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction and extend in the axial direction, respectively. ing. The protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are the most prominent in each of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c in a state where the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third sorting device 2550. With respect to the game balls B located at the lower left and right outer sides of the front end, the game balls B protrude to a position substantially at the center of the game balls B. Each of the protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a has a rounded tip in plan view. Accordingly, the protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 make it difficult to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

  Further, the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are assembled to the third sorting device 2550, and the lower ends of the protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a are connected to the left table 2554b and the left table 2554b, respectively. Each of the right tables 2554c is located above the center of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B located at the left and right outer sides of the lowest front end in each of the tables. That is, the protrusion 2557a and the protrusion 2558a are provided so as to contact the upper portion of the game ball B. Thus, the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a do not come into contact with each other so as to scoop up the game ball B, thereby making it difficult for the game ball B to jump upward.

  The third distribution left rotator 2557 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by a third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right rotator 2558 is driven by the third distribution right drive The motor 2562 is rotated clockwise in a plan view. Accordingly, the projecting piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 cause the game balls B of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c to be hit backward.

  The third distribution base 2559 holds the second V winning opening sensor 2515 and two third loss opening sensors 2518 in cooperation with the passage forming member 2575. In addition, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 and discharge the game balls B downward. A sphere discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 separates the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing openings 2555 on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 without merging them, respectively. The second V winning opening sensor 2515 and the third losing opening sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each of them.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is lower, and is provided rearward when a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks inside the game area 5a. The first image 3110 and the second image 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are not blocked.

  In a state where the third sorting device 2550 is assembled to the game board 5, the front end is located forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly behind the front surface of the front component 1000, and the rear end is located on the back side described later. It is located behind the light guide plate 3102 of the unit 3000 and slightly forward of the front surface of the effect display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is located forward of the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

  The third sorting device 2550 includes a third sorting rotator 2556, a third sorting left rotator 2557, and a third sorting right rotator 2558, and a third sorting drive motor 2560, a third sorting left rotator. It is constantly rotated by the drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third distributing rotator 2556 and the third distributing left rotator 2557 rotate counterclockwise in plan view, and the third distributing right rotator 2558 rotates clockwise in plan view. I have.

  In the present embodiment, the third sorting rotator 2556 is at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are far more than the third sorting rotator 2556. At a high speed of 625 rpm. As described above, since the rotation speeds of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are high, the detection pieces are provided on the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected by the sensor, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. More specifically, since the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece, for example, if the rotation cycle of the detection piece and the detection cycle of the sensor are the same, the detection Since there is a case where a piece cannot be detected at all, it is necessary to make the detection cycle of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation cycle of the detection piece. When the rotation speed of the detection piece is high and the rotation period is further shortened, the detection period of the sensor must be further shortened. However, if the detection period of the sensor is shortened, signals are frequently exchanged between the sensor and the control unit. The load on the control unit increases, and the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation axes of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 (the third distribution left drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562) are provided. After attaching the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570, respectively, the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are engaged with the large-diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively, to rotate. The detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 whose rotation has been reduced and the rotation has been reduced, and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation are provided. The detection is performed by the detection sensor 2565. In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is set to 250 rpm.

  As a result, the rotation speeds of the detecting pieces 2569a and 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 become slower. 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 can be reliably detected, and the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 can be determined. Further, since the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a is reduced, it is not necessary to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycles of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, An appropriate detection period can be set, and an increase in load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  The third distribution device 2550 is supplied with the game balls B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540. More specifically, the game ball B distributed to the second losing port 2543 is detected by the second losing port sensor 2517, and then supplied to the crune 2553 through the third distribution guiding path 2551. After turning around the vertical axis, it falls near the right end of the collection table 2554d in the lower third sorting table 2554. At this time, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550 is executed based on the detection of the game balls B by the second loss opening sensor 2517.

  The game ball B, which has fallen from the crune 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d, rolls to the rear right table 2554c, and then rolls toward the lowest portion of the right table 2554c on the right side of the front end and rotates. Abuts on the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558. After that, the game ball B abutting on the protruding piece 2558a and being pushed rearward enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third distributing rotator 2556 and enters the center table 2554a. To roll forward. Then, either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a is accepted, or the vehicle enters the collection table 2554d through the side thereof. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the site where the game ball B has entered. The game ball B rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is hit by the protruding piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotator 2557 in the same manner as the above-described movement at the right table 2554c. , From the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the rotator 2556 during the third distribution to enter the central table 2554a.

  As described above, the basic flow of the game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third distribution rotating body 2556. After the central table 2554a is rolled, the game ball B is accepted by the collection table 2554d to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. It repeats until.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, since the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are rotating at a high speed, the game sphere B is projected on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c by the projecting piece 2557a or the like. The timing at which the protruding piece 2557a comes into contact with the protruding piece 2558a and the timing at which the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a come into contact with the game ball B cause the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a to grab the game ball B. Or the game ball B is hit hard, and the momentum of the game ball B to be flipped rearward varies depending on the contact condition of the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a.

  Therefore, even if the game ball B is flipped backward by the protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a, if the abutting condition is weak, the game ball B cannot climb the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is raised rearward, In some cases, the game ball B may return and move back and forth on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c without entering the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Alternatively, even when the game ball B flipped rearward by the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a reaches the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, even if the game ball B reaches the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the three outer rotating bodies 2556 during the third distribution are rotating. Depending on the timing at which the protrusion 2556c is located, the game ball B may be prevented from entering by the outer protrusion 2556c, and may not return to the center table 2554a but return to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. . Further, when the game ball B enters the third sorting rotator 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the third distributing rotator 2556 is rotated, so that the three outer projections 2556c are formed. , The game ball B may be carried to the opposite left table 2554b or right table 2554c by the rotation of the rotator 2556 during the third distribution. Also, when the game ball B is strongly pushed backward by the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a, it passes through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution and enters the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side, It may enter the side table 2554e. Note that the game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is in contact therewith.

  For this reason, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the projecting piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558 cause the third sorting to be performed. The game ball B that has entered the middle rotator 2556 enters the central table 2554a with a certain probability. At this time, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a from various positions in the left-right direction according to the rotating position.

  The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a rolls forward due to its inclination, but enters from the left and right outer left and right tables 2554b and 2554c through the third rotator 2556 during the third distribution. In addition, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, the rotating body 2556 has a movement vector in the left-right direction, and it is rare to roll straight forward. Become. At this time, since the bulging portion 2554h is bulging upward at the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction, the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction is weakened by the bulging portion 2554h or returned to the opposite side. Or be done. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the center table 2554a enters one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end, or enters the side of them. Through the collection table 2554d.

  By the way, in the center table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555, the game ball B is shifted to the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening. By contacting the 2555 circular opening, the game ball B may move like a swing-by rotating along the edge of the opening. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), when there is nothing in the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rolls along the edge of the opening, so that it rolls. If there is another second V winning opening 2008 or a third loss opening 2555 ahead of the direction that is changed and jumps out from the edge of the opening, the game ball is inserted into the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, when it is considered that the game ball B has entered the second V winning opening 2008, the player goes around the edge of the opening and enters the next third loss opening 2555, which makes the player disappointed and enjoys interest. There is a risk of lowering. Further, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the acceptance probability (prize winning probability) of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008 in the third distribution table 2554 (third distribution device 2550) becomes large, and the player is given a variation. There is a risk of distrust.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i is projected from the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B tries to turn along the edge of the opening. Also, it is possible to hit the projection 2554i in the middle thereof and play it from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening. It is possible to prevent entry into the three-way opening 2555. Thus, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B unnecessarily enters the third losing opening 2555 and disappoint the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being accepted into the unintended second V winning opening 2008, it is possible to reduce the variation in the probability of accepting the game balls B into the second V winning opening 2008, It is difficult to give a distrust to the person.

  In the present embodiment, since the projection 2554i is projected inside the opening at the third loss opening 2555, the game ball B rolling along the edge of the opening can be reliably played. Further, since the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is rounded and chamfered, the chamfering makes it possible to easily move the moving vector of the game ball B to the outside or the inside of the opening. It is difficult to rotate along the edge of the opening.

  When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. . At this time, the front end of the central table 2554a may come into contact with the protrusion 2554j projecting upward. Then, depending on how the game ball B abuts on the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected rearward, and depending on the angle of reflection, the game ball B may be received in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. There is. On the other hand, when the game ball B is reflected forward by contacting the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. When the game ball B passes between the third losing opening 2555 and the weir portion 2554f in the central table 2554a, the game ball B enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without abutting on the protrusion 2554j. .

  In this way, the game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the site into which it has entered, and the third sorting left rotator By being flipped by the second sorting right rotating body 2558 or the third sorting right rotating body 2558, it is sent again to the central table 2554a through the third sorting rotating body 2556, and either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 is provided. The above-described movements are repeated until the third distribution table 2554 is accepted. In the present embodiment, the game ball B is distributed (accepted) to the second V winning opening 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is guided by the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555 is guided by the third sorting sphere discharging passage 2574, and is discharged downward after being detected by the third losing opening sensor 2518. The game balls B discharged downward from the third sorting device 2550 are discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the lower back ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

  As described above, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is transferred to the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. Can be assigned to

  According to the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the height and the projecting amount of the projecting piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are determined by the game ball. The game ball B has entered the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c because B is hard to hit and the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are rotated at high speed. Occasionally, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict at what strength the game ball B will be flipped backward, and to fix the player's line of sight to the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554. Can be performed, and the movement of the game ball B moving up and down on the third distribution table 2554 can be enjoyed. Suppress It can be.

  In addition, as long as the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 do not play the game ball B strongly to some extent, the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is shifted from the center table 2554a. The game ball B does not enter, and even if the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, if it is not accepted at the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555, the collection table 2554d causes the left table 2554b or the right table. Since the game ball B is returned to 2554c, the game ball B stays on the third sorting table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the game ball B is distributed for a longer time than a sorting device such as a clune in a conventional pachinko machine. It can be entertained, and the game ball B is distributed to the second V winning opening 2008, so that "big hit game" Let me enhance expectation for generation thereby suppress the reduction of interest. In other words, since the “big hit game” is generated by the movement of the game ball B, which is the acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, the effect display device 1600 sends the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 to the second start opening 2004. A case where a "big hit game" occurs when an image effect in which a plurality of symbol rows for indicating the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) selected by acceptance is displayed is displayed. In comparison, even if the time until the occurrence of the "big hit game" is determined is long, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get tired and to reduce the discomfort at the time of "losing" and suppress the decrease in interest Can be done.

  By the way, in the conventional sorting device using a clune or the like in a pachinko machine, in order to reach a destination such as a V winning opening or a losing opening, the acceleration of the game ball B is not essential, and the rolling path and the rolling speed are not required. The game ball B can reach the destination even if no change is given to the game ball B. For this reason, in the conventional pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to some extent, in addition to getting tired of the player due to getting used to the game, there are problems as exemplified below. That is, for example, in the case where the rolling route of the game ball B is guided to an unfavorable destination without being changed, the destination of the game ball B can be predicted from the rolling route, and the interest of the player before reaching the destination is determined. Could be reduced. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, as a result, if the rolling path is guided to an unfavorable distribution destination, it is originally advantageous (unless the rolling path is changed). If the development that could be reached earlier is hindered by the means and suffers a disadvantage, the player may feel that the development is unfavorable, and there is a risk that the player's interest may be reduced and the interest of the player may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the third sorting device 2550, the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 that rotate at high speed cause any strength. Whether or not the game ball B is accelerated and flipped cannot be clearly predicted from the player, and furthermore, the game ball B is flipped by the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558. The number of times is not limited to one, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B is transferred to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. Since the player is accepted, it is possible to make the player feel that the distribution destination is selected by random assignment. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to not only enjoy the movement of the game ball B due to a natural flow, but also to select a random distribution destination without causing the above-mentioned problems of the conventional pachinko machine. , And the player can have a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

  In the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the two third losing openings 2555 are provided side by side on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is received in the losing opening 2555, it is possible to make the player feel that the advantage / disadvantage result is only separated by a slight difference. As a result, even if the player is assigned to the disadvantageous third losing mouth 2555, it is possible to expect an effect that the player can feel regrettable and continue to increase the willingness to play.

  In the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, one second V winning opening 2008 is provided as an advantageous sorting destination, whereas two third losing openings 2555 are provided as disadvantageous sorting destinations. The third distribution table 2554 indicates that it is difficult to accept the game ball B to a more advantageous distribution destination than the disadvantaged distribution destination. By being visually specified, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination, and to increase the interest of the player in the movement of the game ball B, thereby improving the interest. The effect can be expected.

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment is configured such that the center table 2554a is inclined so that the front end side is lowered, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end. The second V winning opening 2008 is located between the game ball B and the player who played the game, so that the player can easily see whether the gaming ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or not. And the movement of the game ball B can be more enjoyed. Also, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V winning opening 2008, the player is made to think that the game ball B is drawn to the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and enjoy the distribution in the third distribution table 2554.

  Further, according to the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 side by the second sorting device 2540 is moved to the second The game balls are supplied to the collection table 2554d downstream of the V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and are provided on the central table 2554a provided with the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. In order to reach B, the third sorting right rotator 2558 (third sorting left rotator 2557) must have a certain strength to get over the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). It has the feature of requiring contact. Therefore, for example, when the rotation of the third sorting right rotator 2558 and the third sorting left rotator 2557 is stopped for some reason, even if the game ball B is supplied from the second sorting device 2540, It will remain at the front end side of the right table 2554c, which is the lowest position in the third distribution table 2554, through the clune 2553, and will not go to the central table 2554a in which the second V winning opening 2008 is provided. The game ball B is not illegally received in the second V winning opening 2008.

  The center role 2500 according to the present embodiment is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center base 2501 and the third sorting device 2550, and is capable of irradiating light to the front. The upper right decorative board 2592 provided above the bonus winning opening 2006 in the group 2520, and the table provided between the bonus winning opening 2006 and the first hitting passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530. It includes a middle right decorative substrate 2593 and a front lower right decorative substrate 2594 provided below the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540 (see FIGS. 131 and 174 and the like).

  A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front center decorative board 2591, the upper right decorative board 2592, the middle right decorative board 2593, and the lower right decorative board 2594, respectively. By making the LEDs mounted on the front center decorative board 2591 emit light, the lower side of the center base 2501 can be made to emit light. When the LEd mounted on the upper right decorative substrate 2592, the upper right decorative substrate 2593, and the lower right decorative substrate 2594 emits light, the guide passage group 2520, the first sorting device 2530, and the second sorting device 2540 are emitted. Are decorated with light so that the game balls B in circulation are easily visible from the player side.

  The front center decorative board 2591 and the upper right decorative board 2592 are connected to the effect relay board 3026, respectively, and the middle right decorative board 2593 and the lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the upper right decorative board 2592. That is, the front right middle decorative board 2593 and the front right lower decorative board 2594 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the front right upper decorative board 2592.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136, 148 to 152, and the like. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the right game ball in the front unit. FIG. 149 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and FIG. 149 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. FIG. FIG. 150 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball received in the bonus winning opening, and FIG. 150 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the third sorting device in FIG. (c) is an explanatory view showing a portion of the second distribution device in (a). FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the first winning device and the second sorting device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 152 (a).

  When assembled on the game board 5, the center role 2500 is provided on the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left side and below the center role item 2500 and in a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center role item 2500. Have been. Further, on the left side of the center role item 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 allow the game ball B driven into the left side of the center role 2500 to mainly enter a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. , And is adjusted so as to enter into a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. The windmill W has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a row so that many of the game balls B that have entered the right side of the center become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a below the center role 2500. N, and the rest flows down to the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

  Under the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N, which are planted in a row so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, distribute the game balls B flowing on the upper side and distribute the game balls B on the lower side. It is adjusted so that it can be accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a higher probability than the game ball B that has been played.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center role item 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are distributed through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. The ball B is adjusted so as to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability, and the second guide passage. The game ball B that has passed through 2522 is adjusted so as to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the left side of the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. By N, it is guided mainly to enter into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and is guided to enter into a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability.

  The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 will be accepted. After the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, it is delivered to the lower back ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged in a line along the lower side of the center role 2500. 2002) and may be accepted into the first opening 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged diagonally, and may flow down to the side unit 2200. May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B that has flowed on the left side of the center role 2500 has little possibility of being accepted into the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the lower back ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. The above is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the first starting port sensor 3002 detects a game ball B, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. Then, the game balls B that have not been accepted by any of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B on the left side of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a is not likely to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and is rarely opened in the large winning opening 2005. May be acceptable.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the game ball B hit to the left of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

  On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with a strength at which the game ball B enters above the upper right portion 2502a (upstream space 2506) of the front frame of the center role item 2500. The game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). ), The game ball B in contact with the stop portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 149 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then guides a group of guide passages. It is discharged from the right outlet at the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacles N implanted between the game ball B and the attacker unit 2400, and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning. The user is guided to enter into either the mouth 2003 or the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted rearward and the first guide passage is formed at the heavy view portion 2520a. After being lined up in the front-rear direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is caused to have a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the game ball B and the attacker unit 2400, and the normal winning opening 2003 or a portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003. , And rarely guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Then, the game ball B, which has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging opening 2435 lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B that has entered the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a bonus such as a normal lottery being performed and a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

  In addition, the game ball B that has entered the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 further contacts a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. It should be noted that the game ball B, which has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003, rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down on the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 flows down onto the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 through between the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422. .

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and “normal hit” is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so that the second starting port is opened. The game ball B passing between the oral guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 may be accepted by the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  The game ball B that has flowed onto the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 through the space between the second starting upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 from the left end of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 to the special winning opening 2005. Is released to the site above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and as a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result. When the "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B released to the left from the mouth guiding shelf 2424 is received at the large winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the special winning opening sensor 2403, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B discharged to the attacker unit 2400 through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is received in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005. If not, the game is discharged from the lower end of the game area 5a to an area below the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a through the out port 1008.

  Note that, in the above description, the case where the ball is hit right is described. , Enter the first guide passage 2521, and the same result as described above is obtained.

  As described above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 becomes larger. Is likely to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, the first guide path 2521 is in the middle. The provided bonus opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotator 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "small hit" is drawn, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened and closed. Therefore, in order for the player to be able to receive the game ball B in the bonus winning opening 2006, the bonus winning is set. "Right-handed" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the mouth 2006.

  In the present embodiment, “small hit” has a higher probability of being drawn than “big hit”, and “small hit” includes “first small hit”, “second small hit”, and “third small hit”. Three patterns are set, and the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened and closed twice roughly in any pattern.

  First, the opening and closing of the bonus winning opening 2006 in each “small hit” will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 151, the “first small hit” is such that after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed. After a short time (1252 ms) has elapsed, the state is opened again for a short time (80 ms), and then the state is closed and completed. In the "second small hit", after a lapse of a fixed time (3000 ms) from the start of execution, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, so that the "first small hit" After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the state is opened for a long time (9414 ms), and then the state is closed and completed. In the "third small hit", after a lapse of a fixed time (3000 ms) from the start of execution, the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed to change from the "second small hit". After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the state is opened for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete.

  The second open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “first small hit” is started after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the execution start. In addition, the second open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit” is started after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution.

  In FIG. 151, in the second long-time open state of “second small hit” and “third small hit”, eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at a constant interval (1252 ms). . That is, the bonus winning opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice in “first small hit” and nine times in “second small hit” and “third small hit”.

  Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 in “small hit” is performed by rotating the housing unit 2531a upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by turning counterclockwise simultaneously with the start of execution. After the first accommodating state is reached, and the accommodation unit 2531a is turned clockwise to the accommodating unacceptable state to the right and a predetermined time (4560 ms) elapses, the second time is longer than the first time (13446 ms). After a short time (500 ms) and a non-storable state, the state becomes a non-storable state for the same time (13446 ms) as the second time.

  The distributing rotator 2531 ends the first accommodating state in the middle of the first opening state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" state, and enters the non-accommodating state. In addition, the distribution rotator 2531 enters the second storable state after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, in the case of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 is completed before the second accommodating state is reached, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. In the sorting rotator 2531, the second storable state is started before the second open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit”, and the second open state is a closed state. After that, it becomes incapable of being accommodated.

  In addition, the distribution rotator 2531 enters the third accommodating state after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, in the case of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 ends before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2531 can be accommodated once for "first small hit", twice for "second small hit", and three times for "third small hit". In the sorting rotator 2531, the third accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the second opening state ends. After that, the storage state is impossible.

  Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in “small hit” is performed in the first closed state in which the second loss port 2543 is protruded forward and closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms) at the same time as the start of the execution (3020 ms). The state is a state in which it can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and thereafter, it retreats to an open state in which the second loss opening 2543 is opened (a state in which the second loss opening 2543 is distributed to the third distribution device 2550) and a predetermined time (23006 ms) After the elapse, the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

  The sorting door 2544 ends the first closed state in the middle of the first opened state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “small hit” state and becomes the opened state. In the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is started in the middle of the second opening state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the bonus winning opening is set. After the second open state of 2006 becomes the closed state, the sorting door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only at the time of the "third small hit", and at the time of the "first small hit" or the "second small hit". The second closed state of the minute door 2544 is not executed.

  For this reason, in the “first small hit”, since the opening and closing of the bonus winning opening 2006 is performed twice in a short time, the game flowing through the first guide passage 2521 by “right-hand” is performed. It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006. In addition, since the first opening state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit” is also a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be accepted in the bonus winning opening 2006. Is low. The time during which the first storable state of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 is overlapped with the first open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in “small hit” is the bonus winning opening. Since the time of the first open state of 2006 is shorter than the time of the first open state of the bonus winning opening 2006, the game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is stored in the accommodation section of the distribution rotator 2531. The possibility of being accommodated in 2531a is even lower. Then, since the first accommodating state of the distribution rotator 2531 and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 are completed at the same time, the distribution rotator 2531 is closed. In the first accommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side.

  On the other hand, in the second open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit”, since the time is long, the game ball B passes through the first guide passage 2521 and the game prize is won. It is highly likely that the mouth 2006 will be accepted. At this time, the distribution rotator 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a stowable state before the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened, and then the bonus winning opening 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. The game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 at the time of the second open state is likely to be stored in the storage portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 because the storage ball 251a is in the non-storage state. .

  As described above, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the bonus winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit” is low. In addition, at the time of the first opening state of the bonus winning opening 2006, the possibility that the game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is further lower. Nevertheless, at the same time as the execution of the small hitting game state, the distributing rotator 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodation part 2531a upwardly accommodable, and the accommodation part 2531a is moved for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After turning upward, the container 2531a is rotated clockwise so that the storage portion 2531a is turned to the right to be in a non-storage state. That is, immediately after the start of the small hitting game state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution rotator 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side, the distribution rotator 2531 transfers the game ball B to the first Atari passage. The distribution operation to the 2536 side is executed, and the distribution operation by the distribution rotator 2531 is shown in advance.

  Similarly, immediately after the start of the small hitting game state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution rotator 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side, the second distribution is performed simultaneously with the start of the small hitting game state. The distributing door 2544 of the device 2540 is projected forward to close the second loss opening 2543 so that the device can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007. After a predetermined time (3020 ms) elapses, the device retreats to the second loss opening. When 2543 is opened, the state is distributed to the third distribution device 2550. In other words, immediately after the start of the small hitting game state, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side, but the distribution door 2544 causes the game ball B to distribute the gaming ball B to the first V winning opening. The distribution operation to the 2007 side is executed, and the distribution operation by the distribution door 2544 is shown in advance.

  In this example, the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are simultaneously operated at the start of the small hitting game state, that is, the effect at the start of the small hitting game state (the opening effect of the small hitting game state. During the small hitting game state, such as "Aim for 2006"), and after the distributing rotator 2531 and the distributing door 2544 are operated, the accessory winning opening 2006 is performed for the first time. Is opened. This reduces the possibility that the distribution rotator 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side. doing. Note that there is no possibility that the distribution rotator 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side. Alternatively, if it is extremely low, the accessory winning opening 2006 may be set to the first open state simultaneously with the operation of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

  Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, the distribution operation is performed by operating in advance some of the movable parts (the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544) for distributing the game balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006. The other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the sorting door 2544 having a high possibility of causing the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007) (high V winning expectation) by operating does not operate in advance. In advance, only the distribution rotator 2531 that has a lower possibility of causing the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (the second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the distribution door 2544 (the V winning expectation degree is low) is determined in advance. You may make it operate. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance a part of the distribution destination of the game ball B that has won the bonus winning opening 2006, the other distribution destinations can be in an unknown state, and the other distribution destinations are apparent. As the number of sorting destinations increases, the player can be surprised and have an increased sense of expectation. At the same time, the player can pay attention to the game balls B to be sorted and enjoy the movement, thereby reducing the interest in gaming. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high expectation degree of V winning is not operated in advance to conceal its existence and remind the player that the game ball B enters the third distribution device 2550. When the “third small hit” is executed, the movable part (the sorting door 2544) having a high expectation degree of the V-prize is operated and the game ball B is set to the V-prize port (in this example, the first V-prize port 2007). By entering, unexpectedness can be given, and by having the game ball B enter an unexpected destination, the entertainment of the game can be improved. Further, the distribution to the first V winning opening 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two sides, that is, the first loss port 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side. Even if the "second small hit" having a lower V-prize expectation degree than "" is executed and the game ball B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 side, the player is not discouraged.

  Also, in this example, the distribution rotator 2531 is arranged in such a manner that the player can easily recognize it, whereas the distribution door 2544 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward of the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Is small, so that it is difficult to notice the operation even if it is operating. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007 which can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the “third small hit” occurs, the sorting door 2544 operates to make it difficult for the behavior of the game ball B to be noticed when the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007, and the game ball Without noticing that B has entered the first V winning opening 2007, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V winning was suddenly generated and a 15R jackpot was executed.

  In addition, by operating the distribution rotator 2531 in advance during the opening effect in the small hitting game state, the distribution rotator 2531 is added to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, “Aim for the character winning opening 2006”. The player can also easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed during the small hitting game state.

  By the lottery of the “small hit” as described above, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is received in the special item winning opening 2006 when the special item winning opening 2006 is opened. Is sent to the first sorting guide path 2534 of the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the winning object winning opening sensor 2513. When the gaming ball B is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of gaming balls B is paid out.

  Of the “small hits”, in the “second small hits”, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the open state when the bonus winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, so that the sorting rotation is performed. When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the accommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari passage 2536, and the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Flows through the second losing passage 2546 from the second losing opening 2543 at the lower end, is detected by the second losing opening sensor 2517, and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

  The game ball B sent to the third sorting device 2550 side is supplied to the crune 2553 through the third sorting guiding path 2551, and after turning inside the clune 2553, falls to the third sorting table 2554 below. I do. The game ball B, which has fallen from the crune 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d, rolls to the rear right table 2554c, and then rolls toward the lowest portion of the right table 2554c on the right side of the front end and rotates. Abuts on the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558. After that, the game ball B abutting on the protruding piece 2558a and being pushed rearward enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third distributing rotator 2556 and enters the center table 2554a. To roll forward.

  The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is received by the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. , And enters the collection table 2554d. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the site where the game ball B has entered. Then, the game ball B rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is hit by the protruding piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotator 2557 in the same manner as the movement at the right table 2554c. , From the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the rotator 2556 during the third distribution to enter the central table 2554a.

  As described above, the basic flow of the game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third distribution rotating body 2556. After the central table 2554a is rolled, the game ball B is accepted by the collection table 2554d to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. The process is repeated until the third distribution table 2554 is reached.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 passes through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and is then discharged from the back unit 3000 to the lower rear ball. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555 passes through the third sorting sphere discharging passage 2574 and is detected by the third losing opening sensor 2518. Through the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, a privilege of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  On the other hand, in the “third small hit”, since the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state when the bonus winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution rotator 2531 Is rotated from the accommodating state to the accommodating state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flow down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first Atari passage 2536. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544 in the closed state, is guided rightward, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542, is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then passes through the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  For this reason, in order to open and close the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is received by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit”, “big hit”, etc. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result needs to be performed. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500, there is an opportunity to be accepted in the first starting port 2002, but there is no opportunity to be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center role 2500, a guide path group 2520 including two first guide paths 2521 and a second guide path 2522 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500. Although there is a chance to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 even if both pass through the aisle, the first guidance is given by "right-handed" for easy driving operation When the passage 2521 is distributed, there is a possibility that the game ball B may be distributed to the second guide passage 2522 because there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430 which is sent to the out opening 1008 without an opportunity to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 or the like. In order to do so, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Further, in order to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B, it is necessary to cause the normal winning port 2003 to receive the game ball B and to derive the normal lottery result of “normal hit”. Is lower in the second starting port 2004 than in the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting port 2002. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by displaying the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002. Expectations can be raised for acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the game winning opening 2006 opens and closes. In order to accept the ball B, the driving operation of the game ball B may be changed to “right strike”, and the game ball B may be driven into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the bonus winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B into the bonus winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B driven into the right side of the center role 2500 may be accepted in the downstream normal winning opening 2003 even if the game ball B is not accepted in the bonus winning opening 2006. Further, the normal winning opening 2003 May be accepted in the second opening port 2004 which is opened according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the player, and "small hit" or "big hit" as the second special lottery result. May be drawn.

  When the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530, so that the game ball B is stored in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531. Depending on whether or not the player is contained, the player can be excitedly excited.

  When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540. The player can be excited by the distribution device 2540, depending on whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loss opening 2543. In the second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loss port 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loss path 2546 and has the second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the second V winning opening 2008, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The game balls B distributed to the second losing opening 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 are supplied to the third distribution table 2554 from the crune 2553 of the third distribution device 2550. Then, it is flipped by the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 of the third sorting table 2554, enters the central table 2554a through the third sorting rotating body 2556, and moves forward. When the player turns to, the player can be excited by whether or not the player can be accepted into the second V winning opening 2008, and the player can be entertained.

  Then, when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special is performed. When the "big hit" is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, since the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, an opportunity comes to pay out many game balls B, A hit operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 can be performed so that the game ball B can be received in the large winning opening 2005 which is opened and closed.

  At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the special winning opening 2005 is higher in the case where the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than in the case where the first guide passage 2521 is circulated. By refraining from "hitting right", the driving strength can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  By the way, the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center role 2500 has a heavy look portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which path the game ball B circulates, so it should have hit the player into the second guide path 2522 and entered the first guide path 2521. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls B flowing through the guide passage group 2520. Further, the game ball B hit into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can make the player throb depending on whether the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and when coming out of the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, the player can be surprised by giving the player unexpectedness, and entertain the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Subsequently, a guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154. 153 (a) to 153 (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 136, and FIGS. 154 (e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing still another embodiment of the guide passage group. It is. In FIGS. 153 and 154, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (a), the distance at which the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 is leftwardly separated from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is longer than that of FIG. It was done. With the guide passage group 2520, the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (b), the angle of the stop portion 1006 in the front component 1000 is set so that the contacting game ball B can easily bounce toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. And the portion of the front frame upper right portion 2502a between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It is inclined. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 side, so that the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B in which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 is widened. The driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 can be easily performed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIGS. 136 and 153 (a) and (b), the respective entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. In contrast to the opening, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center role 2500, and the respective inlets are arranged vertically. In this state, it is opened to the left.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (the peripheral edge of the game area 5a) forms a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the right upper part 2502a of the front frame forms a part of the second guide passage 2522. Make up part. Further, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2506 between the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is equal to the length from the left end of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. The length to the entrance of each of the one guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is smaller than the upstream space 2506 shown in FIG. 136 or the like.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength must be such that it contacts the narrow portion on the front frame upper right portion 2502a on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with the driving strength to directly enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 which is opened to the left, the game is performed as compared with the embodiment of FIG. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the ball B becomes narrow. Further, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 on the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 separates the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances) abuts, there is a possibility that the rebounded game ball B may deviate from the upstream space portion 2506 depending on the leftward momentum and angle. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space 2506, it does not deviate leftward from the upstream space 2506 and enter any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center role 2500 may be distributed. Because of this, the difficulty of the driving operation of the game ball B is increased, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can drive the game medium. The operation can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (d) is different from the embodiment of FIG. 153 (c) in that a branch portion 2524 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 in one-way communication with the second guide passage 2522. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward from the right end of a portion extending left and right (the upper right portion 2502a on the front frame). In this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B with the strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is caused to fall into the second part 2524 at the branch portion 2524 depending on the strength of the hit (when the strength of the hit is weak). Since the game ball B branches to the guide passage 2522, the difficulty of the distribution of the game balls B to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 153 (c).

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521, Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the downwardly bent portion of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is at the downwardly bent portion. It does not jump upward (to the branch portion 2524) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the vehicle enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having a branch portion 2524 in the middle and flows through the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 Alternatively, since the game ball B branches to any one of the second guide passages 2522, the player can be made to feel nervous or throbbing depending on which side the game ball B branches at the branch portion 2524, and the first guidance It is possible to entertain the flow of the game balls B in the passage 2521 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. In the branch portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility of branching to the second guide passage 2522 side. It is possible to flutter and entertain the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, the mistake of the driving operation of the player is covered, and the desired second guide passage 2522 is formed. The game balls B are circulated, and the player can be made to feel as if he / she has gained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the inside of the frame of the center role 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. Accordingly, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space 2506 above the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame flow through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center role 2500, so that the player side , The distribution of the game ball B can be made more prominent, so that when the game ball B circulates through the bypass portion 2525, it is possible to make the player think that something is good after that. Can perform a driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined rightward and rearward in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in the upstream space portion 2506, and the game ball that has flowed along the front surface of the game panel 1100 is provided. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. In addition, the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined such that a portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves rightward as going backward, and faces toward the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B struck vigorously can be reflected to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to be overlapped side by side in the front-rear direction, so that the game inserted into the upper space 2506 above the center role 2500 is played. It can be difficult to determine which path the ball B has entered, and the player can be noticed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. 155 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second opening unit 2100 provided in the starting unit 2100. The game machine includes a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting port 2002, and a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 and a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel relay board 1710 that is relayed, a panel relay board cover 3025 that is attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and a rear face below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. An effect that is attached to the right side and relays the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 It includes a relay board 3026, and a rendering relay board cover 3027 attached to Urabako 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the presentation relay board 3026.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which a left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside of the frame to the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the right side in the left-right direction to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the light guide plate effecting unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and is connected to the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower back ball discharge unit 3150 that receives game balls B and discharges them downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution device of the center role 2500 attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. And a back right ball discharging unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges the ball downward.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and the back front rendering unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. A front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, a lower front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right front of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and a back decoration in the rear front effect unit 3200 And a sub status indicator 3500 provided near the right end of the H.3211.

[5-9a. Light guide plate production unit]
Subsequently, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162. FIG. 160A is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160B is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the relation between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate effecting unit from the front. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate emits light, and FIG. 162 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate emits light.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. And a first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted, and a unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102. And a second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes an upper substrate cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern substrate 3103, and a unit that covers the front of the second pattern substrate 3104. A left substrate cover 3106 attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 so as to be separated in the left-right direction.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 162 (a)) formed by an innumerable first reflection portion having an uneven shape for reflecting only light from above in the forward direction, and only light from the left. And a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 162 (b)) formed by an innumerable second reflective portion having an uneven shape that reflects the light forward. In other words, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3110 to emit light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 emits light, and emits the second pattern when the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 emits light. The 3120 can emit light.

  The light guide plate 3102 is a point-shaped light-emitting portion 3102a (dotted portion in FIG. 162) that emits a point-like light by light emitted from a corresponding direction as a reflection portion constituting the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. , A linear light emitting portion 3102b (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 162) that emits light linearly by light emitted from a corresponding direction, and a spectral light emitting portion that emits light by splitting cocktail light emitted from the corresponding direction. 3102c (the spotted portion in FIG. 162). That is, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point light emitting portions 3102a, the linear light emitting portions 3102b, and the spectral light emitting portions 3102c. Although not shown, the dot-shaped light-emitting portion 3102a, the linear light-emitting portion 3102b, and the spectral light-emitting portion 3102c also form the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 by changing their densities. I have.

  Here, the cocktail light is light of a color including two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is emitted to the spectral light emitting portion as cocktail light, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red or green light is emitted at the site. A part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is emitted to the spectral light emitting section as cocktail light, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and a portion that looks red, green, or blue in the relevant portion or Thus, light of a color in which they are mixed appropriately appears, and rainbow-colored light emission can be exhibited. When light of only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting section, the light emits with the light of the color because there is no component to be separated. For this reason, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light in a single color or emit light in multiple colors depending on the color of the light to be irradiated, and can perform a wider variety of light emission effects. it can.

  In the light guide plate 3102, countless first reflection portions forming the first pattern 3110 and countless second reflection portions forming the second pattern 3120 are each formed with minute irregularities, In a state where the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not emitting light, the effect image or the like which appears transparent and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side is displayed. , Can be visually recognized in good condition.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the first picture 3110 is a picture composed of the characters "decisive battle". The first pattern 3110 has a portion where the shadow of the “decisive battle” extends radially outward around the character of the “decisive battle” and a plurality of arc-shaped portions outside the region are arranged radially. ing. In the first pattern 3110, the portion of the character “Decisive Battle” is formed by the dot-shaped light emitting portion 3102a, and the portion of the shadow outside the character of “Decisive Battle” is formed by the linear light emitting portion 3102b. Are formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c and the linear light emitting portion 3102b.

  The second pattern 3120 is a pattern imitating a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 162 (b). The second pattern 3120 is a central pattern portion 3121 composed of a character, a radial pattern portion 3122 extending radially outward from the central pattern portion 3121, and petals scattered around the central pattern portion 3121 as if petals are dancing. Scattered pattern portion 3123. The central picture portion 3121 is formed by a point light emitting portion 3102a whose periphery is bordered by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. The radiation pattern portion 3122 is formed by a spectral light emitting portion 3102c bordered by the linear light emitting portion 3102b. The scattered picture portion 3123 is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c.

  The radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200 described later ( See FIG. 172). Accordingly, when the second pattern 3120 is displayed by light emission, the radiating pattern portion 3122 and the radiating decoration portion 3212b and the radiating decoration portion 3213b appear to be connected to each other. By protruding forward the 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b, a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 includes a lower cutout 3102d cut out upward from the lower side, and a right cutout 3102e cutout leftward from the right side. The lower cutout portion 3102d is for preventing the center cutout 2500 from coming into contact with the third sorting table 2554 and the upper cover 2577 of the third sorting device 2550. This is for preventing the 2500 guide passage group 2520 of the 2500 from coming into contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted backward.

  The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction like a left decorative substrate 3103a on the light guide plate, a middle decorative substrate 3103b on the light guide plate, and a right decorative substrate 3103c on the light guide plate. A plurality of full-color LEDs for irradiating light downward are mounted on the lower surface of the LED. The first pattern board 3103 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. The effect relay board 3026 is connected in a daisy chain in the order of the left decorative board 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative board 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative board 3103c on the light guide plate (see FIG. 174).

  The second pattern substrate 3104 is vertically divided into two parts like a light guide plate upper left decorative substrate 3104a and a light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3104b, and a plurality of right light irradiating right surfaces of the respective substrates are provided. Are mounted. The second picture substrate 3104 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. The effect relay board 3026 is connected in a daisy chain in the order of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a (see FIG. 174).

  The two left cooling fans 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 are a third distribution driving motor 2560 and a third distribution left drive of the third distribution device 2550 in the center role 2500. This is for cooling the motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and are mounted obliquely toward the front in the center in the left and right direction. Each of the left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 has a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 (see FIG. 174). .

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes a lower back ball discharging unit 3150, a back right ball discharging unit 3170, a back front rendering unit 3200, a back front lower left rendering unit 3300, and a back front lower right rendering on the front surface of the outer periphery of the unit base 3101. The unit 3400 is attached. That is, all the effect units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100. Thus, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is equipped with all other effect units of the back unit 3000, such as the lower back ball discharge unit 3150, so that the light guide plate effect. By simply attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010, all the effect units can be attached to the back box 3010.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is a unit formed by attaching a light guide plate 3102, a first design substrate 3103, a second design substrate 3104, and the like to a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3101. Thereby, in a state where the light guide plate 3102 is assembled, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102. Touching the light guide plate 3102 can prevent fingerprints, dirt, scratches, and the like from being attached to the light guide plate 3102, and can make the light guide plate 3102 easier to handle.

  By the way, when a decorative body to be luminously decorated is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, light due to the luminous decoration of the decorative body is radiated to the front player side through the light guide plate. In some cases, the light guide plate may appear partially shining, or a light-emitting display pattern on the light guide plate may be seen. If the light guide plate shines or a picture is seen, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body becomes difficult to see because the decorative body which is luminously decorated at the rear overlaps, and the effect of the luminous decoration may be reduced. There is. In addition, when the pattern to be illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate can be seen in advance by the luminous decoration of the decorative body provided behind the light guide plate, when the pattern on the light guide plate is actually illuminated and displayed, the player The impact to be given may be reduced, and the effect of the light guide plate may not be sufficiently obtained. In addition, when a decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when a light-emitting pattern is displayed on the light guide plate, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern, so depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, There was a risk that the pattern of the light guide plate being displayed with light emission was difficult to see.

  On the other hand, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010 in a state where the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) is assembled to the game board 5. There is no decoration on the rear side. That is, since the back front effecting unit 3200, the back front lower left effecting unit 3300, and the back front lower right effecting unit 3400 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and Even when the back right decorative body 3213 and the like are illuminated, the light can hardly reach the light guide plate 3102.

  Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 (the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120) appears to be shining even when the ornaments such as the back upper ornament 3211, the back left ornament 3212, and the back right ornament 3213 are illuminated. Since the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body does not become difficult to see, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body can be shown in a favorable state, and the effect of the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body can be sufficiently exhibited. be able to.

  In addition, even when the decorative bodies such as the upper back decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are light-emitting decorated, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to shine. Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen before the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the impact given to the player when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated to be reduced, and to sufficiently exert the effect of the luminous display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. it can.

  Further, since no decorative body such as the back upper decorative body 3211 is provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are luminescently displayed on the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 and the second The decorative pattern does not overlap behind the two patterns 3120, so that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good condition, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission. The effect can be fully exhibited.

  In addition, as described above, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like are not visible behind the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, so that Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a favorable state, the first pattern 3110, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, regardless of the shape or color of the first pattern, etc. 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state. Accordingly, the shapes and colors of the decorative bodies such as the upper back decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are considered in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. There is no need to increase the degree of freedom in designing the decorative body, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

  Further, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is provided at the rearmost side in the back box 3010, and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600. Since the direction of light is substantially perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, it is difficult for the light guide plate 3102 to appear partially shining or for the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 to appear shining. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, depending on the effect image (including the color of the screen) to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 which is light-emitting and displayed. The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be made to stand out or stand out, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. In addition, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are illusioned with the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the effect of the effect display device 1600. The image can be illusioned with the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player.

  Note that the effect display device 1600 may be attached to the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. Accordingly, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate effecting unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered with the effect display device 1600, so that it is more difficult to touch the light guide plate 3102. Similar effects can be obtained.

[5-9b. Lower back ball discharge unit]
Next, the lower back ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The lower back ball discharge unit 3150 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101. The lower back ball discharging unit 3150 receives the game balls B received at the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below. It is. The lower back ball discharging unit 3150 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that separately detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and a first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, respectively. A first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the received game ball B.

  In addition, the lower back ball discharging unit 3150 receives the game ball B that has been received by the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and discharged downward in the third sorting device 2550 of the center role 2500. , To the substrate holder 1200 below.

  Further, the lower back ball discharge unit 3150 is provided with an out ball detection for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It has a mounting portion 3155 to which the unit 3030 can be mounted. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to the mounting portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9c. Back right ball discharge unit]
Next, the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The back right ball discharging unit 3170 is attached to a lower portion on the right side of the unit base 3101. The back right ball discharging unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first loss port 2535 of the first sorting device 2530 and the first V winning opening 2007 of the second sorting device 2540 in the center role item 2500. And discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9d. Ura-mae production unit]
Subsequently, the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, 163, and the like. FIG. 163 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit. The back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

  The back front effecting unit 3200 is formed in a U-shape whose front view is opened downward, and has a decorative body base 3201 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effecting unit 3100, and a front side of the upper side of the decorative body base 3201. A back upper decorative body 3211 attached and extending to the left and right, a back left decorative body 3212 attached to the front side of the left side of the decorative body base 3201 and extending vertically, and a front side of the right side of the decorative body base 3201 And a back right decorative body 3213 which is attached and extends vertically.

  In addition, the back front effecting unit 3200 is provided between the back upper decorative body 3211 and the decorative body base 3201 and has a back upper decorative substrate 3221 for light emitting decoration of the back upper decorative body 3211, and a back left decorative body 3212. A back left decorative board 3222 for light-emitting decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 is provided between the back left decorative body 3212 and the decorative body base 3201. And a back right decorative substrate 3223 for light emitting decoration of the right decorative body 3213.

  Furthermore, the back front production unit 3200 suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and also displays those results. A sub status display 3500 for displaying the number of reservations is provided. The sub status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the upper back decoration 3211.

  The back upper decorative body 3211 has a light-transmitting property as a whole. The back upper decorative body 3211 includes a logo part 3211a in which three circles are arranged in a state of being overlapped in the left-right direction, and a logo decorative part 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a bead shape along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a. Have. In the logo portion 3211a, characters of a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed as reliefs. The front upper surface of the back upper decorative body 3211 is inclined so as to protrude forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, a part of the logo decoration section 3211b constitutes the sub status display section 3501 of the sub status display 3500.

  The back left decorative body 3212 has translucency as a whole. The front left side of the back left decorative body 3212 is inclined so as to protrude forward toward the left. The back left decorative body 3212 has a main decorative portion 3212a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by imitating a flame over the entire surface, and extends radially around the right outer side across the main decorative portion 3212a. Radiation decoration portion 3212b. The main decorative portion 3212a is formed such that a colorless (transparent) portion, a red portion, and a yellow portion are mixed. The radiation decoration part 3212b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decoration portion 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 3102.

  The back right decorative body 3213 has translucency as a whole. The back right decorative body 3213 is slightly inclined with respect to the front-rear direction surface so that the front surface is substantially leftward and the front side is slightly rightward than the rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 includes a main decorative portion 3213a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by imitating a flame over the entire surface, and radially extending around the left outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3213a. Radiation decoration portion 3213b. The main decorative portion 3213a is formed in red. The radiation decoration part 3213b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decoration portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 3102.

  The upper back decoration substrate 3221 is a flat plate shape which is substantially constant up and down and extends left and right, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the back upper decoration body 3211. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper decorative substrate 3221 has a white surface. The upper back decoration board 3221 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back left decoration board 3222.

  The back left decorative substrate 3222 is a flat plate extending vertically, and is attached with the substrate surface facing forward and backward, and has a white surface. The back left decorative substrate 3222 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 and a plurality of LEDs mounted behind the radiation decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212. And the second LED 3222b. Each of the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b is a full-color LED. The back left decorative substrate 3222 is connected to the effect relay substrate 3026. When the back left decorative substrate 3222 emits the first LED 3222a, the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 can be made to emit light. The portion 3212b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3212b at the position of each radiation decoration portion 3212b.

  The back right decorative substrate 3223 is a flat plate extending up and down, is mounted with the substrate surface facing left and right, and has a white surface. The back right decorative substrate 3223 is provided with a first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 and a first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the radiating decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. And two LEDs 3223b. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are full color LEDs, respectively. The back right decorative board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. When the first LED 3223a emits light, the main decoration part 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 can emit light decoration, and when the second LED 3223b emits light, the back right decorative body 3213 emits light. The portion 3213b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction or the front-rear direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3213b at the position of each radiation decoration portion 3213b (see FIG. 164 (a)).

  The back right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing right and has a plurality of third LEDs 3223c capable of illuminating the right part of the center role 2500. The third LED 3223c is a full-color LED. When the third LED 3223c emits light, it is possible to brightly illuminate the bonus winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, and the like in the center bonus 2500.

  On the back right decorative board 3223, a plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 for displaying sub-designs and the like on the sub-state indicator 3500 are mounted on the upper left-handed board surface. The sub state LED 3510 is a side view type LED that emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the mounted board. The light from each sub state LED 3510 is guided by a light guide pin 3520 to the right sub state display section 3501 in the logo decoration section 3211b of the upper back decoration 3211 and emitted forward. The sub state LED 3510 includes one first sub symbol LED 3511 composed of a full color LED for indicating the first special lottery result, and one second sub symbol LED 3512 composed of a full color LED for indicating the second special lottery result. And two first sub-reserved number LEDs 3513 each composed of a single color LED for displaying the reserved number of the first special lottery result, and two second sub-color LEDs for displaying the reserved number of the second special lottery result. And a sub-reserve number LED 3514.

  The back front effecting unit 3200, when assembled to the game board 5, passes through the space surrounded by the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and is provided at the rear. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 displayed on the light guide plate 3102 in the light plate rendering unit 3100, the rendering image displayed on the rendering display device 1600, and the like are visually recognized in a favorable state from the front (the player side). Can be. In addition, the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the periphery of the effect image can be decorated by the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the appearance in the gaming area 5a can be achieved. Can be better.

  Further, according to the back front effecting unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back upper decorative board 3221, the back left decorative board 3222, and the back right decorative board 3223 emit light appropriately, so that the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left The decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 can be illuminated and decorated, and the luminous effect using them can be shown to the player.

  Further, according to the back front rendering unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 and the second LED 3222b of the back right decorative board 3223 are aligned with the light emission display of the second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. The LED 3223b emits light, and the radiating decorative part 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radiating decorative part 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 emit light to radiate to the left and right outer sides of the radiating pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120. The decorative portion 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b can be seen to be continuous.

  In addition, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are inclined such that the front end side projects forward from the center side of the game area 5a toward the left and right, The radiation pattern 3212b and the radiation pattern 3213b that are continuous with the radiation pattern 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 can give the second pattern 3120 a sense of depth.

  For this reason, the second large pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effecting unit 3200 spread a wide and large light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) extending left and right. Can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's attention, and think that there is something good for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back left decorative body 3212 of the back front effecting unit 3200 is located behind the left side of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, the first LED 3222a of the back left decorative board 3222 and the When the second LED 3222b emits light, the light can decorate the rear frame 2504 of the center role 2500, making the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 difficult to see from the player side (front). Can be.

[5-9e. Production unit at the lower left of the back front]
Next, the rear lower left effect unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, FIG. The lower left effect unit 3300 in front of the back unit 3000 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100 at the lower left side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 and above the left cooling fan 3107.

  The back front lower left effecting unit 3300 guides a lower back left decorative body 3301 and a lower back left decorative body 3301 having a translucent shape in which the character of “decision” is formed in a relief shape and protrudes obliquely upward. The decorative base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light plate effecting unit 3100, and is provided between the decorative base 3302 and the lower back left decorative body 3301. And a lower back left decorative board 3304 attached to the lower surface of the lower left upper decorative board 3303 for illuminating and decorating the portion, and a lower back lower left decorative board 3304 (FIG. 174).

  The lower back left upper decorative board 3303 and the lower back left lower decorative board 3304 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surfaces of the lower back left upper decorative board 3303 and the lower back left lower decorative board 3304, respectively. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back left upper decorative board 3303 and the lower back left lower decorative board 3304, the character portion of "decision" of the lower back left decorative body 3301 can be illuminated or decorated. Can be illuminated on the outer periphery of the portion of the character "?", Or the entire back lower left decorative body 3301 can be illuminated.

[5-9f. Production unit at the lower right of the back front]
Next, the rear lower right effect unit 3400 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, 163, and the like. The lower right effect unit 3400 in front of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and above the right cooling fan 3108.

  The lower right front lowering unit 3400 includes a lower right decorative body 3401 and a lower right decorative body 3401 having a translucent shape in which characters of “war” are formed in a relief shape and project diagonally upward. A decorative body base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effecting unit 3100, and is provided between the decorative body base 3402 and the lower back right decorative body 3401, and the “war” of the lower back right decorative body 3401 is provided. A lower back upper right decorative board 3403 for illuminating and decorating a character portion, and a lower back lower right decorative board 3404 attached to the lower surface of the decorative base 3402 for illuminating the outer periphery of the lower back right decorative body 3401. (See FIG. 174).

  The lower back upper right decorative substrate 3403 and the lower back lower right decorative substrate 3404 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the lower right upper decorative substrate 3403 and the lower right lower decorative substrate 3404, respectively. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back lower right decorative board 3403 and the lower back lower right decorative board 3404, the character portion of "war" of the lower back right decorative body 3401 can be illuminated and decorated. The outer periphery of the character portion of “sen” can be illuminated, or the entire lower right back decoration 3401 can be illuminated.

[5-9 g. Sub status indicator]
Next, the sub status indicator 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165 and the like. FIG. 164 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board, the sub status indicator, and the right side portion of the center character in the back unit in the back unit by a left side cross section. a) It is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front effect unit, the sub status indicator, and the right part of the center role in the back unit. FIG. 165 is a wiring diagram showing wiring of some LEDs of the sub-state LED on the back right decorative board.

  The sub status display 3500 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 separately from the effect image for indicating the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result in the effect display device 1600. The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 are displayed to indicate the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. For example, the number of holds is displayed.

  The sub status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back upper decorative body 3211 in the back front effecting unit 3200 so as to be always visible from the front (the player side). The sub status display 3500 includes a sub status display portion 3501 that forms a part of a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres of the upper back decoration 3211 in the back front rendering unit 3200 are arranged in a rosary, and a back front rendering. A plurality of sub state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the back right decorative board 3223 of the unit 3200, and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 for guiding light from the sub state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub state display portion 3501 And

  The sub state display portion 3501 extends vertically in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a in the upper back decoration 3211. Further, the sub-state display section 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

  The plurality of sub state LEDs 3510 are side-by-side type LEDs which are vertically arranged on the back right decorative board 3223 and irradiate light in a direction parallel to the surface of the mounted board (here, forward). Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222, and are connected to the effect relay board 3026. Light emission is controlled by the connected peripheral control board 1510.

  The sub state LED 3510 includes one first sub symbol LED 3511 composed of a full color LED for indicating the first special lottery result, and one second sub symbol LED 3512 composed of a full color LED for indicating the second special lottery result. And two first sub-reserved number LEDs 3513, each of which is a single color LED for displaying the reserved number of the first special lottery result, and a single color LED (for example, red LED) for displaying the reserved number of the second special lottery result. And two second sub reserve LEDs 3514.

  The light guide pin 3520 has a rear end located on the front surface of the sub state LED 3510 and a front end penetrating one sphere in the sub state display section 3501 and being located near the front end of the sphere.

  The sub-state indicator 3500 displays the light-emission mode of the sub-state LED 3510 (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light-emitting color, etc.) as a sub-design. Specifically, when suggesting the selected first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are blinked in red for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every 2F (2/30 sec).

  Then, when the selected first special lottery result or second special lottery result is “losing”, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in red as “losing” symbol. On the other hand, when the selected first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit”, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in green as a “hit” symbol.

  In addition, the display of the number of held first special lottery results and the number of held second special lottery results on the sub status indicator 3500 is indicated by two first sub-hold count LEDs 3513 and second sub-hold counts that are respectively arranged vertically. The number of suspensions is displayed by a combination of the lighting state of the LED 3514. Specifically, when the number of reservations is “0”, the upper and lower two are turned off, when the number of reservations is “1”, the upper part is turned on and the lower part is turned off, and when the number of reservations is “2”, The upper and lower lights are turned on. When the number of reservations is “3”, the upper part is blinked and the lower part is turned on. When the number of reservations is “4”, the upper and lower two are blinked. In this way, the number of reservations is displayed by the combination of the lighting state of each of the two LEDs in the first sub-reservation number LED 3513 and the second sub-reservation number LED 3514.

  In the present embodiment, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are full color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 emit red or green light as sub symbols. It does not emit blue light. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and the cathode of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited on the back right decorative substrate 3223. As a result, even if any malfunction occurs, no electricity is supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, a sub-symbol is not displayed in blue, which does not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid giving a player distrust, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. it can. In addition, since the anode and the cathode of the unused blue light emitting element are connected and short-circuited, static electricity can be prevented from being accumulated in the light emitting element, and the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second The sub symbol LED 3512 can be prevented from being damaged, and the sub symbol can be reliably displayed.

  As described above, according to the sub status display 3500 of the present embodiment, a sub symbol indicating the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by the sub status display 3500 is displayed. Therefore, even if the display of the main symbol by the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is overlooked or the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol is not well understood, the special symbol selected by the sub symbol is viewed. The lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  In the sub status indicator 3500, since the sub status display portion 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b of the upper back decoration 3211, the sub status LED 3510 emits light to display a sub symbol and the like. And the logo decoration portion 3211b appears to be decorated with light, but the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. Is selected, the light emission mode of the portion of the sub status display portion 3501 in the logo decoration portion 3211b changes. This allows the player to recognize that the light emission mode has changed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected, and to recognize the sub symbol. At this time, the sub symbol indicating the selected first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is decorated by the sub status display unit 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration unit 3211b. The sub-design does not look inorganic as in the technique described in the above, the sub-design can be incorporated into the decoration, and the sub-state display 3500 and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  Further, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided by the light guide pins 3520 to the sub state display section 3501 provided at a position away from the back right decorative board 3223. With this configuration, light can be guided to the front end of the sub-state display section 3501 in a favorable state to display sub-designs and the like. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the logo decoration portion 3211b provided along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a of the upper back decoration 3211 is formed. Light can be guided to the position of the sub-state display portion 3501 which forms a part, and the sub-design can be incorporated into the decoration of the upper back decoration 3211 to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the first and second LEDs 3223a and 3223b and the center role 2500 for light-emitting decoration of the back right decorative body 3213 on the back right decorative board 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying a sub symbol and the like are mounted. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the first distribution device 2530 and the like is further mounted, the game ball which is circulated by making the back right decorative body 3213 emit light or brightening the first distribution device 2530 is distributed. B can be made easily visible.

  In the above-described embodiment, the sub-design for indicating the special lottery result is displayed with red light and green light. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-design may be displayed by using blue light and blue light, or the sub-design may be displayed by using green light and blue light. Further, the sub-design may be displayed using only one of red light, green light, and blue light. At this time, by connecting the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of a color that is not used (does not emit light) in the full-color LED and short-circuits the same, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of an unused color are connected and short-circuited, and then connected to GND (ground), so that static electricity can be dropped to GND and escaped.

  In the above embodiment, in the sub status indicator 3500, as shown in FIG. 165, among the three light emitting elements of the full-color LED, the anode and the cathode of the unused light emitting element are connected and short-circuited (short-circuited). Although an example of use has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated, a predetermined portion may be illuminated, or the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 may be illuminated. The present invention may be applied to a full-color LED. Specifically, for example, a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color or a decorative body having a part that does not transmit light of a specific color, when a full-color LED is used to emit and decorate, a color that does not transmit is used. Since it is not necessary to emit light, the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of that color are connected and short-circuited. Thus, by emitting light in a color that does not need to be emitted due to a malfunction or the like, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body from appearing unnatural, and to achieve the same operation and effect as described above. .

  More specifically, for example, the red portions (the main decorative portion 3212a and the main decorative portion 3213a) of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 in the back front effecting unit 3200. ) Is made to transmit only red and green light, and when the full-color LEDs (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the part emit blue light, the part becomes blue. Does not transmit the light, the part is not decorated with light, but the part adjacent to the part and different in color is decorated with light by the blue light, and the intended effect is not intended due to unintended light decoration. There is a possibility that it will not be able to fully demonstrate. On the other hand, by connecting the anode and the cathode of the blue light emitting element and short-circuiting the full-color LED provided corresponding to the portion that does not transmit the blue light, It is possible to prevent an unintended light emission decoration from being performed on a part adjacent to the part due to a malfunction, and to prevent an unnatural light emission effect from being performed. The effect can be produced, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back right decorative board 3223. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the (status display board), or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the back upper decorative substrate 3221.

[5-9h. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the under-back ball ejection unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 (a) is a front view of the out-ball detecting unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detecting unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detecting unit, and (d) (E) is a perspective view of the out-ball detecting unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detecting unit as viewed from behind, and (f) is a view of the out-ball detecting unit and the right lower front position. (G) is a perspective view of the out ball detecting unit viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 167 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from behind.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a perspective view showing a relationship between a game panel and an out-ball detection unit, and FIG. 168 (b) is a perspective view showing a state where the out-ball detection unit is brought into contact with the game panel. FIG. 169 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken from the right and cut vertically at the center of the right sensor of the out-mouth when assembled on a game board. FIG. 170 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out opening from the front in a state where it is assembled on a game board.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so that it can be mounted to the mounting portion 3155 of the lower back ball discharge unit 3150. When the game board 5 of the present embodiment is mounted on the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be mounted.

  The out ball detection unit 3030 is driven into the game area 5a, and has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a special winning opening 2006. This is for detecting a game ball B that was not accepted by the player (a game ball B to which no privilege was given, also referred to as an “out ball”). In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected.

  The out ball detecting unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and an out mouth left sensor attached to the unit body 3031. The unit 3030 includes a sensor 3032 and an out-port right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033.

  The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and has a tubular tubular portion 3031a extending in a longitudinal direction in a tubular manner, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into right and left. A flange portion 3031c protruding from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a in the left and right direction in a flat plate shape, and a left out sensor 3032 and a right out sensor 3033 which are recessed forward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion and are inserted. And an insertion recess 3031d. The front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a is substantially the same size as the out port 1008 of the front component 1000, is long in the left and right directions, and is inclined such that the lower inner surface becomes lower toward the rear side.

  The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and is partitioned on both left and right sides into a size that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. The partition portion 3031b has a front end side curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion concave portion 3031d is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes upward so that the front side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a.

  The out mouth left sensor 3032 detects a game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out mouth right sensor 3033 detects a game ball B flowing on the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

  The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B passing through the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the out-mouth right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a at the center in the left-right direction.

  In this out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front surface of the lower back ball ejection unit 3150 (see FIG. 169). In addition, in a state where the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is connected to the game panel 1100. 168 (see FIGS. 168 and 169).

  When the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (FIG. 169). See). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 169).

  The out ball detection unit 3030 is configured such that the game ball B guided backward by the out guidance unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, It is supplied to the inside of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and is detected by one of the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out-ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed without abutting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a and receives a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and Since it is possible to detect a game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of the bonus winning openings 2006, for example, the acceptance of the game ball B to a specific winning opening is continuously detected. In the case where the “out ball” is not detected in spite of the fact that there is an illegal action, it means that a specific winning opening has been fraudulently performed, and it can be notified that the fraudulent behavior has been performed.

  In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory The ratio of “safe balls” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game balls B received in the winning opening 2006.

  Further, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the left and right out mouth left sensors 3032 and 3033 are partitioned by the partition portion 3031b, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role item 2500 is provided. Can be guided to the out mouth left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role object 2500 can be guided to the out mouth right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B flowing down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role item 2500 can be mainly detected by the out mouth right sensor 3033. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B detected per time by the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033, it is determined whether the player has a tendency to “left strike” or “right strike”. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that is optimal for the game situation, and entertain the intended game.

  In addition, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3031b is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over, when a large number of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the game balls B of the partition portion 3031b are relatively formed. The game ball B can be released to the left or right side where the traffic amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 1008 without any delay.

  In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening. The game ball B (“safe ball”) received in the 2005 and the bonus winning opening 2006 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows back in the out ball detection unit 3030 and outputs the left sensor 3032 and the right sensor for the out port. The detection at 3033 can be prevented, and only the “out ball” can be accurately detected.

  In this embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, as long as the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached. Therefore, the game panel 1100 can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. In addition to this, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  In the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game balls B ("all") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, only the “out sphere” is detected by the out sphere detection unit 3030. Therefore, the numbers of “out sphere”, “safe sphere”, and “all sphere” are compared. This makes it possible to detect the occurrence of clogged balls in the game board 5.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172. FIG. 171 is a front view of the game board in a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the light guide plate of the light guide plate effecting unit of the back unit. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effecting unit of the back unit. The game board 5 displays the light guide plate of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front lower right effect unit 3400 perform a predetermined light emitting effect.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 171, the light effect is implemented on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 in front view. Then, the plurality of LEDs are made to emit light to make the first pattern 3110 emit light. In this way, the character of “decisive battle” is illuminated and decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and behind the back effect unit 3200, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by suppressing that there is a good thing, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 172, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 in front view emit light. Then, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated. As a result, a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised and has a strong impact on the player. Can be given, and it can be assumed that an advantageous game state such as "big hit game" occurs, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  When the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and displayed, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are illuminated and decorated. 3122 and the radiating decorative portion 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 appear to be continuous, and constitute one picture (special picture) together. Therefore, a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided in front of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Since the decoration 3213 is located on the front side of the second pattern 3120, the special pattern can be given a sense of depth, and the special pattern can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, so that the special pattern can be strongly attracted to the interest of the player, and the player can be entertained. It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can also be combined with images (display effects). This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the display effect, and the like, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. 173 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection configuration of each board, a motor, and the like in the game board. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b that controls the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error display, and a partition for the game board 5. A display for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. Includes a Sumonita 1310h, the. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an inconsistent content, forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to the effect that it has been affected by electrical noise. This is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is performed, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, as described later, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Clear). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is kept in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Random number circuit ”). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 65535 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is set in advance in the present embodiment). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. Is completed, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be performed.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in a normal winning opening 2003, and a large winning opening 2005 The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received, the game winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the special game winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007 First V winning opening sensor 2514 for detecting, first loss opening sensor 2516 for detecting game ball B received in first loss opening 2535, second V receiving The second V winning opening sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2008, the third loss port sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B received in the third loss port 2555, the game discharged from the game board 5. Out sensor 664 (or out mouth left sensor 3032 and out mouth right sensor 3033) for detecting ball B, magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting improper magnetism in game area 5a, and vibration acting on game board 5 A detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 and the like is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit.

  Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are output via the payout control board 633 (through a payout control input circuit and a payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 (as they are, without passing through), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2402 are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control board 1310. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are transmitted to the panel relay board 1710. , Ie, indirectly, to the main control board 1310, and to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start control solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. The respective drive signals are output to the bonus winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the predetermined drive signal is output. From the output terminal of the output port, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400, the ordinary symbol indicator, the ordinary reserved indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special reserved number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second special symbol The respective drive signals are output to the pending number display and round display without passing through other boards, that is, directly. Or, to. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information relating to the game (game information) from an output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, and the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal notifying that the shooting of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal notifying that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the firing permission signal for notifying that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is the inverted firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to The firing permission signal is set as an initial value (default) as the initial value (default). After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), a firing permission signal setting process in a main control timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to this point, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) is inverted from the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the normal winning port sensor 2401, the big winning port sensor 2403, the bonus winning port sensor 2513, the first V winning port sensor 2514, the A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one losing mouth sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing mouth sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664. Is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning port 2003, and thus the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is used. Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined by the game board 5, the detection of the game balls B by the out sensor 664 is also frequent. Occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3001, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and will format these various commands and transmit them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described later in detail.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the RAM during power-off processing even when power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that performs the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. A ball release switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation; , Is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port, or receives the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch input from the dispensing control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Also, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310 The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number “3” is displayed, “Count (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "S Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit 226 of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the above; a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit establishes the firing condition 1 that the palm or the finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board Is established, the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is permitted to be fired based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied. Is not output to launch the game ball 5 toward the game area 5a, so that, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and cannot fire the game ball B.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handle 195 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 b that controls the firing by the firing solenoid 542 and controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 is provided on the payout control board 633. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, The power may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not used.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although a detailed illustration is omitted, a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC for performing high-quality performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC. And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC performs peripheral operations based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC converts the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 into a serial I / O for a lamp driving board. A game board-side drive data for transmitting from a port to each decoration board of the game board 5 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 for the game board decoration drive board The vibration is transmitted to the drive motor or the drive solenoid of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port, the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 36 , And door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381 and the like, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. A door-side drive light-emitting data composed of a door-side drive light-emitting data for outputting the data from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) shown from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is generated by the sound source. Output to IC.

  The detection signal from the second losing opening sensor 2517 of the center item 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projection output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on the operation signal, the effect display control unit. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and the like provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the system is running away.

  A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) are set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and the like output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are a plurality of serial input / outputs different from the display command. This is performed by a port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect on the effect display device 1600. Control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP adopts a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in 2 × 3 are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right as viewed from the front, and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. And the sub-scan to be performed. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right as viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Is output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136, 148 to 152, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the balls are rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger they can be hit. B, that is, the game balls B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game balls B come into contact with the obstacle nails N. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper portion of the center role 2500 enters the front view left side (left side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a) of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, Then, while abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N, it flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 passes through the windmill W, and is above or below a plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely arranged in a line along the lower side of the center role 2500. Side.

  The game ball B supplied above the plurality of obstacle nails N, which are obliquely planted in a line along the lower side of the center role 2500, is located at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a along the row of the obstacle nails N. Is guided to the lower part of the row of the obstacle nails N at the central part, and since the central part is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, the central part is located at the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. Accepted. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted obliquely in a line along the lower side of the center role 2500 is the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, There is a possibility that the large winning opening 2005 in the open state will be accepted.

  By the way, the game ball B supplied to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N, which are planted obliquely in a line along the lower side of the center role 2500, is supplied by the shelf 2301 or the obstacle nail N of the upper left side unit 2300. It may be moved to the center in the left-right direction, and may be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (upstream of the upper right part 2502a on the front frame). When the vehicle enters the space 2506), it is discharged above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center role 2500 through either the first guide route 2521 or the second guide route 2522 of the guide route group 2520 of the center role 2500. After abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning opening 2003, the normal winning opening 2003 is accepted with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened near the stopper 1006, and an entrance opened at an interval leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. Thus, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2506, and hits the stop portion 1006. If the player hits the game ball B with a non-contact strength (a somewhat weaker strength than right-handed), the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the circulation through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 can be accepted into the ordinary winning opening 2003 with a higher probability.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games are provided from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the selected normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the closed second starting port in the attacker unit 2400 is closed. 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by accepting the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, a certain period of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Note that if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 after the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, the suggestion of the normal lottery result may be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B that has entered the right attacker passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without having a chance to be accepted in the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, The game is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and then passes through the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , And is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 after passing in front of the closed special winning opening 2005.

  When the game ball B passes between the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result selected by accepting the game ball B at the normal winning port 2003 is " When the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward with “normal hit”, the game ball B is guided by the second starting port door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B not guided by the second starting port door 2411 falls on the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 and passes from the left end of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 through the front of the closed special winning door 2413 in the closed state to the right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, although the game ball B was guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411 but was not received in the second starting port 2004 due to the second starting port door 2411 retreating halfway, The vehicle enters the attacker right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 below the starting opening 2004, and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed special winning opening door 2413, and from the out opening 1008. It is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second guide opening upper guide shelf 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is opened. The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the special winning opening 2005.

  From the above, the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 are hardly accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, and thus the game balls B are accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, so that the second starting opening 2004 is received. Is rarely derived, and the second starting port 2004 does not accept the game ball B very much. On the other hand, the game balls B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 are accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first guiding passage 2521. Therefore, the passing of the gaming balls B through the ordinary winning opening 2003 causes the second starting opening 2004. Is likely to be a lottery result in which the game ball B is in the open state ("normal hit"), and the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004 is high.

  For this reason, since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506 is performed. And, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522. No. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the hitting operation of the game ball B and make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. Can be done.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment causes the main control board 1310 to display an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, , "Small hit", "shortening of time (shortening of time)"). Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that the special lottery results that are determined by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “first small hit”, “second small hit”, “ "3rd big hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit" and the like. In the present embodiment, the lottery probability of the “small hit” (“first small hit”, “second small hit”, “third small hit”) is greater in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result. Is set high.

  When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "small hit", "small hit" , The bonus winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern (see FIG. 151). Since the bonus winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center role 2500, when "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guide passage is used. A game ball B is hit into 2521.

  When the "small hit" is the "first small hit", the opening and closing time of the accessory winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be accepted. In the case of “second small hit” or “third small hit”, the time during which the bonus winning opening 2006 is in the open state is long, and the game ball B is accepted into the bonus winning opening 2006 by “right-handing”. Probability is high. When the game balls B are received in the bonus winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the “small hit” is “second small hit” or “third small hit”, when the game ball B is accepted to the bonus winning opening 2006, one of the accepted game balls B is distributed to the first distribution. It is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the device 2530. When the “small hit” is the “second small hit”, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540, and the third sorting device 2550 Is supplied to the third sorting table 2554 through the croon 2553. The game ball B supplied to the third sorting table 2554 is repelled by the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558, and from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the center table 2554a. It rolls so that it circulates from the central table 2554a to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and is connected to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555 provided in the central table 2554a. Will be sorted. When the game ball B is received (sorted) into the second V winning opening 2008, "15R big hit" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third losing opening 2555, "15R big hit" or the like is not executed, and the state returns to the previous state.

  On the other hand, when the “small hit” is the “third small hit”, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 moves to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. It is sorted and "15R big hit" is executed.

  The first special lottery result and the first special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 and accepting the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 If the two special lottery results are “2R jackpot” or “15R jackpot”, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to be able to receive the game ball B, or When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the special winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern) in which the game balls B cannot be accepted is closed. A "big hit" game in which one round is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, 2 rounds or 15 rounds) is executed.

  Since the special winning opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500, the player can perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role 2500. Can be. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center role 2500, the driving operation is easier on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to make the player select which path the driving operation is aimed at, making it difficult for the player to be bored by various games. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the case of "15R big hit" or "2R big hit" during the time saving state, after the "big hit" game is over, the lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special symbol fluctuation time for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is shorter than usual until the predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 times) is reached. The time until the "hit" is drawn is shortened.

  In the "big hit" game aiming at the special winning opening 2005, since the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 exist in the middle of the game ball B reaching the special winning opening 2005, the large winning opening 2005 is aimed at. Game ball B is likely to be accepted in the second starting port 2004, and during the “big hit” game, if the next “big hit” or “small hit” is drawn, the player's advantageous gaming state becomes advantageous. It will last for a long time, and the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result selected by accepting the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player operation type operation can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, By appropriately using the pre-production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform a luminous production or a display production, etc., which can entertain the player even with various productions, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player.

[8. Main effects of gaming board]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is the first ball in the guide path group 2520 on the right side of the center role item 2500. When the game is received in the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, a predetermined privilege (along with paying out a predetermined number of game balls B, Since a normal lottery for opening or closing the second starting port 2004 is provided, the player is caused to perform a hitting operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 having the normal winning opening 2003. A game can be played.

  Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center role item 2500 are twisted so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction at the heavy part 2520a in the middle arranged in the left-right direction, On the upper entrance side, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The hitting operation of the game ball B can facilitate the hitting, and the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the desired first guide passage 2521 or second guide passage 2522 can be enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the player is twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction at the heavy view portion 2520a. It is possible to make it difficult to determine which guide passage is circulating from, and to make the player pay attention to the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. it can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 allow the game ball B being guided (distributed) to be visible from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed by transparent members. Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap at the portion of the heavy view portion 2520a arranged in front and back, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance. Things. Furthermore, at the outlet side below the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction, so that each of the outlet side Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since they are twisted twice on the upstream side, the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side is different from that of the first guide passage 2521. The relationship between the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side can be hardly determined and obscured.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is driven (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center role 2500, it is difficult to know where the game ball B comes from. It is difficult to recognize the game result after the group 2520 has been distributed, and when the game ball B is driven into any one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a normal prize is won. Since it is difficult to determine whether the game ball B is likely to be accepted in the mouth 2003, when the player hits the game ball B, it is possible to care about which guide path the game ball B is flowing, and the player can be distributed. The player can pay attention to the playing ball B.

  In addition, when the player pays attention to the game ball B flowing through one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (the second guide The player can be excited by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), the expectation for the game can be raised, and an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521) ), The player can be surprised by giving it a surprising effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in order to make the game ball B enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Can be adjusted by adjusting the driving strength of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to impart difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, to make it difficult for the player to be bored by the change of the driving operation of the game ball B, and to provide the game ball to the player. The driving operation of B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the heavy portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction is allowed at the portion. Since the space can be made as narrow as possible, a space can be relatively easily secured on the right side of the center role 2500, and the role winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, and the like are arranged in the secured space. And a staging device can be arranged, so that the pachinko machine 1 can further entertain the player.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped partitioning the game area 5a is provided in the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven is provided on the front side. Since the center role 2500 is attached and the third sorting device 2550 having a front end protruding forward from the game panel 1100 is provided at the lower side of the inner periphery of the center role 2500, The distributing device 2550 can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the third distributing device 2550 can have a strong interest in distributing the game balls B. The present pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be operated, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, since the third sorting device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center item 2500 that divides the inside of the gaming region 5a, the third sorting device 2550 is located inside the gaming region 5a. The game ball B which distributes the game ball B is not disturbed, and both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 can be well enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is the right table of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c provided on the left and right sides with the center table 2554a therebetween. When supplied to the second table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, it is rolled to the lower front side of the right table 2554c, and is moved to the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558 provided on the front side of the right table 2554c. He will be hit and move to the rear. At this time, the timing of hitting the game ball B by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558 and the timing of the game ball B reaching the third distribution right rotator 2558 determine the third distribution right. The strength and situation in which the protruding piece 2558a of the rotating body 2558 hits the game ball B varies. Therefore, when the hit by the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558 is strong to some extent, the game ball B climbs the right table 2554c toward the rear side, passes through the third sorting rotator 2556, and moves to the rear side. At the center table 2554a which is in communication. At this time, in the third sorting rotator 2556, since the communication between the center table 2554a and the right table 2554c (the left table 2554b) is changed by rotation, the projecting piece of the third sorting right rotator 2558 is rotated. Even if the game ball B reaches the rear third rotating body 2556 after being hit by the second ball 2558a, the game ball B enters the center table 2554a depending on the rotation timing of the third rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Without returning to the right table 2554c. Further, since the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are provided on both left and right sides of the center table 2554a, when the game ball B is strongly hit to the rear side by the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558, In some cases, the vehicle may pass through the rotating body 2556 during the strike-out and enter the left table 2554b on the opposite side.

  On the other hand, if the impact of the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558 is weak, the game ball B returns without climbing up the right table 2554c to the rear side. Depending on the timing of the protruding piece 2558a of the sorting right rotator 2558, the game ball B may be hit again weakly and move back and forth on the right table 2554c between the rear side and the front side. Then, when the game ball B is hit by the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and enters the central table 2554a from the rear side through the third distributing rotating body 2556, the central table 2554a moves toward the front. The center table 2554a is received by any one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing holes 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, and is received by either. Instead, it passes through the collection table 2554d from the front end of the center table 2554a, enters the left table 2554b on either side and the front side of the right table 2554c, and again protrudes 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558 (or , And is moved rearward by being hit by the protruding piece 2557a) of the third distribution left rotating body 2557.

  In this way, the game ball B supplied to the third sorting device 2550 is the protruding piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558 on the front side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. Of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, enters the central table 2554a from the rear of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third rotator 2556, and rotates the central table 2554a forward. Moving the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d in order to be supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c again via the collection table 2554d. Second V winning opening 2008 or second opening at table 2554a So that the repeated until it is accepted in any of the loss port 2555.

  Accordingly, the game ball B is hit by the rotation of the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558, and is passed through the third sorting rotator 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. Since the game ball B is sent to the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are open, what happens when the game ball B is supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c? It is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict whether or not the game ball B is hit to the rear side with a certain strength, and the player's line of sight moves back and forth between the left table 2554b, the right table 2554c, and the center table 2554a. Can be entertained by being nailed to the playing ball B.

  Further, the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558, the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558 plays the game ball B. If conditions such as the timing of hitting, the timing of the third rotator 2556 during which the game ball B easily enters the center table 2554a, and the like are not satisfied, the game ball B is moved from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the center table 2554a. In addition to the above, depending on the strength of the hit of the game ball B by the projection 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution is performed on the rear side. Since it may pass through the middle rotating body 2556 and enter the right table 2554c or the left table 2554b on the opposite side, the projecting piece 25 of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 may be used. 7a or the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 makes it difficult to predict the movement of the game ball B when the game ball B is hit to the rear side, and the game ball B is placed on the central table 2554a. Depending on whether or not to enter, the player can be jarred, the player can be entertained, a premium feeling can be given to the central table 2554a, and the game ball B entering the central table 2554a can be provided. It is possible to entertain players with strong interest and interest. At this time, since the game ball B enters the central table 2554a through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution when the game ball B enters the central table 2554a. Depending on the position, the game ball B is sent to the center or the end in the width direction of the center table 2554a, and the game ball B can be guided in various directions at the center table 2554a. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on a simple route, to make it difficult for the player to get tired, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Then, when the game ball B that has entered the center table 2554a is received in the second V winning opening 2008 that is open near the front end of the center table 2554a, a privilege that gives the player an advantage (here, "big hit game") ), The player can be strongly requested that the game ball B, which has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, be accepted into the second V winning opening 2008, Depending on whether or not the player can be accepted in the second V-winning opening 2008, the player can be excitedly excited by receiving the second V-winning opening 2008, and can be distributed to the player in the third distribution. A strong interest can be given to the distribution of the game balls B by the device 2550, and the distribution of the game balls B can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, unless the game ball B supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is hit to some extent by the projection 2557a of the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the projection 2558a of the third sorting right rotator 2558, The third distributing rotator 2556 does not reach the rotating body 2556, and depending on the rotational position of the third distributing rotator 2556, does not enter the center table 2554a. If not received in either the V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the return from the front of the central table 2554a to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d is performed for a relatively long time. , The game ball B stays in the third sorting device 2550, and the ball in the conventional pachinko machine is Longer than a sorter as down, it is possible to entertain the distribution of game balls B, and reduction of the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, it is impossible for the player to predict how strong the game ball B is hit in the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558. The number of times that the game ball B is hit by the projection 2557a of the third sorting left-rotating body 2557 or the projection 2558a of the third sorting right-rotating body 2558 is not limited to one time, but is a complicated rolling path. Is passed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, so that the player strongly feels that the destination of the game balls B is selected by random assignment. Can be. Therefore, even if the time (distribution time) until the game ball B is received in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 in the third distribution device 2550 becomes long, the ball flows naturally. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and to enjoy the development by selecting a random destination (rolling destination). The player is bored with strong interest and interest in the game ball B. You can make it difficult.

  In addition, after a relatively long time, the game ball B rolls around the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, and is received by the third loss opening 2555 ( (Distributed), as described above, it is possible to make the player strongly feel that the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550 is random, so that there is simply no luck. As a result, the distribution result can be easily accepted, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed and lowering the interest.

  In addition, the game ball B moves back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c and circulates between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, so that the game ball B is Even if the time until it is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555 and the distribution is determined is long, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, the second V winning opening 2008 is provided. The expectation of accepting the game does not detract from the interest of the player, and it is possible to keep the player entertained, to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to enjoy the player sufficiently. Therefore, even if accepted by the third losing mouth 2555, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player. That.

  Furthermore, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a and rolled forward is not received in any of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, from the front end of the central table 2554a, Since the player enters the collection table 2554d and is guided to either the left or right outer left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the game ball B is guided to the desired left table 2554b or right table 2554c in the collection table 2554d. Whether or not the player is excited can make the movement of the game ball B entertain, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the projecting piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are configured to contact and hit the upper side of the center of the game ball B, When the game ball B is hit from the three-part left rotator 2557 or the third right rotator 2558, the game ball B can be hardly lifted from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out of the 2550. Also, the protrusion 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are made to project into the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with the same length as the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, the chance that the protrusion 2557a or the protrusion 2558a just meets the game ball B can be reduced, and the game ball B is unnecessarily hit hard and the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c (third sorting device 2550). Can be prevented from jumping out of the table, and the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a can easily pry the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be made difficult to enter the central table 2554a, and the left table 2554b The game ball B can be easily moved back and forth between the rear side and the front side on the right table 2554c.

  Further, in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, since the projection 2554i is provided at the front end portion, the game ball B is formed in a circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. Even if it tries to turn along the edge of the opening, it will come into contact with the projection 2554i on the way, and by contacting the projection 2554i, it is possible to play the game ball B from the edge of the opening to the front side or inside the opening. Can be prevented from jumping out of the edge of and being accepted by the third loss opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B is unnecessarily accepted by the third loss opening 2555 and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the protrusion 2554i prevents the game ball B from being received by the third loss opening 2555 and the second V winning opening 2008 around the edge of the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. Therefore, it is possible to make the probability of receiving the second V winning opening 2008 substantially the same as the designed one, and reduce the variation in the probability of receiving the second V winning opening 2008 for each pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reduce the number of pachinko machines 1 and make it difficult for the player to feel distrust.

  Further, a third sorting device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the center role 2500, and the rear side is raised with the center table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c arranged side by side. Since the third sorting device 2550 is inclined, the third sorting device 2550 is located below the height of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the center table 2554a and the left The table 2554b and the right table 2554c can be easily seen by the player, and the game balls B rolling on the center table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c can be easily seen, and the second V winning opening 2008 or the second It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B distributed to the three holes 2555.

  Further, since the center table 2554a is inclined so that the rear side is higher, the game ball B which has entered the rear side of the center table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 are located between the player and the player who is playing, it is determined whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B easier to understand and show to the player, and to make the player feel as if the game ball B is being drawn to the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the game table B is rolled forward by inclining the center table 2554a and the like so that the rear side is higher, the center table 2554a can be rolled in the left and right directions. Can be widened, the rolling path of the game ball B on the central table 2554a can be made more diversified, and the pachinko machine 1 can make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable. .

  Further, in the third sorting device 2550, first, the game balls B are supplied to the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and in order to allow the game balls B to be received in the second V winning opening 2008, Since the hitting of the game ball B by the third sorting right rotator 2558 is a necessary condition, when the third sorting right rotator 2558 or the like is stopped for some reason, the right table 2554c of the third sorting device 2550 is stopped. , The game ball B is supplied to the second V winning opening 2008 and the game ball B is not hit by the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558. The game ball B does not enter the table 2554a, and the illegal acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008 can be prevented.

  In addition, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 via the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 cause the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third It is possible to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the distribution right rotator 2558, and to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution rotator 2556 by the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563 via the transmission gear 2567. Therefore, it is detected that the rotation of the third sorting left rotating body 2557, the third sorting right rotating body 2558, the third sorting rotating body 2556, etc. has stopped for some reason, and the rotation has been stopped. Can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like.

  In addition, the rotation of the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571, which are being rotated by reducing the rotation of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558, are changed to the third distribution. The rotation of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 is detected by the minute left rotation detecting sensor 2564 and the third sorting right rotation detecting sensor 2565. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558 is increased, it is determined whether the third sorting left rotator 2557 or the third sorting right rotator 2558 is rotating. Since the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558 are reduced and rotated, Third distribution left rotating body 2557, third distribution Since the rotation speed is lower than that of the rotating body 2558, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is reliably detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. Thus, through the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571, the presence / absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558 can be detected.

  Further, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is increased (even if the rotation speed is increased), the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 or the right rotation detection gear 2571 is increased. Is made slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the detection cycle of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 is unnecessary. It is not necessary to shorten the period, the detection period can be set to an appropriate period, and an increase in the load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the rotation speeds of the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 are increased (increased). The third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 rotating at a high speed can surprise the player, and have a strong interest in the sorting of the game balls B by the third sorting device 2550. You can make it. In addition, by rotating the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 at high speed, the third sorting left rotator 2557 and the third sorting right rotator 2558 hit the game ball B. The timing of the game ball B can be made more difficult to predict, and the game ball B can be beaten even if the position of the game ball B is slightly different or the timing is shifted. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exerts the above-described operational effects.

  Further, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, no light is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the back surface provided near the periphery thereof is not displayed. The decoration of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the preceding stage unit 3200 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and The pachinko machine 1 is decorated with the back right decorative body 3213 to improve the appearance. In this normal state, when the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are illuminated and decorated, the outer peripheral side of the light guide plate 3102 can be illuminated and decorated in a front view. The light emitting decoration of the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and the interest of the player is the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right. It can be attracted to the decorative body 3213. On the other hand, when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and displayed in a normal state, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 becomes visible from the player side and the outer side. Since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are not luminescently decorated, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 appear dark, As a result, the first picture 3110 or the second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 looks brighter, and the interest of the player can be attracted to the first picture 3110 or the second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102.

  When the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and displayed, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are illuminated, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right are displayed. Since the decoration of the decorative body 3213 is combined with one pattern (special pattern), a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided in front of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Since the decoration 3213 is located on the front side of the second pattern 3120, the special pattern can be given a sense of depth, and the special pattern can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, so that the special pattern can be strongly attracted to the interest of the player, and the player can be entertained. It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 has a radiation pattern portion 3122 reaching the periphery of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 have a radiation pattern portion. Since the radiating decoration part 3212b and the radiating decoration part 3213b provided with the decoration continuous with 3122 are provided, in the back unit 3000, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and the back left decoration is provided. When the body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 (at least the radiating decorative portion 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b) are illuminated, the radiating pattern portion 3122 and the radiating decorative portion 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b appear to be continuous. Therefore, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b It is possible to further enhance the sense of unity, and to show a special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 to the player without discomfort, as described above. Such an operation and effect can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, as described above, the sense of unity of the special pattern can be enhanced by the radiating pattern part 3122 and the radiating decoration part 3212b and the radiating decoration part 3213b. By radiating and decorating the radiating decorative portion 3212b and the radiating decorative portion 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which the second pattern 3120 spreads outward, It can surprise the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on both left and right sides of the second picture 3120, the second picture 3120 is spread horizontally and looks like a special picture. A three-dimensional special pattern can be shown to the player, and the powerful special pattern can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the special pattern are inclined so as to protrude forward toward the outer peripheral side, the inside of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are inclined. , The light guide plate 3102 (second pattern 3120) at the back is seen to be recessed, and the sense of depth of the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 is further enhanced. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects.

  When the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed by the cocktail light on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the portion of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c in the radiation pattern portion 3122 and the like of the second pattern 3120 constitutes the cocktail light. Since the light is decomposed into light components and emits light in multiple colors, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (the first pattern 3110), thereby increasing the interest of the player. Can be attracted. More specifically, for example, when a yellow light composed of red light and green light as the cocktail light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, a portion of the second pattern 3120 excluding the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. Then, while the light is emitted in yellow, the yellow light is separated into red light and green light at the portion of the spectral light-emitting portion 3102c in the second picture 3120, and the light is radiated and glittered so that red and green are mixed. As a result, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and displayed at the portion emitting yellow light and the portion emitting red and green light in a mixed manner. On the other hand, when light of one of the three primary colors of light (for example, red light) is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the light may be further separated at the portion of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c in the second pattern 3120. Therefore, the second pattern 3120 emits light in the same color as the emitted light. As described above, the light emission mode of the second picture 3120 (first picture 3110) to be displayed by light emission can be changed by the color of the light radiated to the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, so that various light emission effects can be obtained. Can be performed, the player can be hardly bored, and the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c can be entertained by the player being shining in a plurality of colors, thereby providing the pachinko machine 1 with a higher effect. can do.

  Further, in the spectral light emitting unit 3102c, since the light is separated using the difference in the refractive index due to the difference in the color (wavelength) of light, for example, when yellow light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the player One point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks red, green, or yellow between red and green according to the difference in the position at which the second pattern 3120 is viewed. Then, one point of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c in the light guide plate 3102 is very small, so that even with a slight movement of the player, one point of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c looks red, green or red and green. Since the light appears to be yellow in between, the spectral light emitting unit 3102c appears to be shining in a plurality of colors, and the above-described effects can be obtained. For this reason, when white light including all three primary colors of light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the spectral light emitting portion 3102c appears to be rainbow-colored and glittering, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect having a high effect of the effect.

  Also, a spectral light emitting portion 3102c is provided in the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 which is continuous with the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. When the cocktail light is emitted from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the radiation pattern portion 3122 shines in a plurality of colors, so that the radiation pattern portion 3122 emits light from the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. It becomes a light emission mode similar to the decoration, and it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the radiating pattern portion 3122, the radiating decoration portion 3212b, and the radiating decoration portion 3213b, and reduce the sense of discomfort of the special pattern displayed integrally. The pachinko machine 1 can provide the player with more fun.

  Further, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 having the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the game panel 1100, and the outer periphery of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100. On the front side of the frame-shaped unit base 3101 holding the front side, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effecting unit 3200 are attached so as to surround the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 via the back box 3010. Therefore, in a normal state, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can be seen through the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the like. Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is visible inside the back right decorative body 3213, when the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the first image 3110 or the second image is displayed on the light guide plate 3102. Even when 3120 is not displayed by light emission, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. At the same time, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are illuminated and decorated, so that they can be seen. Taseru it can, it is possible to attract the interest of the player.

  At this time, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Even when the decorative body 3213 is illuminated and decorated, the light from the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 does not pass through the light guide plate 3102 and is radiated to the front. Light from the luminous decoration of the upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can reduce the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 from shining and floating, and can be reduced. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 3102 until the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are brought as close as possible to each other. Irregular reflection of light with the device 1600 can be suppressed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shine and float due to the diffuse reflection. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 3102, and thus the LEDs of the first design substrate 3103 and the second design substrate 3104 emit light, and the first design of the light guide plate 3102 is emitted. By causing the 3110 and the second pattern 3120 to emit light, the player becomes aware of the presence of the light guide plate 3102 for the first time, and can greatly surprise the player, and may have something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by assuming that there is a game, and it is possible to entertain the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 illuminated and displayed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest, and to produce the effect of the light guide plate 3102. Can be fully exhibited.

  In addition, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate is formed by the LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104. Even when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of 3102 are illuminated and displayed, the light does not brightly illuminate the front surfaces of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the light is not displayed. Through the light plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 do not show through, and the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be luminously displayed in a good state. Therefore, unlike the related art, the back of the light guide plate is brightened by the luminous display of the pattern of the light guide plate, so that the luminous display pattern does not become difficult to see. The picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be viewed and enjoyed in a good condition, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In addition, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, which can be luminously decorated, are attached to the front side of the unit base 3101 so as to surround the periphery of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body is provided. The body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the periphery of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 luminescently displayed on the light guide plate 3102. The pattern 3120 can be complemented to strongly attract the interest of the player, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest, and also to provide decoration on the back. The body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are appropriately light-emitting decorated, so that the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back Colorful effect in the decorative body 3213 and the light guide plate 3102 can show the player and it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, a back upper decorative body 3211, a back left decorative body 3212, and a back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, and the decorations of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the light guide plate 3102. Since the second pattern 3120 is related to (or is continuous with) the second pattern 3120 displayed by light emission, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen integrally. In addition, the second pattern 3120 to be illuminated and displayed can be made larger, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 outside the second pattern 3120 are located in front of the light guide plate 3102. Thus, a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and the second pattern 3120 can be seen three-dimensionally. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to make the player think that something is good, thereby increasing the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, irregular reflection of light between the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 can be suppressed, as described above. It is possible to reduce the effect that the front surface of the effect display device 1600 shines due to diffuse reflection, making it difficult to see the effect image, and the effect image can be visually recognized in a good state. Therefore, both the effect of the light guide plate 3102 by the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 and the effect by the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be shown to the player in a good state, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. In addition, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be more easily seen, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image (for example, an imitation pattern) of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and displayed by the light guide plate 3102, or displays the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern of the light guide plate 3102. By displaying an effect image that is integrated with the two patterns 3120, it is possible to present a more versatile effect to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  The unit base 3101 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 with the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 interposed therebetween, and the rear side of the unit base 3101. Since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate 3102 via the back box 3010, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the game panel 1100 are provided. In addition, since the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is closed by the effect display device 1600, when handling the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (the pachinko machine 1 or the game board 5), the operator also needs the rear side from the front side. Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 can be hardly touched, and the light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from being stained or damaged.

  Therefore, at the time of manufacturing, the light guide plate 3102 can be hardly stained or scratched without working with great care so that the light guide plate 3102 is not stained or scratched. The directing unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) can be easily handled, the workability during manufacturing can be improved, and the occurrence of defective products during manufacturing due to scratches can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Increase can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall or when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained in the game hall, it is difficult for the worker to touch the light guide plate 3102 and the light guide plate 3102 is hardly stained or damaged. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the present pachinko machine 1 in a state where the light guide plate 3102 is free from dirt and scratches. The second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the transparent center role 2500 is attached via the flange 2503 to the gaming panel 1100 provided with the gaming area 5a in which the gaming balls B circulate on the front side. At the same time, a frame-shaped rear frame 2504 is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 from the flange 2503 to the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the rear frame 2504 has a fixed cross-sectional shape. Since the decoration in which the unevenness extending in the front-rear direction is provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the frame is given, light is irregularly refracted by the lens function of the decoration, and the opening 1102 is passed through the rear frame 2504. The inner peripheral surface looks unclear. In addition, the decorative portion composed of a plurality of irregularities is provided by the LED provided on the pachinko machine 1, the light from the effect display device 1600, the light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the other pachinko machines. The rear frame 2504 appears to shine shiningly by reflecting light from the camera. In this manner, the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be made difficult to see through the rear frame portion 2504 due to the decoration lens function and reflection effect of the rear frame portion 2504, and the deterioration of appearance can be suppressed. it can.

  The outside of the front frame 2502 of the center role 2500 is a game area 5a through which the game balls B circulate, the center role 2500 is transparent, and the rear frame 2504 is substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. As a result, the size of the inner periphery of the rear frame 2504 approaches the size of the opening 1102, and the area in which the rear of the game panel 1100 can be seen can be at least as large as the opening 1102, The rear visibility can be improved. Therefore, through the inside of the frame of the center role 2500, the range in which the front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, and the like provided behind the game panel 1100 can be seen can be made wider than before. Thus, the front effect unit 3200 and the like can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center role 2500, and the effect of the front effect unit 3200 and the like can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, the front frame 2502 of the center role item 2500 can clearly divide the front surface of the game panel 1100 (the game area 5a) into an area where the game balls B circulate (outside the frame) and an area where the game ball B does not circulate (inside the frame). Because it is possible, the back front rendering unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the rendering display device 1600, etc., provided behind the gaming panel 1100, play the game balls B flowing in the gaming area 5a outside the frame of the center role 2500. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a without impairing the visibility and can suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Furthermore, as described above, the decoration provided with the plurality of irregularities on the rear frame portion 2504 allows the LED provided on the pachinko machine 1 and the light from the effect display device 1600, etc., and the game in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the light in the hall, the light from other gaming machines such as pachinko machines, and the like can be reflected, the rear frame 2504 and the front frame 2502 of the center role object 2500 appear to be shining, and the pachinko machine can be seen. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can improve the appearance of the machine 1 and attract the player's attention and has a high appealing power.

  Further, as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to be seen from the player side by the rear frame portion 2504 of the center role 2500, so that the opening 1102 of the opening Even if a plywood having an unsatisfactory inner peripheral surface (cut surface) is used, deterioration of appearance can be suppressed. Therefore, a relatively inexpensive plywood can be used as the game panel 1100, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  By the way, when the rear frame 2504 of the center role 2500 is separated from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 by a certain distance, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 seen through the transparent rear frame 2504 becomes the rear frame. Since the player looks displaced with respect to the portion 2504, the player can easily notice the presence of the inner peripheral surface. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear frame 2504 of the center role 2500 is close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100, the opening 1102 seen through the transparent rear frame 2504. Of the rear frame 2504 can be seen to be substantially coincident with the rear frame 2504, and the rear frame 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be illusioned to be integrated with each other. By making it difficult to notice the existence of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Also, since the rear frame 2504 of the center role item 2500 is close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 seen through the transparent rear frame 2504 is formed by the rear frame. It can be seen that the rear frame 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 are integrated with each other. By making it difficult to notice the presence of, the deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 in the back front rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 for emitting and decorating the rear frame 2504 behind the game panel 1100 are provided, the first LED 3222a and the The rear frame portion 2504 of the center role 2500 can be illuminated and decorated with the back left decorative body 3212 by the light emission of the second LED 3222b, so that the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is difficult to see by the luminous decoration of the rear frame portion 2504. In addition, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are appropriately lit according to the game situation (game state) to illuminate and decorate the rear frame portion 2504, so that a light emission effect can be shown to the player. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for emitting and decorating the rear frame 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the LED is mounted between the rear frame 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Since the rear frame 2504 can be made as close as possible to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 as compared with the case where the decorative substrate is provided, the frame is not passed through the transparent center role 2500. The range that can be seen through the inside can be made wider, and the rear visibility can be made better.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the light for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 of the center role 2500 is forward. Therefore, the light of the first LED 3222a and the light of the second LED 3222b can easily reach the eyes of the player, and the rear frame 2504 can be lightened and decorated more brightly. Since the plurality of concaves and convexes forming the decoration are extended in the front-rear direction, the light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b causes the rear frame portion 2504 to emit and decorate the first LED 3222a. And the light from the second LED 3222b can be guided to the front end of the rear frame portion 2504, 2500 Front and front frame portion 2502 also becomes possible to emit light decorations, it is possible to improve the appearance.

  In addition, since the rear frame 2504 has a decoration in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction with a constant cross-sectional shape are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the frame, the center role 2500 is formed by resin molding. When removing the center role 2500 from the die, the center role 2500 can be removed from the die simply by pulling the center role 2500 in the front-rear direction. Such an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the center role 2500 in the front side of the gaming panel 1100 having the opening 1102 penetrating front and rear is partitioned so that the game ball B does not enter inside. In the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501, at least a vertically extending portion and a flange portion 2503 extending inward from a rear end of a portion located outside the opening 1102 are formed as a game. Since the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 by being attached to the panel 1100, at the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends inward in the front frame portion 2502, nothing extends outside (the game area 5a side). Not that. Therefore, it is possible to implant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame 2502 of the center role 2500, so that a substantial game area 5a is provided in the front frame 2502. The game area 5a can be enlarged even if the size of the front frame portion 2502 is the same.

  In the game area 5a, in an area (left side) outside a vertically extending portion on the left side of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 in the center role item 2500, an area where the game ball B mainly flows downward. Since the flange portion 2503 extending inward is provided in the relevant portion of the front frame portion 2502, the width in the left-right direction of the area where the game ball B circulates downward (the outer left area of the center role 2500). Can be increased. Therefore, since the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the area allow the game ball B to flow down while largely moving in the left-right direction, it is possible to impart a complicated movement to the game ball B, The flow time of the ball B can be lengthened or increased, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, a flange 2503 is extended inward from a portion of the front frame 2502 located outside the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the flange 2503 is attached to the game area 1100. Since the game balls B extend to the side, the game balls B always flow on the game panel 1100, and the game balls B can flow in a stable state without any strange behavior. To be more specific, for example, a flange attached to the game panel in the center role is extended to the inside of the opening of the game panel, and the peripheral wall is extended forward from the inner end of the flange. By doing so, it is conceivable to increase the game area outside the peripheral wall. However, in the case described above, since the gaming panel does not exist behind the portion located inside the opening in the flange portion, when the game medium flows (rolls) through the portion in the flange portion. In this case, the portion may vibrate, behave differently from the game medium flowing on the game panel, or the flange may be fatigued and damaged at an early stage due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the game balls B always flow on the game panel 1100, the game balls B flow in a stable state without strange behavior. To prevent the player from being distrusted by the strange behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball B does not circulate on the flange portion 2503 extended to the inside. In addition, due to the distribution of the game balls B, the relevant portion of the flange portion 2503 is not fatigued and damaged at an early stage.

  In addition, since the flange portion 2503 extends inward from the portion of the front frame portion 2502 that is located outside the opening portion 1102, the flange portion 2503 can be securely attached to the game panel 1100, as described above. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having the function and effect.

  Also, a part of the flange portion 2503 that attaches the center role 2500 to the game panel 1100 extends inward from the front frame portion 2502, and the game ball B circulates on the portion of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the transparent flange portion 2503 is not stained or damaged by the circulation of the game ball B, so that the transparency is not deteriorated. Thus, the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the transparent center part can be prevented. The effect of the product 2500 can be continuously exhibited.

  Further, at the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends inward in the front frame portion 2502 of the center role item 2500, the front frame portion 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame by the flange portion 2503. Even if the game ball B contacts (contacts) the relevant portion of the front frame 2502, the strength of the front frame 2502 can be maintained by the flange 2503, and the deformation of the front frame 2502 (center role 2500). And breakage can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion can be increased by the attachment portion, when the game medium comes into contact, the peripheral wall portion is elastically deformed, and the game medium is elastically deformed like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Playing can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium flowing in the game area from making an unusual movement different from the conventional one by abutting on the peripheral wall portion, thereby preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame 2502 can be increased by the flange 2503, the center role 2500 can be maintained at the same strength and rigidity as the conventional product, and the center role 2500 can be maintained. Can be prevented from being deformed when the resin is molded from a mold and removed from the mold, and the yield can be increased to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, since the center role 2500 is transparent, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the front frame portion 2502 and the like, so that the player is given an illusion that the game area 5a in which the game ball B circulates is large. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 in which the game area 5a looks large can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

  Further, since the center role 2500 is transparent, light from an LED or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from another pachinko machine, By reflecting the etc., the center role 2500 can be seen to glitter, and the pachinko machine 1 which can improve the appearance in the game area 5a and attract the player's interest is provided. be able to.

  Further, since the center role 2500 is transparent, even if the front frame 2502 is positioned outside the edge of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the front frame 2502 is at the same position as the edge of the opening 1102. As a result, the game area 5a in which the game balls B circulate can be made larger than it actually is.

  Further, as described above, since the game area 5a can be enlarged by extending the flange portion 2503 inward, the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is enlarged, and the position where the flange portion 2503 is extended is determined. By devising, it is possible to suppress the game area 5a from becoming smaller while increasing the inside of the frame. Therefore, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the front rendering unit 3200, the rendering display device 1600, and the like provided in the back of the gaming panel are placed in a favorable condition from the player through the center portion 2500 and the opening 1102. To entertain both the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a and the production by the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the back front rendering unit 3200, the rendering display device 1600, and the like. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the main decoration portion capable of transmitting only two of the three primary colors of light to the back left decorative body 3212 (the back right decorative body 3213) in the back front rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. Since the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) has a predetermined color, the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) is colored in a predetermined color. Even if the body 3213) is not decorated with light emission, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be made to stand out by the color of the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a), and the back left decorative board 3222 (back) The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) which are full color LEDs on the right decoration substrate 3223) are It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 high player's interest to be able attract an appeal even when you do not have light. When a game is played in the game area 5a by the operation of the player, the plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) and the Since the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) appropriately emits light and the back left decorative body 3212 (the back right decorative body 3213) is light-emitting decorated, the back left decorative body 3212 (the back right decorative body 3213) is illuminated. ) Can be shown beautifully, it can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can make the player aware of the change in the game situation and think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is illuminated and decorated, the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) made of a full-color LED corresponding to the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) is mainly used. Since the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element that emits a color that does not transmit through the decorative part 3212a (the main decorative part 3213a) are connected and short-circuited, the light emitting element does not emit light due to malfunction. Therefore, due to the malfunction of the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) corresponding to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), the radiation decoration portion 3212b (adjacent to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a)). Since the radiant decoration part 3213b) can be prevented from being luminously decorated with an unintended color, the back left decorative body 3212 (the back right decorative body 3213) can be illuminated with the intended color without fail, and The decorative effect by the luminous decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) composed of a full-color LED corresponding to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), one of the full-color LEDs connects the anode and the cathode of a light emitting element of a color that does not emit light. And short-circuiting, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged in the light emitting element. The charged static electricity adversely affects other light emitting elements in the same package, and the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) is damaged. Damage can be prevented, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be luminously decorated in a favorable state.

  In addition, since the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light, the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a). ), The second LED 3222b (second LED 3223b) composed of a full-color LED corresponding to the radiating decorative portion 3212b (radiating decorative portion 3213b) is a color that does not pass through the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a). When the light is emitted, the radiating decorative portion 3212b (the radiating decorative portion 3213b) adjacent to the main decorative portion 3212a (the main decorative portion 3213a) can be brightly illuminated. Therefore, the main decorative portion can be provided without providing a light-blocking partition (for example, a reflector) between the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) and the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223). 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) and the adjacent radiation decoration portion 3212b (radiation decoration portion 3213b) can be clearly separated and light-emitting decoration can be performed, and the light-emitting decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be provided. , The increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the surface of the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) is white, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a) mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) are used. And the light from the second LED 3223b) can be reflected by the surface of the white back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223), and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be made to emit light more brightly. Can be done. Further, since the surface of the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) is white, it is colored like the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) in the rear left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). It is possible to improve the color development of the part where the image is displayed, to make it easier to exert the decorative effect of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213), and to make the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) more attractive. , The back left decorative board 3222 (the back right decorative board 3223) can be made inconspicuous from the player side (front), thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance.

  Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), all the first LEDs 3222a are mounted. And the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) can be a full-color LED, so that all the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (the back right decorative board 3223) are provided. By making the (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) full-color LEDs of the same type (model number), the cost of manufacturing the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) can be reduced by unifying the components. Pachinko machine 1 The increase of such costs can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a into which the game balls B are driven, the effect display device 1600 provided at the center, and the first starting port capable of receiving the game balls B. 2002 and the center role 2500 as a special distribution area in which the game ball B received in the role right prize opening 2006 of the rear right decoration 3213 of the back front effecting unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 adjacent to each other can flow. A first sorting device 2530 and a sub status display portion 3501 of a sub status display 3500 that is continuous with the logo decoration portion 3211b of the back upper decorative body 3211 are provided, and the game is operated by the player. When the game ball B driven into the area 5a is received in the first starting port 2002 (second starting port 2004), a special lottery result (first special lottery connection) is performed on the main control board 1310. And the second special lottery result) is performed, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the special lottery result selected. Therefore, in order to obtain the privilege, the player aims at the first starting port 2002 for the player. The operation of hitting the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 (second starting port 2004) and the special lottery result is drawn, the lottery is performed in the effect display device 1600 provided in the center of the game area 5a. In accordance with the special lottery result, a symbol (also referred to as a main symbol) indicating the special lottery result is displayed, and the sub-state LED 3510 of the back right decorative board 3223 emits light as appropriate, and the light is emitted by the light guide pin 3520. The light is guided to the sub state display section 3501, and a sub symbol is displayed on the sub state display section 3501.

  Therefore, in addition to allowing the player to recognize the special lottery result selected by the main symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub status display unit 3501 (sub status display 3500) on which a predetermined decoration is formed Also, in the case of sub-symbols that indicate the special lottery result that has been drawn, the sub-symbol is displayed even if the display of the main symbol is overlooked or the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol is not well understood. By watching, the player can recognize the result of the special lottery selected.

  In this sub state display portion 3501, since a predetermined decoration (the same decoration as the logo decoration portion 3211b) is formed, the display of the sub symbol makes the decoration appear to be light-emitting decoration. When the game ball B is received in the one start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is drawn, the light emission mode of the decoration changes. The player can be made to recognize that the light emission mode has changed in accordance with the special lottery result selected, and can recognize the sub-design (indicative of the special lottery result selected). At this time, since the sub symbol indicating the special lottery result selected in the sub status display portion 3501 is decorated, the sub symbol does not look inorganic like a conventional pachinko machine, and the sub symbol is decorated. The sub state display section 3501 (the sub state display 3500), and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  Also, a first LED 3223a and a second LED 3223b for light emitting decoration of the back right decorative body 3213 on the back right decorative board 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying the sub symbol is mounted, and a first distribution device 2530. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating etc. is further mounted, the back right decorative body 3213 is illuminated and decorated, or the first distribution device 2530 is brightened so that the game balls B in circulation can be easily seen. can do. Further, compared to the case where the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on separate substrates, only one back right decorative substrate 3223 suffices. Because of the secured space, the back right decorative body 3213, the first sorting device 2530, and the like can be enlarged, and another decorative body, an accessory, and the like can be arranged. The pachinko machine 1 which can entertain a person can be provided.

  Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided to the sub-state display section 3501 by the light guide pins 3520, the sub-state display section 3501 is separated from the back right decorative board 3223. Even if it is provided in the position where it is located, the light can be guided to the sub state display portion 3501 by the light guide pin 3520 in a favorable state, and the sub symbol can be displayed. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the portion where the sub symbol is displayed can be set to a position corresponding to the shape of the decoration. The design can be blended into the decoration to improve the appearance.

  Also, the board surface on which the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c on the back right decorative board 3223 are mounted is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). Since the right decorative substrate 3223 is provided, and the side surface in the thickness direction of the back right decorative substrate 3223 faces the front-back direction, it is possible to make the back right decorative substrate 3223 difficult to see from the front, The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved by preventing the appearance of the decorative substrate 3223 from being deteriorated.

  Further, since the surface of the back right decorative board 3223 is white, light from the first LED 3223 a and the second LED 3223 b mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 and the light from the third LED 3223 c are transmitted to the white back right decorative board 3223. The light can be reflected by the surface, the back right decorative body 3213 can be lighted and decorated more brightly, and the first distribution device 2530 of the center role 2500 can be illuminated more brightly. It can be made inconspicuous from the front, and deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the back right decorative board 3223 is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 of the center role 2500, the first LED 3223a And the second LED 3223b is mounted, and the third LED 3223c is mounted on the other substrate surface, and the light from each is not blocked by the back right decorative substrate 3223 and irradiated to the opposite side, When the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b emit light, the first distribution device 2530 is illuminated. The body 3213 and the first distributing device 2530 can be separately illuminated and illuminated in a clear state, and can be illuminated, so that the sound without discomfort is generated. It is possible to show an effect on the player, the presentation effect by the light emission effect can be exhibited sufficiently, the reduction of interest to delight the player can be suppressed.

  Since the special winning area 2006 and the first distribution device 2530 are provided in the special distribution area, when the third LED 3223c of the back right decorative board 3223 emits light, the special articles provided in the special distribution area are provided. Since the winning opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530 are brightly illuminated, the player's interest can be directed to the accessory winning opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530. May be opened to accept the game ball B, and the player can perform the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the bonus winning opening 2006. When the gaming ball B is received and sent to the first sorting device 2530 when the bonus winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first sorting device 2530 selects the gaming ball B according to the special lottery result. Since it is distributed to either the first loss opening 2535 side or the first Atari passage 2536 side, it is possible to make the player throb and throb depending on whether it is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, the third LED 3223c emits light to illuminate the first sorting device 2530, so that the game ball B in the first sorting device 2530 can be easily seen. You can enjoy sorting.

  Further, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 in the sub state LED 3510 are a full color LED in which three light emitting elements of red, green, and blue are combined into one, and then the anode of the blue light emitting element And the cathode are connected to short-circuit, and the anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element that does not need to emit light are connected and short-circuited. No electricity is supplied to the element, and no light is emitted in the color (blue). Therefore, a sub-symbol is not displayed in a color that does not normally emit light, so that it is possible to avoid giving a player distrust, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. it can.

  Further, since the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, and in one full-color LED, the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of an unused color (blue) are connected and short-circuited. In this way, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged in the device, prevent the charged static electricity from adversely affecting other light emitting elements in the same package and damage the full-color LED, and ensure that Can be displayed.

  Further, in one full-color LED, since the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of the color not used are connected and short-circuited, it is not necessary to connect the light emitting element to an LED driver for driving (light emitting) the LED. Therefore, the number of LED driver channels can be reduced by the number of light-emitting elements that are short-circuited (the anode and the cathode are connected). Therefore, the number of LED drivers is reduced with respect to the number of full-color LEDs to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, or by driving another LED using an extra channel in the LED driver, the LED driver can be used. It can be used and used effectively without waste.

  In addition, a full-color LED is used as the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512, and a full-color LED is also used for the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 includes the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be constituted by one or more guide passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520, after turning by 90 degrees, twisting by 90 degrees in the opposite direction shows the same arrangement of entrances and exits, but is not limited to this. Instead, the arrangement of the entrances and the arrangement of the exits may be twisted so as to be different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to be spiral.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are provided with the opening 426a and the opening 435a penetrating in the front and rear, respectively, and the guides are connected to the opening 426a and the opening 435a. The optical axis 427a, the optical axis 428a, the optical axis 429a, the optical axis 436a, and the optical axis 437a are shown as being inserted therethrough. At the opening 426a and the opening 435a of the decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, a concave portion is provided that is recessed from the rear, and the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft are provided in the recess. The portion 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, after forming the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 without the opening 426a and the opening 435a, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a. The light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a may be extended forward to the rear surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Thus, while the surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are made to be neat surfaces without the opening 426a and the opening 435a, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, Spot light can be emitted in a spot shape by the optical axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the radiation pattern 3122 is provided on the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and the radiation decoration 3212b and the radiation pattern 3212b that are continuous with the radiation pattern 3122 are provided on the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. Although the decoration part 3213b is provided to display one large pattern by the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b, the present invention is not limited to this. The light guide plate curved so that the right and left ends protrude forward may be provided without the 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. This allows the light guide plate to emit a predetermined pattern to emit light, so that a special pattern whose outer peripheral side projects forward with respect to the center side can be displayed by light emission. A high special pattern can be displayed by light emission, and an extremely strong impact can be given to the player. In addition, since the light guide plate provided in the conventional pachinko machine is not curved but flat, the curved light guide plate can greatly surprise the player, and the player's interest Can be strongly attracted to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, it is desirable that the light guide plate be curved in an arc shape or an elliptical arc shape centered on the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 173 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 175. FIG. 177 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. 178 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process, FIG. 179 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a set value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of an initial value update type counter, main control-side power-on processing, main control-side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used in the game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a hit determination initial value used to determine the initial value of this special random number A determined random number, a reach determining random number used for determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variable displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 for generating a big hit game state. A symbol random number for use in determining a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol (determination of a hit type) derived and displayed on a symbol display, and an initial value of the symbol random number. Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open or close a movable piece capable of accepting the game ball B in the second starting port 2004, An initial symbol determination random number for use in determining an initial value of a random number for determination and a normal symbol used for determining a variable display pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on a normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a symbol variation display pattern and the like are prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After successively extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range, and completing extraction of all values within the predetermined numerical range, once again extracting one value within the predetermined numerical range, the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number toward a maximum value, and then counts up from a minimum value toward a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The normal symbol determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of power-on, or when various types of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control-side power-on processing described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information as a numerical value and the sum is equal to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). In the case of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, for example, when the main control MPU 1310a normally clears the random number, the main control MPU 1310a reads the ID from the built-in nonvolatile RAM. The code is extracted, and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which updates the random number for symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the initial value determination random number for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. By doing so, a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure are taken to prevent the analysis from being performed.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for ordinary symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain the game ball B paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit value match, the ID code is unique to identify the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if a momentary stop is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball B is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed and the game ball B is moved to the second starting opening 2004. A game state that can be accepted cannot be generated.

[9-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a has a circuit configuration such that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. For example, it indicates an address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control-side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access permission (step S10). Update of the main control built-in RAM can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S14). In this determination, while the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines to perform RAM clear and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated. Note that, in the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination in step S14, since the time is extremely short, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  When determining in step S14 that the main control MPU 1310a has operated the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S14, when determining that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the game information related to the game such as the probability variation, the unpaid prize ball, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag indicates whether or not various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) are to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various types of information are deleted and a value of 0 when various types of information are not deleted. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts a detection signal from the body frame release switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a setting key into the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) in the clockwise direction, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Is turned on, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, and sets the setting key switch 1311a in response to the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame release switch, while it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied. Then, by determining from the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, when determining that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area described later). Is a flag indicating whether the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation is permitted or not, and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to a value of 1 when the change is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the change of the set value is not permitted. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby processing. At the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby processing, the payout control board 633 boots up in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can be received.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an input of a power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when the setting change of the set value is permitted and a value 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted.

  In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. Is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when erasing various information and the value 0 when not erasing various information. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM assuming that the values are numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains various types of information, game sum information such as a checksum value (sum value) and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in a main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the first ON operation by being turned 60 degrees clockwise, the main control-side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch in the above-described determination in step S18, and sets the setting key based on the signal of the setting key ON. By determining that the switch 1311a is set to ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. In order to set, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is determined to be the value 1 in the above-described determination in step S25, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change processing in step S37 described later is performed. Subsequently, in the processing of step S38 described later, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control built-in RAM. To release the RAM error by clearing has become possible to proceed a game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As another method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The main control-side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the above-described determination in step S14, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various types of information are to be erased. By clearing the game, the game can be progressed by canceling the RAM error (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the determination of step S30, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display of step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When there is a notification that there is an abnormality (or cannot be trusted) in the content stored in the first RAM error release method and the second RAM error release method It can be done by. Accordingly, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control-side power-off process described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when permitting the setting change of the setting value. Perform (step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but based on a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311, a pressing operation of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed. Each time, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the enter key from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The changed setting value is determined on the basis of the signal of (1) and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, the main control MPU 1310a Are cleared except for the specific area in all the areas (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is always Are cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the “specific area” is the number of balls of the game balls B collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a defined in the game board 5 and the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored. And an area exclusively for out-ball counting in which the counting result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value to be changed in the setting change processing described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball count processing described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of balls is stored.

  The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side When the power-off process has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the random number for symbol-per-pattern determination is updated based on the extracted ID code. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination described above. Set to the determined random number.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to a value 0 which is an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register "). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a) is provided until the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs a test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and acquiring, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit and the like are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined values are determined one after another. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted. Are extracted one after another without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and outputs the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are divided into a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. To memorize. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information and various kinds of commands corresponding to the various kinds of information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. You. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In this non-hit random number update processing, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there has been an input of a power failure notice signal. Steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs the interrupt disable setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-described various information including game information and other information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting of prohibition of RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In the infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. When the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and executes the main control-side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control-side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control-side power-off processing is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the power is reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the processing of step S38, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  If the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, if the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the processing of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, the information is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the setting value is changed and determined. When the setting change that can be performed is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the business of the game hall ends, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, the probability variation (probability)). In such a case, it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the start of the next business. Therefore, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall operates the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the pachinko machine. Further, when the setting value is determined to be changed, if the setting change process is performed, (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed is obtained. It is necessary to delete (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM, as described above, in addition to changing the set value, Since this key is an important key that can be used to check the set value, etc., possession is limited to a limited number of persons, including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to two or three persons. Is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall can store the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). Clear switch 13 By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing portion is pressed in 0f, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, the problem in the absence of the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced Will be described.

  As described above, the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs and power is cut off from the island facilities of the game hall. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even when the power from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the island of the game hall can be operated. The power-off process on the main control side can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power outage or momentary blackout occurs and an island facility in the game hall is provided. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware component such as an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control-side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. That is, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a clerk or the like of the game hall when the power is restored and there is no intention to display the RAM clear by the clerk or the like of the game hall. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thereby, the progress of the game cannot be performed. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the progress of the game cannot be performed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main award ball number information output determination counter or the like). Can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) For storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 as the processing and the main control side power-off processing constituted by the infinite loop, the main control board 1310 When the main control MPU 1310 a restarts, the calculation result of the checksum in step S 28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S 64). Therefore, it is not necessary to initialize the game information immediately before the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure or the power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the content of the main control built-in RAM by the main control built-in WDT. Can be restarted again without any update of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined in step S24. Returning again, as long as the remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game in.

  By preventing the progress of the game from being performed by such software, the steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52. The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the main prize ball number information output determination) is prevented by setting and stopping the progress to a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. Various types of information including information indicating the value of the counter for the device) can be prevented from being updated. When the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to such a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the main prize ball number information output determination And other information including information indicating the value of the counter for the main control) and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and The other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter) can be divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware so as not to be changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. In order to convey, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating a driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, Next, a description will be given of a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, a big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power outage occurs while the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and thereafter the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. The state is shifted from the state closed by the member to the state opened.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power outage occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the terminal, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state according to the probability and the time saving state. It is not possible to display at all which round. That is, for example, the game winning ball B enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of the game balls B entering the special winning opening 2005 is mainly used. Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the ball of the game ball B entering the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (ie, what round) in the jackpot game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 when, for example, ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening 1 closing display command instructing that the state changes from the closed state to the closed state (that is, closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 between rounds). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to open the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. (That is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Also, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and is in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a game that the movable piece is open, The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of a screen (a screen to be conveyed to the user) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to perform the second start. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the mouth 2004 is open, and the power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure occurs, so that the driving of the starting port solenoid 2412 is started to move the movable piece. So that the migrating second start hole 2004 is operated to the state for closing.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power restoration. Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the game can be returned to the second starting port 2004, so that the game state can be accepted. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen informing the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball B is transferred to the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the game state can be accepted. In such a case, the game state is returned to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration, in which the game ball B can be accepted. That the game is instructed to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored (that is, a screen that instructs the player to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004). Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot know what game the player plays.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command, A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state, When an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored after that, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member. Since the transition to the state can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating the number of the round). Cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2 The screen for notifying that the special winning opening 2005 has been opened by the opening / closing member by starting the drive of No. 14 (for example, “Big hit. The big winning opening is open. A screen telling the player to enter the game to enter the ball.) Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is returned to the large winning opening after the power is restored. In 2005, it is possible to instruct a game to enter the game ball B, and for example, in the above-described example, the game state is such that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored after that, the driving of the starting port solenoid 2412 is started and the movable piece is opened as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen that informs the user that the second starting port 2004 has been opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port. Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is returned to the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. It is possible to instruct a game to make the ball B enter.

  Thus, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 to return to the peripheral control board 1510 in detail. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison judgment, the values of the checksums must not match, and in step S38, the values are always cleared except for a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information classified as power-on. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball are generated by creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, that is, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the main control timer interrupt processing described later, a power-on state command is transmitted first, a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then a power-on main prize ball number is transmitted. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command is such that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the RAM is cleared, information indicating the fact and the power-on (including power-on, power-recovery in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs in addition to power-on) are described above. Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And the information shown. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of the work. What kind of game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine)) in which a probability variation occurs in the performed state.

  In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line.

  For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the works of a plurality of types is mixed. With the mixture of 1310, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In step S50, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs.

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by looking at the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[9-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on processing shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank of the above. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the process of saving each register on the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits the time in which the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol variable display pattern determined in the ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands are normally received by the payout control board 633 is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control MPU 1310a includes a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. , The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the detection signal from the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second A detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 2515, a detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 2518, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 (or an out opening left sensor 3032 and an out opening right sensor 3033), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. , Operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), Detection signal from door frame opening switch The payout control board 633 sends a detection signal from the body frame release switch, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the out sensor 664, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Are read from the payout control board 633 that informs the user of the normal reception, and are stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information. When the detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start-up sensor 2402 are read, respectively, a start-up winning command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002, a start-up winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is detected, the start port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state is input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the case where the vacant terminal processing is performed). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, the game ball B is treated as having no incoming ball or as having the input ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those in which the unused terminal processing is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison by performing the comparison and the reading twice for comparing the second to fourth times, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. Because it is possible to detect, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first C The detection signal from the opening sensor 2516, the detection signal from the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 2518, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, the RAM clear An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the switch, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button 1311b, and a signal from the out sensor 664. It is possible to increase the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs the payout control board 633 that the detection signal and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later are normally received.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an unused terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring processing, information obtained in the switch input processing in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing is applied among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Perform based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display for notifying that a failure has occurred in a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described symbol random numbers are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hitting random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random numbers are random numbers related to the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the hit random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol determination random number, the initial random number for collision determination is updated by the hit random number update processing. The normal symbol determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control-side power-on process (main control-side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, but every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the present routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control-side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for initial value determination for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a detection signal is input from the out-opening left sensor 3032 to form a game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out mouth left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008 provided in the game machine, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls B collected by the out mouth 1008 is set to the value. In addition to performing an operation of adding 1 (incrementing), a detection signal is input from the out-port right sensor 3033, and the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 is formed. Is detected by the out mouth right sensor 3033, the counting of the number of game balls B collected by the out mouth 1008 is counted. The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball number counting process, when the out mouth left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008, and the out mouth right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B collected by the out mouth 1008 , An operation of adding the value 2 to the value of the collection ball counter is performed. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 as an out ball counting dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. And the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a issues a ball collection command notifying that the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches ten. It is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value of the collection ball counter by 1 to the value of the collection ball. The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area to create a prize ball command for paying out the game ball B based on the input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Or a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the substrates. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the special winning opening 2005 and enters, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. , The main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output in order to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is performed. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command that is classified into other items is created to convey that effect, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main award ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above and based on the input information, that is, a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003 provided in the gaming board 5, Based on the game balls B that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning ports provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the special winning port 2005. The game ball B to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing in step S108. ing. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. Is read from the input information storage area described above, the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and a value indicating the added number of balls is a value. When the number exceeds ten (that is, when the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls has reached ten), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted in order to convey that effect. The information is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeded is used as the value of the main prize ball information output determination counter as the prize ball schedule information storage in the main control built-in RAM. It is adapted to store updates to pass.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 633 and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU 1310a shapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and are stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that an illegal act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection processing. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). A radio wave irradiation goto notification command, which is classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2010, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto”) is performed. Is determined to be performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and informing the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff such as a clerk of a game hall can discover the magnet goto at an early stage. Has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (the special winning opening). For example, when a large winning prize abnormal prize such as a game ball B enters in 2005), a prize abnormal display command classified as notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. I do.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet When no goto has been detected, a value of 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud has not been detected. The injustice detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to a value 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal winning, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of a firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is fired is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, that no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When it is determined that this is the detection, the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic), which is the inverted firing permission logic, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, inputs a detection signal from the door frame opening switch and opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the body frame opening switch detects that the body frame opening switch is opened, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the body frame opening switch detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, The firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic), which is the inverted version of the firing permission logic, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process of this routine after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power is restored). Until it is started, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing permission logic is inverted to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic).

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. The random number is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of a counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the type of big hit or small hit. It is determined whether any one of the hit type determination values matches (determines the hit type).

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special effect 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are based on the second starting port sensor 2402. If it is caused by the special figure 2, various commands related to the tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the determined special symbol variation display pattern so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big win opening 1 closing display command) (A winning port 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 is operated to open and close the opening and closing member. When the output is set and stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the number of times the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, the round display of the function display unit 1400 is set to two. To turn on the round display lamp, Setting the power and storing it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is fifteen, a lighting signal to the fifteenth round display lamp so as to light the fifteenth round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 And setting the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so that the output information is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or whether or not a time saving has occurred is lit in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In the normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on this determination result, the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

  In the normal winning opening winning information storage area, the 0th section to the 3rd section (four sections) are provided, and the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section are arranged in this order. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information storage of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored. The normal winning opening winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning opening winning information in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage in the 0th section of the normal winning opening storing information, respectively. The two sections and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is set as a reserved ball, and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is set. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so that the hold display is turned on, and stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

  Subsequent to the normal winning opening prize processing, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information to read out the main control. It is determined whether or not the value matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in the built-in ROM in advance (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure tuning effect-related are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is performed. In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information In the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect are created and transmitted. While the information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described ordinary symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create a variety of commands that are related to the general figure synchronizing production related, and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information To memorize. In the present example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of a normal winning) is one half.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In the setting value confirmation display processing, detailed description thereof will be described later. The detection signal from the body frame release switch and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). ), The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the 60-degree clockwise operation and the first ON operation is performed, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used to set the outer frame. It is determined that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the setting key 2 and the setting key switch 131 is set in response to a setting key ON signal. a determines that the setting key display ON condition is satisfied, and determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. Is determined not to be released, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is determined not to be set to ON by the signal of the setting key ON, so that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied. judge. In the set value confirmation display processing, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Is output and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated and the routine returns to the present routine.

  Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, and a driving signal is output to a starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the above, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, starting mouth winning information Output various information related to the game (game information) such as an output signal to the payout control board 633 Or outputs a firing permission signal set to firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or counts the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (total number). ) To output a display signal to the base monitor 1310h, or to output a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. I do.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are created in the main-control-side timer interrupt process that is the main routine and that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands that are classified in special figure 2 tuning effects, and big hits. Command (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball B entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected). ), Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general-tune synchronizing production, various commands classified as normal electric production, various commands classified as information display, and status display Various commands, various commands related to the test, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls B entering the various winning ports reaches 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is used as main prize ball number information. Through the external terminal board 558, a main prize ball number information output command instructing transmission to the hall computer, and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a game ball B collected at the out port 1008). Each time the number of balls reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command notifying the change, a setting change command notifying that the setting value has been changed, and an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or trust). And an error display command that informs the user of confirming the setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. ON operation command or the like of the setting key) it is stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as DC + 5V. At least the main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. Is available. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: A status, a mode, and a sum value which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information, and according to the various kinds of information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Whenever the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command notifying the ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 For each received ball collection command, the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information (the counted value (that is, the out port) Information (corresponding to the total number of game balls B collected in 1008) and the updated date and time are updated. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are terminated without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game balls collected at the out port 1008) is obtained. The ball collection information that associates the updated date and time with the total number of balls of B is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the time of starting the business of the game hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the business. The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored and retained in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection information may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT does not have to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, while the process can be completed. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, in the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data, The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the power-on main control return destination command, which is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, Subsequently, the power supply is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when outputting power.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be effected and displayed. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 on the display area of the effect display device 1600 can be displayed and notified of the return destination of the progress of the game, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing shown above, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitute a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball information at power-on. The signals are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection step in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., and based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[9-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation values as shown in FIG. 178 (Step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is obtained, the setting value may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is to calculate various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and to calculate the sum thereof. Is the same processing as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process (at the time of power-off) in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. It is determined whether or not the value of the checksum (sum value) matches (step S204). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores the game control information such as the various information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process to be described later. This flag indicates whether or not the data has been stored in the RAM. The value is set to 1 when the main control-side power-off process is completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not completed normally. Is done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value It is preset to a value up to value 6. By proceeding with the flowchart to the determination of step S208, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the set values stored in the dedicated set value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are set values 1 to 6 in the normal range. It is determined whether any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the set value is not in the normal range in the determination at Step S208, the main control MPU 1310a sets the set value 1 as an initial value to the set value acquired at Step S200 (Step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 in the normal range. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. In this case, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and a setting value 1, which is an initial value, is set to the setting value acquired in step S200. It may be.

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, determines that the main-control-side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination in step S208. When the MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, or after step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switch button 1311b has been operated (step S216). In this determination, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is read, and it is determined whether a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, and determines that the setting switching button 1311b is not being input when the detection signal is input from the setting switching button 1311b. It is determined that 1311b has not been operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value and updates the value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is obtained in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, Is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S216). S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the initial position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the knob 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the (rotational position) and turning it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it back), the second ON operation causes the setting key switch The decision key 1311a is turned on, and the decision from the setting key switch 1311a is made. On the basis of the ON signal, when the determination key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has been operated, while the determination key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, it is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, the process returns to step S216 again, and determines whether the setting switch button 1311b has been operated. When determining in step S216 that the main control MPU 1310a has operated the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a performs the processing in steps S218 and S220 again, performs the determination in step S222, and operates the enter key. When it is determined that there is no operation, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again. When the setting switch button 1311b is operated until the enter key is operated, the set value is incremented by one each time the operation is performed, and the setting display is updated. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated and the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before, the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined to be operated in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is determined by the main control. Since the setting value is not stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the built-in RAM, the setting value stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, Is updated with respect to the set value set in the main control built-in RAM, and the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After the process of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is an operation of turning off the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The determination is made based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a has not been input. Sometimes setting key is OFF It is determined not to have been created.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the process returns to step S226 again, and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to a setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is set to the first ON state) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This flag indicates whether the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the operation is permitted or not. When the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value 1 is set to the value 1 and the value 0 is set when the setting change is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within a normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value It is preset to a value up to value 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a confirms that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not any of the set values 1 to 6 that are the range is obtained. If it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is within the normal range in the determination of step S233, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), subsequently, creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process in step S238 is mainly used. 176 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data. This is prioritized prior to the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. This is because the setting change command informs the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting has been changed. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). I do.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-5. Set value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 179 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set. When the value is not displayed for confirmation, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the set key. Is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area and, based on the input information, detects the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) by 60 degrees. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first turn-on operation and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the main body frame 4 is moved relative to the outer frame 2 by the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. It is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is open and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch, while it is determined that the set value display permission condition is satisfied. And / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a ends the routine as it is, but the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the value 1 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and the current installation value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. 215. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 2, The values are set in advance to a value 3, a set value 4, a set value 5, and a set value 6. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a checks the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. Is determined to be any one of the set values 1 to 6 that are in the normal range, and if it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. I do.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the set value is within the normal range in the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and outputs the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 177. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has started (that is, the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (Information associating the effect and the date and time).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key are received. A predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as can be permitted is satisfied. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied to perform a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Is performed, the display is switched to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information from the image that has been displayed so far, and is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when the set value is being confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by performing the OFF operation, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key is turned OFF. Setting key switch 1 Setting key when the signal OFF from 11a is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  In the determination of step S362, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a ends this routine as it is. The value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364). Subsequently, the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped to the setting display 1310g. Then, the acquired setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366). Subsequently, a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, the setting operation of the setting key OFF operation command is performed (step S368). To the end. The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the set value stored in the dedicated set value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). Command.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the CPU immediately before switching to the specific history information display image is used. Until then, control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and restore the image.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that it is not in the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 that has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and subsequently enters an infinite loop for continuously clearing the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop keeps clearing the main control built-in WDT. However, this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-6. Error display processing]
Next, an error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is a process performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). , And the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (Step S400). As described above, the firing permission signal indicates that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. If the logic is set to the firing permission logic, the firing is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permitted). .

  One of the processes in which the error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 When started as (specifically, the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts the processing in step S52 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. Since permission setting cannot be performed, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the processing cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), in step S400, the main control MPU 1310a displays the error display in this routine after the power is restored in step S400. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the fire permission signal is set to fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port is set. From the output terminal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function That.

  When the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a executes the processing in step S357 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 1310a has already shown in FIG. 179 before starting the error display processing of this routine. Since the interrupt non-permission setting has been performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. The timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the processing cannot be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S400 that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for turning on all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), subsequently creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is performed in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 178 and the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and the process performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). When the processing is started and ended as the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 17) and the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 179, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be advanced at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main control serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU displays the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) To update.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a blue background image is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a "RAM error has occurred. Please call a clerk." In addition to performing control to display a message image of white characters, an announcement “RAM error has occurred. Please call a clerk” is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The control is forcibly set so as to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume, and is controlled to flow from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of performing the RAM error notification by the error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command for notifying another error, the RAM is notified. Error notification is given top priority.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 181. FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, a process at the time of turning on the payout control unit is performed under the control of the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of the interrupts of the payout control MPU is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed with priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the instruction does not indicate that the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM clear is to be performed. It is determined that the switch has been operated.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to a payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, a prize ball information storage area). And the state of the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the existing PRDY signal output setting information) is to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is deleted and a value of 0 when the payout information is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be made, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when the power is turned off) described later. (Step S526). If the payout control MPU determines in step S526 that they match, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value has been stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cutoff process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, the payout control built-in RAM is determined as power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize stored in the prize ball information storage area) are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information on payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on after the power is turned off, but also a state where the power is restored after the power failure or the momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0). If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S540 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  When the payout control MPU determines in step S542 that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 0, that is, determines that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, awarded ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on an error LED display are stored, and the payout is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. The number of balls that the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the game balls B is used as the prize ball number information output signal as an external terminal board 558. The output or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls B.

  Specifically, a prize ball information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. Is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of the game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The processing (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball information output determination counter stored in a prize ball information storage area of a payout control built-in RAM. Is added to the value of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and stored and updated.

  In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the read prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value 10, ( In other words, when the number of balls of the game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches ten, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls that have exceeded the number of balls) is output. This value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as a value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, It reads a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received, and inputs them as input information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball bleeding state has occurred due to the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is transmitted, a ball bleed determination time set as a criterion condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B stored in the lower plate 202 or not. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball disconnection detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as a ball-out determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls B received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is determined. Whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the inconsistent game balls B due to the mismatch between the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the game ball B is repeated. When making a determination, time management of the determination condition and the mismatch determination reset time set for the inconsistent counter is performed. For example, when the ball dust determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball dust determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gazing judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of a signal is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or blackout. In this way, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls B, the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage, and the payout operation is continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls B can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU performs an instantaneous power failure or power outage while exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out the game balls B to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls B, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information. The pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the exchange of various signals immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage continue from the time of power recovery. It is, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls B.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. The data is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM and included in the payout backup information, for example, in a retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the following formula. Is determined, that is, the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is determined to be in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball dummy action determination setting process. As an output setting of the error status to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, The dispensing operation for out There are a PRDY signal informing of a possible logic state (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. In this way, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that the state is extremely restored after the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is abnormal. Thus, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the CR unit, PRDY is sent to inform that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it informs that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. B is determined to be full or not, and the number of game balls B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 by a detection signal from the ball cutting sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, whether or not the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls B is determined using the timer interrupt period 2 ms by the full-battery detection sensor 154 in the current full-ball and ball-out check process. Is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF to ON. When the state has transited, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update processing in step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls B, and the full tank information notifying the fact is stored in the state information storage area described above. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is not full with the stored game balls B is stored in the state information storage area.

  The determination of whether or not the number of the game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle 2ms to check whether the ball is full or out of ball. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned on in the processing, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 Transitions from OFF to ON, the timer updating process of step S552 starts counting the above-mentioned ball out determination time. Then, when the ball-out determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full and ball-out determination processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, a ball that informs that the number of the game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is determined. While the outage information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is stored in the state information storage area that the ball is out of ball, which informs that the ball is not running.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In the command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball elimination and ball damage are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. I do. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this ball out information, if the number of game balls B taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, The display data (display value 1 (the number “1”) in this embodiment) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described status information storage area, and various commands (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame status 2 command) classified into status display are created based on the various information. And sends it to main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of the game balls B taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state is displayed. One command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  After step S568, the procedure returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. To perform a timer update process, and in step S554 In step S556, a full or missing ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, and an LED is determined in step S564. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls B is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thus, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed again. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “dispensing control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S528, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing of the payout control unit has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[10-2. Dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the power up processing of the payout control unit shown in FIGS. 181 to 183.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 188 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, the RAM, the VDP, the VRAM, the sound source, the SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[11-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit performs power-on processing under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. This causes the CPU of the peripheral control IC to enter a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 is output. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. A V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed is established. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the stationary processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as a protruding output detection sensor 375 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”). Various kinds of information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) and operation of the pressing operation unit 303 Contact history based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information is set. Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the 302, is appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the touch operating unit 302 in the game effects. Specifically, if the volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the light emission mode has been adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and luminance is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and luminance.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light, Are set respectively. While the effect is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. In the case where one specified brightness value from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to have the set specified brightness value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the luminance designation value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the specified luminance value, one specified luminance value may be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the minimum luminance (unlit) to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance. The normal pallet value and the special pallet value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The player (or a clerk such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) to set the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. One specified luminance value can be set up to the specified value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, and the 0th (zero) luminance designation in which the current luminance temporarily becomes the minimum luminance (extinguished). When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is next higher than the value, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear Along with a tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) to increase the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light, When the clockwise rotation operation is performed and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance designated value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress is prepared in advance. At this time, the player (or a clerk of the game hall) Etc.) can operate the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 to set the desired brightness. In addition, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the contact operation section 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the effect, the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) as an image. I can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourteenth luminance designated value is set as an initial value (default).

  Normally, the pallet value is such that the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side which are directly irradiated as light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. is there. As the normal palette value, one of 17 levels is selected from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, in 5% steps, and one of the 17 levels is selected. In a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the designated value, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is a maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which is the above-mentioned luminance specification value. (100%) is a value of 20%, and the values (%) described in parentheses of the other pallet values are also 0th (zero) luminance designation values, which are the above-mentioned luminance designation values. Within the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance specification value, the value is for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is previously selected as the normal pallet value for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated directly as light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side which are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and which are radiated as direct light, a specific decorative board (not shown) (LED which is dazzling to the player) is set on the pallet. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  In the special pallet value, the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. The special pallet value, unlike the normal pallet value, exists in only one step and is one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (0th) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light by setting the first luminance designated value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value which is the minimum luminance (extinguished). The lowest possible luminance is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and ranges from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. Among them, the pallet value corresponding to one specified luminance value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. When a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light when setting While being set along with the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is changed by the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) to the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit. The value is set in accordance with the special pallet value corresponding to the designated luminance value by the operation of step 303. Accordingly, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and reduces the brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness, the direct light is used. The luminance of the LED used is set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at the next higher luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specification value at which the minimum luminance (turns off)), and in conjunction with this, Therefore, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished)). Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side is set. , The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more effective rendering effect), and other pallet values are set. By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emitting mode can be changed very easily. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) to change the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance. Even if one specified brightness value up to the specified brightness value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a specific decorative board. Since the one designated luminance value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. ) Can be very easily adjusted without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust than the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value). Can set the luminance. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually controlled by the pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in a display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data for one frame (for one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, various speakers such as a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a body frame speaker 622 by sound data output processing to be described later. (Hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”.) It is a mechanism that can give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effects matched to various productions.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in a sound data creation processing described later, a sound source of the peripheral control IC reads out sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from a set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data among the emission data arranged in time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, of the sound command data indicating sound data of sound effects such as music and sound effects, sound data of annunciation sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, The pointer is updated in order to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, what number of drive data from the first drive data is set as an output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric driving source schedule data includes a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily specified for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a reception command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to prefetching on hold) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes the various commands performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) to reach the maximum luminance from the above-described first luminance designated value. When one brightness specification value up to the 31st brightness specification value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to have the set brightness specification value. I can do it.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, or a normal symbol. Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. It is analyzed whether the command, the symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 1 count display command output each time the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005. It recognizes whether it is a game state.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Performs analysis of various commands. Various commands are classified into various commands related to Toku-zu 1 entrained production, various commands classified into Toku-zu 2 synchronized production, various commands classified into jackpot-related, various commands classified into power-on, and various commands. Various commands classified in the synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the normal electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display, various commands classified in the status display, various commands classified in the test-related and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process for a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical generation schedule data. The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission mode data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number of the track of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. And a track number for designating which track incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the display is set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RCT acquisition information updating process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data is stored in the peripheral control ROM. From the peripheral control IC and output it to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. The rendering data for one frame (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is updated. It is read from (extracted from) the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. The output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in the sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value 0 to 0 is converted. The value is converted to a value of 1024 levels up to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the music is transmitted from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass on the body frame 4. And sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass on the body frame 4 by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. Has become.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in a sound source built in the peripheral control IC include sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or misconduct with the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is turned. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is determined for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display. For a fixed period (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) on the device (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator). 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern after the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, or 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative pattern is confirmed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit. ) Can be adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or The fixed symbol display (first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) on the fixed symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) for a fixed period of time when starting or stopping (variable in this example 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is finally displayed. By operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the time until the time elapses, the resistance at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is reduced. Is converted into seven levels of the board volume 0 to 6, and the contact operation unit 302 of the staging operation unit 300 responds to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or the pressing operation unit 303. It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4, and the amplified effect sound is serialized to audio. Output as data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, The sound volume flowing from the top side speaker and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used And a volume control switch set as a sub-volume value that is set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume of the substrate, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually changed to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker, the top side speaker, and the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified, the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data, and the Is the sub-volume that adjusts the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used. And the maximum volume without depending on the volume control based on the turning operation of the volume control switch set as, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually changed to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, It amplifies to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top side speaker and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4, and serializes the amplified notification sound to output as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4, the failure of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine 1 Briefly describing the control of playing a notification sound to notify a hall clerk of fraudulent acts, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value of the notification sound set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 6 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 2 to output it as audio data The amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is the above-mentioned sound. It is proceeding according to the generation schedule data.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has proceeded in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the sub-volume value that has been adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set. ), And flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Going on.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, the failure of the pachinko machine 1 and the occurrence of the pachinko machine 1 When the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk of the hall, etc., the sound of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Although the sound from the main frame speaker 622 flows through the main frame speaker 622, the silenced production sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data. When the sound stops flowing from the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, the effect sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing, Thiine so that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point that has elapsed starting to flow a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume control based on the rotation operation of the volume control switch, and the volume of the sound from mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction has occurred or when the player is performing wrongdoing, a notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of a malfunction or a wrongdoing of the player by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and backup to the backup area for regular processing.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the stationary processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  In the peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the routine processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , And steps S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is output from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process (to be described later) that is executed in response to an input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050), and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. When the process is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit is performing the regular processing. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed assuming that the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed by the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process), the routine control unit sets the value 1 in the regular process flag SP-FLG in step S1008 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. 185, the value 0 is set to the steady process flag SP-FLG in the peripheral control unit normal process to notify the V blank signal interrupt process. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Usually, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit regular processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[11-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the number of 1 ms timer interrupts executed STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN by 1 (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. 185. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer is designated by the pointer in the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and the solenoid drive process are executed. I do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided on various effect units provided on the game board 5) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting the position and acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in effect operation unit 300 have been input, and thereby history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, contact operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303 are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be adjusted. The brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. The data is copied and backed up in the provided 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for the 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM is set to a different area from the backup area for the regular processing provided in the SDRAM.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185, various processes related to the effects of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. I have. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC by one byte (8 bits). ) Is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

  In the determination of step S1200, when the timer of the 1-byte reception period has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is determined. If it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on or the like.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and the second byte is still the main serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main serial data, and then the second byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facility of the game hall. When the game balls B rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. The file is easily affected by the environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the status has been received, the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the time period has elapsed since the information can be received, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine ends.

[11-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 189 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU ends the routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If it is determined, the routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input for two microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is not input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 is restarted.

  As described above, if the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that they do n’t. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 190, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3002 On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second opening opening passage process, such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM, is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit”, the 15R A process of controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 according to the jackpot gaming state is executed. In addition, when a mode suggesting “2R big hit” is reached, a process of controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit game state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, the time saving flag and the time saving number counter are set. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time reduction state. The 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time of stopping the change of the first special symbol during the time reduction state indicates “2R jackpot” This is set when ending the state, when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Then, when the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner as the number of times the time reduction state is continued, and controls the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, when the big hitting game state ends, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time saving counter is counted down every time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit is reached before the counter value becomes “0”. Sometimes, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S237), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S238), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 191. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S243 are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the suspended state. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol change display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing an effect pre-determination process of determining pre-determination information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (step S245), the process ends.

  However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

  In addition, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored data, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) designates a first reserved number of stored data (first reserved number specifying commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0). 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage commands 0 to 4). It has become.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-judgment process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is made, if a big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be stored (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first opening opening process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, the preliminary control command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-described peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120), and is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether the display result of the special symbol change display based on the generated starting winning is a big hit or not, if a big hit is made, a type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, the effect display device 1600 is used. The peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed, etc. before starting the variable display according to the starting winning. IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first hold storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, the first reserved storage area has 1-4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance variation stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in a non-executed state (reserved state), the big hit expectation degree of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S234).

  Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 193. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number becomes the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 are executed in order to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S254 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. In addition to updating the command to correspond to the number of stored data, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) specifies a second reserved number of stored commands (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0). -1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage commands 0 to 1). It has become.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the first pending storage number based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002 is set to “4”, while the game is transferred to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved storage number based on the entry of the ball B is “1”. Note that the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. Even if the upper limit of “1” is set to “1”, the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the number of the second reserved storages is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second starting port 2004 Is prevented from being disadvantageous to the player, such as not being able to obtain a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball B enters the ball.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). The first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining a mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4. First special symbol variation process which waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 195, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes step S301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as a process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation storage area in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control suspension is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 197 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of first special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched so that the first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 315 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the loss has occurred. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 3/319). In this example, in the second special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number, a big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit. Loss determination indicating that 144 kinds of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value indicate that the small hit has been won, and that 174 kinds of second special random numbers are the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/1319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, in the determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number as compared with the hit determination table referred to be compared with the first special random number, the probability that the small hit is determined is increased. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, compared to the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. Is more advantageous for the player.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that the hit is a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the change is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit judging process is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has won the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in the time reduction state, and is used when the game state is in the non-time reduction state. A state determination table. In the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach is possible, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that reach is not possible. Random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach number of five types including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reaches the reach determination value, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the non-time reduction state is set higher than in the time reduction state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), and determines that a reach loss has occurred (step S317), the variation is determined. The reach flag indicating the reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery result is made by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197 (B). The type of the big hit is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. The opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times after opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 gaming balls B have won the large winning opening 2005. (15 rounds) By repeating, the game ball B is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game state is completed. If the big hit does not become a hit before the change display is executed 77 times, it is controlled to a time saving state in which the big hit is ended. The opening / closing pattern to be closed twice when the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005. (2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball B is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and if the time reduction state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state After the end of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) until the change display is executed 77 times, if it does not become a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state to be ended, before the start of the 2R big hit game state If it is controlled to the non-time saving state, any one of the two types of big hits, 2R big hits, which are controlled to the normal state after the big hit game state ends, is determined.

  In the big hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, eight judgment values are assigned when a 15R big hit occurs, and 192 judgment values are assigned when a 2R big hit occurs. That is, if a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big hit is obtained with a probability of 4%, and a 2R big hit is obtained with a 96% probability. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are allocated when a 15R big hit occurs, and four determination values are allocated when a 2R big hit occurs. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, a 15R big hit is obtained with a probability of 98%, and a 2R big hit is obtained with a probability of 2%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined as the 15R big hit is higher in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize in the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the winning prize in the first starting port 2002, the game is executed. It is in a state advantageous to the elderly.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when a 2R jackpot is determined, a 2R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if a 15R jackpot is determined, a 15R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol, and if a 2R jackpot is determined, a 2R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol.

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S131 and the small hit flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number with the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197 (C), and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is stopped. (The stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the gaming ball B to a small hitting gaming state in which the gaming ball B can enter (easily) the ball entering the accessory winning opening 2006, During the small hitting game state, all the game balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, so that the gaming balls B can be received in the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008. 1st small hit that is difficult The opening / closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing the opening is executed nine times, and the game ball B is controlled to a small hitting gaming state in which it is possible (easy) for the gaming ball B to enter the accessory winning opening 2006, During the small hitting game state, one of the game balls B which has won the bonus winning opening 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 after the closing of the bonus winning opening 2006, so that the second V is obtained. The game ball B can be accepted in the winning opening 2008, and when the game ball B is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small hitting game state (for example, 29 Second), or when the large winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 gaming balls B have won the large winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) and the gaming ball B becomes large. Winner 20 5 is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible to enter the ball (easy), and until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. 2. The second small hit is controlled to reduce the time if it does not become a big hit. By executing the opening / closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing the opening 9 times, the gaming ball B is controlled to a small hitting gaming state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the accessory winning opening 2006. During the small hitting game state, one of the game balls B that has won the bonus winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the closing of the bonus winning opening 2006, and Based on the fact that B has been accepted in the first V winning opening 2007, after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hitting gaming state, or 10 gaming balls B win in the large winning opening 2005. The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2403 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), and the game ball B is controlled to the 15R big hitting gaming state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the special winning opening 2005. I After the end of the jackpot game state, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the time-saving state to be terminated if the jackpot does not become a big hit until the variable display is executed 77 times. Any of the three types of small hits is determined to be one of the big hits.

  In the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 199 determination values are assigned when the second small hit occurs, and one determination value is assigned when the third small hit occurs. ing. That is, if a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 99.5%, the third small hit is generated with a probability of 0.5%, You will not win for one small hit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value of 20 pieces is allocated when the first small hit is made, and the 130 determination values are allocated when the second small hit is made. In the case of the third small hit, 50 judgment values are assigned. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 10%, the second small hit is generated with a probability of 65%, and a probability of 25% is obtained. Is the third small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is compared with the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. By guiding one of the game balls B to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small hit that always becomes the 15R big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is increased. In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize in the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the winning prize in the first starting port 2002, the game is executed. It is in a state advantageous to the elderly.

  When the type of the small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be the second small hit, it is determined to be the second small hit symbol as the small hit symbol, and when it is determined to be the third small hit, it is determined to be the third small hit symbol as the small hit symbol. . In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined. Is determined as the second small hit symbol, and if the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a lost symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stopped symbols is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the lottery result (one of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S328. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328). ). Then, thereafter, as the process of step S329, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), the process ends.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are variably displayed, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → middle). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (note that the decorative symbols on the left, the middle, and the right may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a fluctuating manner and may be simultaneously stopped and displayed). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the small hit is specified from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing. When the 2R jackpot is specified and the 2R jackpot is specified, the combination of the 2R jackpot symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") ) Is determined, and when the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols “0” to “9”) is determined. In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same pattern whose left and right decorative patterns are "0" to "9" and different middle decorative patterns; If the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outlier with no reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols out of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols) and changed. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time-saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the big hit gaming state, the time saving state is controlled, and if a predetermined number of (for example, two) big hits thereafter occur, the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the predetermined number of the big hit gaming states. Alternatively, control may be performed in a normal state. Even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than the predetermined number, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the control of the time saving state may be performed again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been done (step S341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. Is set (step S343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the small hit type determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the reach (FIG. Is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if a normal loss (a loss in which the reach effect is not performed) is obtained, a variation pattern table at the time of the loss (FIG. (Not shown) is selected (step S347).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348). A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a determines the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Are obtained, and the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random numbers is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the mode of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time-saving counter for setting the number of continuations of the time-saving state is “0”. I do. If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S353). . Then, as a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in step S351 that the counter value of the time-saving counter is “0”, and if it is determined in step S353 that the counter is not “0”, Then, control goes to the process of step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the special symbol variation pattern is set in a manner that the special symbol variation time information set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of the off-time selected in the time reduction state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of the off-time selected in the non-time-saving state, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short, The fluctuation time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 200, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S371. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process is ended.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S381. As the processing of the above, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (the control of the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is completed. (Control in the normal state) is started.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game (step S387), The standby time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of the big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in a jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening process (step S401) and the special winning opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches “0”, and the big winning is achieved. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), the large hit counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”, and the process proceeds to the special winning opening process (step S403) to end the big hit game. Execute the control to make it.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. It has become.

  The big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, in the big hit control processing (step S235A) after the big win opening process (step S403). Open / close control of the special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 gaming balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the above-described special winning opening sensor 2403) Is reset (all the rounds that can be executed in the big hit game) when the opening / closing control for repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected at (2) is repeated twice or 15 times). The big hit execution flag is reset so that the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 A state in which the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S391), and a standby time until the start of the small hit game (a time for displaying an indication to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S391, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game corresponding to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (first small hit, first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, third small hit) A hit start command, a second small hit start command, and a third small hit start command) are set.

  When the small hitting game is completed, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed, specifically, during the small hitting control processing (step S236A) to be described later (step S411). ) Ends the opening / closing control of the accessory winning opening 2006 according to the type of the small hit (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern for closing the opening of the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice or 9 times). Reset when you do. The small hit execution flag is reset so that the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). The first special symbol display on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol on the function display unit 1400 on the second special symbol display can be displayed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, a standby time (a time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next change display of the special symbol is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), and proceeds to step S395.

  When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S395), this process ends.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board informs the player of the transition to the big hit game state based on the change of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) at the time of the change display stop to the big hit symbol. Preliminary winning opening opening process of waiting until performed by 1510 or waiting for the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on a state in which the change display of the special symbol is stopped is a big hit symbol, and the special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on the start of the next round. After the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have been won in the large winning opening 2005, the game is closed. Processing during opening of the special winning opening (step S402)
3. The big win opening process after waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the player of the end of the big hit game state when all rounds are completed (step S403).

  The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big win opening processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. In the special winning opening opening process (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the special winning opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled to the state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing for executing setting processing for starting the small hit game state (step S410)
2. Small hit middle processing for monitoring the entering time and opening time of the game ball B in the small hitting game state (step S411).

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. Also, if the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hit middle processing, the big hit execution flag is set, and the number of rounds executable in the big hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is set to the big hit. The value is set in the number counter and the process ends. As a result, the big hit game state is started following the small hit game state.

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is shown in FIG. 204. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and stores the random number in a normal symbol holding storage area of a RAM. A winning process is executed.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on the read ordinary random number, a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process of waiting until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4. The normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Ordinary symbol stop processing to stop variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “per-universal pattern”, the second starting port door 2411 is retreated and the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is returned. Electric-powered accessory opening process for executing a process for controlling the reception of the character (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 175).

[13. Game in small hit game state]
Next, a game in the small hitting game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the special symbol change display is a small hit, a small hit game in which the opening / closing pattern in which the bonus winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times. In the small hitting game state, all the game balls B that enter the bonus winning opening 2006 and are detected by the bonus winning opening sensor 2513 are the first loss opening sensor 2516 and the third loss opening sensor 2518. Is detected by one of the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning opening sensor 2515, that is, the small hitting game state when discharged from the inside of the accessory winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5. To end. Further, the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 during the small hit gaming state is received by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning is provided. When detected by the mouth sensor 2515, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball B which has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is the first loss port 2535 or the third loss port. When it is received by 2555 and detected by the first losing mouth sensor 2516 and the third losing mouth sensor 2518, it is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state according to the control state before the small hitting after the small hitting game state.

  Further, as described above, in this example, the first small hit that controls all the game balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006 to be guided to the first loss opening 2535, and the game that has won the bonus winning opening 2006 After one game ball B of the balls B is controlled to be guided to the third distribution device 2550 and circulates in the third distribution table 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 and two third loss The second small hit that is controlled so as to be accepted by any one of the mouths 2555 and one of the game balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006 are guided to the first V winning opening 2007. And the third small hit is controlled as described above.

  Further, in the first small hit, the number of opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is smaller than that of the second small hit and the third small winning, and in addition, all the game balls B that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 are given the official winning. The execution period of the small hitting game state (period from the start of the small hitting game state to the end thereof) is short because the guidance is guided from the mouth 2006 to the nearest first losing mouth 2535 and detected by the first losing mouth sensor 2516, In the third small hit, one of the game balls B that has won the bonus winning opening 2006 is the first V winning opening 2007 whose distance from the bonus winning opening 2006 is next to the first loss opening 2535. And the first V winning opening sensor 2514 detects the small hitting game state, the execution period of the small hitting game state becomes short after the first small hitting. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball B among the game balls B that has won the bonus winning opening 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 that is the farthest from the bonus winning opening 2006, After the game ball B guided to the three sorting device 2550 is circulated in the third sorting table 2554, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515. Since the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555 is detected by the third losing opening sensor 2518, the execution period of the small hitting game state is the longest of the three types of small hits.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when it is determined that the small hit is based on the first special random number, the second small hit is determined. In the normal state, the second small hit is executed in most cases. On the other hand, in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the above-mentioned time saving state, the small hit is determined based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed, the rate of execution of the third small hit is set higher than in the normal state, and in the time saving state, the third small hit is executed once for every four small hits. .

  That is, in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hitting game state, it is advantageous for the player who is in the time reduction state after the 15R big hitting game state. Since the transition to the state is controlled, one game ball B of the game balls B that have entered the bonus winning opening 2006 during the small hitting game state is circulated in the third distribution table 2554. It is noticed over a certain period of time while the throbbing is made whether to be accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, while a small hit game is displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Even if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the state, it is only controlled to the time saving state again after the 15R big hitting game state, so the ball enters the role winning opening 2006. Rather there may decrease the game excitement when one game balls B of gaming balls B was shown visited the first struck partial table 2554. Therefore, in this example, in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hitting game state is shortened during the time saving state by increasing the ratio of the third small hit in which the execution period of the small hitting game state is short. It ends in time.

  Further, as described above, when the sorting rotator 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the non-accommodating state in the third small hit, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 moves to the first attack It flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the passage 2536, contacts the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters the first V winning opening 2007. I do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball B distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotator 2531 from the accommodating state to the accommodating state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. This makes the player invisible. The first V winning opening 2007 can enter when the sorting door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing opening 2543, but the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operation state. That is, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is hard to be recognized (is difficult to see) by the player, and the game balls B distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the sorting door 2544 can be transferred to the game board 5 in a short time. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the first V winning opening 2007 in conjunction with the discharge to the rear, the player is informed that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the first V winning opening 2007 It is difficult to notice that the game ball B passes. As described above, in the case of the third small hit in the time saving state, it is difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning opening 2007. The small hitting game state is executed without paying attention to the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008)). After the end of the state, the 15R jackpot gaming state can be executed. As a result, the small hitting game state and the 15R big hitting game state are continuously generated in a short time, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, the case where the game ball B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 as the second small hit and the case where the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 as the third small hit are produced. The effect of the small hitting game state executed on the display device 1600 is different. Specifically, when the second small hit occurs, whether the game ball B distributed to the third distribution device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, On the other hand, in the case of the third small hit, an effect that does not make the rotation of the distribution rotator 2531 conscious (for example, in the case of the third small hit, The player is informed that the small hitting game state will be executed by performing the same notification as in the case of (for example, notifying a big hit instead of a small hit in the case of a third small hit). It is difficult to obtain a prize ball that is different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state. The effect may be executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the 15R jackpot has been won can execute a special bonus chance before starting the 15R jackpot gaming state and acquire a prize ball different from the 15R jackpot gaming state, thereby improving the game entertainment. I do.

  Note that if the arrival time at the V winning opening is shorter in the third small hit than in the second small hit, the route until the game ball B guided by the second small hit is accepted in the V winning opening. The length of the (first path) and the path (second path) until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted in the V winning opening increases in proportion to the arrival time to the V winning opening. If the arrival time at the V winning opening is longer than the third small hitting, the route (first route) until the game ball B guided by the second small hitting is accepted by the V winning opening is not limited to the one. The path (second path) until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted in the V winning opening may be shorter. For example, by providing a speed reducing means for reducing the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first route, the arrival time at the V winning opening may be longer than that of the game ball B passing through the second route.

  Further, in the above example, a plurality of V winning openings, ie, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the special winning opening 2006 is provided. Is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 having the second V winning opening 2008, and one of the gaming balls B among the winning game balls B is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B that have won the winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 which is located next to the first loss opening 2535 from the accessory winning opening 2006, the small game ball B is small. Although the execution period of the hit gaming state is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening, the number of the V winning opening, and the like are not limited to those described above. For example, a gaming machine having only one V winning opening The technical idea of the present invention can be applied to It is. Specifically, for example, means for obstructing or delaying the reception of the game ball B to the V winning opening such that the gaming ball B can be received in the V winning opening after circulating in the third distribution table 2554 (obstacles) ) Is provided, and no means is provided for obstructing or delaying the reception of the game ball B to the V winning opening with a long arrival time to the V winning opening (at least compared to the second small winning). The third small hit with a short arrival time to the V winning opening due to the small number of the provided symbols is provided, and the normal state (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) is determined according to the arrival time to the common V winning opening. The execution ratio may be changed between the variable display) and the time saving state (the variable display of the second special symbol).

[13-1. Error notification in small hit game state]
Next, error notification in the small hitting game state will be described. In this example, in the small hitting game state, the time until the game ball B winning in the role-prize winning opening 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if the ball is not discharged even after exceeding a predetermined period, an error is notified. .

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the small hit start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, a setting process for starting the small hit game state is executed.

  When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first decrements the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process and the interval timer set in the second special symbol stop process (step S421). Is timed out (step S422), that is, when the standby time from when the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed until the small hitting game state is started, the small hitting game state is started. The initial value “0” is set to the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time from the end (step S423).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening / closing pattern data according to the type of the small hit being executed (the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit) (step S424), and Based on the opened / closed pattern data, the control of the bonus winning opening 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hitting middle processing (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes.

  Note that the opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and indicates the operating mode of each of the bonus winning opening 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game state. Things. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the bonus winning opening 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. 151, the bonus winning opening 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 operate.

  FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting middle processing (step S412).

  When the small hitting process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game state, and sets a discharge monitoring timer to be described later. If it is, the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state) in the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start processing. The data is read, and based on the read opening / closing pattern data, the opening / closing of the bonus winning opening 2006, the sorting rotator 2531 and the sorting door 2544 are controlled (step S432).

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 turns on the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 (step S433), that is, in the accessory winning opening 2006. If the game ball B has been received, one is added to the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the inside of the game winning opening 2006 among the gaming balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006 (step S434). .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured such that, when the small hitting game state is started, the game ball B is first received in the bonus winning opening 2006 (when the first game ball B enters). (Step S435), the longest period assumed until all the game balls B that have entered the bonus winning opening 2006 including the game balls B is discharged is provided corresponding to each of the small hit types. The assumed maximum time is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

  In the present example, in the case of the first small hit, the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 are all distributed to the second loss opening 2543 without being distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531. In order to enter, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed maximum period (for example, 10,000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one game ball B among the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531 and the first Atari passage The game ball B that has entered the third sorting device 2550 through the 2536 passes through the third sorting table 2554 and then enters one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loss openings 2555. The longest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, one game ball B of the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531, but the first In order to accept the game ball B passing through the Atari passage 2536 at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, a short period is set as the assumed longest period after the first small hit ( For example, 60000 s).

  The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in the above step S431, and a mismatch state between the number of game balls B having won the bonus winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from the bonus winning opening 2006 is determined by the timeout of the discharge monitoring timer. When the operation is continued until a later time, it is determined that some abnormality (error) or improper operation has been performed.

  It should be noted that the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game state is monitored, and if this elapsed time is the assumed maximum time corresponding to the type of the small hitting being executed, it is determined that some abnormality (error) or improper conduct has occurred. It may be determined, or the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the small hitting game state is monitored, and this elapsed time is assumed to be the assumed maximum time according to the type of the small hitting being executed. In the case where the game ball B has become unusual, it may be determined that some sort of abnormality (error) or misconduct has been performed, or the timing at which the distribution rotator 2531 actually distributes the game balls B (in the first small hit, At the start of the small hitting game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) and the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 faces upward from the first distribution solenoid 2 32 is turned off (non-energized), the timing at which the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 moves to the right (first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531), the second small hit Then, after the first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on again (energized), and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 faces upward from the first position. The timing at which the distributing solenoid 2532 is turned off (de-energized) and the housing 2531a of the distributing rotator 2531 moves to the right (the second distributing operation timing of the distributing rotator 2531), In the case of three small hits, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again after the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution rotation is performed. The timing in which the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state in which the storage section 2531a of the 2531 faces upward, and the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 operates to face right ( The elapsed time from the third allocation operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531) is monitored, and if the elapsed time becomes the assumed maximum time according to the small hit type being executed, any abnormality (error) or improper operation will occur. It may be determined that an action is being performed.

  In addition, when the discharge of the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is discharged, the first loss sensor 2516 and the first loss sensor 2516 are detected. When the gaming ball B is detected by any of the V winning opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and the third losing opening sensor 2518 (Step S437), the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1 (Step S438). ).

  Then, whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0”, that is, whether the number of game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 matches the number of gaming balls B discharged from the bonus winning opening 2006 It is determined whether or not the residual number counter is “0” (NO in step S439).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out to determine whether or not an abnormality or fraud has occurred (step S440). . The discharge monitoring timer is provided in correspondence with each of the small hit types as the longest period assumed from the start of the small hitting game state to the discharge of all the game balls B from the bonus winning opening 2006 as described above. It indicates the remaining period of the assumed longest expected period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes. Accordingly, when the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114) of the main control timer interrupt processing is executed again, the small hit processing is executed, and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. Become like

  If the remaining ball counter is not "0" and the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or illegal action has occurred and a discharge error is notified (step S441). The hit processing is terminated. The discharge error notification includes an error display on the effect display device 1600, output of a notification sound by the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like, and a predetermined mode using a lamp, LED, or the like provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. In this example, a display such as "Discharge is abnormal" is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600 to output the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like. Not to do. In other words, the state in which the remaining ball counter is not “0” indicates a minor abnormality such as that the gaming ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is not discharged, and so the abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. The display for making the player uncomfortable or uneasy is not performed. After performing the discharge error notification in step S441, the small hitting process is terminated without updating the small hitting process flag, and then the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of the main control side timer interrupt process (step S441). When S114) is executed, the small hit processing is executed again. That is, all the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RAM clear switch is operated by the game store clerk to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Until it is performed (until it is reset), the discharge error notification is executed without ending the small hitting game state.

  If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is “0”, it is determined whether the game ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). When the game ball B has not entered the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball B has entered the first loss opening 2535 or the third loss opening 2555 and the first loss. If it is detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third losing mouth sensor 2518, a small hit end command instructing execution of an effect at the end of the small hit game state is set (step S443), and the small hit start process (step S411) ), The process is terminated when the small hit process flag is updated so as to shift to the process (step S447).

  In step S442, if the game ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the big hit game is started. After setting the standby time up to the interval timer (step S444), the small hit execution flag is reset and the big hit execution flag is set (step S445). Further, a V-winning jackpot start command for instructing the execution of the effect at the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the game ball B into the first V-winning opening 2007 and the second V-winning opening 2008 is set (step S446). When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the hit start process (step S411) (step S447), this process ends.

  As described above, in this example, when the game ball B is received in the bonus winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is incremented by one, and every time the gaming ball B is discharged from the bonus winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is increased. By subtracting 1, the number of the game balls B remaining without being discharged from the role winning opening 2006 (the center role 2500) can be grasped. Further, the period (estimated maximum period) until the execution of the discharge error notification is made different according to the small hit type, in other words, the destination of the game balls B, and the game balls B passing through the first Atari passage 2536 are changed to the third. In the third small hit that is received at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the three sorting device 2550, the game ball B enters the third sorting device 2550 and travels through the third sorting table 2554. The period until the discharge error notification is executed (the assumed maximum period) is shorter than the two small hits. In other words, a small hit with a shorter time (distance) until reaching the V winning opening has a shorter period until the discharge error notification is executed.

  Since the game ball B usually does not remain in the bonus winning opening 2006, if the state where the gaming ball B remains in the bonus winning opening 2006 continues for a long period of time, some abnormality ( Error) has occurred. In addition, when the discharge of more game balls B than the number of game balls B that have won the bonus winning opening 2006 is detected, an improper act such as illegally winning the gaming ball B into the bonus winning opening 2006 is performed. Can be determined to have been The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent actions, and reports an emission error when there is a suspicion of them.

  Further, in this example, it is detected that the game balls B remain in the bonus winning opening 2006 or that a larger number of the gaming balls B are discharged than the gaming balls B which have won the bonus winning opening 2006. Therefore, even if the discharge monitoring timer times out when the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the discharge error notification is performed, and even if the main control-side timer interrupt processing is executed without stopping the game, a small value is set. The hit ball processing is executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, and if the value of the remaining ball counter is “0”, that is, if it returns to the normal state, the first V winning opening 2007 and the The state is automatically returned to the state in which the entry of the game ball B into the 2V winning opening 2008 is determined, and the small hitting game state is ended.

  In the present example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter is not “0” after executing the discharge error notification in step S441 of the small hitting process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, The error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. As a serious abnormality, for example, when one of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects a magnet that acts improperly in the game area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification) ), When the door frame 3 is detected to be opened (door opening error notification), there is a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed. When such a serious abnormality has occurred, the emission error notification in step S441 in the small hitting game state is terminated, and errors relating to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification). Etc.), and after the error notification related to the serious abnormality ends, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hitting game state may be restarted, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be notified to the small hitting game state. By overwriting and executing the discharge error notification of step S441 in step S441, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small hitting game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like. Output, lighting / points of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 Is not reflected (performed to be visible / viewable), etc. (performed in the background), but the content of the emission error notification over time during error notification related to a serious abnormality When the error notification related to the serious abnormality is finished, the display on the effect display device 1600 and the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top The output of the side speakers and the like, and the lighting and blinking of the lamps and LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be reflected (for example, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hitting game state is started. After 5 seconds from the start of the error notification related to the serious abnormality, if the error notification is executed for 30 seconds, the error notification related to the serious abnormality is ended. After the start of the discharge error notification in step S441 is resumed from the content after 35 seconds in Koatari gaming state in).

  Further, the mode of the discharge error notification may be different between the case where the remaining ball counter is “1” or more and the case where the remaining ball counter is less than “0” in step S439 of the small hitting middle process. When the remaining ball counter is “1” or more, it merely indicates a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is not discharged, while the remaining ball counter is less than “0”. In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality that the game balls B are ejected more than the number of the game balls B entered into the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game balls B are illegally entered into the accessory winning opening 2006. Could be. For this reason, when a minor abnormality occurs in which the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 has not been discharged, as a discharge error notification 1, for example, as shown in FIG. An abnormal sound is displayed, and the effect sound is continuously output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like, so that the error sound is not output and the door frame 3 is provided. A part of the LED is made to partially emit light, and when a serious abnormality occurs in which more game balls B are discharged than the number into which the game balls B have entered, as the discharge error notification 2, for example, the entire area of the effect display device 1600 Is displayed, and the volume of the effect sound from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like is displayed. Control, an error sound is output at a high volume, such as "Illegal activity is being performed." The occurrence may be notified.

  In this example, the detection signal of the second losing opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 performs the third small hitting game state. When the game ball B guided to the distribution guide path 2551 is detected by the second losing opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the effect display device 1600 and the main body frame speaker. 622, the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the game ball B which circulates in the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 by controlling the lamp / LED provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3. An effect that excites which of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 is accepted is executed.

  The detection signal of the second losing opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the game ball by the second losing opening sensor 2517 is used. The presence or absence of occurrence of an abnormality may be determined in accordance with the detection of B. For example, when the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type in the small hitting processing, or according to the small hitting type. When there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the planned V winning opening or a losing opening (different from the planned passage or the winning opening according to the small hit type) In the case where the game ball B heads for a passage or a winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hitting process.

  Specifically, as a V winning opening and a loss opening scheduled according to the small hit type, a first loss opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small hit, and a second loss opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the second small hit. A V winning opening 2008 or a third loss opening 2555 is scheduled, and in the case of a third small hit, a first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B has been received in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2555 in the small hitting middle processing, In the case of the second small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B has been received in one of the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small hit processing, the small hit is performed in the case of the third small hit. If it is detected in the processing that the game ball B has been received in any of the first losing opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. As indicated by reference numeral 207, a display such as "Illegal occurrence!" Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like is suppressed to generate an error sound. "Illegal It is output at a loud volume, and furthermore, by illuminating all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3, the entire door frame 3 is illuminated, and the distribution error notification for notifying the occurrence of fraud is provided. It may be executed. In this case, the occurrence of the fraudulent activity can be immediately reported, and the fraudulent activity can be detected early.

  Further, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting a game ball B flowing inside the second distribution guidance path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guidance path 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. May be inputted to the main control board 1310. In the case of the first small hit, the small hitting process is performed to any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555. When the possibility that the ball B is accepted occurs, that is, when it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541 by detecting the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor, the second In the case of a small hit, the game passes through the second distribution guide path 2541 because the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing but cannot detect the game ball B with the second loss opening sensor 2517. Game ball B heads to first V winning opening 2007 When it is determined that the game ball B is detected by the second loss detection sensor 2517 after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hitting process in the case of the third small hit, When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the distribution guide path 2541 is heading for the third distribution device 2550, a V-prize port or a losing port different from the planned V-prize port or the losing port is used. If there is a possibility of detecting the game ball B, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to be notified when a state in which a fraudulent activity is likely to occur, and it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity at an early stage.

  In addition, the mode of the distribution error notification may be changed according to the degree of abnormality (injustice level). For example, when the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the case of the first small hit, If it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hitting process in the case of the second small hit, the second loss is detected. If it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading for the first V winning opening 2007 because the mouth sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high. By making a judgment, for example, "Illegal occurrence!" Or the like is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like, and a loud sound is displayed. Output with The second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hitting medium processing in the case of the second small hitting and the small hitting medium processing in the case of the third small hit in the If it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B with the two-loss opening sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is determined. Judgment is made that it is low, for example, "emission abnormal" is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600, and the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. are not output. The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. That is, when the game ball B passes through a path in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the rate of entry of the game ball B into the V winning opening preset according to the small hit type. In the case where the expected degree of V-prize is higher than the degree of expected V-prize set in advance according to the type of the small hit being executed, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and an illegal act is performed. Is notified, and the game ball B passes through the path in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the rate of entry of the gaming ball B into the V winning opening preset according to the small hit type. (If the expected V-prize is lower than the expected V-prize expected according to the type of the small hit being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and the fraudulent act is performed. The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. If the expected V-prize is lower than the expected V-prize expected according to the type of the small hit that is being executed, the player himself / herself suffers disadvantages, but damages the game store side. Since this does not occur, when the degree of such an abnormality is low, the distribution error notification may not be performed.

  Also, a game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or a losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type, or a V winning prize scheduled according to the small hitting type is determined. During the period in which the distribution error is notified based on the possibility that the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing mouth different from the mouth or the losing mouth, the bonus winning opening in the small hit processing is performed. Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred in which the game ball B entered in 2006 has not been ejected, a V winning opening or a losing mouth different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type is determined. Based on the detection of the game ball B or the possibility of detecting the game ball B at a V winning opening or a loss opening different from the V winning opening or the loss opening scheduled according to the small hit type. Do not terminate the distribution error notification , It continues to be performed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the fact that it has been determined that a minor abnormality has occurred in which the gaming ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 in the small hit processing during the small hit has not been discharged is in a state in which viewing and viewing are possible. Although not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 is advanced with the passage of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes “0”, it is slight that the gaming ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. As described above, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the error notification (allocation error notification in this example) based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, the error notification based on the minor abnormality occurrence ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed so as to be visible and viewable. However, it is executed quietly behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, the distribution error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

  In this example, even in the state where the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state do not occur, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third losing opening sensor 2518 is monitored, and when the game ball B is detected by any of them, it is determined that the illegal action is being performed and the occurrence of the illegal action is notified. It has become. In a state in which the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state does not occur, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517 may be monitored. When the game ball B is detected by any of the detection sensor and the second losing mouth sensor 2517, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, it is determined that fraudulent behavior is being performed, and the occurrence of fraudulent behavior is reported. Good. That is, in the state where the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state are not generated, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the ratio of the game ball B entering the V winning opening (high or low), any one of the paths in the accessory winning opening 2006 is played. Even if the ball B has passed, it may be determined that the wrongdoing is being performed, and the occurrence of the wrongdoing may be notified.

  In the above-described example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441, or when the gaming ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. The distribution error is notified based on the fact that there is a possibility that the game ball B may be detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. In this case, the small hit processing is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. In addition, even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the remaining ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the remaining ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the game is automatically returned from the abnormal state to the small hit. The game state may not be ended. As a result, the occurrence of the abnormality can be reliably grasped.

  Also, after the distribution error is notified, if the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type. When the game ball B rolling on the scheduled route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second loss contact sensor 2517 detects the second small hit), the distribution error notification ends. You may make it. Also, after the discharge error is notified, when the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hitting type, or according to the small hitting type. When the game ball B rolling on the set route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit is detected by the second losing mouth sensor 2517), the discharge error notification is ended. Is also good. In addition, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer, which causes the execution of the discharge error notification, is detected by detecting a game ball B rolling on a route (regular route) scheduled according to the small hit type (for example, the second small ball). In the case of a hit, the second loss sensor 2517 may be used to reset each time. In this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. The emission error notification may be made executable when the assumed maximum time according to the small hit type is reached.

[14-1. Volume control]
The volume control switch is operated for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the A fixed period (in this example, a peripheral control unit in the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) on one special symbol display and the second special symbol display. 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol after receiving the command or until 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the fixed display of the decorative symbol). Except for the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the sound of sound effects such as sound and sound from the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, So that the it can be adjusted by rotating operation. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjustment switch is changed by being rotated, and the peripheral control A / D converter electrically connected thereto is connected to the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. Is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the music and effects are obtained from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4. The sound is flowing. As described above, the music and sound effects are produced from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass on the body frame 4 by the volume control based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. The sound is flowing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the production sounds such as music and sound effects, the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1. Or an announcement of the contents related to the game effect (for example, an effect that the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced as a more powerful one, or that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player. , Etc.) also flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4, but the notification sound and the notification sound are generated by the volume adjustment switch. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation at all, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program. It has been cut way.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can be changed from mute to the maximum volume in five stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the main frame speaker 622 becomes small, when the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in this embodiment, , Maximum volume). Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special period A fixed period (variable control in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the unit and 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the final display of the decorative symbol Except until the time elapses), in addition to adjusting the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effects by rotating the volume adjustment switch, in addition to a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, Special symbols are displayed in the special symbol display (the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display) and the special symbol display (the period until the side control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) For a fixed period of time when starting or stopping the variation display (in this example, after the variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit, 0.5% after the variation symbol display start) (Until the second elapses, or until 0.5 seconds elapse after the display of the decorative symbol is confirmed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit), and further, the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect. And an operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (a valid period for receiving an operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 in a so-called button effect). ) Or the like, except, thereby making it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound music and sound effects by operating the touch operating unit 302 and the pushing operation section 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first A fixed pattern (variable pattern command in the peripheral control unit in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol display and the second special symbol display. Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, or until 0.5 seconds elapse after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the final display of the decorative symbol). The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect (the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect). Except for the effective period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is accepted, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the effect operation is performed. By rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the unit 300, the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effects can be changed and adjusted to a desired volume (any of 1 from the minimum volume to 5 from the maximum volume). .

  Specifically, the contact operation unit 302 is rotated right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound becomes 1 The sound volume is changed to a step-up volume, the contact operation unit 302 is rotated left without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the production sound The volume is changed to one level lower.

  FIG. 208 shows a top center speaker and a top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and a bass body frame of the body frame 4 in response to a rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts a fluctuating effect of fluctuating and displaying a decorative symbol, and presses the effect operation unit 300 during the fluctuating effect. It is a timing chart which shows the example when the part 303 is pressed and the contact operation part 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated after that.

  As shown in FIG. 208, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during the variable effect performed on the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 to the volume 4 and the rotation of the contact operation unit 302 is changed. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. That is, the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is changed to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the effect sound output from the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. At the timing of t1 when the rotation operation is performed, the volume after the change is reflected on the output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. .

  The indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes its scale in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. As a result, the current set volume can be determined visually. In this example, an indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which an effect using a decorative pattern or the like is executed. This indicator is displayed on the outermost surface of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed translucently, so that an image such as a variable effect executed on the back can be recognized. In addition, you may make it provide the sub-display apparatus different from the effect display device 1600 in which the variable effect by a decorative design etc. is performed, and in this case, according to the rotation operation of the contact operation part 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses from the end of the operation of the contact operation unit 302. After the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may make it do. In addition, the above-mentioned indicator may be displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600, or may be used to define a lower right display area or the like that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for performing display for various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

  Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect change by rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as “beep”) corresponding to the changed volume is obtained. The electronic sound is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Thus, when the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sound of music and sound effects is produced by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Even if the sound is not output from the main frame 622 and the specific sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, the actual volume is checked. The volume can be adjusted. Note that the specific sound may not be output during the execution of the fluctuation effect. That is, during the execution of the fluctuation effect, an effect sound corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation effect is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a specific sound irrelevant to the content of the fluctuation effect being output during the fluctuation effect, thereby preventing the fluctuation effect being executed from being hindered and thereby reducing the interest in the game.

  The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of the effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the effect sound is updated. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the volume of the effect sound of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the case where the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased, thereby adjusting the volume of the music or sound effect sound. And two methods. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 needs to be always opened from the outer frame 2. Then, only the clerk in the hall can turn the volume adjustment switch. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, there are cases where the player feels low and it is difficult to hear the effect sound of the music and sound effects, and sometimes the player feels loud and feels the sound of the music and effect sounds noisy. is there. Therefore, when the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It has become. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music or sound effect sound to the desired volume, so if the hall clerk feels the volume adjusted to be low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect sound. Can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 to increase the volume up to a desired volume, and feel the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall so that the production sound of music and sound effects can be produced. If the user feels noisy, the user can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed in the customer waiting state (for example, 10 times), The sound volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the sound volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly turning the volume adjustment switch is set. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the volume adjusted by the player is low and it is difficult to hear the effect sound of the music and sound effects, this time the front of the pachinko machine 1 A player who plays a game while sitting on the pachinko machine 1 can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who played the game feels the volume adjusted by the player large and feels the production sound of music and sound effects noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and performs the game this time has the production operation unit 300. By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[14-2. Volume control of specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. In addition to adjusting the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) sound output in a high-frequency range (a predetermined frequency band or more).

  That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first special symbol) Display device, the second special symbol display), for a certain period (variable pattern command received in the peripheral control unit in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) And then 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, or until 0.5 seconds elapse after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the fixed display of the decorative symbol elapses). The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (Operation in the so-called button effect) Except for the operation period of the operation unit 303, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 causes various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (existence of high-frequency sound output, light emission of the LED of the door frame 3). Screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for performing the environment change mode for setting the presence / absence. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, the environment that can be changed (whether or not high-frequency sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, and the like) is displayed in a list, and the environment is changed by the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where such an environment setting is selected, a process of changing the environment setting can be executed. As described above, by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300 in accordance with the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, The sound can be output at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen in the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, but is displayed translucently so that the image of the back can be recognized.

  Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 while operating the contact operation unit 302 to select the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band suppresses the sound output of the specific frequency band and the specific frequency band. A selection screen is displayed indicating that the sound output is not suppressed (for example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed, and “high-frequency cut-on” or “high-frequency cut-off” is displayed in the balloon of the mini character, and the touch operation is performed. The display is switched every time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation), the state where the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed by operating the contact operation unit 302 again, and the state where the sound output of the specific frequency band is not suppressed By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where one of the buttons is selected, the change to the selected state is determined, and a determination screen is displayed (the mini-capacitor for volume setting). Balloon within the displays either "You there cut of the high-frequency range," or "I no cut of the high range" of). Thereafter, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the environment change mode is ended by causing the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 to disappear. After the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Note that the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the effect effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area or the like that does not overlap with the display of the indicator at the time of sound volume adjustment may be partitioned, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen may be displayed in the lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen are displayed on the display device. You may.

  Note that by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the contact operation is performed. Even if the part 302 is rotated, the effect sound volume adjustment is invalidated, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 after the end of the environment change mode, the volume control of the production sound is enabled and an indicator is displayed on the production display device 1600. Will be done.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, during the fluctuating effect performed by the effect display device 1600, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is changed by turning the volume adjustment switch or rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. When the user operates the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to suppress the volume from being set according to the operation, the contact operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. The change according to the operation of the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is not reflected on the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4. Then, at the timing of t3 when the variable effect performed by the effect display device 1600 ends (decorative symbol is determined and stopped based on the reception of the stop display command instructing derivation display of the decorative symbol display result from the main control MPU 1310a). At the timing), the change according to the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 performed during the variable effect is reflected, that is, the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. The volume is set lower than the volume set according to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit or the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

  In addition, in the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is invalidated after the timing t2 when the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed. You. Then, when the change of the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the fluctuation effect ends, the specific operation is performed. The volume control of the effect sound in the frequency band becomes effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume control of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is invalid, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operating unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the environment A screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but it is not possible to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. In addition, in the period in which the volume control of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated, the environment change mode is performed even if the push operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. May not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the variable effect performed by the effect display device 1600, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 are performed. When the unit 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not immediately reflected, but are reflected after the end of the variable effect executed on the effect display device 1600. Normally, from the start to the end of the fluctuating effect, the effect sound according to the contents of the fluctuating effect is continuously output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Because the output sound is output, when adjusting the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation effect (the effect sound that is continuously output is momentarily interrupted, and then the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed) (For example, when the output of the effected sound or the effected sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is restarted), the player may feel uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the effect of the effect of fluctuation, the effect of the effect is changed. Until the end, the change according to this operation is not reflected and reflected after the end of the fluctuating effect, so that the effect sound continuously flowing during the fluctuating effect is output with the preset contents, After the effect is finished and the output of the effect sound continuously flowing according to the content of the variable effect is stopped, the volume of a specific frequency band by operating the contact operating unit 302 or the pressing operating unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 Since the effect sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the fluctuating production in which the production sound is continuously output, without continuously reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the production sound that is continuously output is stopped, and the next production sound is output. By reflecting at the switching timing until the output, the effect sound can be changed according to the adjustment without discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band during the period in which the fluctuation production is not performed, The corresponding change is immediately reflected, and the effect sound whose volume in a specific frequency band is adjusted is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4. .

  As described above, while the sound volume adjustment of the effect sound during the fluctuation effect is immediately reflected, the sound volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the scheduled performance in the running variable performance, such as giving a sense of incongruity to the player due to the change in the performance sound, the change during the variable performance is prohibited and the reduction in the performance effect is prohibited. It is designed to be deterred.

  In addition, when the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the effect may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the sound volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not performed. Although not immediately reflected, the miniature character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a standby display such as "wait a moment" is displayed in the balloon of the minicharacter to adjust the sound volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band. The player may be notified that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for normal operation is normally received. Further, the standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is normally received is specified. May be changed according to the remaining time until the timing at which the volume adjustment of the frequency band is reflected. For example, a mini-character for setting the volume is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the message The player confirms that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for performing the standby display 1 such as “Ne” and adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is normally received. After the notification to the effect display device 1600, when the remaining time until the timing of reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, "3" in the balloon of this Minikyara to display the Minikyara for volume setting, "2", may be performed stand-by display 2 to perform a countdown, such as "1". Furthermore, when the timing of adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band has arrived, the effect may be notified. For example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and A reflection display such as “selection reflection start!” May be performed in the balloon.

  Further, in the above example, as the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are set in advance by the equalizer setting pattern. By switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by performing the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, a state in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and a specific frequency band A state in which the volume of the band is suppressed is switched between two stages (on and off). Note that a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching the plurality of equalizer settings, a plurality of equalization settings of the degree of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band are different. You may make it switch to a state. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a turning operation of a volume adjustment switch or a staging operation unit 300 And an equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6 is changed to volume 3), the equalizer setting C is suppressed to half the volume set in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of FIG. By switching to one of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C by performing the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, the volume of the specific frequency band is When the volume is not suppressed, when the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and when the volume of the specific frequency band is And while suppressing half the volume of the volume that is set in response to the rotating operation of the touch operating unit 302 of the turning operation and staging operation unit 300 of the switch may be set so as to be switched to three stages of. This makes it possible to make settings that match the preferences of various players.

  In addition, the effect sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above, but also includes a sound frequency band, a low sound range, and the like.For example, it is possible to adjust a volume of a dialogue emitted from a character or the like during a fluctuation effect. (If there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. Further, the effect sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the big hit determination, the payout sound at the time of payout of the prize ball, and the like may be adjusted. In addition, the sound volume of a plurality of frequency bands as a specific frequency band may be adjusted. For example, the sound volume of both a high frequency range and a low frequency range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted collectively (for example, an operation of switching between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a case in which the bass range is not suppressed are suppressed. The operation of switching to one of the states is collectively performed by a single operation), and each is adjusted (for example, the operation of switching to one of a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and the state of being suppressed and the state in which the bass range is not suppressed are suppressed. And the operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be allowed to select any one of a plurality of setting modes (such as a high-frequency cut, a payout sound cut, and a big hit confirmation sound cut). This makes it possible to make settings that match the preferences of various players.

  Further, in the case where a continuous effect sound is output during a big hit game state, a small hit game state, or the like, the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted by a top center speaker, a top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and a main body frame. 4, while the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band may be reflected after the big hit game state and the small hit game state are finished. As a result, the output of the continuous effect sound is stopped, and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is adjusted at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output, by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame. By reflecting the result in the output from the bass frame speaker 622 for low sound of No. 4, the effect sound can be changed in accordance with the adjustment without any discomfort. In addition, during the big hitting game state and the small hitting game state, the player's attention to the effect content is lower than in the variable effect, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is the same as the above-mentioned effect sound volume adjustment. The output may be immediately reflected on the outputs from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the third side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4.

  Further, in the case where a continuous effect sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during a time saving state, the volume control of the effect sound is performed by controlling the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body. The effect is immediately reflected in the output from the main frame speaker 622 for the bass in the frame 4, and the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the change effect is not reflected until after the change effect is completed, and is reflected after the change operation is completed, so that the change effect is performed. When the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band when there is no 3-side top center speaker, and the top side speakers, may be caused to immediately reflected on the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low body frame 4. In other words, during the performance of the variable effect, which is the player's most noticeable effect, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not reflected during the execution of the variable effect, but is reflected after the end of the variable effect, thereby identifying when the player is not paying much attention. The effect of the volume adjustment in the frequency band may be reflected so that the effect sound can be changed according to the adjustment without discomfort.

  Note that even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the production sound is actually output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass on the body frame 4. Until the change, the effect sound after the change is not output. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect, the specific frequency after the end of the fluctuation effect. Even after the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the effect sound after the change is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 after the start of the next fluctuation effect. Is done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (hit determination lottery or the like) for starting the next variable effect is performed. Similarly, when the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period in which the demonstration is performed on the effect display device 1600. Means that the sound effect of the sound effect of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected, but if the sound effect is not output as a demonstration, the sound effect after the change will be applied to the door frame 3 until the next variable effect is started. The sound is not output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4, but is output after the start of the fluctuation effect.

  Further, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is initialized at the same time when the volume of the effect sound is initialized. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 has not been playing a game for a predetermined period of time and enters the customer waiting state and the demonstration using the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time The volume adjusted by the player sitting and playing the game is canceled, the volume is initialized, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed. State).

  In addition, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit of the production operation unit 300 adjust the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (or the maximum volume). When the button 303 is operated, whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound may be appropriately set according to the degree of abnormality (injustice level) that caused the error notification. Good.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, when a minor abnormality (a full tank error) occurs as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full of the game balls B. When the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during the full tank error notification executed, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately reported. When a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the state in which the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center of the door frame 3 side is maintained. The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side and the top side speaker (for example, “Please pull out the ball!”) Reflects the volume control in a specific frequency band as the full tank error notification. It is changed (for example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, the voice is output by a female voice, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, the voice is output by a male voice).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210, when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 is opened occurs, the volume of a specific frequency band is changed during the door opening error notification. When the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the specific frequency band May not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, the volume of a sound (for example, “the door is open!”) Output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side in a specific frequency band can be adjusted as the door opening error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, output with a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, output with a male voice), but a serious abnormality Is generated, the sound volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is invalidated and a notification sound in which the sound volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 209, when a small abnormality (full error) occurs as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full of the game balls B. During the notification of the tan error, when the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the staging operation unit 300 is performed to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as being effective, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. Regarding the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the notification sound after the change is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 while reflecting on the notification sound. . Also, as shown in FIG. 210, during the notification of the door opening error when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 has been opened occurs, the staging operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume. When the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 is performed, the operation is accepted as being effective, but not only does the sound volume adjustment not be reflected in the notification sound but also the sound volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound. It has become. As described above, by appropriately setting whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is to be reflected in the notification sound in accordance with the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification, a serious abnormality can be surely performed. Be able to discover.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are operated. When a serious abnormality occurs in a state in which the effect sound after the change is output from the body sound speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4, when a serious abnormality occurs, the specific sound corresponding to the operation of the environment change mode or the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without performing volume adjustment of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (off), and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is restarted after the stop of the notification sound, the specific sound corresponding to the operation of the environment change mode or the effect operation unit 300 is specified. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that has been forcibly released is set (turned on) again, and the effect sound with the suppressed volume of the specific frequency band is generated on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the volume control of a specific frequency band is enabled, and the volume control of the specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. In the case where the production sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and without directly reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 on the output of the production sound. The case where the effect sound and the notification sound after the change can be output by delaying the timing and the case where the effect sound and the notification sound are output are appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, and the like). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the production and to surely find a serious abnormality.

[15. Change settings such as winning probability]
An example in which the probability of a big hit, a small hit or the like in the pachinko machine 1 is changed according to a set value will be described. Hereinafter, it is assumed that operation signals from the setting keys on the setting board, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch are output to the payout control board 633. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, the setting board may be connected to the power board 630 in the power board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting display may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the main control board 1310.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the set or selected set value. Control the vessel.

  On the setting board, a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the set value, a setting fixing switch for fixing and inputting the changed set value, and , A setting display for displaying a setting or a selected setting value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided in the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up on the gaming island at the game store, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, the setting can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. The setting display is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a responds to the setting as a table (a hit determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. Select the table that was created. Tables used for special lottery and the like are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211, in this example, the “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “normal symbol hit probability”, and The opening / closing pattern of the starting port is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  The jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and the set value 1 is “1/319” and the set value 2 is “1/319”. “1/1/309”, set value 3 is “1/299”, set value 4 and set value 6 are “1/279”, and set value 5 is “1/289”. In this example, the larger the set value is, the larger the probability of the big hit becomes with the set value 1 to the set value 5, but the larger the set value 6 with the highest set value, the smaller the big hit probability is than the set value 5. I have. The big hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the big hit probability may be set to be higher as the set value increases from set value 1 to set value 6.

  The small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. In the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, The set values 1 to 4 are set to “1/100”, and the set values 5 and 6 are set to “1/90”. In the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set values 1 to 4 are set. Up to the setting value 5, “50/100” is set, and the setting value 6 is “66/100”. In this example, in the case of the high set value (set value 5 or set value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit game state is increased indirectly by increasing the small hit probability more than other set values (low set value). It has become. As described above, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, in the normal state, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit, while the second special symbol is estimated. In the table used for the special lottery, the small hitting probability is set to be substantially the same for all the set values so that the continuation of the time reduction state (ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the time reduction state.

  In the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol mainly executed in the normal state, the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set values 1 to 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol mainly executed in the time saving state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set values 1 to 5. Therefore, in the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the lottery is performed with a different small hit probability, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Is such that a small lottery is performed with the same probability. However, the big hit probability and the determination rate of the small hit type to be described later are set so that the set value 5 is higher than the set value 4, so that the set value 5 is more advantageous than the set value 4 as a whole. Have been.

  In addition, since the probability of a big hit in the normal state is high while the probability of a small hit is low, it is highly probable that the hit as a trigger for shifting to the time-saving state as in the set value 4 is “big hit”. A game that is unlikely to become a big hit via a "small hit" and a "small hit" while the chance of a hit as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to the time saving state as set value 5 is a "big hit" is low To provide a new game property that can realize a game that is likely to be a big hit by changing the set value and infer the set value according to the type of hit as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to the time saving state Can be.

  Note that the small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the small hit probability may be set to be higher as the set value becomes higher with the set value 1 to the set value 6. . Also, the small hit probability according to some of the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability according to any one of the lower set values. You may make it. For example, the small hit probability of the set value 4 may be set to 1/100, and the small hit probability of the set value 3 lower than the set value 4 may be set to 1/90. In this case, the ratio determined for the small hit type (third small hit in this example) that is advantageous in the case of a small hit is set such that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

  Also, as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio when the small hit type is determined based on the small hit determination is set in the small hit symbol determination table. Different values are set for each set value. In this example, when it is determined that the small win is made as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to the set value 3 are determined to be the second small hit at a ratio of 9/10, and Is determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 1 and at the set value 4 and the set value 5, it is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 8/10 and is determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 2/10. In the setting value 6, the first small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10. It has become.

  In addition, when it is determined that the small win is made as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the set value 1 and the set value 2 are determined to be the first small hit at a rate of three-tenths, and six-tenths are set. The second small hit is determined by the ratio, the third small hit is determined by one tenth, and the first small hit is determined by two tenths at the set value 3 and the set value 4, and the tenth minute is determined. Is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 6; the third small hit is determined at a rate of 2/10; the set value 5 and the set value 6 are determined to the first small hit at a 1/10 rate. The second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10.

  Further, as described above, the first small hit is for guiding the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 to the first losing hole 2535, and there is no possibility that the big hit game state occurs, or the big hit game state. Is extremely low. Then, in this example, when it is determined that a small hit is made as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and the other set value (set value By setting it not to be selected at 1 to 5), if a small hit occurs in a state that is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the time saving state of the normal state, if the set value is 1 to 5 the big hit game The small hitting game state can be executed while generating expectation of the big hitting game state by generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of the state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, when the small hit is performed in a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state of the normal state, while paying attention to the small hit game state while expecting the big hit game state, When the player recognizes that all the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535 and there is no possibility of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the discouragement of the player increases, By generating at least the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of generating the big hit gaming state, it is possible to draw attention to the big hit gaming state during the small hitting gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. The decline can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the case of the setting value 6, although the first small hit may be selected, it is possible to determine that the setting value 6 is the highest setting value by executing the first small hit in the normal state. In this way, the player can be given more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is made as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time reduction state, the small hit probability is higher than in the normal state, and the small hitting game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, it is assumed that the first small hit is executed, and all the game balls B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, and it is recognized that there is no possibility of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Also does not discourage players. Also, when it is determined that a small hit is made as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the determination rate of the first small hit is increased at a low set value (set value 1 or set value 2), and at a high set value. The decision ratio for the first small hit is reduced. In other words, when the high setting value is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol as compared with the low setting value, the ratio determined as the small hit type disadvantageous to the player is reduced. Thus, the high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

  In addition, as described above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball B received in the bonus winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, and it is determined that the third small hit is a big hit. This is almost the same state as what has been done. In other words, an increase in the determination rate of the third small hit is equivalent to an increase in the winning probability of the big hit, and in this example, the determination of the third small hit is made at a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6). By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is indirectly improved.

  In addition, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol hit determination value indicating the normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination random number) is set to a different value for each set value. The value is “1/2”, and the setting value 6 is “1/2”. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed at the setting value 6, the second starting port door 2411 always moves forward and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. , Which is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

  Further, in this example, when it is determined that the normal lottery results are set to the normal hit, the normal symbol hit A (the symbol A per common symbol) and the normal symbol B (the symbol B per normal symbol B (the symbol B1 per symbol normal) It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of ordinary symbols per symbol of symbols per symbol B5)) and symbols per symbol C (symbol C per symbol), and according to the determined type of symbols per ordinary symbol. The modes (symbol A per symbol, symbol B per symbol, symbol C per symbol) are derived and displayed on an ordinary symbol display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second starting port door 2411 is made different for each set value. More specifically, when the normal symbol A is reached in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of “execute the opening of 0.1 s once” is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), When the normal symbol per time is set to A, the opening / closing mode of "perform 6s release once" is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when the normal symbol becomes B per normal symbol Executes the opening / closing mode of “perform opening of 0.1 s twice” with odd set values (set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5), and sets even number set values (set value 2, set value 4, When the opening / closing mode of “execute 0.1 s release once” is executed with the value 6), and when it becomes B per symbol usually in the time saving state, “perform 6 s release once” for the set values 1 to 3 The opening / closing mode is performed, and the set value 4 and the setting value 5 execute the opening / closing mode “execute 3s release twice” and the set value In running the "Run once 3s open" opening and closing manner.

  In the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, the type is determined to be one of the two types of normal symbol hits, the normal symbol hit A and the normal symbol hit B, as the normal symbol hit type. In the case of the set value 6, the type per normal symbol is determined to be one of three types of normal symbol per type, that is, normal symbol per A, normal symbol per B, and normal symbol per C. . Then, in the normal state, when the normal symbol per C is reached, the opening / closing mode of “execute the opening of 0.1 s six times” is executed with the set value of 6, and when the normal symbol per C is reached in the time saving state, the setting is performed. At a value of 6, an opening / closing mode of “execute 1s release six times” is executed.

  As described above, the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second starting port 2004) that sets the second starting port 2004 to the open state based on the normal lottery result being the normal winning is set for each set value. Therefore, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411.

  The setting key is a trigger for inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion portion) and turning the key to a set position to maintain a short-circuited or open state of the contact and to change to the setting change mode. This is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that another switch may be used instead of providing a setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating (holding) the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, and the setting change mode is ended by pressing and holding the setting change switch during the setting change mode. You may.

  The setting change mode may be started / terminated by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the operation of the RAM clear switch is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press) to start the setting change mode. Also, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch.

  The setting change switch is constituted by, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select the set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value increases by one, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. The set value is not limited to six steps, but may be smaller (e.g., two) or larger (e.g., eight).

  The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability of a big change big hit, the ratio of the time saving (ST) after the big hit, the number of time savings, the number of rounds and counts of the big hit, the probability of the normal drawing, the prize ball of the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening. Various parameters related to the game, such as the number, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player.

  The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be determined without providing the setting determination switch. Further, the set value selected in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be determined. For example, the operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, the operation of the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball lending button, the operation of the return button, The selected setting may be determined by detecting a winning of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 or the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for a game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in order to set the gaming performance in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

  Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the operation of the RAM clear switch is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press) to start the setting change mode. Also, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The set value can be determined by the above operation (long press). Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a setting key). Note that the setting display may be constituted by LEDs having a settable number of values instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of the payout error is provided on the payout control board 633. The set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dots may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dots may be turned on when displaying the set value. The display of the error type may be lit (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be blinking.

[15-1. Setting change processing]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the set value.

  In this example, the main control-side power-on process is executed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The above setting values are changed.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines the state of the setting key after performing the initial value setting and the start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on processing, and turns on the setting key. If it has been operated, a setting change mode for changing the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned on when receiving the setting key operation signal. . The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 195 is touched, or a prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit (the prepaid card has a balance). The setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance inserted into the cash sand. The setting change mode may not be started even when there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is performing some kind of misconduct (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

  When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a uses data other than the game state (for example, the information on the probability change state, the time saving state, and the prize ball) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. Then, a first RAM clear process for clearing data indicating the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

  Next, the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the first RAM clear processing, it sends a first RAM clear processing end command to the payout control section 633a, and when the first RAM clear processing end command is received, the payout control section 633a displays the set value on the setting display. The initial value (for example, the set value 0) is blinked and displayed, and the set value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (the set value 1 to the set value 6 are looped).

  The set value is cleared by the main control MPU 1310a executing the first RAM clear processing, and the main control MPU 1310a is in an unset state. In addition, the setting change mode cannot be ended if the setting value is not set.If the power is cut off during the setting change mode while the setting value is not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode is performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process for monitoring the state of the setting key is performed until the setting key is turned on. When the setting key is turned on, the setting change mode is set. Will be started.

  Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame opening switch is off, and turns on the main body frame opening switch (the main body frame 4 is If the setting is not released, the operation loops until the body frame release switch is turned off, and the operation of the setting confirmation switch is not accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

  When the setting switch is operated when the body frame opening switch is off or when the body frame opening switch is turned off, the payout control unit 633a determines and displays the set value displayed on the setting display ( The blinking display is ended and the display is turned on), and the main control MPU 1310a transmits a setting change end command indicating the determined set value.

  Upon receiving the setting change end command, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, the lottery process or the like according to the determined set value is performed.

  Then, when the condition for ending the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the setting value is changed by the above-described processing.

  Note that when the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). You may. When the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode ends, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display, although the setting change mode is not executed. This allows the game clerk to change the set value after grasping the current set value.

  Further, when the setting change mode is executed, it may be notified to that effect. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is operated to be turned on, a setting change mode start command for notifying that the setting change mode is started is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the setting change mode start command is received. Peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (during setting change) on effect display device 1600 based on the display. In this case, when the setting change mode is ended, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is ended is transmitted. The predetermined display that the peripheral control unit 1511 performs on the effect display device 1600 may be terminated based on the reception of the change mode end command. The set value determined as the predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the set value may be erased at the end of the setting change mode. Good.

  The main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the special symbol displays are turned off or turned on).

  On the other hand, after the initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on processing (Step S12), the state of the setting key is determined. The processing after S14 is executed.

  Then, in the main control-side power-on processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, determines that various information is to be erased, or determines in step S30. When the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in the determination in step S32, that is, the power-off process on the main control side. Is determined not to end normally, in step S38, the data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area and the game state (for example, information about the probability change state, the time saving state, After executing the second RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating ()), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step ST). Flop S40). Thus, unlike the first RAM clearing process, the set value information is not initialized in the second RAM clearing process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear processing can be executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch can be operated to clear the second RAM. By executing the process, it is possible to clear the information on the gaming state (for example, the information on the probability change state, the time saving state, and the winning ball). Further, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process is executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clearing process. Clears information related to the state (for example, information about the probability change state, the time saving state, and the prize ball). It is also possible to clear both. In this manner, one or both of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

  In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. The setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, transmits a predetermined pulse signal (pulse of a predetermined frequency is performed a predetermined number of times), or is grounded even at a power supply voltage. A signal of an intermediate potential other than a voltage may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key, a signal relating to the operation of the setting key is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminal. Is preferably transmitted to

[15-2. Fluctuating effects according to set values]
Next, a description will be given of a variable effect according to each set value. FIG. 213 is a fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (first fluctuation pattern setting processing, second fluctuation pattern setting processing).

  In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 outlier variation pattern table (referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process) In FIG. 213 (A)), for example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “Low?” Or “One of 1, 2, 3? By performing the “low setting suggestion effect” that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is any one of 1, 2, and 3, the outlier fluctuation pattern 25 can be selected from the set value 1 to the set value 3. For example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "high" or "4, 5, 6" is displayed in the balloon of the mini-character. Off variation pattern 26 for executing the "High Set suggesting demonstration" suggests that the set value of the slave unit 1 is one of 4, 5, 6 are selectable setpoint 4 setpoint 6. For this reason, when the “high setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, for example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “even?”, “2, 4, or 6?” Or the like is displayed in the balloon of the mini-character, so that the pachinko machine 1 The non-performing variation pattern 27 for executing “even number setting suggesting effect” indicating that the setting value of “2” is one of 2, 4, and 6 can be selected by setting value 2, setting value 4, and setting value 6. For example, The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini-character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying “is it odd number?” Or “is it one of 1, 3, 5?” In the balloon of the mini-character. Is set to 1, 3, and 5 to execute the "odd number setting suggesting effect" that indicates that the value is one of 1, 3, and 5. Therefore, when the “even number setting suggestion effect” is executed in the fluctuation effect, the setting value is any one of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6, and when the “odd number setting suggestion effect” is executed, the setting value 1 and the setting value The player can recognize that the value is any one of the setting value 5 and the setting value 5. The set value can be estimated by combining with the execution history of “low setting suggestion effect” or “high setting suggestion effect”. That is, if the “odd setting suggestion effect” and the “low setting suggestion effect” are executed, the setting value is 1 or the setting value 3, and the “odd number setting suggestion effect” and the “high setting suggestion effect” are executed. If it is, the setting value is 5, and if “even setting suggestion effect” and “low setting suggestion effect” are executed, the setting value is 2, and “even number setting suggestion effect” and “high setting suggestion effect” are displayed. Is executed, it can be estimated that the setting value is 4 or 6. As described above, in this example, a new game characteristic is provided in which the set value is estimated by a combination of the executed setting suggestive effects among the plurality of types of setting suggestive effects.

  Further, in this example, for example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “the best?” Or “6?” Is displayed in the balloon of the mini-character, so that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. The outlier fluctuation pattern 29 for executing the “highest setting suggestion effect” indicating that the value is 6 can be selected only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the “maximum setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the highest setting, and the interest in the game is improved. Further, in the case of the set value 6, in the case of the out-of-reaching condition or the out-of-reach condition, the out-of-fluctuation variation pattern 31 for executing the “maximum setting confirmation effect” can be selected, whereby the setting value is given to the player. It is possible to notify that the maximum setting is set with the setting value 6, and to make the player aware that the maximum setting has been settled, thereby improving the entertainment of the game.

  In addition, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, a special figure 1 small hit change pattern table (FIG. 213) which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the first special symbol in the first change pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, the mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying “Maximum setting finalized!” Or “6 finalized! The small hitting variation pattern 33 and the small hitting variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting confirmation effect” notifying that the value is 6 can be selected only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the “highest setting finalized effect” is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the highest setting, and the gaming interest is improved. .

  In addition, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit change pattern table (FIG. 213 (C)) referred to when determining the change pattern of the first special symbol in the first change pattern setting process. In)), the big hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting confirmation effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. For this reason, when the “highest setting confirmation effect” is executed in the variable effect in the case of a big hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the set value 6 of the highest setting, and the big hit game state is further executed. By doing so, double pleasure can be given to the player, and the entertainment interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time reduction state, a special figure 2 small hit change pattern table (FIG. 213) which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the second special symbol in the second change pattern setting process. In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting finalized effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting finalized effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting value 6 and further, the bonus winning opening By guiding the game ball B that entered in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 and winning the third small hit that generates a big hit gaming state, double joy can be given to the player, Game entertainment is improved.

  As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the set values 1 to 4 are set to the small hit probability “1/100”, whereas the set values 5 and 6 are set to “90 minutes” which are higher than the set values 1 to 4. 1 ”. Similarly, in the time reduction state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 are set to the small hit probability “1/10”, whereas the set value 6 is set to “1/9” higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the small hit variation pattern 34 that executes the “highest setting confirmation effect” that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process is for a long period (155 seconds). It is longer than the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected with the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6. Further, at the set value 6, the selectivity of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed in the time saving state is longer. As described above, at the setting value 6, the small hitting probability is higher than the setting values 1 to 5, and when the small hitting occurs, the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is the first V winning opening. Since the ratio determined as the third small hit for generating the big hit gaming state by guiding to 2007 is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a short time. . Therefore, the selectivity of the small hit variation pattern 20 or the small hit variation pattern 34 in which the variation time is set longer than the other small hit variation patterns in the case of the set value 6 is increased from the set value 1 to the set value 5. The number of executions of the fluctuation effect per unit time is suppressed, and the improvement of gambling is suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner for all the set values, but in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the variation pattern peculiar to the set value 6 (outward variation pattern 29 to outlier variation). Since the pattern 31, the small hit change pattern 33, the small hit change pattern 34, and the big hit change pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of the change pattern determining random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to the specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6 are adjusted to distribute the variation pattern determination random numbers. In this way, only the variation pattern determining random numbers allocated to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the variation pattern determining random numbers of all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6. By doing so, the load in adding or deleting a fluctuation pattern is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine is facilitated. Note that the specific variation pattern is such that the frequency of occurrence is maintained at a certain value or more even when the number of distributions of the variation pattern determination random number is reduced, and at least the variation pattern determination random number set in another set value. The number of distributions is adjusted so as to have 60% or more, and the appearance rate may not be excessively reduced as compared with other set values.

  As described above, in this example, the small hit probability and the variable time of the variable effect executed when the special lottery result is a small hit are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, thereby achieving a balance with the gambling. Has taken.

  In addition, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effects (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting confirmation effect) are different from the first special lottery result in the normal state. Or, it is most easily executed when the reach is out of reach, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result in the time reduction state is out of reach or out of reach, the special lottery results in the normal state and in the time reduction state (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) are small hits or big hits In such a case, the first special lottery result in the normal state is less likely to be executed as compared with a case where the result is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. That is, by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect in the time reduction state or the small hit as compared to the case of the loss or the reach of the normal state, the reception of the game ball B to the V winning opening is focused. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of first guide passage and second guide passage]
[16-1. Case in which right detection sensor 2404 is provided in first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided, FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521. FIG. 215 is a specific example of an effect at the time of executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. .

  As shown in FIG. 214, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. In other words, when the game ball B is driven into the upstream space 2506 with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (strength somewhat lower than right-handed), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

  The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (firing intensity) in accordance with the game state, and to make the area and path on which the game ball B is hit different. First, during the small hit game, the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is thrown into the opened bonus winning opening 2006. Is required. For this reason, during the small hit game, the game ball enters the upstream space 2506 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to strike B (so-called right strike).

  In addition, during the jackpot game, the special winning opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center role 2500 is opened, and it is required that the game ball B be thrown into the opened special winning opening 2005. However, the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 with a higher probability than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 so as to enter the special winning opening 2005 with a higher probability. ing. In addition, during the time-saving state, the second starting port 2004, which is also provided at the lower right of the center role 2500, is opened based on the ball entering the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center role 2500. It is required that the game ball B enter the second starting port 2004 in the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 is located closer than the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is configured to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with a higher probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the game ball B. For this reason, during the big hit game and during the time reduction state, the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with the right (strength somewhat weaker than the right hit).

  In addition, during the normal state, it is required that the game ball B enter the first starting port 2002 provided below the center role 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, the highest among the outer peripheral surfaces of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B flows down the left area of the center role 2500 where the game ball B can enter the first starting port 2002. The game ball B must be driven (so-called left-handed) with such a strength that it enters the left side in front view (left side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame) from the part where it has become.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (firing intensity) in accordance with the game state, and to make the area and passage into which the game ball B is hit different. When the ball B has not been hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or passage. Specifically, when it is not a game state in which the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. If the detected state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

  First, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time reduction state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is recommended. Detects that the game ball B has passed, it determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and this state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, five game balls B in five seconds). When the above is detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a first warning effect for notifying a message “Please drive into the second guideway”. Thereby, during the big hit game and during the time reduction state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts on the stop portion 1006 (a somewhat weaker strength than right-handed), and the second guidance The player can know that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, if the state where the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is placed in the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state in which has been entered has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Is started, and the count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the first warning effect is executed but the state has not continued for a predetermined time (for example, when the number of game balls B is less than 5 in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the gaming state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state to the state where the game ball B should not be driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first timer is set. In addition to terminating the first warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, the second guide passage 2522 is also provided when the gaming state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state. It is determined that it is no longer necessary to hit the game ball B in the first warning effect.

  Also, during the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the area on the left side of the center role item 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 prevents the game ball B from passing therethrough. When it is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), It warns the player that the game ball B should be driven into the left area of the center role 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), the effect display device 1600 is executing a second warning effect for notifying a message “Please left-turn”. Thereby, during the normal state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength to enter the left side in front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 (the left side from the upper right portion 2502a on the front frame). Then, the player can know that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center role 2500. When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved. It is determined that the second warning effect has been performed.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. During the monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented every time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B. Then, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the second warning effect is executed, but the state has not continued for a predetermined time (for example, when the number of the game balls B is less than 5 in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is provided. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the normal state, and when the state where the game ball B should not be driven into the left area of the center role 2500 is no longer necessary, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state where the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first timer is set. In addition to terminating the second warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and in the case where the game state has been switched from the normal state, the left area of the center role 2500 is also provided. It is determined that the state in which the game ball B should not be hit is stopped, and the second warning effect has been completed.

  As described above, when it is not a game state in which the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. When the detected state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the contents of the warning change according to the gaming state. Thereby, even when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game ball B is not to be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the recommended area or the passage may be any. The player can know exactly whether there is.

  On the other hand, during the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 causes the game ball to be hit. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide passage 2521, and if the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that the game ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), the effect display device 1600 is executing a third warning effect for notifying a message “Please drive into the first guidance passage”. Thereby, during the small hitting game, the way of hitting is changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the stop portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. The player can understand. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is ended. Like that.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring is performed. The timer has started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the third warning effect is executed, If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state where the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. 3 The warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hitting game to the gaming state after the start of the monitoring timer and the state in which the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer present, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Then, after execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, a state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 is set. In addition to terminating the fourth warning effect assuming that the game ball has been resolved, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hitting game to the third gaming state, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer present. The warning production has ended.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. However, the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be provided. Any position may be used as long as it passes through, for example, an inlet at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and an inside of the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the bonus winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hitting game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the bonus winning opening 2006 opened. Accordingly, the frequency of the game balls B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from excessively passing and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are described by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. If a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display made of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display made of a left-arrow image) is performed separately so that the player always knows that the player should drive, It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the driving area instruction display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a “display region for displaying a driving region instruction display” is provided and partitioned, and the display region of the effect display device 1600 different from that region is provided. It is desirable that a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" is sectioned in the upper left portion of the display section so that the respective guides are not overlapped and hindered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, such warning is realized as a sound effect, not a display. In that case, in this case, the priority of the assignment to the finitely provided channels for outputting the voice is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state It is desirable to set such that output is performed as much as possible even when there is no vacant (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress a disadvantage that a player who is unfamiliar with the game property having various types of playing balls B is disadvantaged.

[16-2. Case in which detection sensors are provided in first guide passage and second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and an entry into the second guide passage 2522 And a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the played game ball B will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. FIG. 217 shows a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. It is a specific effect example at the time of execution.

  As shown in FIG. 216, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and Slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the upper end of the guide passage 2522, a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. In other words, when the game ball B is driven into the upstream space 2506 with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

  On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. In other words, if the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (strength somewhat lower than right-handed), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

  The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 sends detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Is entered. Then, based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and generates a detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Based on this, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B. It is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

  In the present embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (firing intensity) according to the game state, and to make the region and path on which the game ball B is hit different. If the game ball B has not been driven into the area or passage to be played, the player is alerted to drive the game ball B into the recommended region or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in each of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the normal game ball B should be driven into the left area of the center role 2500. In this state, the state where either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B is predetermined. When the time continues, it is possible to alert the player.

  More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the left area of the center role 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the game ball B. Is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, the game is played for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). When five or more balls B are detected), the player is warned that the game balls B should be driven into the left area of the center role 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (A), the effect display device 1600 is executing a fourth warning effect of notifying a message “Please turn left”. Thereby, during the normal state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength to enter the left side in front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 (the left side from the upper right portion 2502a on the front frame). Then, the player can know that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center role 2500. When the state where the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are displayed. It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is determined that there is, and the monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) ), The fourth warning effect is executed, whereas if the state has not been continued for a predetermined time (for example, if the number of game balls B has been less than 5 in 5 seconds, the game ends) Assuming that the state where the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, the fourth warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the normal state, and when the state where the game ball B should not be driven into the left area of the center role 2500 is no longer necessary, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition to terminating the fourth warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is terminated, and the gaming state is switched from the normal state. In addition, the fourth warning effect is terminated because it is no longer necessary to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center role 2500.

  During the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide passage 2521, and if the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that the game ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), the effect display device 1600 executes a fifth warning effect for notifying a message “Please drive into the first guide passage”. Thereby, during the small hitting game, the way of hitting is changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the stop portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. The player can understand. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect ends. Like that.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring is performed. The timer has started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the fifth warning effect is executed, If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state where the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. 5 The warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hitting game to the gaming state after the start of the monitoring timer and the state in which the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer present, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Then, after execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning effect on the assumption that the game ball B has been resolved, the game state that the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game state is switched from the small hitting game to the fifth game state is also determined. The warning production has ended.

  On the other hand, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time reduction state, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 Does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and if the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes a sixth warning effect for notifying a message “Please drive into the second guidance passage”. Thereby, during the big hit game and during the time reduction state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts on the stop portion 1006 (a somewhat weaker strength than right-handed), and the second guidance The player can know that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated. ing.

  More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. And the monitoring timer has started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the sixth warning effect is executed, If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state where the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved. 6 The warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state to the state where the game ball B should not be driven into the second guide passage 2522. . Then, after execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B, the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 is set. In addition to terminating the sixth warning effect assuming that has been resolved, it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B should not be driven into the second guide passage 2522 is also stopped when the gaming state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state to the gaming state. The sixth warning effect has been completed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. However, the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be provided. Any position may be used as long as it passes through, for example, an inlet at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and an inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance, which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, such that the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 must pass therethrough. The position may be any position, for example, the inlet may be provided at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, the outlet may be provided at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, or may be provided inside the second guide passage 2522.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the bonus winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hitting game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the bonus winning opening 2006 opened. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from causing a problem due to the game ball B passing excessively.

  In this embodiment, the detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, one detection sensor is provided in a passage closer to the game ball B that has entered the upstream space portion 2506 than one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, thereby providing guidance. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B. Otherwise, it is possible to determine that the game ball B has not been hit into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the state where one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time in the normal state in which the game ball B should be driven into the left area of the center role 2500, By alerting the player, the player can know whether or not the player should hit the game ball B at least in the area on the left side of the center role 2500.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. If a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display made of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display made of a left-arrow image) is performed separately so that the player always knows that the player should drive, It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct the driving area instruction display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a “display region for displaying a driving region instruction display” is provided and partitioned, and the display region of the effect display device 1600 different from that region is provided. It is desirable to provide a "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left portion of the display area so as to prevent the respective guidances from being superimposed and obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are described as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, such warning is realized as a sound effect instead of a display. In that case, in this case, the priority of the assignment to the finitely provided channels for outputting the voice is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state It is desirable to set such that output is performed as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant (unused channel) in finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress a disadvantage that a player who is unfamiliar with the game property having various types of playing balls B is disadvantaged.

[16-3. A case where a ball blocking clearance hole is provided in a heavy part where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in a heavy portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball capable of removing clogging of the ball in the rear second guide passage 2522 is provided. A case in which the clog elimination hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 and 219. FIG. 218 and FIG. 219 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided with a ball clogging clearance hole 2523.

  Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the first guide passage 2521 on a portion extending up and down on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006, so that they are arranged in the front-rear direction so as to be forward. And a heavy part 2520a which is seen from above. In this heavy part 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 218 and FIG. 219 (A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is placed on the heavy portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clog elimination hole 2523 that is insertable and that can remove a ball clog in the rear second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. Specifically, a ball-blocking hole 2523 is provided at the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and at a position where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other. Further, a ball clogging clearance hole 2523 provided at a position where the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front surface side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other is provided on the front surface side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front. It is provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging clearance hole 2523, and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Accordingly, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, so that the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side is inserted. The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B clogged with the ball, and by moving the rod-shaped member back and forth, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed.

  When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member is also visually recognized from the front and the first guide passage is provided. The clogging clearance hole 2523 may be provided at a position corresponding to the clogging clearance hole 2523 provided on the front side of the 2521. Accordingly, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, the bar-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

  Further, the ball clog elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. Accordingly, when the bar-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the bar-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-back direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. . In other words, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, the ball is moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical and horizontal directions to easily remove the ball clog in the second guide passage 2522. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of ball clog elimination holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a portion extending vertically above and below a heavy portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, no matter where the ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522 in the heavy weight portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member may be inserted through the ball clogging clearance hole 2523 provided at a location close to the position. The ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

  The first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 has a complicated path in which the passage is bent only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 has a bent passage not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the heavy weight portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is provided at either the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 at the inlet or the lower end thereof. The rod-shaped member is separated from the inlet and the outlet and is bent, so that even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the inlet or the outlet, the rod-shaped member does not reach the part. In this regard, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the heavy portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball clog elimination hole 2523 is provided. Accordingly, by inserting the rod-shaped member not only when the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side but also in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side in the heavy part 2520a, Ball clogging can be easily removed.

  In the above description, in the heavy view portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the ball is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although a clogging clearance hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging clearance hole 2523 capable of removing a ball clogging in the rear second guide passage 2522 will be described below.

  As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the heavy view portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined block-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and a ball clogging clearance hole 2523 that can remove a ball clogged in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. You may. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 so that the game ball B clogged with the ball in the second guide passage 2522 is bar-shaped. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. In the present embodiment, a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 is provided to the left of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

  Further, as a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), a heavy portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-back direction has a front side of the first guide passage 2521. A hole 2523 for eliminating the clogging is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522. The shape of the hole 2523 for eliminating the clogging is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. May be formed. In such a case, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be largely moved in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. The clog can be easily removed.

  In addition, near the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. Then, as a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is connected to the second guide passage 2522 at a position where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. May be provided from the left side of the first guide passage 2521, and a ball clogging clearance hole 2523 capable of removing a ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. That is, the clogging clearance hole 2523 may be provided to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521, a ball-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the right (rear side). It is possible for the rod-shaped member to come into contact with the game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed.

  Further, as in the first alternative example and the third alternative example, in the case where the ball blocking clearance hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the ball blocking clearance hole is set from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. By inserting the rod-shaped member through 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. However, the light guide plate 3102 is provided at a position adjacent to the rear of the second guide passage 2522 although it is behind the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearance hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. When the light guide plate 3102 is damaged by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with a pattern (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) by light emission decoration, a part having a scratch which is not related to the pattern may be formed. Although the light guides (reflects light), there is a problem that if the damaged portion overlaps with the pattern, the pattern becomes difficult to visually recognize. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decoration area where a picture is exposed in the right area of the light guide plate 3102 which is a part adjacent to the second guide passage 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010. However, the light guide plate 3102 is manually moved left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball clogging clearance hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where the rod-shaped member does not come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 as a preceding stage. May be. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a movable member capable of moving to a position for concealing the clogging clearance hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 and a position for not concealing is provided. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to be able to move to a position where the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not concealed before the insertion. In such a configuration, when it is not necessary to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position that conceals the ball clogging clearance hole 2523, and the player visually recognizes the ball clogging clearance hole 2523. There is an advantage that the decorativeness as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[16-4. Ball Clogging Prevention Structure Near Exits of Side-by-Side First and Second Guide Passages]
As described with reference to FIG. 149 (a), the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( When the player hits the so-called right), the game ball B in contact with the stop portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then guides a group of guide passages. It is discharged from the right outlet at the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. The game balls B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 are caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the game balls B and the attacker unit 2400, so that the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, The user is guided to enter the normal winning opening 2003 or a portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 149 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward. After being aligned in the front-rear direction with the first guide passage 2521 in the heavy view portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the game ball B and the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003. Is guided to enter any one of the above-mentioned portions, and rarely, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging opening 2435 below the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of the game balls B discharged from those exits flow in a short time, and ball clogging easily occurs below these exits. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 is provided. , The game ball B enters the right exit passage 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game balls B discharged from those exits is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out entrance 1008, The game balls B are less likely to stay near the exit of the ball, and the occurrence of clogging of the balls can be prevented. Further, even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from those outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being piled up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. The position of the first opening 2431 is the exit of the second guide passage 2522. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is provided closer than the outlet. The inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with a bonus winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hitting game. However, due to the ball clogging below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 is closed. When the game balls B are stacked up to the position of the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the gaming balls B flow more than expected into the opened bonus winning opening 2006, and the player is illegal. You will be able to get great profits. In this regard, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the Even if the ball is clogged below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out opening 1008, It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being stacked up to the position of the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the one guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, an attacker right that can guide the game ball B to the out opening 1008 is provided. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, a different out opening from the out opening 1008 is provided in the right attacker passage 2430 so that the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 can be separated from the other opening. You may make it discharge | emit out of the game area 5a from an out mouth. Also in such a case, a part of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stay near those exits, thereby preventing the ball from being clogged.

  In addition, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, an attacker right passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the exit 1008 at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, a passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008 or a position outside the game area 5a is also provided at a position near the exit of the second guide passage 2522. An out port different from the out port 1008 from which the game balls B can be discharged may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a. It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

  In the above description, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008 is provided. However, also near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a. An out port different from the possible out port 1008 may be provided. Hereinafter, another example of a case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Show. FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As shown in FIG. 220, between the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a. A certain second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is driven into the upstream space 2506 with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. A part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (strength somewhat lower than right-handed), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B driven to enter the upstream space 2506 enters the second out port 1013. Accordingly, regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, one of the game balls B that is driven to enter the upstream space 2506 is formed. Since the part is guided to the outside of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, the number of the game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the balls are inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to prevent clogging from occurring.

  In addition, in addition to the above, only when the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the out port 1008 that can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided. Another outlet may be provided. Hereinafter, another example of a case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521 is provided. FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided near an outlet inside the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (A), slightly above the exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, a front surface of the game area 5 a (game board 5) which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. There is provided a second out port 1013 which is open and is capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a. Also, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a bonus winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game, and the second out opening 1013 is located on the downstream side of the bonus winning opening 2006. It is provided at a position. In such a configuration, when the ball is not clogged below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide path 2521, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the second out Instead of entering the ball 1013, the ball passes through the front of the second out port 1013 as it is.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), when a ball is clogged below the second outlet 1013, such as below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, the game reaches the position of the second outlet 1013. When the balls B are stacked, the game balls B further flowing through the first guide passage 2521 enter the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are not stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with the bonus winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game, but due to the ball clogging near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. When the game balls B are stacked up to the position of the bonus winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the gaming balls B flow more than expected into the opened bonus winning opening 2006, Players can now gain fraudulent benefits. In this respect, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when a ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 downstream of the bonus winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Is provided, even if a ball is clogged in the vicinity of the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the special winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is closed. Before the game balls B are stacked up to the position, the game balls B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and a situation may occur in which the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[17. Out-mouth detection when an error occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the player enters a ball entry port (a first start port 2002, a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, a special winning port 2006, etc.) provided on the game board 5. When the game ball B enters the ball and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of each ball is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is used as information on the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, a base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue or stop (stop) the operation depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. If an abnormality occurs, the operation is performed. It is stopped (stopped). The execution state of the calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution state of the calculation when an abnormality occurs.

  First, on the main control board 1310, as a ball entrance provided on the game board 5, a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a winning prize, respectively. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game balls B, and adds them to the corresponding number-of-ball counters. With such a number-of-balls counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls of the game balls B that have entered the respective entrances among the game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

  On the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 outputs the game ball B. Are detected and added to the out number counter. The number-of-outs counter can be used to determine the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a.

  The main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation using the number-of-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter. As a specific example, the total number of the game balls B that have entered the entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a by adding all of the entry number counters Can be calculated. Further, the total number of the game balls B hit in the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the incoming ball number counters and the out number counters.

  The above calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, based on the respective number-of-ball counters and number-of-out counters, the number of game balls B entering the respective ball entrances and out-ports 1008 is directly used. It is also possible to output. In addition, examples of the predetermined display device include an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer externally managed by the hall side, and the like. Further, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be displayed. When the information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the information can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall can be visually recognized, while the monitor of the hall computer or the main control board 1310 can be grasped. When the information is displayed on the (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can view.

  In addition, as information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B entering the entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B entering the exit 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it can be determined from these ratios whether or not the extent to which the game ball B enters the entrance or exit 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a enter the entrance at a predetermined ratio. If the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance is too high, it can be suspected that the player has entered the entrance to the entrance due to improper behavior. In contrast, if the total number of game balls B that have entered the out mouth 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the game ball B has been entered into the out mouth 1008 by an illegal act.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. The number of payouts of the game balls B paid out to the player can be grasped by the payout number counter. Then, since the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, which is calculated by the total number of incoming ball counters and the number of out counters, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference between the number of paid-out game balls B and the number of paid-out game balls B, it is possible to calculate the net increase of the game balls B, and display such a net increase of the game balls B on a predetermined display device. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and the pachinko machine 1 A frame-side out port sensor capable of detecting a game ball B that is discharged to the rear outside (island equipment side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93) but passes through the ball discharge port 629 is provided. . When the frame side out mouth sensor detects the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629, a detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the entrance or out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged out of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the frame side out mouth sensor detects the game ball B, and adds it to the frame side out number counter. The number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame side out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 also receives the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower empty ball 600b. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the lower ball ejection passage 610c of the path unit 610, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629. It is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall), and is discharged not only from the game ball B driven into the game area 5a but also downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580. The game ball B is also configured to be detectable by the frame-side out mouth sensor. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is as follows. It is eager to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in a configuration in which the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also detected by the frame-side out-mouth sensor, the game ball B is located upstream of the frame-side out-mouth sensor. The ball removal detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B. It is preferable that the number of the game balls B is subtracted from the number-of-outs counter. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 are detected by the ball ejection detection sensor, temporarily subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side out mouth sensor. This is added to the out number counter, and the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially prevented from being reflected in the out number counter. Note that such a form is used when the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the payout device 580 removes the ball). There is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side exit sensor can perform the detection itself, but the game is performed downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is energized. When the ball B is released (when the payout device 580 removes the ball) or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. In this case, it is possible to solve the problem when the pachinko machine 1 is energized while the ball is being removed (the payout device 580 has been removed). Further, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through separate passages without being merged, and are located behind the pachinko machine 1. The frame may be discharged to the outside (island facilities side of the game hall) so that only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame-side out mouth sensor. In such a configuration, a configuration in which the number of game balls B detected by the above-mentioned ball-out detection sensor is subtracted from the out-number counter becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be ascertained by the frame side out number counter, but the number of game balls hit into the game area 5a can also be determined by the out number counter. The total number of balls B can be calculated. That is, in a state where the game is not played and the game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter matches the numerical value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B has passed the detection sensor provided at the entrance or exit 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the value of the sum of all the incoming ball counters and the out-number counter becomes slightly larger than that of the frame-side out-number counter.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether addition or calculation to the counter is continued or stopped (stopped) differs depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 222A, when a minor abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). The mild abnormality includes a state in which the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B and the payout device 580 cannot pay out the game balls B, and a state in which the game balls B are to be driven into the right area of the center role 2500. , Right-handed. In these states, an effect of warning that the game ball B on the upper plate 201 is guided to the lower plate 202 and an effect of warning that the player will hit the right ball are executed. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2 and the entrance and exit ports 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 are not opened. In this state, the game ball B cannot be artificially entered. For this reason, in the event of a minor abnormality, the number of incoming balls and the number of outgoing counters do not increase due to an illegal act, and the addition or calculation to the counter is continued without being stopped (stopped). I have.

  On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). As this severe abnormality, there is a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and the entrance and exit 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 are artificially formed. This is a state in which the game ball B can enter. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition or the calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped) so that the number-of-ball counter or the number-of-out counter does not increase due to an illegal act.

  In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided at the entrance or exit 1008 does not pass the game ball B. Detected. When a serious abnormality occurs, the values of the counters such as the number-of-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter before the occurrence and the calculation result are retained, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 After the severe abnormality is resolved, such as closing the counter, the addition to the counter and the calculation are restarted. Further, when a serious abnormality has occurred and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter is performed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker. A performance at the time of suspension that notifies that the production has been suspended is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (B), addition to the number-of-outs counter corresponding to the detection by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and detection by the out-mouth right sensor 3033 and the calculation relating to the number-of-outs counter cause the occurrence of a serious abnormality. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time, the addition to the number-of-outs counter and the calculation relating to the number-of-outs counter are continued without being stopped (stopped). The addition to and the calculation relating to the out-number counter are stopped (stopped). Accordingly, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being opened from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of game balls B entering the out-opening 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. .

  For example, when the game ball B becomes grape-like in the game area 5a and clogging of the ball occurs, a normal game cannot be performed, so that the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 to open the grape-like game ball B. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B flows into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is a game ball B that is highly likely to have been discharged from the out port 1008 if it did not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 to remove the grape-shaped game balls B, addition to the out-number counter and calculation relating to the out-number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Is continued without being stopped (stopped), the number of incoming balls having the grape-shaped game balls B flowing into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of information on the out port 1008 can be improved. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the likelihood that the grape-shaped game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 is low, and it is suspected that the game ball B is being entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act. In addition, the calculation relating to the addition and the out-number counter is stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (C), the addition to the out-number counter corresponding to the detection by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the detection by the out-mouth right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out-number counter may cause a serious abnormality. From the time until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the addition to the out-number counter and the calculation relating to the out-number counter continue without being stopped (stopped), but the predetermined time elapses. Even if it is before, if the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 detect a large amount of game balls B continuously in a short time, the addition to the out number counter or the out number counter at that time is performed. The calculation related to has been stopped (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of incoming balls expected to flow into the out port 1008 due to the removal of the grape-shaped game balls B may flow into the out port 1008. Since it is suspected that the ball is thrown into the out mouth 1008 due to a high illegal action, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation relating to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened in a case where a serious abnormality has occurred, the output number counter corresponding to the detection by the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033 is sent to the out counter. With respect to the addition and the calculation related to the out-number counter, the addition to the out-number counter and the calculation related to the out-number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. However, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out-number counter and the calculation relating to the out-number counter are stopped (stopped) at that time. This is conceivable when the door frame 3 is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-like game balls B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game area 5a is opened. This is because the main frame 4 which does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B is opened. That is, when the main frame 4 is opened, the pachinko machine 1 is opened for another purpose, such as removing a ball clogging on the back side, and the addition to the out-number counter and the calculation relating to the out-number counter are stopped (stopped). You are going to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the entrance port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the combined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame-side out mouth sensor detects the game ball B, the frame-side out-number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out mouth sensor as shown in FIG. Regarding the addition and the calculation relating to the frame-side out-number counter, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame-side out-number counter and the calculation relating to the frame-side out-number counter are stopped (stopped). For this reason, when the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out-port corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 in a predetermined period. While the addition to the number counter is performed, the addition to the frame-side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out mouth sensor is not performed. From the difference between the added numerical value and the numerical value of the frame side out number counter, the number of grape-shaped game balls B removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be grasped. It should be noted that the number of such grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information relating to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, as described above, in a state where the game is not played and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter is set to all of the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter. Will be the same as the numerical value obtained by adding. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B has passed the detection sensor provided at the entrance or exit 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the value of the sum of all the incoming ball counters and the out-number counter becomes slightly larger than that of the frame-side out-number counter. In this way, as long as a normal game is played, a difference of a predetermined number or more may occur in the numerical value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball number counter and the out-number counter as compared with the frame side out-number counter. Since there is no such difference, by monitoring whether or not a difference equal to or more than the predetermined number has occurred, it can be determined whether or not a normal game is being played.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when a difference of a predetermined number or more from the frame side out number counter occurs in a numerical value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter, a special Is determined to have occurred, and addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, in a state where a special abnormality has occurred and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker. The effect at the time of cancellation to notify that there is. Then, when a difference equal to or more than a predetermined number occurs with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding the total number of incoming ball counters and the out-number counter to the frame-side out-number counter, for example, on the gaming board 5 due to an illegal act. An object other than the game ball B is allowed to pass only through the provided entrance and exit 1008 or after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entrance and exit 1008 It can be suspected that the ball is clogged before passing through the frame-side out-port sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that a failure such as an improper act or a clogged ball has occurred, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 is illustrated as a serious abnormality, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, when detecting a situation in which the game is assumed to be proceeding by an illegal act, addition to various counters or calculation is stopped (stopped). It may be. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not performed. Then, the addition or the calculation to various counters can be stopped (stopped). Further, either the state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or the case in which illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in the state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, addition or calculation to various counters is stopped (stopped), but only when an unauthorized magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2, is determined to be illegal. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the firing of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[17-1. Out-mouth detection when multiple out-mouths are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side and a third out port 1014 is provided on the middle stream side, and each of the out ports is provided from the out port. A case in which a detection sensor capable of detecting the discharged game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the execution state of the calculation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

  As shown in FIG. 224, between the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5 a. A certain second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is driven into the upstream space 2506 with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. A part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (strength somewhat lower than right-handed), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B driven to enter the upstream space 2506 enters the second out port 1013.

  A first opening 2431 of an attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the ordinary winning opening 2003. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B entered from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  It should be noted that the second outlet 1013 is provided around the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the third outlet 1014 is provided around the outlet. Although the effect is described above in detail, the provision of such a second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 allows the ball to be clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, a second out port sensor capable of detecting a game ball B discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013 and a game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. And a third out-port sensor capable of detecting the event. When the second out-port sensor detects a game ball B that has entered the second out-port 1013, a detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out-port sensor has a third When a game ball B that has entered the out port 1014 is detected, a detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. While the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is grasped by the second out counter, the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is grasped by the third out counter. The number of entering balls can be grasped.

  In the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using not only the number-of-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter, but also the second number-of-outs counter and the third number-of-outs counter. As a specific example, by adding the number-of-outs counter, the second number-of-outs counter, and the third number-of-outs counter, out of the game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the game ball B provided on the game board 5 The number of game balls B discharged to the outside can be calculated without entering a ball entry port such as the one starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Further, by adding the number-of-balls counter, the number-of-outs counter, the second number-of-outs counter, and the third number-of-outs counter, the total number of game balls B hit in the game area 5a can be calculated.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the game balls B are driven into the right region of the game region 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired in one minute) per second is out. It is designed so that the ball does not enter the mouth 1013. For this reason, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, the second out counter is used to determine whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. It is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game if the number is monitored and a predetermined number or more per unit time.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (A), when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 reaches or exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by voice output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 falls below a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the number of incoming balls located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a. There are few opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, and special winning opening 2006), which is disadvantageous for the player. Becomes In this regard, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is set so that the game balls B can easily enter the second out port 1013. 5 can be suspected to have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to early detect that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above, in the time saving state and the big hit game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, The number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 and the number of game balls B that have entered the in or out ports (out port 1008, third out port 1014) downstream of the second out port 1013 The ratio of the number of the game balls B to the number of balls entered may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Also in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game balls B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

  Similarly, in a state where the game balls B are driven into the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired in one minute) per unit time is the third out port 1014. It is designed not to enter the ball. For this reason, in the time-saving state or the big hit game state, the third out counter is used to determine whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. Monitoring is performed, and when the number becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 reaches or exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by voice output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third exit 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the number of incoming balls located downstream of the third out port 1014 in the right area of the game area 5a. Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005) are reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is set so that the game balls B can easily enter the third out port 1014. 5 can be suspected to have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to early detect that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above, in the time reduction state or the big hit game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. Ratio of the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 downstream of the third out port 1014 May be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Also in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 has reached a predetermined number or more per unit time in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, Although the addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation regarding those out number counters are continued, as in the above-described embodiment, when the number becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the calculation relating to these out number counters may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B is thrown into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase. , The reliability of the information on the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be hit in the left area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, the game ball B is in the right area. The game ball B may enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. For this reason, in the normal state, when the second out-port sensor or the third out-port sensor detects the game ball B, the image is displayed on a predetermined display device or the sound output from the speaker is used to make a right-to-left hit. The instruction production to instruct to change to is executed.

[18. Light emission history after light emission effect using light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During the variation display, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The light guide plate 3102 provided on the front surface of the display area is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise by the plurality of times, thereby indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot for the variable display. The production is executable. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the back upper decorative body 3211 of the back front effect unit 3200 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010), and the back left decoration. The body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light guide plate 3102 has It is possible to execute a history effect in which the back upper decorative body 3211 and the like are continuously lit in the immediately preceding luminescent color.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command in the command analysis processing of step S601, it determines whether to perform the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. To decide. When it is determined that the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is to be executed, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is referred to based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. One of a plurality of types of emission color patterns set a plurality of times is determined.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 changes the emission color of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the light guide plate 3102, so that the light guide plate 3102 has a first color in any of white, green, blue, and red. Although it is possible to decorate the picture 3110 (see FIG. 172) with light emission, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is set to a predetermined three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. Light emission decoration is performed at the timing. In addition, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second). Time is longer. Also, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only once, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission plural times at each timing.

  Also, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. For example, 1 to 3 times out of 3 times in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission may be executed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the light guide plate 3102 so that the first pattern 3110 can be illuminated and decorated. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 disposed on the left side in the front view can emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light. In this example, the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. Thus, it is possible to clearly understand that the three light emission decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light emission effect are a series of effects.

  Next, an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 226 is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

  As described above, a plurality of types of luminescent color patterns are set in the luminescent color pattern table. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, a light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that the light emission pattern can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a predetermined light emission color.

  In addition, the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the emission color pattern is set so as to be illuminated with any one of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when determining the emission color pattern from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 having changed to the end, it is set so that the big hit expectation increases in the order of white → green → blue → red Have been. In other words, when the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, a light emitting color pattern that becomes a light emitting color (for example, red) with a high jackpot expectation as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined with a high probability. When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emission color pattern that becomes a light emission color (for example, white) having a low jackpot expectation as a final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 has a high probability. It is decided to decide. Thus, when the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color having a high expectation of a big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

  Note that the luminescent color pattern is such that the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red. Is set so that the emission color is maintained or the emission color has a high expectation of a big hit. Thereby, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the light emission color changes to a light emission with a high jackpot expectation as long as the timing of the light emission effect is not completed three times. Thus, the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 can be noticed with expectation until the luminous effect ends.

  Also, the luminescent color pattern does not necessarily need to change in the order of green → blue → red after the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated in white. It is also set so that the above emission colors are skipped and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which light emission color will be changed to the next light emission color, and the light guide plate will not be changed until the light emission effect ends. The emission color of 3102 can be noticed with expectation.

  Next, the back decoration 3211 and the like provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the front-side effect unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 in a front view, that is, surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600. , A back left decorative body 3212, and a back right decorative body 3213. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 227, in the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, three radiating decorative portions 3212b and 3213b are used, respectively. , Divided into four parts. Here, these are collectively referred to as decorative bodies 3210. Therefore, the four decorative bodies 3210 are provided on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 so as to be vertically arranged. In addition, a decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward is mounted is provided behind the decoration body 3210. Further, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, similarly to the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting decoration can be performed in any one of white, green, blue, and red.

  When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Further, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at a predetermined timing. However, even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative objects are formed. 3210 light emission is maintained. As described above, when the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed, the history effect of continuously emitting the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is used as the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. Running.

  Specifically, at the first or second timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated, the next time. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the light emission decoration timing. Further, in the third timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same emission color as that of the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated, the variation display of the decorative pattern ends. Light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the light emission. As a result, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than one second), but the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is the same as the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. Is maintained, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the light emission even if the light emission color is overlooked when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the light emission.

  In addition, as the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors capable of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the luminous effect is provided. The number of light emission of the decorative body 3210 is made different depending on the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration body 3210. Are set so that the number of light emitting portions of the decorative body 3210 increases in order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210. Specifically, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to be decorated with light emission in the light emission effect is white, which is the light emission color with the lowest jackpot expectation, four light sources on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Of the decorative bodies 3210, one lower decorative body 3210a is set to emit white light. When the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. When the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. When the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the emission color with the highest expectation of big hits, all of the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Accordingly, even when the expected degree of big hits cannot be determined from the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the expected degree of big hits can be easily determined from the number of light emitting the decorative bodies 3210.

  Further, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, and can emit light forward. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of ornaments 3210 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but since the plurality of ornaments 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. Light is applied to the light guide plate 3102 not only by the plurality of LEDs for decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the first pattern 3110 by light emission, but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light. Accordingly, the first pattern 3110 to be light-emission-decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is further emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

  Further, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed during the change display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Another announcement effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. That is, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visual recognition of other notice effects, and other notice effects are started. Never miss it. That is, it is possible for the player to firmly grasp each of the light emission effect of decorating the light guide plate 3102 by light emission and the other notice effect.

  Next, a specific effect example of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 during the execution of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is an example of a specific effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 during the execution of the light emission effect. In FIG. 228, the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are shown as enlarged second patterns 3120.

  FIG. 228 illustrates a case where a light emission color pattern in which the light emission color for decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect changes from white to green to red is determined. First, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), at the first timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated with the second pattern 3120 in white and the effect display device 1600 Out of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the lower decorative body 3210a emits light, and the luminescent color is white, which is the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102. . Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished in a short time (for example, less than one second), but for the decorative body 3210a already emitting white light, Until the second timing, the white light emission is maintained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), at the second timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated with the second pattern 3120 in green, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is changed. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b on the lower side are increased to emit light, and the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. And emits green light. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (E), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210 and the decoration already emitting light in green. For 3210b, the light emission in green is maintained until the third timing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 228 (F), at the third timing of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red light, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is changed. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are all increased so as to emit light, and the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits a certain red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (G), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decoration 3210 to the decoration already emitting red light. As for 3210d, as shown in FIG. 228 (H), the light emission in red is maintained until the change display of the decorative symbol is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 at the time when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the light emission effect. A plurality of luminous bodies may emit light in the luminous color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the luminous decoration of 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be grasped after the light emission decoration is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of light-emitting elements of the decorative body 3210 is made different depending on the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light of the decorative body 3210. Although it is shown that there is, the number of times that the light guide plate 3102 has already been light-emitting decorated out of the three timings for light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 may be indicated. For example, at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in the luminous effect, the lower decorative member 3210a of the four decorative members 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 emits light. In the second timing, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c emit light at the third timing so that the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b emit light. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing three times in the light emission effect. However, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing. However, the light guide plate is decorated at the second and third timings. A pattern in which the light guide 3102 is not decorated with light emission, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second timings but does not emit light decoration at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not known how many times the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emission effect, and it is also possible to pay attention to how many times the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be changed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the display of the decorative symbol, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as the effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot for the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, the light emission using the light guide plate 3102 extends over a plurality of variations from the time when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied) to the time when the variation display of the decorative pattern due to the entering ball is performed. An effect may be executed. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the pre-determination command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510. Is received, whether or not to execute the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the preliminary determination command, What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be determined. Further, in such a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing among a plurality of variations, and the light guide plate 3102 is turned off even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the light emission of a some luminous body may be continued by the light emission color just before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to draw attention to how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light emission effect ends over a plurality of changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 emit light to decorate the first pattern 3110 with light. However, when a plurality of LEDs do not emit light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission at the timing of light emission decoration, and it is necessary to grasp the degree of expectation of the big hit indicated by the emission color. Can not. In this regard, since the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 after the timing of decorating the light guide plate 3102 with light emission, even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be decorated with light emission, a plurality of ornaments 3210 are emitted. The degree of expectation of a big hit can be grasped by the emission color of the decorative body 3210.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred is given priority over other effects. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not performed. Then, a warning effect is being performed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of executing the light emission effect and decorating the light guide plate 3102 by light emission, priority is given to the warning effect, and the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are given. Is performed, but after the timing of decorating the light guide plate 3102 with light emission (before the end of the variation display of the decorative pattern), when the abnormality is eliminated, the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is started. I have. As described above, even when the warning effect is performed prior to the light-emitting effect, the expectation degree of the big hit can be grasped by the light-emitting colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is eliminated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit expectation is suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect. May be executed, and the setting value may be suggested based on the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 having changed to the end, the set value is higher in the order of white → green → blue → red. It may be set so as to indicate that. That is, among the setting suggestion effects, as the high setting suggestion effect, a light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed, and as the low setting suggestion effect, the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is used. A white light emission pattern may be executed. Thereby, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is decorated with the light emission color that indicates that the set value is high, the player's response to the high set value (set value 6) is performed. Expectations can be raised.

[19. Image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, not only is the light guide plate 3102 decoratively decorated with a predetermined pattern, but also in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern having a visual recognition mode similar to the pattern to be light-emitting decorated on the light plate 3102, a simulation effect of visually recognizing the light guide plate as if there are a plurality of light guide plates can be executed. In this imitation effect, a pattern that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally, one of the patterns is displayed. , And the reach production performed thereafter is different.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, the variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, but the variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified. In this case, a pattern to be illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated with a pattern. By executing the effect, the process then proceeds to the first reach effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. As a result, the imitation effect that finally displays the picture in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to the second reach effect.

  The imitation effect described above is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The first reach effect among the reach effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the second reach effect. Accordingly, in the imitation effect during the normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with light emission, the process proceeds to the first reach effect with high expectation of big hits. Can be noticed as to whether or not to perform light emission decoration.

  Next, a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 229, the second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern consisting of the characters “CHANCE!”.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (A), the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation effect has a character “CHANCE!” In the center as the second pattern 3120, and an effect pattern is illuminated and decorated around the periphery. . The light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the light guide plate 3102 to emit light to decorate the first pattern 3110. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side in the front view can emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light, but the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 is possible. Uses only the luminous decoration of the second pattern 3120.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the imitation effect, an imitation image 1600a is displayed at the center with the character “LUCKKY!” And an effect image around it. it's shown. Although a moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a still image is displayed during the execution of the imitation effect like the above-described imitation pattern 1600a.

  In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with the character “CHANCE!” As the second pattern 3120, the character “LUCKY!” Is displayed as the imitation pattern 1600a on the display area of the effect display 1600. However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the characters of the second pattern 3120. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the form of each character is the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with an effect pattern as the second pattern 3120, the effect pattern is displayed as the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3120. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the common effect image is displayed as a part of the image, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 displays the second pattern 3120 in a single color with a plurality of LEDs, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 similarly displays the imitation pattern 1600a in a single color. Further, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission, the light-emitting decoration of the second pattern 3120 is shaded by the distance from the plurality of LEDs, but the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also imitated. The image 1600a is displayed such that shading occurs. In the case where the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without displaying any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the imitation picture 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the visual recognition mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area where the second picture 3120 is illuminated and decorated in 3102 is substantially the same as the area where the imitation picture 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. The time is the same for all. In addition, during execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the respective images of the second image 3120 and the imitation image 1600a are displayed, or the light is output around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. A composite effect of operating the provided members in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operating a movable member) is performed. , A common effect is executed as a composite effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are all turned on, but the emission colors are different. You may. In this way, in the imitation effect, there is no effect difference between the case where the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation image 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be difficult to grasp which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Next, a specific effect example of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is an example of a specific effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 230, the second pattern 3120 is indicated by a pattern consisting of the characters “CHANCE!”.

  FIG. 230 shows a variation pattern in which either the chance reach effect as the first reach effect or the lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and the imitation effect is performed before executing the reach effect. The case of execution will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 230 (A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 is provided with a second pattern 3120, a character "CHANCE!" (For example, less than one second), and is decorated with red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (C), when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a along with the characters “LUCKY!” An effect picture is displayed in blue color for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second) in the periphery. The display time for displaying the imitation picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for light-emitting decoration of the second picture 3120 on the light guide plate 3102.

  As described above, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 by emitting light in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 may be used in a case where the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation picture 1600a is being displayed, it is possible to grasp which of the second picture 3120 and the imitation picture 1600a is displayed.

  In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times). Although the display is repeated a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 230 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without displaying any information is displayed. I have. Thus, as a result of the imitation effect, attention can be paid to which of the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (E), after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the second pattern 3120 is illuminated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, the reach is displayed by the variation display of the decorative pattern. Is formed, the process proceeds to the chance reach effect (first reach effect) as the reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3120. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the display of the decorative symbol is changed. After the reach is formed, the process proceeds to the lucky reach effect (second reach effect) as the reach effect corresponding to the imitation picture 1600a. Also, the display time for displaying the imitation picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 230 (F) is the same as the display time for emitting and decorating the second picture 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 230 (E). (For example, 3 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, the characters and the effect pattern are displayed by the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is only necessary to display a pattern having a similar visual recognition mode so as to match the elements, for example, a pattern of a character having a similar style may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, a second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and a imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, Is stopped, but after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second reach effect are not displayed. A pattern that does not progress to any of the reach effects may be set. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, more attention can be paid to what result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 of the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The pattern starts from the light emission decoration of 3120, but a pattern starting from the display of the imitation picture 1600a may be set. Also, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 decorates the second pattern 3120 with light emission in red, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but any or all of them are displayed. May be set to be executed in a different color. As described above, when the imitation effect is performed with a display or color different from the normal one, the light guide plate 3102 is set to have a high degree of expectation for the big hit with respect to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. Not only which of the two patterns 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped, but also the effect contents can be noticed.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of performing the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, in addition to the imitation effect, an effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, an effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the second light guide 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 decorates the second pattern 3120 with light emission in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, the light guide plate 3102 decorates the light guide plate 3102 with a blue light emission decoration so as to invert the color development, whereas the pattern in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in red. You have set. In these patterns, red is a color that indicates that the expectation of a big hit is higher than blue. For example, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 by emitting light in red, the color of the light is greater than in the light guide by blue. Similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the big hit expectation is higher than in blue. As described above, in the imitation effect, both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation image 1600a can be displayed in blue and red, so that any one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 can be used. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the information is used.

  In the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By displaying any one of the patterns, it suggests a reach effect to be executed after that, but by performing a mimicry effect as the setting suggestion effect described above, and finally displaying any of the patterns , A set value may be suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect of finally illuminating the second pattern 3120 with light emission in red on the light guide plate 3102 is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the imitation effect which displays the imitation picture 1600a in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Accordingly, when the imitation effect is performed, if the second pattern 3120 is finally decorated with light emission in red on the light guide plate 3102, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to make the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102 emit light, and to make the first design 3110 emit light. On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side in the front view can emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light. The setting of the luminance of can be changed by operating the pressing operation section 303 by the player. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3120 to be light-emission-decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is high. When set, the second pattern 3120 to be light-embellished on the light guide plate 3102 has a bright display mode. Then, in the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 to be illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has the dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect is performed so that the brightness corresponds to any of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation image 1600a, any one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the information is used. In the brightness adjustment, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs with respect to the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Is also good.

[20. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. FIG. 231 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIGS. 232 and 233 show a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. It is a table.

[20-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 231 to FIG. 233, various commands are related to special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power actor related, information display. , Status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization production related)
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start-up opening sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. The command is composed of commands named “tune start effect in FIG. 1”, “specify special symbol 1”, “end end of special figure 1”, and “change state”. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command instructs the gaming state. The gaming state includes a time-saving state that indicates that the game is in the time-saving state, a probable change state that indicates that the game is in the probable change state, and a normal state that indicates that the game is not in either the time-saving state or the probable-change state. Have been.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 1 tuning effect end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A command corresponding to the stored set value is selected and transmitted. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided to the peripheral control board 1510 by making the mode of the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command different from each other. The set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It has become.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[20-1-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, and the division includes special features related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 as shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is composed of commands named “Tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation”, and “Special figure 2 tuning effect end”. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. The non-specific jackpot is designated, and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  The special figure 2 synchronous effect start command (variable pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronous effect end command are the same as the special figure 1 synchronous effect start command (variable pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronous effect end command. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided. The command corresponding to the set value stored in the set value dedicated area is selected and transmitted. It should be noted that the special figure 2 tuning effect (the changing effect of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004) is mainly executed in the probable change state and the time saving state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the mode of the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the mode of the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, which are conventionally used, are changed, so that the pachinko machine The set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted. The set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probable change state and the time saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 The setting value of can be grasped.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[20-1-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 231, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 231, a jackpot opening, a jackpot 1 opening N-th display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 of the 1st to 15th rounds (the Nth round of the jackpot 2005). The special winning opening 1 closing display command indicates that the special winning opening 1 is to be closed during the round (during closing or the closing of the special winning opening 2005 during the round). The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls B having a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (the gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2005 detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403). B number of balls), the big hit ending command instructs the big hit ending start, and the big hit symbol display command is a big hit symbol. It is an indication of the broadcast display.

  The small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command instructs the start of the small hit opening (during the small hit, the opening or opening of the accessory winning opening 2006). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball B that has entered the special winning opening 2006 during the small hit is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513). Command, and the V passing command is a V-prize mouth winning effect (the game ball B which has won the bonus winning opening 2006 during the small hit is the first V-winning hole 2007 or the second V-winning opening 2008). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending. Note that V passing commands corresponding to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening command, A second V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening 2008) may be provided.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the large winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is issued when the large winning opening 1 of the 1st to 15th rounds is opened (the large winning opening 2005 is opened). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the N-th round is opened), and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 closes (the closing of the special winning opening 2005). Sent when the winning opening 1 is opened or when the count changes to the winning opening 1 (when the winning opening 2005 is opened, and when the game ball B entering the winning opening 2005 is detected by the winning opening sensor 2403). The big hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is issued when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2005 is opened). It is sent to.

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit and the opening of the bonus winning opening 2006), and the small hit count display is performed. The command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle and large winning opening (when the game ball B which has entered the special winning opening 2006 during the small hit is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2513), and a small hit ending command is transmitted. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[20-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 232, the categories of power-on are named power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. Command. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored), the payment control board 633 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to perform RAM clearing, information indicating the fact is provided when power is turned on (when power is turned on, also when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). ) Includes information indicating which of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state to return to, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  Also, the model code of the pachinko machine, for example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, respectively, determines which work is for the copyright, and what game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation When this occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, a game in which the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) This is for specifying whether the specification is a specification (a so-called ST machine) or the like, and whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of set values or only one set value. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max type, Middle type, and Sweet digital type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited. Mainly includes a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine or the like) in which the game occurs, and a set value code indicating whether the number of set values of the pachinko machine 1 is one or more.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs a return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512.

  The setting key ON operation command is for instructing confirmation of the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM. The setting key OFF operation command is for the main control built-in RAM. It indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been confirmed.

  The setting change command is for instructing that the setting has been changed and that the setting has been changed. In this example, by changing the mode of the setting change command, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The set value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed. May be transmitted. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp the latest set values every time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  These commands are transmitted when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side game control main process transmits a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control built-in RAM. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are stored in the information storage area and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[20-1-5. Related to zuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect is based on a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401. As shown in FIG. , A general symbol designation, a general figure synchronizing effect end, and a change state designation. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronization production start command (general figure fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the general figure synchronization production with the production pattern (general figure fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. A jackpot or a non-specific jackpot is designated. The general figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect end, and the fluctuating state specifying command instructs the gaming state. As described above, the game state includes a time-saving state indicating that the player is in the time-saving state, and a normal state indicating that the player is not in the time-saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of normal symbol fluctuation, the general pattern designating command is transmitted immediately after the general figure synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is The normal symbol change time is transmitted (when the normal symbol is determined), and the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol hit information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[20-1-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The normal electric production effect-related relates to the second starting door 2411 which is advanced and retreated by driving the starting opening solenoid 2412, and includes, as shown in FIG. And a command named ending per ordinary figure. To these various commands, "F * H" is assigned as a status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per ordinary figure is to instruct the start of opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for ordinary electric power is started during opening of ordinary electric power (the second starting port door 2411 is projected forward by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2412). Ending state or when it protrudes), and the ending per-figure ending command is for instructing the start of ending per-figure drawing.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened (when the second starting port door 2411 drives the starting port solenoid 2412). , And is transmitted at the time of protruding forward), and the ending per-figure-ending command is transmitted when the ending per-figure-end is started. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[20-1-7. Others]
As shown in FIG. 233, the other divisions include a start opening winning, a change shortening operation end designation, a special symbol 1 storage, a special symbol 2 storage, a special symbol type prefetch, a fluctuation pattern prefetch 1, a fluctuation pattern prefetch 2, a fluctuation pattern prefetch. It is composed of commands named prefetch 3, fluctuation pattern prefetch 4, fluctuation pattern prefetch 5, fluctuation pattern prefetch 6, normal winning opening prize, and normal symbol storage. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect, and the start of an effect when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002. And a start of an effect when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively. The special symbol 1 storage command is for storing 0 to 4 special symbols 1 on hold (the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002). The first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not been used yet for the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 storage command. 0 to 4 holds (the number of balls (number of holds) that have not yet been used to display a special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004) The special symbol type look-ahead command is used to pre-read the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before the display result (losing symbol, big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 and the special symbol 2 reservation are used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the pre-reading is performed. Then, the display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) by the second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 reservation is designated, respectively.

  In addition, before the variation pattern prefetch command 1 to variation pattern prefetch command 6 are used for the special symbol 1 hold on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol is read in advance and the special symbol is read. Before the change pattern used in the special symbol change display based on 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold is used for the change display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, look ahead and read the special And a fluctuation pattern used in the special symbol fluctuation display based on the symbol 2 hold. The fluctuation pattern prefetch command 1 is a command corresponding to the set value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command 2 Is a command corresponding to the set value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command 3 is a command corresponding to the set value 3 of the pachinko machine 1. The variation pattern prefetch command 4 is a command corresponding to the set value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern prefetch command 5 is a command corresponding to the set value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 6 Is a command corresponding to the set value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the command including the setting value information of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 1 (special figure 1 tuning production start command, special figure 1 tuning production end command, special figure 2 tuning production start command, special figure 2 tuning production end command, setting change command Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

  The normal winning opening winning command is an instruction for accepting the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storing command is 0 to 4 normal symbol holdings (the gaming ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003). The number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol is transmitted on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning command (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402), the main center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 mainly notify the fact by voice. Is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is determined (after the loss stop period has elapsed) after the specified number of changes have been reduced, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 storage command. 1 When the number of pending balls changes (when game balls B enter the first starting port 2002 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the first special symbol display changes the special symbol display from the number of reserves). The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls decreases due to the change of the number of reserved special operation 2 operation balls (the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004). The special symbol type pre-reading command is sent when the special symbol type is read or when the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the second special symbol display to change the number of special symbols. Sent when the number of balls increases (when game balls B enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the number of holdings increases), the fluctuation pattern prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. Sent to. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  Further, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storing command is transmitted when the number of the normal symbol operation-reserved balls changes (the gaming ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003). This is transmitted when the number of holdings is increased, or when the number of holdings is decreased from the number of holdings by using the normal symbol display to change the normal symbol. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the second starting starts). When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402), the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 mainly notify the fact by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification in which the pachinko machine 1 is used for not only sound notification from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622, but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify by voice from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, a process for notifying when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above. Will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination processing executed when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the above-described reception command analysis processing (step S1022).

  When starting the setting information determination process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag described later is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is reported. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the set value abnormality is being notified, and the flow advances to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is set. , And the process advances to step S1501.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command. The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the set information storage area based on the set value information of No. 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

  If the received command is not the setting change command (in this example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, the variation pattern) When the prefetch command 1 to the variation pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the setting value information is abnormal (step S1504). If the setting value information does not match, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504). This is set and the process ends (step S1505).

  If it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, if the abnormality of the setting value information is being reported, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command is set in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507). If the setting value information does not match, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is continued.

  On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormality notification of the setting value information ends (step S1508). Then, the setting abnormality notification flag is reset and the process ends (step S1509).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 has an abnormality, specifically, normal processing (setting value changing processing) has not been performed. Nevertheless, when the set value is changed, a process is executed to determine that an error or illegality has occurred and to notify that fact. In addition, the game progresses during the abnormality notification of the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect or the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to hinder the execution of the variable effect performed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, control for displaying “setting abnormality!” Or the like in an area that does not overlap with the fluctuation effect executed on the effect display device 1600, so that the fluctuation effect executed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Control to display semi-transparently “setting error!” Etc. in the area overlapping with the fluctuation effect, control to output “setting error has occurred” from top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622, game board 5 One or a plurality of controls such as light emission control in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking red) are performed on lamps and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the like.

  When there is an abnormality in the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the set value information is not performed or the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed. At the same time, an effect indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 described later is prevented from being executed, and if an effect indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect is stopped. It may be. That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command is changed to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 The setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 due to, for example, the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area being changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. If there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if an effect indicating the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect is reduced. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be executed, and if the effect is being executed, the effect may be stopped to suppress a decrease in reliability. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. In this case, the game is stopped when an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. It may be. For example, when the set value is changed in the set value changing process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set to a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the changed set value, and stores the set value and the reference value stored in the set value dedicated area at an arbitrary timing (for example, a timing of transmitting a special figure 1 tuning effect start command or a special figure 2 tuning effect start command). It may be determined whether or not the setting value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the setting value does not match, the game may be stopped and the abnormality of the setting value information may be notified.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, after the abnormality notification of the set value information is started, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the set value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the gaming clerk. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, the command is stored in the setting information storage area. After the abnormality notification of the set value information is started because it does not match the set value information, if a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the setting is immediately performed. The abnormality notification of the value information can be ended.

  In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value specified by the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Is configured to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information according to whether or not the set value matches the stored set value. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the previously received command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are received. It may be determined whether or not the values match, and if the values do not match, the abnormality of the set value information may be notified. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the setting value, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

  In addition, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted a plurality of times from the main control board 1310 in relation to the fluctuation effect, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is issued. It may be performed. Specifically, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, and the special figure 1 tuning effect ending command and the special figure 2 tuning effect ending command are indicated. It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the set value information does not match, the abnormality of the set value information may be notified.

  In the above example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command are set to the pachinko machine 1 setting values. Although the information provided for each pachinko machine 1 is provided from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command, and the main control is performed. When transmitting any command from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, always or when transmitting a specific command. Command for notifying the setting information of the Nko machine 1 also may be transmitted. For example, a setting notification command 1 to a setting notification command 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and a setting notification command (setting value 1) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is provided from the main control board 1310 at any timing. If so, the setting notification command 1 may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 if the setting value is 2, the setting notification command 2 if the setting value is 2,... With such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one having a plurality of setting values and one having only one setting value), and it is possible to save trouble of designing.

  Also, in this case, commands (for example, special figure 1 tuning effect start command, special figure 1 tuning effect end command, Not only at the time of transmission of the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command, but also commands that are not involved in the effect performed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal winning opening winning command, etc.) ) Is also transmitted, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also transmitted, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is matched. May be determined whether there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently determine whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, thereby avoiding a problem due to noise or the like. Accuracy can be further improved.

[22. Hold notice production]
Next, the hold announcement effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the first reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B having entered the first starting port 2002, the command indicating the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number) The number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first pending storage number on the effect display device 1600. Based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, When the second storage number changes, a command indicating the second storage number (second storage number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The second reserved storage number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. When the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B having entered the second starting port 2004, the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received. The display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result whose suggestion start is held based on the special lottery result is changed. , A pending announcement effect indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot at the time of execution of the suggestion can be executed.

  In this example, the first hold number specified by the first hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold number indicated by the second hold number storage command, the variable pattern prefetch command and the special Peripheral control board 1510 in accordance with each of the pre-judgment information (a loss, a small hit, a big hit, and the like, which can also notify a type of a big hit such as a positive change big hit or a normal big hit) designated by the symbol type prefetch command. Has a hold notice determination table for determining the presence / absence of the hold notice and the type of the hold notice pattern when executing the hold notice.

  Then, when the execution of the hold notice is determined, and when the type of the hold notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from the normal ones. It is displayed in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from a normal color). In this example, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are usually displayed in white as a basic color, and when a hold notice is executed, it is displayed in any of blue, green, red, and a ladybug pattern. I do. The display modes of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are set so that the big hit expectation increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

  In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a jackpot as the preliminary determination information, a hold announcement pattern that has a high jackpot expectation (for example, red or ladybug pattern) is finally determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode. When the lottery result is determined to be a loss as the determination information, a hold notice pattern in which a large hit expectation is low (for example, blue) as a final hold display mode is determined with a high probability, so that a final hold display is performed. When a mode having a high jackpot expectation is displayed as the mode, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  In addition, each time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is made during the execution of the pending announcement effect (each time the hold is exhausted), the effect is displayed in the pending announcement pattern. How the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the device 1600 changes is set. Note that, in the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is reverse to the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in the order (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable symbol of special symbols)), the hold is exhausted. (Every time) The display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the jackpot has a high expectation. It is set as follows. Therefore, even if the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, the suggestion of the special lottery result to be subjected to the hold announcement starts. Until this is done, there is a possibility that the hold display mode will change to a mode with a high jackpot expectation, and the hold display mode can be focused on with expectation until the end.

  In addition, it is not always necessary to change the hold notice pattern in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern after displaying the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in white (basic color). Starting from a display mode in the middle (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the first hold storage 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002). ), The display mode changes to the next display mode without passing through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first hold storage 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is completed). When the first hold storage 1700d is moved to the first hold storage 1700c in response to the start, the color changes from white to a ladybug pattern). For this reason, even if the opportunity (the number of holdings) of the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a is small, the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the first hold storage 1700d to 1700d are displayed in a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. The second storage 1701a can be displayed. Further, even if the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed in a display mode having a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. The display modes of the hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a can be noticed to the end with expectation.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a is different from the above-mentioned hold notification in addition to the above-mentioned hold notice effect indicating the expectation degree of the big hit. , A set value holding suggestion effect indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed.

  In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect and the set value hold suggestion effect in accordance with the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 designated by the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A set value hold suggestion determination table for determining the set value hold suggestion pattern type in the case of performing the setting is provided. Then, it is determined that the set value hold suggestion effect is to be executed, and when the type of the set value hold suggestion pattern to be executed is determined, the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in a display mode different from normal (in this example, a shape different from normal).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235 (A), the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are usually displayed as circles, which are basic shapes, and a set value hold suggestion effect is executed. 235 (B), a triangle indicated by 1700c in FIG. 235 (C), or a star indicated by 1701a in FIG. 235 (D). In the display modes of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a, the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set as follows.

  Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern prefetch command, the set value hold which is a high expectation for the high set value (for example, star) is finally set as the hold display mode. When the suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, a set value in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is medium (for example, a triangle) as a final hold display mode A hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, a set value that gives the lowest expectation for the high set value (for example, a square) as the final hold display mode By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, when an aspect with a high expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, the high set value is determined. Player's expectations is adapted to increase that.

  In addition, each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol)) is performed during the execution of the set value retaining suggestion effect (every time the reservation is exhausted) ), How the display modes of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 change. In the set value hold suggestion pattern, the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in the reverse order of the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation for the high set value does not decrease), and each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable symbol display of special symbols)), Display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for the high set value is It is set to be a high mode. For this reason, even if the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is low, the special value for which the set value hold suggestion effect is to be executed is displayed. Until the suggestion of the lottery result is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode having a high degree of expectation for the high set value. it can.

  Also, the set value hold suggestion pattern does not necessarily need to be changed in the order of square → triangle → star after displaying the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a in a circle (basic shape). Starting from the display mode (for example, the first hold memory 1700d is displayed as a square based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002). The display mode changes to the next display mode without passing through the middle display mode (for example, when the first hold storage 1700d is displayed as a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. (When the first hold storage 1700d is moved to the first hold storage 1700c, the square changes to a star). For this reason, even if the opportunity (the number of holdings) for changing the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a is small, the first hold storages 1700a to 1700a to 1700a to 1700d have a high expectation for the high set value. 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a can be displayed. Further, even if the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed in a display mode having a low degree of expectation for the high set value, it cannot be predicted which display mode will be changed next. It is possible to bring attention to the display modes of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a with expectation until the end.

  In addition, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the set value suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are determined separately, the second display displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display mode of the one hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a is changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a is changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation for the high set value, the display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold advance notice pattern of the hold advance effect. Display modes of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a with respect to the high set value. The display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect is maintained while changing to a high wait state. In the case where the display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect, the setting of the set value hold suggestion effect is performed. There is a case where the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the value hold suggestion pattern is changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation for the high set value.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold announcement effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “circle”, the hold is exhausted and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the second hold storage 1701a is moved, the display mode “white” of the hold notice effect is changed to “red”, and the display mode “circle” of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to “square” (color and shape). Both are changed), and when the display mode of the hold announcement effect is “red” and the display mode of the set value suggestion effect is “circle”, the hold is exhausted and the first hold memory 1700 a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. １1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are moved without changing the hold notice effect display mode “red” without changing the set value hold suggestion effect display mode “circle” to “square”. (When the shape is changed while maintaining the color), and when the display mode of the hold notice effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “triangle”, the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are moved, the display mode “white” of the hold announcement effect is changed to “blue”, while the display mode “triangle” of the set value suggestion effect is displayed. May be maintained without changing (the color is changed to maintain the shape).

  That is, in this example, the process of determining the hold announcement pattern of the hold announcement effect and the process of determining the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are separately performed, and suggesting a special lottery result based on each change pattern ( The display of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted). The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode having a high expectation for the high set value.

  In addition, the final display mode of the hold announcement effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are separately determined, and the change scenario of the display mode of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a according to the determination result is shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

  Further, the start timing of the set value hold suggestion effect (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode) is determined based on the fact that the game ball B has been received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The timing is not limited to the timing at which the hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed. Accordingly, the process is also started at the time of moving the first holding storages 1700b to 1700b to the first holding storages 1700a to 1700c. Thereby, even if the set value suspension suggestion effect is not executed, the first suspension storages 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension storage 1701a can be noticed to the end with expectation.

  Note that the execution frequency of the set value suspension suggestion effect is set lower than the above-described suspension notice effect. That is, the hold announcement effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and when the special lottery result based on the current lottery result based on the hold memory performing the hold announcement effect is suggested, the content of the hold announcement effect is reset. On the other hand, the content of the set value hold suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. The setting prevents the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  As shown in the first hold storage 1700c in FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B) and the second hold storage 1701a in FIG. 235 (D), the set value hold suggestion effect is executed simultaneously with the hold advance notice effect. In some cases, the set value suspension suggestion effect may be executed independently as shown in the first suspension storage 1700c of FIG. 235 (C). In addition, the change pattern of the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect may be included in the hold notice pattern. In this case, a hold notice determination table may be further provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 1 of this example includes a plurality of types of image data in which the display mode of the above-described hold announcement effect and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect are combined. The target hold memory is displayed based on the image data according to both the pattern and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice effect of the target hold memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, a display mode is generated by combining these, and the combined display mode is generated. Is displayed as a hold memory.

  Specifically, in the example of FIG. 236 (A) in which a hold notification in which only the hold announcement effect is executed and the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed is displayed, the first hold memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed as “composite pattern white 1”. , And the first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of the "synthetic pattern blue 1". Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (B) in which the hold storage in which both the hold announcement effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the first hold storages 1700a and 1700b are displayed as the image data of the “synthetic pattern white 1”. , And the first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern blue 2”. Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (C) in which the hold memory in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold memory in which only the set value hold suggestion effect is executed are displayed, the first hold memory 1700a is displayed as the “composite pattern”. The first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of the "synthetic pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of the "synthetic pattern white 3". Is displayed.

  FIG. 236 (D) also shows a hold storage in which the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are also executed in the second hold memory 1701a, and both the hold advance effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed. In the example, the second hold storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "synthetic pattern red 4".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display of the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a is controlled in a manner different from the usual manner, thereby indicating the hold announcement effect indicating the expectation of the big hit and the pachinko machine 1 A set value suspension suggestion effect that suggests a set value can be executed. Note that the hold announcement effect is executed based on the advance determination information, whereas the set value suspension suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information. That is, the hold announcement effect can be executed by acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance, while the set value suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance. is there.

  In addition, the special lottery in which the suggestion is being executed is not limited to displaying the special lottery result in which the start of the suggestion is suspended as the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a on the effect display device 1600. The on-hold storage according to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the on-hold storage during execution. In this case, the final display mode in the above-mentioned hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect may be displayed in the hold memory during execution, and by such a configuration, the suggestion of the special lottery result may be made. Until the time of execution, attention can be given to the jackpot and the high set value by paying attention to the hold announcement effect and the set value hold suggestion effect, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above example, the display color of the hold storage is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the shape of the hold memory is changed as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that the program is being executed. For example, the display color of the hold notice effect is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the numerical value or the hold memory corresponding to the set value suggested without changing the shape of the target hold memory as the display condition of the set value hold suggestion effect is displayed. Additional information such as an effect mode (glitter effect or flame effect) around the information may be displayed in association with the reserved storage.

  In addition, when the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d is displayed based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, or based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, When the hold storage 1701a is displayed, the first hold storages 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are updated and displayed based on the fact that the hold has been consumed (the first hold storages 1700b to 1700d are replaced with the first hold storages 1700a to 1700a to 1700a to 1700d). 1700c or when the first hold memory 1700a or the second hold memory 1701a is moved to the hold memory during execution), a sound effect may be output to indicate the set value of the pachinko machine 1. . For example, when it is suggested that the set value is “1”, a sound effect (for example, “beep”) corresponding to the set value “1” is output from a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is “2”. When it is suggested that the setting value is “5”, a sound effect (for example, “beep”) corresponding to the setting value “2” is output from a plurality of types of sound effects. If the set value is "6", the sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" is output (e.g., "pipipipipipi") out of the plural kinds of sound effects. A sound effect (for example, “Panpakapan”) corresponding to the set value “6” among the sounds may be output.

  In addition, when the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. A value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying an operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The big hit expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. Further, the operation instruction image may be made common between the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are maintained and the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are further increased. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the effect (the effect of displaying the operation instruction image) that predicts the execution of the hold suggestion effect increases the jackpot expectation degree or the suggested setting value. It is possible to cause the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be positively operated.

  Further, during the demonstration (demonstration effect performed in a waiting state of the player), it may be possible to select whether or not there is a hold announcement effect and whether or not there is a set value hold suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of the player, and a hold announcement effect or a set value hold suggestion effect is executed even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation or the set value of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed that the big hit expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are suggested.

  In addition, a description of the mode suggested in the set value hold suggestion effect (such as a mode indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and not a mode indicating the jackpot expectation degree) is demonstrated (becomes the player waiting state). May be executed at the time of execution of a demonstration effect performed by the user) or at the time of suggestion of a special lottery result (during display of a decorative symbol being changed). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the big hit from being improved due to being mistaken as the big hit expectation when the set value hold suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the probable change state, the advance determination instructed by the fluctuation pattern prefetch command and the special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002. Prior judgment indicated by the fluctuation pattern prefetch command and the special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 without executing the hold announcement effect based on the information. Only the hold announcement effect based on the information may be executed. In addition, even during execution of the time saving state or the probable change state, the set value is held in relation to the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entering of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002. A suggestion effect may be executed. Thus, even when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probable change state, the expectation for the set value suspension suggestion effect can be given.

[23. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, the set value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In the present example, it is possible to execute a set value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of display variations of the decorative symbol. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to one performed for one variable display of the special symbol, and may be performed a plurality of times for one variable display of the special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous display). Fluctuation).

  In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the set value continuous suggestion according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 specified by the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A setting value continuous suggestion effect table for determining the presence / absence of an effect and the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type when executing the set value continuous suggestion effect is provided. Then, when it is determined that the set value continuous suggestion effect is to be executed, and when the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type to be executed is determined, the set value is displayed each time the decorative display variation display is started on the effect display device 1600. , One of a plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 having a different display mode according to is displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (A), when the decorative display variation display is started on the effect display device 1600, “1” is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the set value 1. The input setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 237 (C), when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, “3” is drawn on the head as a setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 3. The setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed as the setting suggesting character 1702 according to the setting value 4 when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. A setting suggestion character 1702 with “4” drawn on its head is displayed.

  When the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as “6” based on the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the setting suggestion corresponding to the set value “6” is made as a final mode. A setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern that becomes the character 1702 is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the set value “1” is set as a final mode. By determining the value continuous suggestion effect pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final setting suggesting character 1702, the player's expectation for the high setting value The degree is increasing.

  Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the decorative symbol change display is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect. Is set to change. In the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, the degree of expectation for the high set value is not reduced), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the display of the decorative symbol is started to change is maintained. (The display mode does not change) or the mode according to the high set value is set. Therefore, even if the setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the setting suggesting character 1702 is changed to the high setting value until the setting value continuous suggesting effect ends. , And it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 with expectation until the end.

  In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the setting suggesting character 1702 does not necessarily need to be changed in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after being displayed in a mode corresponding to the setting value “1”. (For example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect is started and the setting suggesting character 1702 is first displayed at the setting value “2”), and changes to the next display mode without passing through the display mode in the middle. (For example, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value “2” is displayed, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to “4” is displayed at the start of the next variation display of the decorative pattern. Out). For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 Can be paid attention to the end.

  The execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is set to be lower than that of the hold announcement effect, similarly to the above-described set value hold suggestion effect. That is, the hold announcement effect is executed based on the advance determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the current lottery result based on the hold memory performing the hold announcement effect, the content of the hold announcement effect is reset. On the other hand, the content of the set value continuous suggestion effect is continued without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. The setting prevents the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the setting value continuous suggestion effect of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying the setting suggesting character 1702 over a plurality of display variations of the decorative pattern. I am getting it. Note that the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information as in the case of the set value hold suggestion effect, and thus can be executed without acquiring the special lottery result in advance.

  In addition, the setting value continuous suggestion effect that causes the setting suggestion character 1702 to appear can be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved storages (the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4 and the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is 1). You may make it (for example, over 5 changes of a decoration pattern). In addition, when the number of retained memories becomes 0 during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decoration symbol changes based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the display is started, the continuous setting value suggestion effect may be resumed to display the setting suggestion character 1702. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 is kept until the continuous setting value suggestion effect is restarted. You may make it continue displaying on the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to recognize that the set value continuous suggestion continuation is continuing and the game to be continued, and even if the player quits the game, the new set value continuous suggestion effect to the new player , So that the player can play with the gaming machine.

  Further, the set value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the set value hold suggestion effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game for estimating the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from both the effect mode in the set value holding suggestion effect and the effect mode in the set value continuous suggestion effect. Alternatively, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided, and any one of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed in accordance with the jackpot expectation degree.

[24. Use of surplus settings other than big hit probability or small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, in a state where the setting of the setting value can be changed, the setting value (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed by pressing the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b. Yes, as tables used in the special lottery and the like (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.), a table corresponding to the determined set value is used. In the above-described embodiment, the tables corresponding to the respective set values include “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “normal symbol hit probability”, and “normal hit type”. The combination of the "opening / closing pattern of the second starting port" is set to be different, but as another example, the "big hit probability" or "small hit probability" or "small hit probability" has the same set value. Information other than the "hit probability" may be set so that the fraud monitoring system is different.

  As described above, in the fraud detection process of step S112, various frauds are monitored. More specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of a game ball B flowing down a game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5, and various winning ports and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 are provided. ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting a fraudulent act such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the fraudulent act by the magnet. ing. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 and change the course to the game board 5. The main control MPU 1310a determines presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 by providing a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting a fraud such as a ball entering a winning port or a gate (gate) provided. And monitors for fraudulent activity. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud is changed, or a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud is performed. ) Can change the part (target area) that is judged to be fraudulent, or change the conditions for releasing the error state when it is judged to be fraudulent and transition to an error state I have.

  As shown in FIG. 238, in this example, the “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, and “fraud monitoring system” are changed to the set values of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′. It is set correspondingly.

  Specifically, the set value 1 and the set value 1 'are set to "1/319", the set value 2 and the set value “1/309” is set to 2 ′, and “1/299” is set to set value 3 and set value 3 ′. In this example, for each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 'to 3', the larger the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit is set.

  In the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set values 1 to 3 and the set value 1 While "1/100" is set for each of "~ 3", in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 'to 3' Is set to “50/100”. Each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 'to 3' may be set such that the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability.

  As a fraud monitoring system, “fraud monitoring A” is set for the set values 1 to 3 and “fraud monitoring B” is set for the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′. In this example, the monitoring system is set so that “fraud monitoring A” is stronger than “fraud monitoring B”.

  In this example, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are the same set values for the set value 1 and the set value 1 ', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3 '. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to one of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B”. For example, if it is possible to set six setting values on the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a and the like, and if it is necessary to set only three types of “big hit probability”, three types are set. In addition to the three set values corresponding to the “big hit probability”, three extra set values are generated. As described above, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six set values is used in another gaming machine, a surplus set value may be generated. By using the value also for changing the monitoring system for fraudulent activities, the surplus set value can be effectively used, and the change in the program can be minimized.

  As a display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310 g configured by a single 7-segment LED display. In addition, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in the settings 1 ′ to 3 ′, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the 7 It is displayed so that the segment LED blinks at a high speed (blinks faster than the settings 1 to 3). Thus, when the operator changes the setting of the setting value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting value being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1 'to 3'. However, when the set value is determined after the change of the set value, the display mode of the set value includes the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED and the high speed in any of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 1 ′ to 3 ′. The blinking is terminated and the display is normally lit. For this reason, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the setting, it is unknown whether the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 'to 3'.

  As another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1” and “2” "3" is displayed, whereas in settings 1 'to 3', "1.", "2.", and "3." are displayed on the setting display 1310g. Dot may be added. In such another example, even if the 7-segment LED normally flashes during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the set value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 'to 3'. be able to. Further, when the set value is determined after the setting value is changed, even if the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED is terminated and the normal setting is displayed as the display mode of the set value, the determined set value is not changed to the set 1 value. ３3 or setting 1′〜3 ′ can be clearly distinguished.

  Next, as specific monitoring systems of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B”, first to fifth specific examples are given. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as the “fraud monitoring A” and the “fraud monitoring B”. First, as a first specific example, a case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity are made different will be described below.

  As a first specific example, "fraud monitoring A" increases the detection sensitivity of detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud, while "fraud monitoring B" detects fraud. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) for detecting is reduced. If the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity is excessively detected due to individual differences of the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, selecting “fraud monitoring B” prevents the excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor that detects the fraudulent activity is slow, selecting “fraud monitoring A” can prevent the slow detection. In addition, when it is desired to enhance the measures against the magnet goat and the vibration goto, by selecting “injustice A”, it is possible to enhance the monitoring of the fraud by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  In the “fraud monitoring A”, when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity, the detection signal is input for a short time or the detection signal is not detected. Even if the number of times of input of the detection signal is small, it is determined that the act is fraudulent. When there are many cases, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above, in which the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor for detecting the misconduct is made different, can be obtained.

  Next, as a second specific example, a case where the detection sensor (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) for detecting the fraud differs in the part (target area) where the fraud is determined to be fraudulent will be described below.

  In this example, a setting operation unit capable of detecting generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting misconduct by a magnet. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting generation of magnetism in front of a game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is monitored whether or not the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting is changed by a person other than the person who changes the setting or confirms the setting. Monitors for fraudulent activity, such as attempts to make changes or display confirmations. On the other hand, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether a magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, and provides various information to the game board 5. It monitors for fraudulent activities, such as throwing balls into the winning opening or gate (gate).

  Similarly, as a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting a fraudulent act due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration capable of detecting generation of vibration around a setting change board 1311 or a setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting generation of vibration in the vicinity of the third distribution device 2550 of the center role item 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and only the person who changes the setting of the set value or performs a confirmation display is displayed. Monitors fraudulent activities, such as changing settings or displaying confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the game area vibration sensor, it is monitored whether or not vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, and the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed to make the second V winning opening 2008. Is monitored for illegal activities such as allowing game balls B to enter the ball.

  As a second specific example, in “fraud monitoring A”, all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent use are used to increase the number of parts that are determined to be fraudulent. In the “fraud monitoring B”, the fraudulent activity is determined using only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor that are a part of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) for detecting the fraudulent activity. The number of parts to be judged is reduced. In other words, the “fraud monitoring A” not only detects the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a located on the rear side of the game board 5, but also detects the game area located on the front side of the game board 5. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, in “illegal monitoring B”, the magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected. It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration or vibration. For example, when a malfunction occurs in the game area magnetic sensor and the game area vibration sensor, and such a detection sensor frequently detects an illegal action even though no wrongdoing is performed, the "illegal monitoring B" By making a selection, frequent detection can be prevented. In addition, when it is desired to enhance measures against magnet gots and vibrating goats, by selecting “fraud monitoring A”, fraudulent activities can be monitored in front of the game area 5a and fraudulent activities caused by magnet gots and vibratory gots can be performed. Monitoring can be enhanced.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent acts by magnets. It is possible to specify 1 (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5). One magnetic sensor 2010 may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors 3003, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent acts due to vibrations. 5 is located around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center role 2500 provided on the game board 5). It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of performing the above. Even in such a case, in the “fraud monitoring B”, the fraudulent act is performed only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. By judging that there is, the same effect as above can be obtained.

  Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the condition for canceling the error state is changed when the state is determined to be a fraud and the state is shifted to the error state.

  As a third specific example, in the case of "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and the state has shifted to the error state, the error state can be cleared by turning on the power again. In the "fraud monitoring B", when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and the state has shifted to the error state, the error state can be automatically released after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses. ing. In other words, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that the fraud has been committed and the state shifts to the error state, the hall clerk performs a work of opening the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630 a. If the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on again, the error state cannot be released. If the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the state shifts to an error state and the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. Accordingly, an abnormality occurrence effect of notifying that the state is abnormal due to generation of magnetism or vibration is executed, and it is difficult to normally grasp progress of the game. For this reason, when "fraud monitoring A" is selected, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and an error state has been entered, work by the hall clerk is required, and the hall clerk must understand the fraudulent activity. Therefore, deterrence against wrongdoing can be enhanced. In addition, when it is desired to enhance the measures against the magnet goat and the vibration goto, by selecting “fraud monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and the state has shifted to an error state, information relating to the error state is transmitted to the hall installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The case where the output to the computer is different or not will be described below.

  As a fourth specific example, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and the state has shifted to an error state, information on the error state is transmitted to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. While the information is output to the hall computer installed on the side, the "fraud monitoring B" outputs information on the error status to the hall computer even if it is determined to be a fraud and enters an error state. I try not to. In other words, in the "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and an error state has been entered, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent activity even if he / she is not present. Deterrence can be increased. In addition, when it is desired to enhance the measures against the magnet goat and the vibration goto, by selecting “fraud monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and shifts to an error state, information on the error state is externally notified by an image of the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker. The case where the difference is made will be described below.

  As a fifth specific example, in the case of “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and an error state has occurred, generation of magnetism or vibration is generated by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. The information about the error status is externally reported, for example, by executing an abnormal occurrence effect to notify that the status is abnormal due to the abnormal status. Even in the case of shifting to, information about the error state is not notified externally. In other words, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that the fraud has occurred and the state has shifted to the error state, the fraudulent person is warned by the external notification of the information on the error state, and the deterrence against fraud is increased. can do. In addition, when it is desired to enhance the measures against the magnet goat and the vibration goto, by selecting “fraud monitoring A”, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto.

  In this example, “illegal monitoring A” is set for the set values 1 to 3 and “illegal monitoring B” is set for the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the By transmitting information relating to the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine which of “illegal monitoring A” and “illegal monitoring B” should be on standby. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a transmits information on the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined to be an illegal action and shifts to the error state, the peripheral control board 1510 side It is possible to determine whether or not to externally notify information on the error state.

  In the “fraud monitoring B”, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has occurred and the state is shifted to an error state, information about the error state is notified externally. At that time, the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 are used. May be executed in a mode (inconspicuous) that is lower than that of “fraud monitoring A”. For example, in the “illegal monitoring B”, when information on the error state is externally notified, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is a case where whether to externally notify the information regarding the error state is different.

  In the above, the case where only three types of "big hit probability" need to be set using the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six set values and three surplus set values have occurred has been described. In other words, with the set values 1 'to 3', the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A" even though the set values 1 to 3 have the same "big hit probability" and "small hit probability". Although "illegal monitoring B" is set for the set values 1 to 3, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, set values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "big hit probability" are set. If one surplus set value is generated, the fraud monitoring system may be made different for the one surplus set value. For example, in the setting value 1 'which is one surplus setting value, even if the setting value 1 among the setting values 1 to 5 is the same as the "big hit probability" or the "small hit probability", the monitoring of the fraudulent activity is performed. “Illegal monitoring B” may be set for setting values 1 to 5 in which the system is set to “illegal monitoring A”. Also in such a case, the surplus set value can be effectively used.

  In the above description, one of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” is set as the fraud monitoring system, but “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” with different fraud monitoring systems are set. , Or "illegal monitoring C" may be set. The monitoring of fraudulent activities is strengthened in the order of "fraud monitoring C", "fraud monitoring B", and "fraud monitoring A". For example, a description will be given of a case where two setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to “big hit probability” are set and four surplus setting values are generated. The setting in which the fraud monitoring system is set to “fraud monitoring A” For the values 1 and 2, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values, but the set values 1 'and 2' set in "illegal monitoring B", "big hit probability" and "small hit" The set values 1 ″ and 2 ″ ′ set in “illegal monitoring C” may be set as surplus set values while the “probability” is the same set value. Also in such a case, the surplus set value can be effectively used.

  In the above description, the case where the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” have the same set value, but the fraud monitoring system is set to be different, but “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” As other information, the operating system of all or some of a plurality of characters (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 may be set to be different. A sixth specific example will be described below as a sixth specific example of a case in which a part of the operating structure of a plurality of useful objects (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set to be different.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the sixth specific example, the operating system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set. The point that “special accessory operation performed” is set to the values 1 to 3 and “no specific accessory operation set” is set to the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′ is the first point where the “fraud monitoring system” is set. Different from the specific examples to the fifth specific examples. That is, in the sixth specific example, the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are set for the set value 1 and the set value 1 ′, the set value 2 and the set value 2 ′, and the set value 3 and the set value 3 ′. Even though the setting values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to one of “with specific agent operation” and “without specific accessory operation”. Note that the plurality of roles (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each operate using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. The accessory includes the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can move up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, it is more likely that a failure or a malfunction will occur than other role-playing objects. In the case of “special character operation is performed”, it is necessary to control the specific character to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific character (the effect operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific accessory operation", control is performed so that the specific accessory does not operate without executing a movable object effect accompanying the operation of the specific accessory. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the operation mechanism of the special character and the special character does not operate normally, selecting `` No special character operation '' stops the operation of the special character. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game becomes difficult and continuation of the game becomes difficult.

  In this example, when a variation pattern in which execution of a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory is set is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns, the “specific While control is performed such that the specific accessory operates at a predetermined timing during execution of the movable object effect with motion, in the case of “no specific accessory operation”, a movable object effect with the operation of the specific accessory is executed. Without this, control is performed so that the special accessory does not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between “with a specific accessory operation” and “without the specific accessory operation”. , Among the plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine a variation pattern in which execution of a movable object effect accompanying the operation of the specific accessory is set, whereas in the case of “no specific accessory operation”, May be controlled so as not to determine the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanying the above operation is set. In such a case as well, in the case of "no specific character operation", the same effect as described above can be obtained by controlling such that the specific character does not operate without executing a movable object effect accompanying the operation of the specific character. Can be obtained.

  Further, in this example, when the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to one of the set values 1 to 3 in which “specific accessory operation is performed”, the specific combination is set when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). While the initial operation of the object is performed, if the setting value is set to 1 'to 3', which is "no specific accessory operation", the initial operation of the specific accessory will be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). I try not to do it. Thereby, it can be made to recognize again that the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is excluded from the operation target. Further, it is possible to confirm whether or not the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is the setting value intended by the operator, thereby preventing a situation in which the operator mistakes the setting value unintended. be able to.

  In contrast to the above, when priority is given to confirming whether there is a problem related to the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), in order to accurately notify the fact, "there is a specific accessory operation" and "no specific agent operation" In any case, the initial operation of the special accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

  In addition, which of “special accessory operation performed” and “non-special accessory operation not set” can be confirmed by setting values displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g However, it may be notified. For example, at the time of completion of the setting change of the set value, the notification of "set with the specific accessory operation / set without the specific accessory operation" is provided by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Going on or as a standby screen during a period in which no game is played, a notification to that effect is made, and whether a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) is to be operated You can recognize whether.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to set one of “special accessory operation” and “no specific accessory operation” by changing the setting of the setting value by the operator. After the setting, the initial setting may be changed to another setting by the player. For example, during the display of the standby screen during the period in which the game is not performed, the player may be allowed to change to one of “with a specific accessory operation” and “without the specific accessory operation”. That is, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to “special accessory operation” and the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′ are set to “no specific accessory operation”, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting to the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the information about the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side executes one of the settings as an initial setting. However, if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is executed with priority over the initial setting.

  In addition, the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300, and is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from the outside of the screen of the effect display device 1600 to the front of the screen. Further, in this example, by changing the setting of the set value, it is possible to change the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) of the plurality of accessories (movable objects), but the change is not limited to the specific accessory. It is possible to change the operation system of a plurality of characters (movable objects) or all of the characters, and set the target character as either “with a character operation” or “without a character operation” You may do so. In addition, an accessory (movable object) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It may be a target to be performed.

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent activities are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of a game ball B flowing down a game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5, and various winning ports and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 are provided. ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting a fraudulent act such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the illegal act by the magnet. ing. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5 and to the game board 5 The main control MPU 1310a determines presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 by providing the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud such as entering a winning port or a gate portion (gate) provided. And monitors for fraudulent activity. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent acts, the monitoring mode is different between a normal state and a state where the setting value of the set value is changed or the setting value is confirmed and displayed.

[25-1. About fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal state is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and a setting change of the set value and a confirmation display of the set value are not performed. Refers to the state in which the game can be performed.

  In this example, a setting operation unit capable of detecting generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting misconduct by a magnet. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting generation of magnetism in front of a game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, at normal times, the setting operation section magnetic sensor is used to monitor improper behavior in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in a normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor uses magnetism that should not be originally generated (magnetization due to unauthorized access) in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. ) Is monitored (whether the magnet is approaching), and an unauthorized person who attempts to change the setting or confirm the display is monitored by a person other than the person who changes the setting of the setting value or displays the confirmation. As an illegal act on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, a metal illegal instrument inside an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in a space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), A magnet for indirectly operating a metal fraudulent device is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent device are removed through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening in which a part of the pachinko machine 1 is broken. It is conceivable that the user illegally accesses the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraud using a magnet is performed in a region where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that it is being performed.

  Similarly, at normal times, the game area monitoring unit monitors the pachinko machine 1 for a fraudulent activity in a predetermined area using the magnetic sensor in the game area. In other words, in the normal state, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether or not a magnet (magnet due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated is generated in the area in front of the game area 5a (whether the magnet approaches). In addition, it monitors for illegal activities such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and entering a ball into various winning ports or gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5. In the cheating detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor, it is determined that a cheating using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. ing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area unit magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting a wrongdoing by a magnet. The magnetic section sensor and the game area magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010 are formed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity with high sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to one side surface. This makes it possible to perform magnetic detection in the area and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection area having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the side surface on the other side opposite thereto. ing. Note that “highly sensitive in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity of each side surface is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, but does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection areas emitted from the respective side surfaces are wide areas surrounded by spheres, respectively. The game area magnetic sensor is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the left-right direction or the up-down direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, A wide area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a winning opening such as a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a normal winning opening 2003, a large winning opening 2005, or a plurality of other locations such as a main portion of a ball flow path) ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is configured such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are widened in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Is arranged so as to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the area provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

  It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the two setting operation unit magnetic sensors and the game area unit magnetic sensors do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the game area section magnetic sensor, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, One magnetic sensor 2010 that can specify whether the game area 5a is located in front of the game area 5a. Even with such a configuration, it can be monitored whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Further, in this example, as a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting a fraudulent act due to vibration, a setting capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. An operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor capable of detecting generation of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center role item 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. At normal times, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. That is, in a normal state, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether or not vibration that should not occur originally (vibration due to unauthorized access) is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. In addition, a person other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation is monitoring for an illegal activity such as the attempt to change the setting or display the confirmation. In the fraud detection processing of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit vibration sensor, fraud by vibration is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. I judge that it is.

  On the other hand, only during the small hitting game during normal times, the fraudulent activity is monitored using the game area portion vibration sensor, and other than the small hitting game, the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area portion vibration sensor. This is because, in the small hitting game, in the third sorting device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second V winning opening 2008 side by the second sorting device 2540 is transferred to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the losing side. When vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed and the game ball is placed in the second V winning opening 2008. This is because it becomes possible to allow B to enter the ball and prevent such misconduct. In other words, during the small hit game during normal times, the game area portion vibration sensor monitors whether or not vibration (i.e., vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated originally is applied to the third distribution device 2550. Then, it monitors the third sorting device 2550 for illegal activities such as changing the course of the game ball B and causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning opening 2008. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area portion vibration sensor, it is determined that the fraudulent fraud is performed on the third distribution device 2550.

  In this example, two vibration sensors 3003, that is, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as the vibration sensors 3003 for detecting a fraudulent act due to vibration. (Is it around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the back side of the game board 5 or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center role 2500 provided on the game board 5) One vibration sensor 3003 that can be specified may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, respectively. it can.

  Also, at normal time, in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is set, and the player When the handle 195 is operated, the game ball B can be fired.

  Also, at normal times, when the game ball B wins a winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, etc., the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor. Is input by the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the symbol is not changed, and the game ball B is not changed. In the case where the detection of the game ball B is valid, when the game ball B wins in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the symbol change is not performed. And the payout of the game balls B can be performed.

  Also, at normal times, except for the period during which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 during the symbol change is performed, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after the adjustment operation image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted by rotating the contact operation unit 302. During the period in which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is being performed during the symbol change, the user waits for the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 for the effect. In this state, even when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume and the light amount cannot be adjusted.

[25-2. About fraud monitoring while setting values are being changed]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting value setting change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a time chart showing a state of monitoring for fraudulent activity during the change of the setting of the setting value.

  When changing the setting of the set value, first, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (a state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off). Operation is performed (timing t1), and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. To set the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON (timing t2). By operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the pachinko machine 1 enters a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change permission state, the set value (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the press operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b is pressed, and then the set key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a by pressing the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned from the rotation position to the original position by turning the setting key switch 1311a on by the turning key 120 degrees. The setting key cylinder 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder to OFF (timing t4). That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting of the setting value can be changed (change permitting state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state where the setting cannot be changed (change impossible state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and performing the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), a state where a game can be performed is established. Become.

  In this example, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176) when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4. Until the setting change process of step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited so as not to be performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process and the fraud detection in step S112. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed, and the apparatus enters a standby state. That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting of the set value can be changed (change permitted state). However, the monitoring of the misconduct is not performed. The launch is not permitted, and the special period is set so that the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins the winning opening. In the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, information about the change of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The hall clerk can know that the setting is being changed.

  Specifically, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor Not to run. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a magnet other than the regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value is magnetized. This is because there is no room for fraudulent activities using. In addition, when a setting value is changed, even if a legitimate worker performing the setting change has a magnet that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. In addition, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular setting change operation.

  Similarly, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and unauthorized workers other than the regular worker who makes the setting change are not authorized by the vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, even if a legitimate operator who makes the setting change applies vibration when changing the setting of the set value, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Also, in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. , And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. Thereby, even if the regular worker who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the obstruction of the regular setting change work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

  The change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes winning openings such as a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a normal winning opening 2003, a large winning opening 2005, and various gate portions (gates). The main control MPU 1310a does not input a detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the game balls B when the game balls B enter the ball, and the detection of the game balls B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor itself may not be performed, or the detection signal may be treated as invalid while the detection signal is input from the detection sensor. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, and the game ball B This will not be performed for any of the payouts, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value, , Thereby suppressing the progress of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of a winning port, a gate unit (gate), and the like in a change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-described base monitor 1310h is performed on the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the number-of-outs counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to balling (ball jam) or the like is detected in a change permission state and the base monitor 1310h Can be prevented from being measured (added to the number-of-outs counter).

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like. The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. The setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the setting is being changed is being executed. As a notification during the setting change, a voice that repeats “Setting is being changed”, a message “Setting is being changed” is displayed, and a lamp is emitted in a color corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. And This notification during the setting change is a notification (effect) performed only in the change permission state, and is executed in preference to the main body frame opening notification performed in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display or sound of “frame is open” or the like) is normally performed. , The setting change notification is executed with the highest priority. Note that the body frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification is given priority over the body frame opening notification, and the body frame opening notification is performed after the setting change notification ends. A form can also be illustrated.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also provided as the above-described setting change notification. Running. More specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special reservation display. In addition to the symbol display, the second special reserve number display, and the round display, a setting change display including one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), There is provided a display-in-confirmation indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the confirmation display (confirmation display state). Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the display indicating that the setting is being changed in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thus, in the change permission state, it is possible to know from the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  Also, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change processing in step S37 in the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176) ends (the setting key is changed in step S222 of the setting change processing). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) can be started. In the main control side timer interrupt process, the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the setting of the firing permission signal in step S113. Processing and the like are performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and the detection is performed when the game ball B wins the winning opening. A signal cannot be input, and a state in which a game cannot be started is maintained. In other words, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, no detection signal is input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening due to wrongdoing, and no illegal profit can be obtained. Further, since there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 may be subjected to an impact of closing the main body frame 4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor. The monitoring and monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

  Further, the game ball B can be fired from the time t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be performed, and a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game can be performed. In this state, the monitoring of various types of fraudulent activities is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned [About fraud monitoring in normal times].

  Further, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the game display stand 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of a game. Is displayed (a game standby notification). Then, after the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 for a predetermined period from the timing t5, a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, or a small hit game is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Image (game start notification) notifying that the game has become possible.

  In this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 may be used), the game ball B is fired. Although the logic of the firing permission signal notifying the permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, in consideration of performing the inspection of the firing operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state, During this period, the logic of the firing permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during a period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be a period from timing t3 to timing t4), only the permission until the launch of the game ball B is allowed. It is desirable to prevent a detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various winning ports or gate portions (gates) so that the game does not unduly proceed. .

  Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is fired. The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch is permitted is not set, and the launch of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). Although it is possible to change the setting value in the change permission state when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the change permission state is terminated and the launch of the game ball B is permitted. Notification after the setting change is executed. As the notification after the setting change, a voice of "Setting changed", a message "Setting changed", and lamp emission are executed. In addition, the notification after the setting change is performed by operating the steering wheel 195 for the first time after the setting change of the setting value even when an unauthorized person who changes the setting of the setting value changes the setting value by an illegal act. 195). As a result, even if the regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value does not change the setting of the setting value, but executes the notification after the setting change, the setting change of the setting value is performed due to wrongdoing. It will be known to the outside, and deterrence against wrongdoing can be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is fired. The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch is permitted is not set, and the launch of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). Although the state is possible, when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) from the time before the launch of the game ball B, the contact with the handle 195 is once released after the launch of the game ball B is permitted. If the player does not touch (operate) the handle 195 again (by turning off the contact detection), the game ball B is not fired. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been ON before the timing t5, unless the contact detection of the handle 195 from OFF to ON is detected after the timing t5, the handle 195 is continued to be continued. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. Thereby, even if the regular worker who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is When the game ball is closed, the game ball B is not accidentally fired, and loss of the player can be reliably prevented.

  Also, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the permission of the launch of the game ball B, the handle 195 With the contact being continued, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be fired from the time when the game ball B is permitted to be fired. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B can be fired from the timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as the symbol change, the big hit game, and the small hit game can be performed. Although the game can be played, the game may be played immediately at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from the point in time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be fired and a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, a small hit game can be performed, and the above-described [normal Monitoring of Injustice at Time], monitoring of injustice may be performed. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5. However, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a symbol change, a big hit game, An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a hit game can be started may be displayed.

  As another example, after the power is turned on, at least before the switch change processing in step S104, the fraud detection processing in step S112, and the emission permission signal setting processing in step S113, before the setting change processing in step S37 is started. The corresponding process may be performed in advance. With such a configuration, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting of the set value is changed (change permitted state). The firing of B may not be permitted, and the input of the detection signal may not be validated when the game ball B wins the winning opening.

  Further, in the above-described another example, in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 (a period including a change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 may be included), the magnetic sensor 2010 or the like may be used. It is also possible to configure so as to monitor fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor 3003, but not to notify the user of an abnormal state when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In addition, in a normal state, when it is determined that a wrongdoing by a magnet or vibration is being performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibrating goto counter is incremented by one, but from timing t3 to timing t4. In the change permission state (the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 may be included), even if it is determined that cheating due to a magnet or vibration is performed, You may comprise so that the value of a goto counter or a vibrating goto counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when the setting value is changed, even if the regular worker who makes the setting change approaches the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal due to the magnet or vibration. Notification or addition is not performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting of the set value.

  Note that various processes related to the above-described change permission state may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, and may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, an operator of the game arcade generates a state in which various processing related to the change permission state can be selected as any setting, After that, when a change permission state is generated, various processes related to the change permission state are executed with the selected setting. Accordingly, in game hall A, setting is made such that contact with handle 195 is enabled while illegal monitoring is not monitored in the change permission state, and in game hall B, illegal monitoring is performed in the change permission state. It can be set as non-monitoring, and can be set to invalidate contact with the handle 195. Needs of the amusement arcade, such as whether or not it is desired to check the firing operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state Will be able to match.

[25-3. About fraud monitoring during confirmation display of setting value]
In the above description, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting value change is described as not monitoring fraudulent activity during setting value setting change. It may be configured in any of a state in which the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value and a state in which the fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting value confirmation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a time chart showing a fraud monitoring state when fraud is not monitored during setting value confirmation display.

  When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the pachinko machine 1 first confirms that the power is turned on, and also confirms that the symbol has not been changed (there is no hold). An operation of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5). Subsequently, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the clock is changed in the same manner as when the setting is changed. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a to ON by performing a first ON operation by rotating the terminal 60 degrees in the direction (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on). I do. The setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key was turned ON to the original position, and turned OFF (timing t7). The state is changed from a state in which the set value is displayed for 1310 g to a state in which the set value is not displayed. That is, in the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation is performed. The display is not displayed (confirmation disabled state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and performing the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), the game can be performed. Become.

  At the time t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless there is no payout of game balls B such as prize balls. ing. Further, even if the setting key is inserted into the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees clockwise, the game ball B such as a prize ball is paid. If it has been issued, the setting key switch 1311a may not be set to ON (the setting key remains OFF), or after the payout of the game ball B such as the prize ball is completed, the setting key switch 1311a may be set. May be configured so that the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by setting the setting key ON.

  As another example, when the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on), as in the case of changing the setting of the setting value. In a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By setting the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a state in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state) is provided. You may. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permitted state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the state may be shifted to a state where a confirmation display of a set value can be performed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value is confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). The state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to a period from timing t6 to timing t7.

  In the present example, during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state). Is not permitted, and a special period is set in which the input of the detection signal is not made valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening. In the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, information regarding the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The hall clerk can grasp that the confirmation display is being performed.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor are performed. Not to run. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a. This is because there is no room to perform. Also, when confirming the set value, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirming display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. In addition, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular confirmation display operation.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular worker performing the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for a person other than the regular worker performing the confirmation display to perform an illegal act due to vibration. Because there is no. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display applies vibration when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration. Inhibition can be suppressed.

  In the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the logic of the firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. , And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. Thereby, even if the regular worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the inhibition of the regular confirmation display operation can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

  In the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, a winning opening such as a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a normal winning opening 2003, a large winning opening 2005, and various gate portions (gates). ), When the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B enters, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. The detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor itself may not be performed, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, and the game ball B The payout is no longer performed, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value, , Thereby suppressing the progress of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of a winning port, a gate unit (gate), and the like in a confirmation display state which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-described base monitor 1310h is performed on the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state. It is possible to exclude from the target (the target to be added to the number-of-outs counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to balling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h Can be prevented from being measured (added to the number-of-outs counter).

  In the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like are displayed. The light amount output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

  In the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. The notification during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that it is being displayed is being executed. As the notification during the confirmation display, a voice that repeats "Confirmation is being displayed", a message "Confirmation is being displayed!", And lamp emission in colors corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. I have. The notification during the confirmation display is a notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed in preference to the body frame opening notification performed in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening notification (display or sound of “frame is open” or the like) is normally performed. , The notification during the confirmation display is executed with the highest priority. In addition, the body frame opening notification and the notification during confirmation display are executed in parallel, and the notification during confirmation display is given priority over the body frame opening notification, and the body frame opening notification is performed after the notification during confirmation display ends. A form can also be illustrated.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also provided as the above-described notification during the confirmation display. Running. More specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special reservation display. In addition to the symbol display, the second special reserve number display, and the round display, a setting change display including one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), There is provided a display-in-confirmation indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the confirmation display (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the display-in-progress display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to know from the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7 (the period may include a confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the first start port 2002 and the second start port. When the game ball B wins a winning opening such as 2004, a normal winning opening 2003, and a special winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is performed. Is treated as invalid, but when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. A warning effect that informs that the game ball B is illegally winning in the winning opening despite the period in which the gaming ball B does not win in the winning opening. Running. The warning effect C is executed in preference to the notification during confirmation display and the body frame opening notification. That is, at the time of executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during the confirmation display or the main frame opening notification.

  In the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the permission of the launch of the game ball B and the input of the detection signal when the game ball B wins the winning opening are not enabled, and the game is not performed. Although the state cannot be started, the state is maintained until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed thereafter (timing t8). In other words, during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, no detection signal is input even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening due to a fraudulent act, and no illegal profit can be obtained. Further, since there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 may be subjected to an impact of closing the main body frame 4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor. The monitoring and monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of the fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

  Further, from the timing t8 when the operation of closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be fired, and a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game can be performed. In this state, the monitoring of various types of fraudulent activities is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned [About fraud monitoring in normal times]. The game ball B can be fired before the timing t6 when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. In a state in which a game such as a game or a small hit game can be performed, monitoring of various types of misconduct is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned [About irregularity monitoring in normal times].

  Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the game display device 1600 is on standby for the start of a game. Is displayed (a game standby notification). Then, after the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 for a predetermined period from the timing t8, a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, a small hit game, etc. is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed to notify that the game has become possible (game start notification).

  Also, in a normal state in which the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is turned ON. , Warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key has been turned on improperly by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbols are changed during normal times (timing t1), the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where the symbol is not constantly changed (timing t3), the setting key switch 1311a is not changed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. During the period (timing t4), the warning effect B is executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed in preference to the effect currently being executed. That is, at the time of executing the warning effects A and B, the effect under execution is stopped and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol change is performed. Although the warning effects A and B perform the effects in the same manner, the effects may be performed in different modes so that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring for misconduct due to magnets or vibrations, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibrations is detected, the output of the effect display device 1600, lamps, or loudspeakers will be used for a predetermined period of time. Is performed to notify that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of an abnormal state. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor, the game area section magnetic sensor, the setting operation section vibration sensor, and the game area section vibration sensor has detected the abnormality. Whether the occurrence is detected), the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the third sorting device 2550) (Is it a surrounding area)? In addition, the abnormality occurrence effect is executed in preference to the effect under execution. That is, at the time of execution of the abnormal occurrence effect, the effect under execution is stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed, and the abnormal occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority.

  In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the game ball B is fired. Although the logic of the firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is given is not set, in consideration of checking the firing operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission up to the launch of the game ball B is limited. It is desirable to prevent a detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various winning ports or gate portions (gates) so that the game does not unduly proceed. .

  In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the game ball B is fired. The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch is permitted is not set, and the game ball B is launched from timing t8 (or timing t7). However, if the handle 195 has been operated (contacted with the handle 195) from the time before the launch of the game ball B, the contact with the handle 195 is temporarily performed after the launch of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not fired unless it is released (touch detection is turned off) and the handle 195 is not touched (operated) again. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 is ON before the timing t8, unless the contact detection for the handle 195 from OFF to ON is detected after the timing t8, the contact of the handle 195 is continued. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. Thereby, even if a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value is in contact with the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is When the game ball is closed, the game ball B is not accidentally fired, and loss of the player can be reliably prevented.

  Also, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the confirmation display state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the handle 195 is changed to the handle 195. With the contact of the game ball B continued, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be enabled to enable the game ball B to be fired from the point of time at which the game ball B is allowed to be fired. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B can be fired from the timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game is performed. Although the game can be played, the game may be played immediately at the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be fired, and a game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game can be performed. Monitoring of Injustice at Time], monitoring of injustice may be performed. In such a configuration, the main frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8. However, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a symbol change, a big hit game, An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a hit game can be started may be displayed.

  As another example, the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor is in a confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7 (a period including a confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 may be included). It is also possible to configure such that, while monitoring irregularities using 3003, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, it is not notified that the state is abnormal. In addition, at normal time, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibrating goto counter is incremented by one, but from timing t6 to timing t7. In the confirmation display state (the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 may be included), even if it is determined that the illegal act by the magnet or the vibration is performed, You may comprise so that the value of a goto counter or a vibrating goto counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when the set value is confirmed and displayed, even if the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display approaches the magnet or applies vibration, the illegal operation due to the magnet or vibration may occur. Notification or addition is not performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming a hindrance when confirming and displaying the set value.

  Note that various processes related to the above-described confirmation display state may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade or the like, and may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a state in which the operator of the game arcade can select any one of the various processes related to the confirmation display state is generated, After that, when the confirmation display state occurs, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected setting. Accordingly, in game hall A, setting is made such that contact with handle 195 is made valid while monitoring for fraud is not monitored in the confirmation display state, and in game hall B, fraud monitoring is performed in the confirmation display state. It can be set as non-monitoring, and can be set to invalidate contact with the handle 195. Needs of the amusement arcade, such as whether or not it is desired to check the firing operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state Will be able to match.

  Next, a case in which a fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of the fraudulent behavior when the fraudulent behavior is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display. Here, a description will be given below of a difference from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the above-described setting value confirmation display.

  In the present example, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted and the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. A special period in which the input of the detection signal is not made valid when B wins is set, and only the improper activities in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. I have.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, while monitoring for fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used. To monitor fraudulent activities. This is because, in the confirmation display state, while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311 a, Other than the regular worker who performs the confirmation display of the setting, the wrong operation is performed such that the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is incorrectly changed. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening due to cheating, no detection signal is input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since the period is not possible, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activities using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in a period, until timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor fraudulent activities. That is, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed in a normal state, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, while monitoring for impropriety using the game area vibration sensor is not performed, unauthorized use using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is not performed. They monitor their actions. This is because, in the confirmation display state, while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311 a, The unauthorized worker who performs the confirmation display of the device performs an improper act so as to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the set value is illegally changed. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the gaming ball B is won in the winning opening due to cheating, no detection signal is input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since the period is not possible, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

  The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in a period, until timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor fraudulent activities. That is, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is performed in a normal state, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided.

  Also, during a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be a period from timing t6 to timing t7), unauthorized use of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor may be performed. Monitoring of actions and monitoring of fraudulent actions using the setting operation unit vibration sensors. When those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the images of the effect display device 1600 display the magnetism or vibration. Is performed to notify that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of the abnormality. In the abnormality occurrence effect A, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor has detected the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetic or vibration has been detected) or the abnormality is detected. The notified part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the timing t7 (which may be the timing t8) at the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, the timing may be changed. The abnormal occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the regular worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the regular worker who performs the confirmation display is displayed. The possibility of unintentionally bringing the magnet closer or applying vibration cannot be ruled out. For this reason, even when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is not necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A during execution is forcibly performed. It is going to end.

  As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. Although it is performed, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring for fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring for fraud using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitoring of fraudulent activities, and monitoring of fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor. Further, in such a normal time, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp or the speaker, and the abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration occurs for a predetermined period. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is a certain event is being executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used. The effect is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the effect B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person performing the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when performing the confirmation display of the set value, the regular worker performing the confirmation display is not intentional. This is because it is not possible to exclude the possibility of bringing the magnet closer or applying vibration. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnet, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area unit vibration sensor detected the abnormality. Whether the occurrence has been detected), the part where the abnormality has been detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, (Is it a surrounding area)?

  Further, as described above, when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is output by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. To notify that the main body frame 4 is open. In the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. The notification during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that it is being displayed is being executed. Then, after performing the operation of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key to shift to the confirmation display state. The notification during confirmation display is executed with a higher priority than when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed prior to the notification during the confirmation display.

[25-4. Modification of fraud monitoring while setting value is being changed]
In the above description, the monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting change of the set value has been described as not monitoring fraudulent activity during the setting change of the set value. Good. A case in which a fraudulent activity is partially monitored during such setting value change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state of the fraudulent behavior when the fraudulent behavior is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed. Here, a description will be given below of a difference from the case where the illegal action is not monitored during the setting value change of the setting value.

  In the above description, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4. Until the setting change process in step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, The interrupt permission setting in S52 is prohibited so as not to be performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. That is, since the main control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, and the fraud detection in step S112. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed, and the apparatus enters a standby state. On the other hand, after the power is turned on and before the setting change processing in step S37 is started, this corresponds at least to the switch input processing in step S104, the fraud detection processing in step S112, and the emission permission signal setting processing in step S113. The processing (the same processing) may be performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting of the set value is changed (change permitted state), but the firing of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, when the game ball B wins the winning opening, the input of the detection signal is set to a special period in which the input is not valid, and, among the misconduct, an area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided Only fraud is monitored.

  Before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process corresponding to the fraud detection process in step S112 (the same process) is performed in advance, and among the fraudulent activities, the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch are included. In the case where only the fraudulent activity in the area provided with 1311a is monitored, as in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that a wrongdoing by a magnet or vibration has been performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibrating goto counter is incremented by one. However, in the main control power-on processing, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and after the setting change processing in step S37 is completed (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing). After the determination), in step S38, all the areas except the specific area in the main control built-in RAM are cleared. Therefore, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is determined that the illegal act by the magnet or the vibration is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the value of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter is set (initialized) to a value 0 (zero) as an initial value. Thus, at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized, but in the change permission state, a person who changes the setting of the set value is set by the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b. When changing the setting of the set value, it is not possible to exclude the possibility that the person making the setting change unintentionally approaches the magnet or applies vibration. For this reason, even when it is determined that a wrongdoing by a magnet or vibration has been performed, it is not necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibrating goto counter is initialized. It is going to be.

  Specifically, in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor is not performed, while using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor. To monitor fraudulent activities. This is because, in the change permission state, in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a regular operator who performs setting change of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b. However, a person other than an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value performs an illegal act so as to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is illegally changed. This is to eliminate the possibility that a malfunction such as accidental operation will occur.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening due to an illegal act, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since the period is not possible, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activities using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in a period, until timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor fraudulent activities. That is, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed in a normal state, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Regardless of whether or not the change is permitted, the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  Similarly, in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the illegal operation using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is not performed while the illegal operation using the game area vibration sensor is not monitored. They monitor their actions. This is because, in the change permission state, in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a regular operator who performs setting change of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b. However, a person other than an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value performs an illegal act so as to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is incorrectly changed. This is to eliminate the possibility that a malfunction such as accidental operation will occur.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening due to wrongdoing, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since the period is not possible, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

  The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 but also in a period until the timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor fraudulent activities. That is, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is performed in a normal state, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Regardless of whether the change is permitted or not, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  Further, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Performing a setting change effect to notify that the setting is being changed. In the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4 (the period may include a change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), the first start port 2002 and the second start port are provided. When the game ball B wins at a winning opening such as the 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the special winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the gaming ball B is performed. Is treated as invalid, but when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. A warning effect that informs that the game ball B is illegally winning in the winning opening despite the period in which the gaming ball B does not win in the winning opening. Running. This warning effect C is executed prior to the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, at the time of executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the body frame opening notification.

  Further, during a period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be a period from timing t3 to timing t4), unauthorized use of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor may be performed. Monitoring of actions and monitoring of fraudulent actions using the setting operation unit vibration sensors. When those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the images of the effect display device 1600 display the magnetism or vibration. Is performed to notify that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of the abnormality. In the abnormality occurrence effect A, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor has detected the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetic or vibration has been detected) or the abnormality is detected. The notified part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. When the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the timing t4 (which may be the timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. The abnormal occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular operator who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting is changed when the setting of the setting value is changed. It is not possible to exclude the possibility that a legitimate worker unintentionally brought the magnet closer or vibrated. For this reason, even when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is not necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A during execution is forcibly performed. It is going to end.

  As described above, during the period in which the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 is included, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. Although it is performed, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitoring of fraudulent activities, and monitoring of fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor. Further, in such a normal time, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp or the speaker, and the abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration occurs for a predetermined period. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is a certain event is being executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used. The effect is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the effect B. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular operator who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting is changed when the setting of the setting value is changed. This is because it is not possible to exclude the possibility that a regular worker unintentionally brought the magnet closer or applied vibration. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area unit magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) Is detected), a portion where an abnormality is detected (is a region where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, a region in front of the game region 5a, or the third sorting device 2550). Is the area in the vicinity of the area).

  Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, in a state where the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during a period from timing t3 to timing t5, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. In addition, the main body frame opening notification for notifying the outer frame 2 that the main body frame 4 is open is executed. Further, after the power is turned on, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is deleted, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. The setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the setting of the setting value is being changed is executed. After the operation of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key turned on, and the state shifts to the change permission state. The setting change notification is executed prior to the release notification, and when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body frame is set. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the opening notification and the notification during the setting change.

[26. Modification of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above-described example, the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the result of the special lottery, and during the small hit game state, the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008. In this case, the setting change of the winning probability and the like is performed for the control of shifting to the big hit gaming state. However, as shown in FIG. 244, whether the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 is provided or not. Alternatively, even if the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hitting game state, the setting of the winning probability or the like is changed for the one that is not controlled to shift to the big hitting game state. Good. Hereinafter, a description will be given as a second embodiment of a modified example of the change of the setting such as the winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided. The pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the above-described example of the pachinko machine 1 in that the accessory winning opening 2006 (in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are disposed) is used. The second large winning opening 2006A (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not disposed inside) is provided, and the other configuration is the same.

[27-1. Game Content of Second Embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player. , “Small hits”, “shortening of time (shortening of time)”, “shortage of probability variation (probability)” are performed. Then, the result of the special lottery selected is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the reception in the second starting port 2004 is suggested with priority (derivation). I do. It should be noted that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 without preferentially suggesting (deriving) the special lottery result corresponding to the reception in the second starting port 2004 (priority change). The special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in the order described (sequentially varying), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in parallel with the same period (simultaneous fluctuation).

  In addition, special lottery results that are determined by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “15R probable big hit”. , "15R normal big hit" and the like. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes “small hit”, while the first special lottery result does not include “small hit”. In addition, the lottery in which the second special lottery result wins the "small hit" than the first special lottery result, while including the "small hit" in both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

  If the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are “small hits”, When a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) elapses after the two-prize winning opening 2006A is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, a “small hit” game in which the game ball B cannot be received in a closed state is performed. Be executed. Since the second special winning opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center role item 2500, when the "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" is performed to the first guide. A game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. Further, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period in which the second big winning opening 2006A is in the open state is shorter than that of the big hit game, it is possible to keep hitting the game intention ball so as to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big winning opening 2006A in one small hitting game. During the small hitting game, the gaming state before the start of the small hitting gaming state (such as a probable change state or a time saving state described later) is maintained, and after the small hitting game, the gaming state before the start of the small hitting gaming state is continued. .

  The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are “15R probable big hit” or “15R normal big hit”. In this case, a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to be able to receive the game ball B, or a predetermined limit number (for example, 10 pieces) to the special winning opening 2005 If any one of the conditions of (i) accepting the game ball B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern of closing the game ball B unacceptable (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated 15 times. The game is executed. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R normal big hit”, after the big hit game is over, the lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The change time of the special symbol for indicating to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is determined by a predetermined number of times of change (for example, the sum of the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery). Until the number of times reaches 100), control is made to shift to the "time reduction state" in which the time until the next "hit" is drawn is made shorter than usual. Also, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R probable big hit”, after the “big hit” game ends, go to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next “big hit”. The special special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B of the above, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for indicating to the player is shorter than usual, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result The transition control is performed to a “probable change state (high probability state)” in which the probability of the special lottery result being “hit” is improved.

  If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are “2R sure change big hit”, the second special winning port 2006A is set. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) after the game ball B is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, an opening / closing pattern for setting the game ball B in a closed state in which the game ball B cannot be received (one open / close pattern is defined as one round) ) Is repeated twice. Also, after the "big hit" game is completed, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next "big hit" is reached. The “variable state” (high probability state), in which the special symbol fluctuation time for suggesting the result to the player is shorter than usual and the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “hit” is improved. )).

  Since the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500, the operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role 2500. Can be made to be a player. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 while the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are open, the payout device 580 is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are capable of accepting the game ball B, the second special winning opening 2006A and the special winning opening 2005 are allowed to receive the game ball B, so that many game balls B are received. Can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center role 2500, the driving operation is easier on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to make the player select which path the driving operation is aimed at, making it difficult for the player to be bored by various games. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, only the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be received in the second winning port 2006A.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the result of the special lottery is indicated by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously selected special lottery result is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result selected by accepting the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on. In the following, the blinking of the LED for a predetermined time to indicate the first special lottery result to the player is referred to as “variation display of the first special symbol”, and the second special lottery result is indicated to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined time may be referred to as “variable display of the second special symbol”, and the lighting combination pattern of the LED that indicates the first special lottery result to the player is “stop symbol of the first special symbol”. And a lighting combination pattern of LEDs that indicates the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as a “stop symbol of the second special symbol”.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player operation type operation can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, By appropriately using the pre-production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform a luminous production or a display production, etc., which can entertain the player even with various productions, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, the main control board 1310 performs a normal lottery result as to whether or not to open the second starting door 2411 in a predetermined pattern. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time) on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time for suggesting to the player the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003 is set to "6000 s" in the normal state, while the probable change state is set. In the time reduction state, it is set to “0.1 s”.

  In addition, the probability of winning the regular drawing (probability that the ordinary lottery result is “normal winning”) is “10/11”, and in most cases when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, the probability is “normal”. The second starting port door 2411 is opened. When the normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the period during which the second starter door 2411 is in the open state is set to “0.1 s” in the normal state, while “2” is set in the positive change state and the time saving state. .0 s ". Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting port door 2411 is opened only at intervals of at least 6000 s, and the period of the open state is extremely short. Is considered difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the probable change state, not only is the second starting port door 2411 frequently opened, but the period during which the opening state is open is long, so that the game balls B can be easily received into the second starting port 2004. . In addition, the normal probability (low-probability non-shortening state) and the time-saving state (low-probability saving time state) or the probable change state (high-probability saving time state) may be set to be different from the ordinary per-drawing probability. The probability per normal figure is set to “1/11”, the probability per normal figure is set to “10/11” in the time reduction state or the probable change state, and the accepting of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is abnormal in the normal state. On the other hand, by facilitating the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state or the probable change state, the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the time reduction state or the probable change state is facilitated. It is also possible to make the reception frequently occur, and to suppress the fraudulent act aimed at receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. In addition, in the normal state (low-probability non-short-time state), the probability of winning is set to zero (0/11) so as not to be elected. "Or" 11/11 "to further suppress an illegal act aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  As described above, in the normal state, the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based mainly on the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 (first (Variable display of special symbols) is performed. On the other hand, in the probable change state and the time saving state, the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center role item 2500 is performed. The suggestion of the second special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the starting port 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed.

  Also, if the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result by accepting the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003, the suggestion of the normal lottery result is made. Cannot be started, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result previously selected is completed. The number of retained ordinary lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the ordinary winning opening 2003, and for more than that, even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003, the ordinary lottery result is retained. Instead, they are destroyed. Instead of this example, the game ball B was received in the normal winning opening 2003 from the start of the normal drawing to the suggestion of the result of the normal drawing by accepting the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003. In this case, the result of the ordinary lottery may be discarded without suspension. This further prevents the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to reduce a small hit. It is possible to prevent occurrence of such a situation, and it is possible to further suppress an illegal act aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  In addition, the suggestion of the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the ordinary lottery. The suggestion of the normal lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly turning on / off the LED different from the LED indicating the special lottery result to blink for a predetermined time, and thereafter, by the combination of the lit LEDs, the normal lottery is performed. Suggest results.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the normal state, the game ball B aimed at the left side of the center role 2500 is driven, and the first special operation based on the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 is performed. The lottery result is suggested (variable display of the first special symbol). Also, if the first special lottery result is “15R normal big hit” in the normal state, the control is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center role 2500 is driven. The suggestion of the second special lottery result based on the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed. If the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (a total of 100 suggestions of the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery) without a big hit occurring in the time reduction state, the time reduction state is terminated and the normal state is reached. The game ball B aimed at the left side of the center role 2500 is again driven, and the first special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 is suggested (first special lottery result). (Variable display of symbols) is performed.

  Also, when the first special lottery result is “15R probable big hit” or “2R probable big hit” in the normal state or the time saving state, the transition to the probable change state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game is controlled. A game ball B aimed at the right side of 2500 is driven, and a second special lottery result is suggested (variable display of a second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. The probable change state is continuously executed until the next big hit. If the second special lottery result becomes “15R normal big hit” in the probable change state, the control is shifted to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game, and a big hit occurs in the time reduction state. If the predetermined number of fluctuations (the number of suggestions obtained by adding the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery is 100) is reached, the time saving state is ended and the control is shifted to the normal state.

  Also, when the second special lottery result becomes “15R probability change big hit” or “2R probability change big hit” in the probability change state, after the big hit game ends, the control is shifted to the probability change state (high probability state) again. In this manner, the probability change state is continued until the "15R normal big hit" is reached, and when the "15R normal big hit" is reached, the shift control to the time saving state is performed after the end of the big hit game.

  In the case where only the first special lottery result is held without the held second special lottery result, or when there is no held second special lottery result, the game ball B is sent to the first starting port 2002. Is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed also in the time saving state or the probable change state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes “15R normal big hit” in the time saving state or the probable change state, the control is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the first special lottery result is “15R in the time saving state or the probable change state”. When the “big hit big hit” or “2R big hit big hit” is reached, after the big hit game ends, the control is shifted to the positive change state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability (small hit probability) of “small hit” as the second special lottery result is set to be much higher than the big hit probability (for example, 10 times of the big hit probability in the probability change state). About twice). In addition, during the time saving state or the probable change state, the game ball B is frequently accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the second special lottery is performed. The mouth 2006A is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the time reduction state or the probable change state, small hits frequently occur in the second special lottery, and it is possible to obtain prize balls that exceed the firing amount little by little even if it does not become a big hit. It is possible, and the longer the time reduction state and the probable change state continue, the more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, not only the game balls B do not decrease in the time saving state or the probable change state, but also the player's possession balls can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the small hits that have occurred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game in the normal state where the consumption of the game ball B is large, and the ball possessed by the player does not become a big hit due to the occurrence of the small hit as well as the small consumption of the game ball B. It is possible to control the game to be completely different between the increasing time-saving state and the game executed in the probable state.

[27-2. Change of settings such as winning probability in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a probability of a big hit, a small hit, or the like that is changed according to a set value will be described.

  In the second embodiment, as in the example described above, a table corresponding to the set value is selected as a table (a hit determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. Tables used for special lottery and the like are provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (A), in the present embodiment, “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are set corresponding to the set values 1 to 6, respectively.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) that is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery is set to a different value for each set value. The jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time reduction state (low probability state) are “1/319” in the set value 1, “1/309” in the set value 2, and 3 in the set value. , The setting value 4 is “1/289”, the setting value 5 is “1/279”, and the setting value 6 is “1/269”. The jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probable change state (high probability state) are “1/30” for the set value 1, “1/40” for the set value 2, and 3 for the set value. Is 1/50, setting value 4 is 1/60, setting value 5 is 1/70, and setting value 6 is 1/80.

  As described above, in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the larger the set value is, the larger the jackpot probability becomes. However, in the probable change state, the set value becomes higher contrary to the normal state and the time saving state. The bigger the probability of hitting, the lower it is. In other words, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest in the normal state and the time saving state, whereas the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest in the positive change state. Note that the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value. For some parts, the jackpot probability set to a lower set value than the set value is set to an arbitrary set value. You may make it set so that it may become high.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) in the first special lottery is “0” for all the set values. It is difficult to obtain a prize ball by the small hit in the normal state and the time saving state (without winning the small hit), while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hit in the hit determination table) Is a common one-third for all set values, which is a very high probability compared to the big hit probability. Frequent hits occur, making it easier to obtain prize balls.

  In the probability change state, the jackpot probability is set to the lowest at the setting value 6, so that the occurrence of the jackpot is less likely to occur than the low setting value (delay), and the probability change state continues over a long period of time. The number of small hits that occur before a big hit increases as much as possible. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is also promised. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage degree. In other words, in the probable change state, the next big hit is promised regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained except for the big hit differs for each set value. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in other places is increasing.

  In addition, without changing the duration of the probable change state to the next big hit, the predetermined number of fluctuations (100 times of the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) in the same manner as the normal state and the time saving state. With the configuration that terminates when the set value is reached, the larger the set value is, the higher the probability of the jackpot is increased. (So-called change of the number of times). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained except for the big hit differs for each set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the number of prize balls that can be obtained except for the big hit Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property that expects a big hit to occur until the end condition of the probability change state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve interest. In order to realize such a game characteristic, the probability of a big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time reduction state is set so as not to make a setting difference (to be equal to 1/1319), and to be surely changed. The setting difference may be provided as described above only for the big hit probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state.

  In addition, in realizing the playability of the second embodiment, when the set value is lower than the specific set value, the big hit probability in the probability change state is set higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, When the set value is higher than the specific set value, the big hit probability in the probability change state may be made lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) are set to “1/250” at the set value 1 and “240/250” at the set value 2. 1 /, 3/230 for setting 3, 4/180 for setting 4, 5/170 for setting 5, and 1/160 for setting 6. The jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probable change state (high probability state) are "1/25" for the set value 1, "1/24" for the set value 2, and "1/24" for the set value 3. While setting "1/23", setting value 4 to "1/18", setting value 5 to "1/17", and setting value 6 to "1/16", the small value in the second special lottery Example of setting the winning probability (the ratio of the small hitting determination value indicating that the small hit was won in the hit determination table) to "1/20" common to all the setting values It can be.

  In the case of such a configuration, at the set values 1 to 3, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the probability change state. While the number is relatively small, at the set values 4 to 6, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is higher than the big hit probability in the probable change state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is equal to or more than the set value 4, the big hit probability is lower than the small hit probability in the probable change state, so that the occurrence of the big hit hardly occurs. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that a ball can be acquired. Further, history information of the probability of a large hit occurring in the probable state after power-on or the probability of a small hit occurring in the probable state is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM or the like) of the peripheral control unit 1511. By displaying various hit probability information based on the history information on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to remind the player that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a big hit in a probable change state. The player can be provided with a sense of expectation that “the set value may be 4 or more”, and new fun and fun can be provided while the game is being continued in the probable change state. In addition, the player feels that the probable change state continues for a long time and that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by small hits in the probable change state. It can also be recognized, and in this regard, it can also add new fun and fun that has never been seen before. As described above, at a specific set value (the set value 4 in the present embodiment), at a set value higher than the set value, the game is changed to a game characteristic in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by small hits. Can be further improved.

  Further, as another embodiment, the larger the set value in the probable change state, the higher the probability of a big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the second special lottery May be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the big hit probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is the set value 1 in the small hit probability. "1/319", set value 2 "1/309", set value 3 "1/299", set value 4 "1/289", set value 5 "1/279" , Set value 6 is “1/269”. The small hit probability in the probable change state (high probability state) is “1 / 31.9” at the set value 1, “1 / 30.9” at the set value 2, and “29.9 minutes” at the set value 3. 1, a setting value 4 of “1 / 28.9”, a setting value 5 of “1 / 27.9”, and a setting value 6 of “1 / 26.9”. As described above, in the probable change state, the big hit probability of all the set values is ten times higher than in the normal state and the time saving state.

  Also, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is “1/7” for the set value 1, “1/6” for the set value 2, “1/5” for the set value 3, and “1/5” for the set value 4. "1/4", setting value 5 is "1/3", and setting value 6 is "1/2". Therefore, at a setting value of 1, a small hit occurs once every 7 times of the second special lottery is performed, whereas at a setting value of 6, a small hit is reduced every time the second special lottery is performed twice. The frequency of occurrence of small hits increases. That is, at the setting value 6, small hits occur more frequently than at the setting value 1, so that it is easy to obtain the prize ball by the small hits. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

  Further, in addition to the setting change of the big hit probability and the small hit probability described above, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability, the degree of advantage is obtained by changing the determination ratio of the big hit type for each set value. You may make it change. As described above, in the probable change state and the time reduction state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small hit can be generated. On the other hand, in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and the small hit cannot be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes according to the duration of the probable change state or the time saving state.

  Also, in the probable change state, as in the case of the normal state and the time saving state, the larger the set value is, the larger the probability of the big hit becomes, and the higher the set value is, the higher the small hit probability becomes. Alternatively, a so-called falling lottery may be performed in which, when the special lottery result becomes “out” during the probable change state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the probable change state. In this case, the falling probability (the probability of terminating the probable change state) may not be changed for each set value and may be common, or the falling probability may be changed for each set value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (C), the falling probability of the high probability state may be set to “1/100” which is common to all set values, and in this case, the falling lottery result ends the probability change state. 245 is not different for each set value, but as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the larger the set value is, the larger the big hit probability is. Therefore, the frequency and number of occurrences of big hits are made different for each set value. Thus, the degree of advantage is changed so that the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

  Further, the falling probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (D), the fall probability is “1/80” for the set value 1 and the set value 2, “1/90” for the set value 3 and the set value 4, and the set value 5 and the set value. The value 6 may be "1/100".

  In this case, at the set value 1, the jackpot probability is "1 / 31.9", whereas the falling probability is "1/80", and the jackpot probability is about 2.5 times higher than the falling probability. On the other hand, at the setting value 6, the jackpot probability is "1 / 26.9", whereas the falling probability is "1/100", and the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the falling probability. Twice as high. In other words, by increasing the jackpot probability as the set value is increased and terminating the probable change state by increasing the ratio of winning the jackpot before the fall lottery result is obtained, the higher the set value, the greater the advantage degree I have.

  In addition, when the falling lottery result for terminating the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), while the second special lottery is performed. The control for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number (for example, the first special time). The control may be terminated and the control may be shifted to the normal state based on reaching the number of times of suggestion of the lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery of 100). That is, when a falling lottery result for terminating the probable change state is obtained during the probable change state, the probable change state may be ended and the shift to the time saving state may be controlled. In addition, when the falling lottery result for terminating the probable change state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of suggestions of the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100 times) ), The transition to the normal state may be performed without controlling the transition to the time saving state after terminating the probable change state.

  In addition, when the falling lottery result for terminating the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is displayed. The change time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal change time. That is, when a falling lottery result for terminating the probable change state is obtained during the probable change state, the probable change state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the falling lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and when the falling lottery result for terminating the time saving state during the time saving state is obtained, the time saving state is ended and the state shifts to the normal state. You may make it control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 245 (E), after the transition to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game is controlled, if the special lottery result is “big hit”, the probability of occurrence of the big hit type that will end the probability change state is By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the first special lottery result executed mainly in the normal state (low probability non-saving time state) is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is the same for all the set values, "15R probable big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "2R certain change" where the number of award balls acquired is smaller than "15R certain big hit" although the control is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game The occurrence ratio of "big hit" is set to "40/100", respectively, and a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery of 100 times). The occurrence ratio of “15R ordinary big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the time reaches “20/100” is set.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability change state and the time saving state is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value. The occurrence ratio of “15R probable big hit” controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to “45/100”, and the number of prize balls acquired while the shift to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit game The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variable hit” which is smaller than “15R probability change big hit” is “15/100”, and is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached after the big hit game ends. The occurrence rate of the “15R normal big hit” is “40/100”.

  At the set value 2, the occurrence ratio of “15R probable change big hit” controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to “46/100”, and the prize is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game. The occurrence rate of “2R probability variable hit”, in which the number of obtained balls is smaller than “15R probability variable hit”, is set to “19/100”, and a predetermined number of changes (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R ordinary big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery reaches 100) is “35/100”.

  At the set value 3, the occurrence ratio of the “15R probability variable big hit” controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to “47/100”. The rate of occurrence of “2R probability variable hits” in which the number of obtained balls is smaller than “15R probability variable hits” is “23/100”, and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of “15R normal big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery reaches 100) is “30/100”.

  At the setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of “15R probable big hit” controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to “48/100”. The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variable hit” where the number of obtained balls is smaller than “15R probability variable hit” is “27/100”, and a predetermined number of changes (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R ordinary big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery reaches 100) is set to “25/100”.

  At the setting value 5, the occurrence ratio of the "15R probability variable big hit" controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to "49/100". The rate of occurrence of “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the number of obtained balls is smaller than “15R probability variable jackpot” is “31/100”, and a predetermined number of changes (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery reaches 100) is “20/100”.

  At the setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of the “15R probability variable big hit” controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is set to “50/100”, and the prize is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game. The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variable hit” where the number of obtained balls is smaller than “15R probability variable hit” is “35/100”, and a predetermined number of changes (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the “15R normal big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery reaches 100) is “15/100”.

  As described above, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability change state and the time saving state becomes “big hit”, the predetermined number of changes (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the special lottery reaches 100) is changed for each set value. By reducing the ratio, it is difficult to end the probable change state. As a result, once the shift control to the probable change state is performed as the set value is higher, the probable change state becomes difficult to end, and the number of big hits can be increased. It becomes possible to acquire. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the probable change state.

  The higher the set value, the lower the occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit”, and the higher the setting ratio of “2R certain big hit” than “15R certain big hit” to suppress the number of winning balls, Can be suppressed from being excessively advantageous to the person.

[27-3. Set value suggestion effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is configured such that the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in the probable state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 245 (A), since the big hit probability of the probability change state of the set value 1 is “1/30” and the small hit probability is “1/3”, after the big hit game is over. The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won from the control to the probability change state to the next big hit is “9 times”. Further, in one small hitting game, about one game ball B can enter the second big winning opening 2006A, so that the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one small hitting game is obtained. Is “15 balls”. That is, in the case of the set value 1, the expected value of the prize sphere that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability change state is “135 balls” of “9 times × 15 balls”. Similarly, when the set value is 2, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability change state is “195 balls” of “13 times × 15 balls”, and when the set value is 3, the expected value is obtained by the small hit in the probability change state. The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is “240 balls” of “16 times × 15 balls”, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the case of a set value of 4 is “19 times × 15 balls”. The expected value of the prize sphere that can be obtained by small hits in the case of "285 balls" and the set value of 5 is probable, and "345 balls" of "23 times 15 balls", and the case of the set value of 6 is the small hit in the probable state. The expected value of the prize sphere that can be obtained by this is “390 balls” of “26 times × 15 balls”.

  In FIG. 245 (B), the expected value of the prize sphere that can be obtained by the small hit in the case of the set value 1 in the probability change state is “60 balls” of “4 times 15 balls”, and in the case of the set value 2, the expected value of the prize ball is the probability change state. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hits is “75 balls” of “5 times × 15 balls”, and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hits in the case of a set value of 3 is “5 times” The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the probable state in the case of “75 balls” of “× 15 balls” and the set value of 4 is “105 balls” of “7 times × 15 balls” and the set value of 5 The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable change state is “135 balls” of “9 times × 15 balls”. When the set value is 6, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable change state is “ 13 times 15 balls "and" 195 balls ".

  As described above, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hits and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ depending on the set value in the probable state (partly the same in FIG. 245 (B). Therefore, when controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game or the number of wins of the small hit until the next big hit. it can. An effect that suggests a set value (set value suggestion effect) may be executed in accordance with the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game, the number of wins per small hit, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge unit having six scales 1600 d of 1 to 6 corresponding to six set values on the effect display device 1600 as a set value suggestive effect, The scale between the gauges is colored according to the number of prize balls (number of payouts) obtained by winning the second large winning opening 2006A, and as the number of prize balls obtained in small hits increases, the gauge part is stepped from the initial display mode. The color may be colored gradually (increased color display between the scales), and the color between all the scales of the gauge section may be colored to indicate the high setting value. Specifically, when controlling to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of awarded balls acquired is “0”, only the leftmost one of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to the “set value”. The value is 1 or more ", and the setting value is displayed on the balloon 1600c to indicate to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge section indicates the setting value. .

  Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 1 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 2. By further coloring and displaying up to the second scale from the left of the six scales in the gauge portion (a state in which the first and second scales are colored from the left), it is determined that “the set value is 2 or more”. In addition to the suggestion, "2 or more?" Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 246 (B)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value 2 and falls within the range of the expected value of the set value 3. By further coloring and displaying the third scale from the left of the six scales in the gauge portion (a state in which the first to third scales from the left are colored), it is determined that the set value is 3 or more. Along with the suggestion, “3 or more?” Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b, and it is more clearly suggested that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 246 (C)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 3 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 4. By further coloring and displaying up to the fourth scale from the left of the six scales in the gauge portion (a state in which the first to fourth scales from the left are colored), it is determined that the value is “set value 4 or more”. At the same time, "4 or more !?" is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 246 (D)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 5. By further coloring and displaying the fifth scale from the left of the six scales in the gauge portion (a state in which the first to fifth scales from the left are colored), it is determined that “the set value is 5 or more”. In addition to the suggestion, “5 exceeded ??” is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 246 (E)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 6. By further coloring and displaying the sixth scale from the left of the six scales in the gauge portion (in a state where all the scales are colored and displayed), it is suggested that the setting value is 6 and the character 1600b is displayed. "Did it! 6 may be !!" is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (FIG. 246 (F)).

  From the state in which the six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed from the left to the sixth scale (the state in which all the scales are colored), since the display has already reached the final stage, a big hit The next big hit game is started without changing the display of the gauge part according to the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the game, or the end condition is satisfied if there is an end condition of the probable change state Up to this point, the state in which all the scales are colored and displayed is continued.

  In addition, further setting suggestion may be separately performed in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed. For example, in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, a jackpot game When paying out a prize ball in a later small hitting game, based on the detection of a ball at the second big winning opening 2006A, the highest setting (set value 6) is definitely notified to the player to determine the highest setting. A special effect lottery for performing the effect may be performed. Specifically, in the state where all six scales in the gauge portion are displayed in color, a special rendering lottery that wins at 1/1000 is performed every time a ball is detected at the second big winning opening 2006A. By winning, the voice output of the special mode (message voice of Congratulations! 6), various lamp lights of the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamp light emission of rainbow colors using seven colors), and the effect display device 1600 In this example, the maximum setting confirmation effect including the special display (message display of setting 6 congratulations!) Is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the maximum setting finalization effect with all the scales displayed in color, the user can obtain satisfaction with the effect related to the setting suggestion performed earlier, and further update the game without making the player bored. A certain degree of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the entertainment interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big hit, whereby a big hit occurs and a big hit game is played. Since the set value suggestion effect is executed each time the control is shifted to the probable change state to indicate the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the actual set value is estimated by statistically setting the value suggested by the set value suggestion effect. Will be able to That is, if the probability change state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by small hits during the probability change state may differ from the expected value of the prize ball obtainable according to the set value. Although it is difficult to determine the number of prize balls acquired by small hits for each probable change state between big hits, the ratio around the specific prize balls will increase, so the specific prize balls count as the expected value The set value can be estimated by comparing. In this example, it is possible to infer that the setting value having the highest suggestion ratio in the setting value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual setting value.

  In the case of a big hit, the display mode of the gauge unit may be taken over until the probable change state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit. Also, in this case, the six scales in the gauge section are set to be equal to or more than the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probable state or the number of small hits that can be generated in one probable state according to the set value. All the scales may not be colored in the probability change state. This makes it possible to suggest a set value based on the number of winning balls, the number of small hits, and the like obtained in a probable change state over a long period of time, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

  In addition, the various setting value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize ball acquired by the small hit game executed in the probable change state of the period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit. Because the setting is based on the number and not the actual setting, the suggested setting may differ from the actual setting. The main control board 1310 may transmit information related to the set value (set value information) to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the prize acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game as a set value suggestion effect The setting value may be suggested based on the setting value information in addition to the number of balls. Specifically, when the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestive effect is not changed. Alternatively, if the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or the set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery or the like May be changed to a suggestion mode of a set value suggestion effect corresponding to a set value equal to or less than the set value indicated by. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting value suggestion effect, and to pay attention to the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value at each set value. Is determined, the display of the gauge section is changed to suggest the setting in the probable change state. However, the setting suggestion in the probable change state is not limited to such a form, and may be as follows.

  For example, in the case where there are six gauge units as described above, one scale 1600d is colored each time the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the winning ball paid out by the small hit has reached a certain value. By achieving the coloring of the scale 1600d in the final stage, it may be suggested to the player that the setting is high. In this case, it is preferable to use the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small hitting game after the hitting game with the set value 6 as a guide so that the coloring of the scale 1600d in the final stage is achieved. If the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game with the value 6 is “195 balls”, the payout of “195 balls + α balls (α <195)” is colored on the scale 1600d in the final stage. It can be exemplified that the timing is an achievement timing.

  Also, based on the peripheral control unit 1511 determining that the number of times that the result of the second special lottery has been a small hit result has reached a certain value, instead of based on the prize ball paid out by the small hit, 1 By coloring the two scales 1600d and achieving the coloring of the final scale 1600d (for example, the number of times that the result of the second special lottery becomes a small hitting result reaches 80 times) at a high setting. That may be suggested to the player. In this case, the difficulty of achievement changes depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the probability change state at the actually set value. Then, depending on the display condition of the gauge portion (for example, a condition of reaching the final stage with one more scale of coloring), the result of the second special lottery may be a smaller hit than a big hit, in anticipation of setting value suggestion. It is possible to provide a new game characteristic that focuses on the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the probable change state, a new game for estimating a set value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of wins of the small hit game is performed. Sex can be provided.

[28. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The contact detection sensor main body 392 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a sensor main body of the present invention, and the contact detection body 393, the first contact detection body 393a, and the second contact detection body 393b of the present embodiment are The switching unit 394 in the present embodiment is a switching unit of the present invention, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like in the present embodiment are the present invention. Respectively correspond to the control means.

[29. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided at a desired portion where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions from each other. When the player approaches or comes into contact with the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion by switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected, the electrostatic force of the contact detection body 393 is reduced. Since the capacitance changes, the change in the capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, so that the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion is detected. The main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1 according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. It is possible to perform a predetermined control by the control means 12 or the like. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching section 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at other portions is provided. Is cut off, so that even if the player approaches or contacts another part, the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other part changes, Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at a desired portion is reliably detected. Erroneous detection can be prevented. As described above, for the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions from each other, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. Capacitance can be detected by a single contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control unit 1511, an effect display control unit 1512, and the like. In the control means, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the effect can be relatively increased. Therefore, it is possible to control more effect means (for example, movable decorative body, light-emitting decorative body, effect display device, and the like) by the control means, so that a variety of effects can be provided to the player by increasing the effect means. It can be presented, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible for the player to be sufficiently entertained and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting approach or contact of the player to a desired portion, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave predetermined cautions and warnings by the means, one contact detection sensor body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 and relatively controls the number of channels that can be used for production. It can be increased, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sensor body having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit in a part that is difficult for a player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. , The capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392, so that the labor involved in assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

  In addition, a connection terminal is provided in advance on the contact detection sensor main body 392, and only by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 are provided. Can be connected, the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of components is reduced as compared with the case where the conductive member is connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the pachinko machine 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detector 393 to be detected by the switching unit 394 can be selected. When a player participation type effect is performed in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner and touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 with the player at the timing of sequentially touching. By switching the contact detectors 393 to be connected, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in order, and a player-participatory effect with high game properties can be performed by one contact. This can be realized by the detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player is touched by the player's finger or the like. When the player approaches or contacts the player, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of a patching metal of a metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (production operation unit 350). When the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected by using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this manner, the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit ascending and descending A predetermined effect is output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the in-button decoration substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player can enjoy the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the rendering operation unit 350, a predetermined rendering is output, so the rendering of the rendering operation unit 350 is performed by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. It can function as a contact operation unit. The player can press and operate the non-contact operation unit and the effect operation unit 350 functioning as the contact operation unit when the player projects the non-contact operation, the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the press operation. Since various staging operations such as operation can be performed, it is easy to embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of the conventional pachinko machine having operation buttons that can only be pressed, and other pachinko machines can be realized. By distinguishing the pachinko machine from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player.

  In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in accordance with the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (the button main body 351). It is possible to output a different effect for each of the thresholds by providing a plurality of thresholds for the capacitance since the thresholds differ depending on the distance between the player and the player. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the stage (distance) from the player's approach to the contact to the button body 351 (the stage operation unit 350) until the button is contacted in multiple stages, the stage-dependent production is output. By doing so, more diverse effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is performed. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance and appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, since various operation operations such as a non-contact operation, a contact operation, and a pressing operation can be performed by the operation unit, a player participation-type effect that enables the player to perform the operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain various production operations, make it difficult for the player to get tired of it, and to make the player entertain in a participant-type production, reducing the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is a punching metal formed of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed thereon, the plurality of holes allow the player to attach to the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, and the like of the plurality of holes, the area of the contact detection body 352 can be increased while suppressing an increase in capacitance. The range in which the player approaches or touches the main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be widened. Thereby, since the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged and the detection range can be widened, as in the above-described embodiment, the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged, and When the contact detection body 352 has the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 so that the player's finger or the like approaches or makes contact with the staging operation unit unit 350. The moving distance is shortened, and the operation operation unit 350 can be quickly operated. It is possible to hardly, the player can reliably be joined to participatory effect, a decrease in the interest entertained player by the effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. The light emission effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the light emission effect can be surely enjoyed by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is provided in the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) capable of performing a pressing operation, the contact detection body made of a punching metal which is a metal plate having a certain strength and rigidity. With 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even when the player performs a pressing operation, even if the production operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit, the production operation unit is produced. 350 can be made difficult to deform or break. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be made hard to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, so that the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed by the player without mind, and the effect operation unit 350 is operated. It is possible to make the player's participation-type production more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detection body 352 is formed of a punching metal and the contact detection body 352 is an expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, a space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, and the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, so that the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

  Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact detector 352 is constant as compared with expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily formed into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it possible to easily make the shape optimal for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350), and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Also, in the effect operation unit 350, the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detection body 352 having a plurality of holes, thereby giving an unpleasant feeling. The button body 351 can be operated without discomfort in a player-participation-type effect using as an operation unit, and the effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food adheres to a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the cleaning work, and reduce the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the easily-cleaned pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the rendering means such as the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the rendering operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decoration board 364 in the button, and the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358. Then, since a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the production means such as the decoration board 355 outside the button, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decoration board 364 in the button, and the projection output adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the provision means is provided, the contact detection body 352 covers the production means, and the contact detection body 352 (production operation unit 350) and the production means can be compactly integrated. It is possible to easily provide the staging operation unit 350 and the staging means having the above-described effects at desired portions of the pachinko machine 1, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Can be made easier.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the rendering operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the rendering operation unit 350 changes, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, so that the rendering operation unit 350 The approach or contact of the player can be detected. When the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward by the urging force of the elevation spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 projects while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with (collides with) the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player an effect by a physical force such as pressing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that the conventional pachinko machine does not have, and to strongly attract the interest of the player to the effect operation unit 350, and to the player The projection of the effect operation unit 350 can be reliably noticed.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is to be protruded, if the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 of the projection output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the lifting / lowering spring 365 (upward), the compression of the lifting / lowering spring 365 is strong. When the spring is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the elevating spring 365, the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened, and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the staging operation unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this manner, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be protruded with various projection powers, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, to make it difficult for the player to be bored, and to effect the effect operation. The effect by the projection of the unit unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the projection output of the staging operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the staging operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the staging operation unit is applied with a strong force. When the player 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, so that it is possible to strongly think that there is something good (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous). And a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 capable of performing a pressing operation, when a player participation type production is executed, the player is caused to perform a pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to play a game. The player can participate in the participant-type effect, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player can place a finger or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that the effect operation can be performed at any time. Then, when the player participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation unit raising / lowering mechanism 360 to thereby provide a player participation type effect image or sound. Even if the start of the performance is not guided, it is possible to promptly recognize the start of the execution of the player-participation-type effect, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 to perform the player-type effect. It can be even more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the effect operating unit unit 350 is made to protrude by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously protruded, so that the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

  Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and make the effect operation unit 350 protrude with a different projection power for each threshold. Becomes Accordingly, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the staging operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, so that the stage can be detected in multiple stages. By protruding with the sudden output, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by effecting the pop-up by performing the player participation type effect in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When the player approaches or comes into contact with the button, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be detected, the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 can be detected, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the advance / retreat (press) of the effect operation unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320, the out-of-button decoration substrate 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the in-button decoration substrate A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as the 364, the projection output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, a predetermined effect is performed by the player moving the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaching or touching the effect operation unit 350, so that the effect can entertain the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the staging operation unit 350, the staging is performed. Can function as follows. On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is performed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). Because of this, the player can perform a variety of staging operations, and by performing a player participation-type staging that enables the staging operation of the player, a variety of staging operations can be enjoyed. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to make the player entertain the player-participatory effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player makes contact (under the upper surface 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 differs according to the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and each of the thresholds is provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the stage (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the stage operation unit 350 until the stage comes into contact with the stage operation unit in multiple stages, it is possible to present the stage in accordance with each stage. Thus, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the production operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 (non-contact operation, An operation feeling can be given to the (contact operation), and the effect operation can be more enjoyed for the player.

  Furthermore, it is provided with a rendering operation unit unit 350 in which a player can advance and retreat (can be pressed), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 capable of detecting approach or contact of the player to the rendering operation unit unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player performs an operation (press operation) for moving the production operation unit 350 forward or backward, and an operation (a non-contact operation, a contact operation) for bringing a finger or the like into or out of contact with the production operation unit 350. ) Can be requested, and the various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type production and facilitate the participation in the player participation-type production. Can be. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various operations using the effect operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participating effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 to the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 is locked so as not to advance and retreat. Until an effect such as moving the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward is performed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from moving back and forth by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from arbitrarily moving or swinging. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the effect operation unit 350 without permission, and to make the effect by the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be made.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult to see from the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance.

  Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, and the like for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are formed separately. Since the shape, material, and the like of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the shape, form, specifications, and the like of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 are changed. And the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the button main body 351 or the surface member covering the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 inside the button, or the decoration body 395 is provided. When the player approaches or touches the finger or the like to the 396, the contact detection body 352 provided between the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 or the decoration body 395 in the button, or Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 397 changes, a predetermined effect of irradiating light to the player side by the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration body 395 according to the change is executed. The light radiated to the player strongly attracts the player's interest to the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 395. It is possible, it is possible to entertain the player by directing executed. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration 395 is attached to the button body 351 or the button. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player an illusion of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 as a part of the decoration portion, and It can be made impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting a player. As described above, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is different from the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 395 (production) is interrupted, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration body 395. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give a sense of incongruity to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the effect of the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 395 to the player in a favorable state, and to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the outside of the button covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the effect of irradiating light to the player side is performed on the decorative substrate 355, the in-button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 395, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the directing operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302), and the player can be given an operational feeling by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is performed, the finger or the like of the player is made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the approach or the contact of the finger or the like by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is performed. By performing the effect by the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 in the button, or the decorative body 395 by detecting the contact, the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, since the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the finger of the player are detected. The effect of the decoration board 355 outside the button, the decoration board 364 in the button, or the decoration body 395 can be made different according to the distance between the decoration board 355 outside the button and the movement (position) of the finger or the like of the player. And the effect of the decoration board 364 or the decorative body 395 in the button can be changed, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the variety of effects can make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  Further, a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button are pressed. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button decoration substrate 364, and the decoration 395 changes, the game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. The approach or contact of a finger or the like of a person can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the change in the capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be a conductive member. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor-deposited film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor-deposited film, and it looks like a part of the decoration by thickening the vapor-deposited film to have a metallic luster. Can be. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punching metal having a design such as a star and a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made to look like a part of a decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 that cannot be recognized by the player can be provided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when the finger or the like of the player approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). The capacitance changes, and due to the change, effect presentation means such as the decorative board outside button 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the decorative board in button 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. A contact detection object 395 (including a contact detection object 352, a contact detection object left 390L, a contact detection object right 390R, a contact detection object 393, a contact detection object 397, etc.) for presenting a predetermined effect. The pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself because it is formed in a predetermined outer peripheral shape having a property, and the appearance is improved and the pachinko machine 1 is provided to the player. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. In addition, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the presentation is performed according to a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented by the means via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, a predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. In other words, the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And since the contact detection body 395 etc. which can be seen through the button main body 351 have a design, the effect operation part 301 appears to have a design, and the effect which the pachinko machine does not have so far. Since the pachinko machine 1 includes the operation unit 301, the pachinko machine 1 can give a strong impact to the player and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 having a design property can give a strong impact to the player, so that interest in the contact detection body 395 (the button main body 351) can be strongly inspired. It is possible to increase the expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the decoration detection body 395 or the like for detecting approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having design, at a glance, some players present effects. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, and for the first time, the effect of the button body 351 by the contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to make the player aware of the operation unit 301, and it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to further enjoy the player participation type effect. Alternatively, when the player's participation-type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the static detection unit 359 or the like is activated. Since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means with a change in the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 and the like, the player's finger and the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 and the like. It is possible to easily detect approach or contact, and it is possible to easily realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. In addition, since the effect is presented in accordance with the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like, contact from the approach of the player's finger and the like to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 and the like is performed. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to (distance) in multiple stages, by presenting the effects according to each stage, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, Can be made hard to get tired of, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, and wire mesh is used as the contact detection body 395 having conductivity, A design property can be imparted to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the appearance of the contact detector 395 and the like can be prevented from being deteriorated. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

  In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having designability without forming the contact detector 395 and the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the front surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food does not adhere to the contact detection body 395 and the like, and the trouble of cleaning is easy. It can be. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 or the like is made of a material having irregularities such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food tends to adhere to the irregularities, and it takes time to clean the dirt. However, since the surface of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395 or the like having irregularities such as punching metal is used, the button body 351 can be used. Thus, the adhesion of dirt can be prevented, and the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as an easy-to-clean one.

  Further, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection body 359 and the like. In the case of using a material that can enhance the design, such as a foil stamping, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn out early by touching, and to enhance the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

  Further, the front side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 and the like with the transparent button body 351. Since it is possible to use a material having a bad touch or a thing that gives a player an unpleasant feeling as the detector 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 and the like, The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from the corresponding material.

  In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by bringing the finger or the like of the player close to or touching the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. The predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., so that the player approaches or touches the finger or the like with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the operation of the finger or the like.

  In addition, an effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, and the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 and the like is executed, the button body 351 can function as a contact operation unit, and the presented effect provides an operational feeling. Can be provided, and the operation (player participation type effect) using the button body 351 can be enjoyed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player brings a finger or the like close to or touches the button main body 351, When the contact detection body 352 (the contact detection sensor main body 358) detects that a finger or the like has entered the detection area, the buttons 355a of the decoration board 355 outside the button and the LEDs 364a of the decoration board 364 inside the button emit light to emit a button. A light emission effect in which light is applied to the player through the main body 351, an effect in which the finger or the like of the player in contact with (through) the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. To give impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player through (via) the button body 351 by projecting upwards, etc. To be executed, it is possible to function button body 351 as the contact operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, the effect can surprise the player and entertain the player. Accordingly, the desire to operate the button body 351 can be increased. When the finger or the like of the player touches the button body 351 and appropriately moves the finger or the like to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. A contact operation by detecting approach or contact of a finger or the like of the player by 352 and a pressing operation of the button body 351 can allow the player to enjoy various staging operations, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a detecting means for detecting approach or contact of a finger or the like of the player is constituted by the contact detecting body 352 and the contact detecting sensor main body 358, and the contact detecting body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 remote from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the button main body 351 can be controlled by the contact detection body 352. Of the player's finger or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is constituted by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 remote from the upper surface portion 351a (the contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be disposed in a less conspicuous portion. 1 can improve the appearance.

  In addition, since the out-of-button decorative board 355 and the in-button decorative board 364 and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, light and light are provided to the player through the button main body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily provided, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[30-1. Main control unit (2)]
The other main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 247, 248, 249, 250 to 268 and 269.
Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of a game, and a main control board box 1320 serving as a housing that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ing.

[30-1-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIG. 252, the main control board box 1320 generally includes a cover 1301 and a base 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The main control unit 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space 1320s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded of a synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front side or the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration is performed, Whether the IC chip is mounted or not) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320.
Further, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z so as to correspond to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy one sealing mechanism 1320z, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing remaining in the sealing mechanism 1320z, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence of the main control unit 1310 against the illegal act is enhanced.

[30-1-2. Main control section]
The main control unit 1310 includes a main control board 1310X (see FIGS. 252 and 269) that controls the progress of the game, the payout of the game ball B, and the like. And a setting change board 1310Y (see FIGS. 252 and 269) that can set the game settings relating to the distribution rate and the like to any one of a plurality of set values.

[30-1-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. The main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2406, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning port sensor. 3001, a first starting port sensor 3002, a magnetic sensor 3003, an out port left sensor 1008a, and an out port right sensor 1008b.

[30-1-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 includes a setting switch 1311a for switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and checking the set value, a setting switch button 1311b for selecting and switching the set value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected (connecting between boards) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X. (A harness connects the connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X. May be electrically connected to each other). By this connector connection (connection between boards), a signal from the setting switch 1311a and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
The vertical dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y is almost the same as the vertical dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X, and the horizontal dimension of the left and right sides of the main control board 1310X is the same. The center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X and the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. Agree.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y at a position which is the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is Along the left side of the control board 1310X, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line.
On the setting change board 1310Y, a setting switch 1311a having an operation section 1311j into which the setting key K1 is inserted and rotated below the center line is disposed, and a pressing operation section is provided above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting switching button 1311b having a setting switch 1311p is arranged, and a setting capable of emitting light of a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and to the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). A change permission lamp 1311c is provided.
A setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310X and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310X is arranged. Below, a base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a line from the center to the right side is arranged, and the lower side of the main control board 1310X is closer to the center. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit similar to the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion hole extends vertically). In the state, the setting switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the operation unit 1311j is at the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key K1 can be extracted from the insertion port.

When the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON, and the signal of the setting key ON changes the setting. The signal is input from the board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing the second ON operation. The data is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
Further, the operation unit 1311j is rotated counterclockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees toward the direction and turned OFF, and the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned ON with the enter key. The rotation of the operation unit 1311j by 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the setting position (the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) and the OFF operation of the setting switch 1311a can be performed. it can. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In the present embodiment, two completely different functions of the setting key ON and the determination key ON can be realized by only the setting switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the operation unit 1311j is rotated. Thus, the operation of the setting key ON and the determination key ON can be performed collectively.

The front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting change button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed in the corresponding cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although exposed to the outside via 1301h, the opening 1301h corresponds to the front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. A portion corresponding to these openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 is set so that a foreign matter such as a wire cannot be intruded from a “gap” formed in the cover member 1301 to modify the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. Switch 1311 Between the setting change button 1311b and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (for example, fitting of the cylinders 1301c shown in FIG. 264) for preventing foreign matter such as wire from entering is molded. .
Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, the cover body 1301 is molded transparent as described above. Therefore, through the cover body 1301, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key 1311a of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key 1311a of the setting key ON, and an OFF state of the setting switch 1311a. And the wiring pattern transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are formed on the setting change board 1310Y so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted to the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, setting key O of setting switch 1311a) , The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the determination switch ON of the setting switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of OFF of the setting switch 1311a) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring with the wiring pattern is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the wiring with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also not to be close to each other. (Separated from each other).

[30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting display]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting switch button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case where the setting value of the game setting is changed will be briefly described, and the case where the current setting value is confirmed and displayed will be briefly described. Note that the setting key K1 is an important key that can be used to check the current set value in addition to changing the set value. Only a limited number possess.

When the setting of the set value is changed, the main frame is attached to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily). 4 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary to satisfy a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key 1311a is ON.
That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, and then sets the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j, and the setting key K1 is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform a first ON operation, thereby turning the setting switch 1311a ON, and then again. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a.

  Thus, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. (Set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the unlit state to the lit state.

  Next, when the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting change button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the value is incremented by one and reaches the maximum set value of 6, the control returns to the initial set value of 1, and is again incremented by one to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

  Next, when the set value is determined, the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (that is, the operation unit 1311j is at the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON). Second turn counterclockwise to turn it OFF to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a), and then turn it counterclockwise to another 60 °. Is turned on, the setting switch 1311a is turned on the enter key. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a.

  Next, the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting switch 1311a is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the enter key is turned ON (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a is turned off by rotating and turning off. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state, and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

  Next, the setting key K1 is removed from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the operation of changing the setting of the set value is completed.

In addition, when the confirmation display of the currently set values is performed, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily). The body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first operation. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation of.
In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred), Then, the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. By operating, the setting switch 1311a turns on the setting key.
The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

  The main control MPU 1310a stores the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. (Set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who checks the setting value presses the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value corresponding to this pressing operation is changed. Neither is changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  When the confirmation of the currently set value is completed, the setting switch 1311a is turned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder with the setting key ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). To turn it back, turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it off. The signal of the setting key OFF is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the set value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

  Finally, pull out the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, perform the operation of closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and complete the operation of confirming and displaying the currently set value. I do.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure (momentary power failure) occurs, as described above. After the power is restored after the instantaneous power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a. operation 1311j it is necessary that it is set the key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation in the clockwise direction.
As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the operation switch 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is inserted into the insertion port. There is a common requirement that the setting key K1 is inserted and the setting key ON operation is performed by turning the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

  Here, the setting value of the game setting will be described. The “setting value” is, in addition to the probability for determining whether a lottery is a big hit or the probability for determining whether a lottery is a lottery, Probability that can change the probability for lottery determination when moving to normal time (the above is also collectively referred to as “probability of winning a lottery”), the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (advantage) that is advantageous for the player (that is, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, a set value 1, a set value 2, a set value 3, a set value 4, a set value 5, and a set value 6 are prepared in advance as a set value of a plurality of stages, and the set value 1 is changed to the set value 6. The probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player toward the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X includes various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table in which a ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, the small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value that indicates that the small hit has been won, the ratio of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined A small hit symbol determination table, a normal shift determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the shift determination from the probable change to the normal time is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set values. Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, etc.). To or. Various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. Note that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and various tables used in various sort ratios are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. Others may have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Although the above-described set values are six set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 6, the set values may be smaller than this range, or may be set in a larger range. It may be something. For example, four set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integers) in a range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g displays the set value, and also checks the content of the RAM incorporated therein when the power is restored by the main control MPU 1310a to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main-control-side power-off process is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality (or trust) in the content stored in the RAM incorporated therein. Is not possible), and an error message to that effect is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, a brief description of the base monitor 1310h will be given. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 among the game balls fired in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls fired in the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out mouth 1008 are detected by one of the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b, and the detection signal is output from the panel. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected through the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays the result on the base monitor 1310h. Has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the counter switch 6011 counterclockwise to turn it OFF and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. An ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the setting switch 1311a was turned from the initial position, and the setting key 1311a was turned on. Setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in the range up to It may be. In this case, counterclockwise so as to return the setting switch 1311a 'from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting switch 1311a 'can be turned on by pressing the setting key 1311a' by turning it off by turning it 60 degrees, and a signal of this setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be described as "variation example (1) of determination key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, although not shown, a decision key button having a pressing operation section on the setting change board 1310Y May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button A foreign matter such as a wire is prevented from entering the corresponding opening and a “gap” formed in the opening so that the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X cannot be altered to prevent foreign matter from entering. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is attached to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal.) Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit as the determination key button may be employed. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. When the setting key board and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the setting key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed. The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should be close to each other ( (Separated from each other). When the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key 1311a turned on. The switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "Modification (2) of enter key").

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. An ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, the palm unit or the finger on the handle 182 in the handle unit 180 may be used. Game ball according to the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting the A detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop the ejection is branched at the payout control board 633 and is sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The presence / absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on these input signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or the finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or the finger is When it is not touched, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194, the determination key is turned ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor). Good) may be described as “Modified example (3) of determination key”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the counter switch 6011 counterclockwise to turn it OFF and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a firing timing control circuit provided in a firing control unit 633b of a payout control board 633 described later. The emission reference pulse is branched from the payout control board 633 through the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310X, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, but determines that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “Modification (4) of determination key”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The detection signal is provided from the distance measurement sensor to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board. In this case, the detection signal from the distance measurement sensor is branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the relay board, and it is determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal. May be. The distance measuring sensor transmits the light emitted from the light emitting unit through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects the light on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, whereby the operation of the player can be detected. In this case, when a detection signal from the distance measurement sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal. While it can be determined that there is an operation, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as “Modification (5) of determination key”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be set to a decision key ON, and a signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j of which the setting key 1311a has turned the setting key ON has The initial position which is the original position from the rotation position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the (turning position of the operation unit 1311j to be turned off), and the setting switch 1311a is determined. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j with the key ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by being turned off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The information to convey the decision key ON and OFF is serially As broadcast, the serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y. Alternatively, the setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X or on the payout control board 633. When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of the OFF states is to be transmitted (in some cases, the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit is described as “Modification (6) of determination key”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be set to a decision key ON, and a signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j of which the setting key 1311a has turned the setting key ON has The initial position which is the original position from the rotation position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting switch 1311 to the OFF position (the rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and the setting switch 1311a is determined. The operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by being turned off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The information that conveys the decision key ON and OFF is As the pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with the pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y. Alternatively, the setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X or on the payout control board 633. For example, the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information is to convey the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms if it is the information to convey the decision key ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a converts the input pulse signal into a setting key ON, a decision key ON, And OFF can be determined (in some cases, the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is referred to as "variation example (7) of determination key").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be set to a decision key ON, and a signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j of which the setting key 1311a has turned the setting key ON has The initial position which is the original position from the rotation position (that is, the setting switch 1311a The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the OFF position (the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j to be turned OFF), and the setting switch 1311a is determined. The operation unit 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by being turned off, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Signal voltage level, Enter key ON signal voltage level And the voltage level of the OFF signal between the boards ranging from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) by the main control. By providing a comparator circuit on the substrate 1310X and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON / OFF the signal of the setting key ON, ON / OFF of the signal of the determination key ON, and The ON / OFF of the OFF signal may be determined. Thereby, security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the counter switch 6011 counterclockwise to turn it OFF and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Alternatively, the payout control board 633 may be provided with an enter key button having a pressing operation unit. Good. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button corresponds to the pressing operation unit. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening so that wires and the like cannot enter the “gap” formed in the opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is provided at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the error release switch 633d so that the enter key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal.) Also, a button with a cover that covers one of the pressing operation parts of the determination key button and the error releasing switch 633d so that the setting key button and the error releasing switch 633d are not confused. , The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the error canceling switch 633d. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit as the determination key button may be employed. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the enter key button and the error release switch 633d, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are routed. The dispensing control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the dispensing control board 633 to the terminal of the connector (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the determination key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch 633d are also routed so as not to be close to each other. (Separated). When the payout control board 633 is provided with an enter key button, the setting switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "variation (9) of the enter key").

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633 was used. Are branched at the payout control board 633, and are transferred to the main control board 131 via the payout control board 633. Is input to X of the main control MPU1310a, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. The error release switch 633d is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (power supply of various control boards). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation section of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the main control MPU 1310a receives the signal from the error release switch 633d. When the pressing operation section of the error release switch 633d is not operated based on the signal, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (10) of determination key”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633 was used. The dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633 processes the A command is created by monitoring in a port input process of the main control board 1310X, and a command created in a command transmission process of a payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. The control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON. The error release switch 633d is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, as described above, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (power supply of various control boards). When the pachinko machine 1 does not have an error, the pressing operation of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later and that fact. When a command to be transmitted is received, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, but on the basis of a signal from the error release switch 633d, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated, and a command to that effect is given. Is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as “variation example (11) of determination key”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position that is the original position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned ON (that is, the setting switch 1311a is reset). The operation switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the (rotational position of the operation unit 1311j to be turned off) and turned OFF, and further rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform the second ON operation. Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of the RAM clear switch 1310f Is provided on the payout control board 633, and the RAM clear switch 13 The operation signal from 0f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, is branched at the payout control board 633, is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a May be determined based on an operation signal input by the user. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. In That. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The same foreign substance intrusion prevention unit 1301v as the foreign substance intrusion prevention unit 1301v is used to prevent the wire and the like from entering the “gap” formed in the part and the opening corresponding thereto to modify the dispensing control board 633. A part is formed.

  Note that the position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. The names of the buttons are printed on the cover of the payout control board 633 at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d, respectively, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused. A seal is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of the seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d so as not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d (the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit). The cover needs to be opened in order to perform the operation.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, and the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch 633d. Alternatively, a switch having a different shape of the pressing operation unit may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch 633d, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error canceling switch 633d are changed. The dispensing control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the dispensing control board 633 to the connector terminal (the main control board 1310X connector terminal) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d are transmitted should be close to each other. (Separated from each other). When the payout control board 633 is provided with the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The setting switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “Modification (12) of determination key”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position that is the original position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned ON (that is, the setting switch 1311a is reset). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and returning it to a second ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the setting position (the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to be turned OFF). Can be set to the decision key ON, and the signal of the decision key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of the RAM clear switch 1310f Is provided on the payout control board 633, and the RAM clear switch 13 The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from 0f in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and generates a command of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command created in the transmission processing may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received the command may determine whether the enter key is ON. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. Is determined by the dispensing control MPU 633aa to be operated, and the determination key ON can be determined when a command notifying the fact is received, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine RAM clear switch 1310f depressing operation portion is unmanipulated the payout control MPU633aa of based on et operation signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included). In some cases).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the left-out sensor 1008a and the right-out sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key. To the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a) from the position, the turning operation is performed by turning 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, and the turning operation is further performed 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. By performing the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the The right and left mouth sensor 1008b is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input from the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b. May be determined based on the detection signal. As described above, the game balls fired in the game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5 are collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out mouth 1008 is detected by one of the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a performs a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port Based on the detection signal from one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the out port 1008 has collected the game ball, while the door frame 3 is When it is not opened (that is, closed) and / or when the out port 1008 does not collect the game ball based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b It can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the mode of the outlet switch ( (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the left-out sensor 1008a and the right-out sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key. To the original position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j for turning off the setting switch 1311a), and then turn it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off and then turn it counterclockwise by 60 degrees. By performing the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signal from the right mouth sensor 1008b in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and generates a command when the payout control unit power-on described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command may determine whether the determination key is ON. As described above, the game balls fired in the game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5 are collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out mouth 1008 is detected by one of the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects a game ball through the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b in a frame command receiving process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the determination key is ON when receiving the command notifying that, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball is not collected by the out port 1008, and When a command notifying the fact is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (setting mode 2 of the outlet switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) Is sometimes described as “Modification (15) of determination key”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 Is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and the payout control The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is branched via the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signal from the tongue detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 in a port input process of a payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. Is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command determines whether or not the decision key is ON. It may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting of the dispensing unit (setting (The mode of the switch 1311a 'may be included.) May be referred to as a "decision key modification (16)."

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is configured to output the ON signal based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b. When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the determination key is ON. , It can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting of the body frame opening switch). (A mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.) In some cases, this is described as "Modified example (17) of determination key." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn the determination key ON. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again, pull out the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the determination key is ON. It can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the state of the door frame opening switch). (A mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.) In some cases, this is described as "Modified example (17) of determination key." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, pull out the setting key from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (ie, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on. Position) by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the position, and then turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise, and then performing the second ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. Although the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X. (In some cases, the mode of the setting switch is described as “Modification of determination key (18)” .

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (ie, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on. Position) by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the position, and then turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise, and then performing the second ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Is set to the initial position from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j whose setting key is turned ON. The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned to the OFF position, and the OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, so that the main control MPU 1310a turns OFF. When a signal is input, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while when an OFF signal is not input, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (setting mode 2 ( (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may also be included.).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the counter switch 6011 counterclockwise to turn it OFF and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. Although an ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, instead of this, the main control board 1310X may be provided with a decision key button having a pressing operation section. Good. In this case, the pressing operation part of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation part of the determination key button and the Between the corresponding opening and the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion, so that wires and the like cannot enter the “gap” formed in the main control board 1310X and be modified. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (see FIG. 264) is formed. When the pressing operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation part of the determination key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the pressing operation part of the determination key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a label on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers either one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be employed, or another type of switch having no pressing operation unit may be employed as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a sliding unit, a rotary switch having a rotating operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Switches can be mentioned. If the main control board 1310X is provided with the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310X is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be turned only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a 'may be used (the mode 2 of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "variation (20) of the enter key").

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the ON signal is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined in this manner. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). If the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Area except for the specific area in the entire area of). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the RAM clear switch mode 3). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.) Is sometimes referred to as a "decision key modification (21)." Note that the period during which the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of an error release switch 633d to be described later, the error release switch 633d is not required on the payout control board 633 because it is input to the payout control MPU 633aa.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. An ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a gate sensor 2401 of the gate unit 2003 provided on the game board 5 and various winnings Various sensors of the mouth (for example, the second starting port sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor) 2406, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002), and a main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out opening left sensor 1008a and the out opening right sensor 1008b of the out opening 1008 are input is based on these detection signals. The presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting of various sensors and the like). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 or various winnings in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or to send the game ball B to the out mouth 1008.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Drive control of the movable body (accessory) to control the optical sensor (photo sensor and When determining the original position, operating position, and the like of the movable body (accessory) based on a detection signal from a distance sensor or the like, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. May be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the optical switch sensor of the optical accessory sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included) may be described as a "decision key (23)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the enter key is turned ON, and the optical sensor moves the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a to which the signal is input is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. The presence or absence of the ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting of the magnetic sensor (The mode of the switch 1311a 'may be included.) May be described as a "decision key modification (24)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the gaming board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Is added to the game board 5 to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a defined and formed in the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor 3006 (see FIGS. 241, 242, and 245) for detecting an illegal act of entering a seed winning opening or a gate (gate), the main control MPU 1310 a transmits the vibration sensor 3006 from the vibration sensor 3006. The presence / absence of a fraudulent act may be determined based on the detection signal, and the presence / absence of a determination key ON may be determined based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key. (The mode of the switch 1311a 'may be included.) May be referred to as a "decision key modification (25)." In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The misbehavior of illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing various sensors of the mouth and various sensors provided in the payout device 580 to malfunction is described. When the radio wave sensor to be notified is provided in the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of the fraud based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor and determines based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting the mode of the radio wave sensor (setting (The mode of the switch 1311a 'may be included.). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting key turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j with the setting switch 1311a turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the set key 1311a by turning the counter switch 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Detection signal from detection sensor 381, rotation direction of rotation operation unit 302 of effect operation button unit 360 Detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 to be detected are input to the peripheral control board 1510, and are branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a 'may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (setting of the production operation button unit). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a 'may be included.) Is sometimes referred to as a "decision key modification (27)."

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are accommodated in the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 including the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. 1310Y may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are caulked with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism 1320z, and includes a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism 1320z, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Therefore, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism 1320z. That is, unless the sealing mechanism 1320z is destroyed, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can be applied to a structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, The setting change board 1310Y cannot be modified by entering a wire or the like from a “gap” formed in the front surface of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation unit of the enter key button. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (see FIG. 265) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation unit. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An open / close switch for a setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover open / close switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. May be configured. Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening / closing switch, the fact that the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (the setting change board box The mode may be described as “decision key modification (28)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X. In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is set. A wiring pattern in which an ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a signal of an ON key of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a signal from the setting switch button 1311b Are formed on the setting change board 1310Y so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the main control board 1310X) Connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN) Also in the main control board 1310X, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a, and a signal for a determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a). The wiring pattern to be transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are transmitted should be kept away from each other (separate from each other). ), But one of a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a and a wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a. It is separate from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y. May be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y (connecting between boards); The other connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310X may be electrically connected via a harness. Modification (29) of the above).

  In addition, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an aspect of appropriately selecting and combining may be adopted (the variation of the selection combination in the modification example is referred to as “the modification example (30) of the determination key. ").

[30-2. Other forms of main control unit]
[30-1-2. In the main control unit 1310 described in [Main Control Unit], the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separate bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “split board structure”), but both control boards 1310X and 1310Y are one. It may be formed of a single substrate (hereinafter, referred to as “single substrate structure”).
The main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 has a main control unit 1310 having a single board structure having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of a game, and is attached to the board holder 1200 by accommodating the main control unit 1310. A main control board box 1320 serving as a housing.
The components, members, and the like provided in the main control unit 1310 having the single-substrate structure are provided on the main control substrate 1310X and the setting change substrate 1310Y having the split-substrate structure, except for the structural features described below. And the functions and operation methods are the same. Therefore, the functions and operation methods of each element are mainly described in [30-1. Main control unit (2)] to [30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting display].
Conversely, the structural features of the components described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having the divided board structure including the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y described above.

[30-2-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, the main control board box 1320 is generally constituted by a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, and is provided in an internal space 1320s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. The main controller 1310 is accommodated.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate), so that the state of the front side and the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration is performed, Can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320).

[30-2-2. Main control section]
The main control unit 1310 has a main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game balls B in the divided board structure, and a game setting regarding a probability of a lottery and a distribution rate to an area that is advantageous for the player. For example, electronic components (such as the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g, or the resistor 1310r) provided on each of the setting change boards 1310Y which can set the setting value to one of a plurality of set values, the setting switch 1311a , A circuit component including a setting switching button 1311b and the like are appropriately arranged on a single board (hereinafter, also referred to as a “printed board”) 1310t.
The main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 254 for convenience of description, but actually the female control unit is provided at an intermediate position between the four corners and the long side of the cover body 1301. It is screwed to the screw cylinder 1301n with a screw (not shown).

[30-2-2-1. Arrangement of circuit components]
Here, the arrangement of circuit components on the printed circuit board 1310t will be described.
As shown in FIG. 254, the printed circuit board 1310t has a substantially rectangular shape, and a main control MPU 1310a as an electronic component is mounted substantially at the center thereof, and a setting switch 1311a is mounted at a corner (details of mounting of the setting switch 1311a). Are described later.) Further, other electronic components such as an IC 1310i, a resistor 1310t, and a capacitor, and other circuit components are arranged in the whole area. The setting switch 1311a attached to the printed circuit board 1310t has a top fitted into an opening 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 as described later, and faces the outside from the opening 1301a in this state.

  As is well known, the main control MPU 1310a includes a plate-shaped resin package 1310ab, and a plurality of pins 1310ap provided in rows on both front and rear surfaces of a lower edge of the package 1310ab (hereinafter, a plurality of pins 1310ap arranged in a row). Are collectively referred to as a “pin group”). The main control MPU 1310a is disposed substantially at the center of the printed circuit board 1310t in a state where the rows of the pins are oriented substantially parallel to the longitudinal sides of the printed circuit board 1310t, and the front and rear pins at that position are connected to the printed circuit board 1310t. Soldered to.

  In addition, [30-1-2-3. Setting Switch, Setting Switching Button, Setting Display], the ON / OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a and the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b are input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a Is controlled to change the set value of the game setting. Therefore, by accessing a specific pin 1310aq connected to the setting switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b in the pin group of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to change the setting value of the game setting from outside, and In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component that can be a target of unauthorized manipulation, and a specific pin 1310ap of a pin group is a specific pin 1310aq that can be a target of unauthorized manipulation.

[30-2-3. Setting switch]
As shown in FIG. 254, FIG. 255, and FIG. 256, the setting switch 1311a has a substantially cubic mounting portion 1311d mounted on the board of the main control portion 1310, and a circle that can inscribe the square top of the mounting portion 1311d. A setting key cylinder 1311e having a smaller diameter and a cylinder shape smaller than the height of the mounting portion 1311d, and a step in which an upper portion (setting key cylinder 1311e) is superimposed on a lower portion (mounting portion 1311d) in appearance. It has a stacking form.

[30-2-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly composed of a resin main body 1311f having an electric function part therein, and a mounting bracket 1311g for covering the upper surface and side surfaces of the resin main body 1311f. An insertion piece 1311h projecting from the bottom of 1311g is inserted into the board of the main control unit 1310 and fixedly attached to the circuit.
The mounting bracket 1311g is provided with a notch 1311i at substantially the center of the four sides of the top, so that the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the setting key cylinder 1311e and the center of each side is uneven due to the notch 1311i. It has become.

[30-2-3-2. Setting key cylinder]
The setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a has an operation section 1311j at the top, and an insertion port for inserting the setting key K1 into the operation section 1311j is opened. By inserting the key body K10 of the appropriate setting key K1 into the insertion slot of the operation unit 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be confirmed as described above.

[30-2-4. Main control board box cover and setting switch]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 255, the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is provided with an opening 1301h for exposing the operation unit 1311j of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to the outside. A receiving cylinder portion 1301i protrudes toward the internal space 1320s so as to surround the opening 1301h.
The inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e so that the setting key cylinder 1311e can be easily inserted and removed when the main control portion 1310 is attached to and detached from the cover body 1301 (for example, (Approximately 7% to 8% in design dimensions), and therefore, fits loosely with the set key cylinder 1311e by the gap t1 shown in the enlarged view of FIG.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that the position of the operation unit 1311j at the top is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body 1301 in the state of FIGS. 255 and 256 in which the setting key cylinder 1311e is fitted in the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. The operation section 1311j and the opening 1301h of the cover body 1301 form a concave depression 1301k.

FIG. 259 shows another form of the dent 1301k. The dent 1301k is formed with an inclined tapered surface 1301p descending toward the center. A part of the periphery of the setting switch 1311a is conspicuously visible by reflection of the indoor illumination by the tapered surface 1301p of the recess 1301k, so that it can be intuitively understood. Therefore, the setting switch 1311a of the main control board box 1320 can be arranged on the hinge side of a door frame or the like that is hard to see with common sense and is easily shunned. If it is not, fraud can not be performed, and the crime prevention performance can be improved. In this case, if the main control unit 1310 has a divided board structure divided into a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y, the setting change board 1310Y is arranged at a position advantageous for security as described above, and the tapered surface of the recess 1301k is provided. The above-mentioned effect by 1301p can be further exerted.
The size and inclination angle of the tapered surface 1301p in the radial direction are arbitrary, but in general, a molded product made of a transparent synthetic resin has a reduced visibility of a bent portion, making it difficult to find unauthorized manipulation of a circuit component thereunder. For this reason, for example, a check part (part number) of another circuit component (electronic component) itself or the circuit component (electronic component) disposed near the setting switch 1311a and below the tapered surface 1301p is required. It is conceivable that the required visibility is ensured by making the tapered surface 1301p larger than the size of the display portion (e.g., etc.). Further, the size of the tapered surface 1301p may be associated with the degree of inclination of the tapered surface 1301p, for example, the inclination angle may be reduced in order to increase the size of the tapered surface 1301p.
FIG. 260 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which an inner flange piece 1301q is provided in the opening 1301h to further bend the entry path of the foreign matter. Thereby, the difficulty of inserting the foreign matter and the subsequent operation can be remarkably increased, so that the security performance against the foreign matter can be further improved. In addition, although the tapered surface 1301p is formed together with the inner flange piece 1301q in the recess 1301k in FIG. 260, the inner flange piece 1301q may be provided in the recess 1301k without the tapered surface 1301p as shown in FIGS. Good.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the interval t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the cylinder receiving portion 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is determined by the distance between the cylinder receiving portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e. The length of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set so as to be equal to or less than the gap t1. As described above, the axial gap t1 between the cylinder receiving portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e in the radial direction and the axial interval t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the cylinder receiving portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are defined as t1 ≧ t2. By doing so, fraudulent insertion of foreign matter such as wire through the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e can be effectively prevented.
This is because the gap t1 in the radial direction between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is usually set to a minimum width (clearance) required for passing the setting key cylinder 1311e through the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Since the foreign matter passing therethrough is limited to an extremely thin one, even if such a thin foreign matter passes through the gap t1, the foreign matter changes its direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion, and in that state, the part with the interval t2 smaller than the gap t1 It is not easy to break through, and even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control foreign matter thereafter toward a target point (for example, the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a as the specific electronic component described above). It is.

In particular, in the embodiment, the lower mounting portion 1311d is higher in the internal space 1320s than the upper setting key cylinder 1311e, and thus the mounting portion of the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting switch 1311a. The position of the axial distance t2 from the top of 1311d is relatively high in the internal space 1320s. Therefore, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 258, for example, the wrongdoer draws out the foreign matter W that has broken through the narrow gap t1 and the narrow interval t2 into the internal space 1320s, and causes the tip thereof to abut on the printed circuit board 1310t by bending due to its own weight. It is necessary to perform an operation of switching the direction of the tip in the contact state to the intended direction, but such a foreign matter W that is bent and has a long length drooping by its own weight and the force is not transmitted well to the tip. Is difficult to perform.
257 and 258. Since the foreign matter W hanging down from a high place on the side surface of the setting switch 1311a is unlikely to wrap around to the vicinity (foot) of the setting switch 1311a, the foreign matter W near such setting switch 1311a is shown in FIGS. The specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a (specific electronic component) may be arranged as described above. By setting the unauthorized entry guard of the foreign matter W at a high place in the internal space 1320s in this manner, the important part of the main control MPU can be arranged near the unauthorized entry guard, so that the circuit components The degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased.

Meanwhile, the main control unit 1310, which is a support base for the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-shaped printed circuit board, and can be bent when the setting switch 1311a is pressed. Therefore, by strongly pushing the setting switch 1311a to bend the main controller 1310, the interval t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is forcibly expanded. In such a case, there is a possibility that a linear foreign matter W breaks through as shown by an imaginary line in FIG.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is attached to the vicinity (corner) of the main control unit 1310 in the vicinity of the above-mentioned screw stop (joining portion), thereby suppressing the bending of the main control unit 1310 and reducing the interval t2. It is not possible to perform forcible expansion. In addition, suppressing the deflection of the main control unit 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is also effective in preventing the main control unit 1310 from cracking when used for a long time.

  Also, as described above, the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is uneven on each side due to the notch 1311i due to the work of the mounting bracket 1311g, but the receiving cylinder is engaged with the unevenness of the mounting portion 1311d. The cylindrical end 1301z of the portion 1301i is also uneven, and more specifically, by projecting a convex portion 1301m at the cylindrical end 1301z corresponding to the cutout 1311i of the mounting portion 1311d, the relationship of t1 ≧ t2 as a whole is obtained. Is kept.

  As described above, the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e, and the interval t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are t1 ≧ t2. Alternatively, the configuration in which the interval t2 is located at a higher position in the internal space 1320s and the configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the depression 1301k of the opening 1301h can be realized by using one of the foreign matter intrusion prevention portions 1301v that prevent foreign matter such as wire from entering. Therefore, the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v is provided with a stepped portion in which an upper pressing portion 1311p such as a setting switch button 1311b or a RAM clear switch 1310f is protruded from a lower mounting portion. The push button type switch member or the slide type switch member in the form of a stack is also different from that shown in FIG. The cylindrical body 1301c like intrusion preventing portion 1301v can be applied to a low cost without separately added.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the cylindrical end 1301z of the cylindrical receiving portion 1301i is formed such that the thickness of the convex portion 1301m is smaller than the thickness of the cylindrical receiving portion 1301i, and the interval between the convex portions 1301m facing each other is reduced. It is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Further, a taper 1301j is provided at the boundary between the inner surface of the convex portion 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 1301i. The convex portion 1301m and the taper 1301j capture and guide the top of the setting key cylinder 1311e. , Can be smoothly fitted to the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set to a minimum necessary for security. Therefore, it is difficult to insert the setting key cylinder 1311e directly into the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Is set wider than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, workability can be remarkably improved. Moreover, in the configuration in which the convex portion 1301m is used as an introduction guide for the setting key cylinder 1311e, the fitting of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is more difficult than the case where the inner periphery of the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is tapered. Since the length can be increased, security performance against foreign object insertion can be enhanced.
In the embodiment, the shape of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is made cylindrical in accordance with the setting key cylinder 1311e, but it may be made in a rectangular cylindrical shape in accordance with the top shape of the square mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. In this case, the inner diameter of the rectangular tube is made smaller than the top contour of the mounting portion 1311d, and a space t2 is formed between the tube end 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. It is good to keep it.

[30-2-5. Main control unit and back cover of main frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as described above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above, and the rear surface of the main control unit 1300 is, as shown in FIG. The back cover 640 covers the game board 5 together. In the embodiment, the back cover 640 of the main body 4 covers the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300, so that the opening 1301h does not need to be provided with a security cover. To prevent unauthorized access. This eliminates the need for an extra cover to protrude through the opening 1301h, thereby making it easier to keep the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the specified range without pressing other elements.
Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the imaginary line enclosed in FIG. 255, a bulging portion 640b that can fit (free-fit) into the depression 1301k of the cover body 1301 may be provided on the inner surface of the back cover 640. . By doing so, when the dent 1301k of the cover body 1301 does not match with the bulge 640b of the back cover 640, the bulge 640b of the back cover 640 interferes and does not close normally, so that it is possible to detect illegally modified products. Insufficient installation of main control unit 1300 can be prevented.
In the embodiment, the center of rotation of the back cover 640 is provided on the side opposite to the center of rotation of the main body frame 4. May be provided on the same side as. Then, the back cover 640 can be opened without rotating the main body frame 4 greatly, and in this state, the game setting value of the control unit 1300 can be changed. Can be up.

[30-3. Security structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention includes game settings related to the player's interest as a plurality of set values, and the set values are used as the setting switch 1311a, the setting switch button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, and the like. , And a security structure is provided to prevent such illegal setting of game settings. Hereinafter, a specific example of the security structure will be described.

[30-3-1. Security structure of main control unit (1)]
As described above, in the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the arrangement of the opening 1301h through which the setting switch 1311a passes and the main control MPU 1310a serving as the specific electronic component T is arranged in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (the dashed line in FIG. 254). L2), a virtual straight line L1 connecting the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h intersects obliquely.
In the main control unit 1300, a measure against foreign matter such as the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v of the embodiment is not provided between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a as a circuit component, and as a result, the opening 1301h Even if wire-like foreign matter is inserted into the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 from the gap between the setting switch 1311a and it can reach the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, the foreign matter and the specific pin 1310aq are electrically connected. Since it is difficult to apply a contact load necessary for stable connection, electrical access to the main control MPU 1310a cannot be performed after all. Therefore, impropriety due to foreign matter can be prevented.
Also, if the opening 1301h is on an extension of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq in the row direction (see the dashed line L2 in FIG. 254), that is, the dashed line L2 is connected to the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h. When the straight line L1 is made to overlap, it is possible to protect the specific pin 1310aq by using the other pin 1310ap as a shield, and therefore, it is possible to prevent illegality due to foreign matter.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the substantially center of the rectangular printed circuit board 1310t such that the long side of the substantially rectangular printed circuit board 1310t and the row direction of the pin group are substantially parallel to each other as in the embodiment, and the opening 1301h, That is, if the setting switch 1311a is disposed on the short side of the printed circuit board 1310t, more preferably on the corner, the distance between the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h is increased, and the angle of the straight line L1 connecting the two is made acute. It is possible to effectively prevent fraud by foreign matter.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a may arrange the specific pin 1310aq on the opposite side of the opening 1301h with the package 1310ab interposed therebetween. In this case, since the specific pin 1310aq is located on the rear side of the package 1310ab of the main control MPU 1310a when viewed from the opening 1310h, even if a foreign object is inserted from a gap between the opening 1301h and the circuit component, the foreign object is specified. It is substantially difficult to make contact with the pin 1310aq, and thus fraud by foreign matter can be prevented.

[30-3-2. Security structure of main control unit (2)]
The main control unit 1300 of the embodiment is a specific electronic component T that the main control MPU 1310a can be a target of unauthorized manipulation. However, an input circuit is actually formed by an electronic component such as a resistor between the main control MPU 1310a and the setting switch 1311a. In such a case, the electronic components forming the input circuit also correspond to the specific electronic components T that can be a target of unauthorized manipulation.
For this reason, in the embodiment, as the security structure (2) of the main control unit 1300, the setting switch button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, the resistance 1310r, and the like are provided between the circuit component corresponding to the opening 1301h and the specific electronic component T. Circuit components other than the electronic components are arranged as obstacles 1310s in a barricade shape, so that foreign substances can be prevented from reaching the specific electronic component T. Therefore, it is possible to prevent impropriety due to a foreign object aimed at the specific electronic component T.
This security structure (2) can obtain a higher security effect when used in combination with the security structure (1).
More specifically, by arranging circuit components in a barricade manner between the main control MPU 1310a of the security structure (1) and the opening 1301h to form the obstacle 1310s, it is possible to prevent fraud by foreign substances more effectively. Can be.
For example, like a setting switch 1311a and a main control MPU 1310a shown by a solid line in FIG. Deploy. In this case, the connector SMCN and MSCN can function as a failure unit 1310s against foreign matter inserted from the setting switch 1311a side toward the main control MPU 1310a, and even if the failure unit 1310s is broken through, The instability over the unit 1310s and the instability of obliquely contacting the main control MPU 1310a are combined to make it very difficult for fraud by foreign matter. This effect is the same when the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG.
Further, the setting switch 1311a is set to the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 250 (in FIG. 250, the setting switch 1311a is drawn sideways, but the description here is based on the assumption that the setting switch 1311a is in the same direction as the solid line setting switch 1311a). ), The main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position of the imaginary line so that the setting display 1310g is sandwiched between the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the setting display 1310g can be made to function as an obstruction 1310s for a foreign object inserted from the imaginary line setting switch 1311a side to the main control MPU 1310a of the imaginary line. Even if the vehicle breaks through, the instability over the obstacle 1310s and the instability of obliquely contacting the main control MPU 1310a are combined to make it extremely difficult for fraud by foreign matter.

  The obstacle 1310s of the security structure (2) does not necessarily have to be a circuit component. For example, the main control unit 1310 has the above-described divided board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated. A partition wall (a structure in which a partition wall 1302b in FIG. 266 is integrally formed on the cover body 1301 side) that partitions the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y is provided inside the cover body 1301, and the partition wall is used as an obstacle 1310s. Is also good. In this case, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be connected by the connectors SMCN and MSCN as described above, but each of them is provided with a connector having a connection structure to be inserted and removed in a direction perpendicular to the board surface. Should be connected by a harness. Foreign matter that moves along the printed circuit board 1310t into the connector having such a coupling structure cannot enter the connector due to a difference in the traveling direction. Therefore, even if the connector is a specific electronic component connected to the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, an illegal operation cannot be performed. .

  The security structures (1) and (2) of the main control unit 1300 have been described above. Of course, the security structure (1) and (2) are provided with the clearance t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e described above. And the interval t2 between the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is t1 ≧ t2, or the interval t2 is located at a higher position in the internal space 1320s. Further, a high security effect can be obtained by combining a configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the depression 1301k of the opening 1301h.

[30-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (A)]
The first security structure (A) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is, as described above with reference to the embodiment of FIGS. It is configured with a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion portion on the front end surface portion) for turning on the operation unit by the setting key K1. Thus, the setting value of the game setting by the change operation means can be changed only by a specific person including the store manager of the game hall having the setting key K1.

  The change operation means is used to change a set value. In the embodiment, the change operation means includes a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switch button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g. It is a specific operation unit provided in the control unit 1310 and controls the start of setting change, and a separate operation unit provided in the main control unit 1310 to perform a setting operation other than the start of setting change. . No security measures other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v for preventing the invasion of foreign matter such as wires are taken for this separate operation unit. Therefore, an external input operation (press operation of the setting switching button 1311b) is performed. The pressing operation of the unit 1311p) can be performed by anyone other than a specific person, but the “predetermined setting value change permission condition” that the setting key 131a serving as the specific operation unit is turned on by the setting key K1 is satisfied. Since the input in a state where the input is not performed is invalid in control, there is almost no problem in crime prevention.

  Note that the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit of the change operation unit, has an axis directed in a direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 as shown in FIG. Although the tip portion protrudes from the outer surface of the cover body 1301, the protrusion may obstruct the depth depending on the depth of the island facilities in the game hall, and may even obstruct storage.

  In such a case, as shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 250 and B, the axis of the change operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having a key insertion portion) operated by the setting key K1 is set to the board of the main control unit 1310. For example, the main control board box 1320 may be set so that the front end face (key insertion face) faces the side face of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the key insertion portion is changed to protrude from the left end (hinge portion side) of the board surface of the main control portion 1310 in front view (to protrude from the board end), and the change operation means is changed to the board surface of the main control portion 1310. A semi-circular cutout formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 as a housing so as to fit in the direction substantially parallel to the main switch and the setting switch 1311a; Both the cutout formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320 and the cutout formed in the cover 1301 can accommodate the protruding portion of the change operation means with the key insertion portion exposed to the outside. In projecting the key insertion portion from the left end of the board surface of the main control portion 1310 when viewed from the front, the operation portion provided with the key insertion portion may be substantially the same surface as the side portion of the main control board box 1320, The surface on which the key insertion portion is provided may be made to protrude from the side surface of the main control board box 1320, but it is preferable to form the recess 1301k as described above.

  As a result, the protrusion of the change operation means on the rear side of the main control board box 1320 (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) can be almost eliminated or reduced. Further, when the work of arranging the board of the main control unit 1310 on the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is performed, the key insertion part protruding from the end of the board is accommodated in the notch so that Positioning (positioning) of the substrate by the control unit 1310 is facilitated, and the burden of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[30-3-4. Security structure of change operation means (B)]
As shown in FIGS. 261 to 266, a second security structure (B) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means includes a change suppression means 1312 that covers at least a part of the change operation means, A first state holding unit (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock unit) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppression unit 1312.

  The change operation means of the security structure (B) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, as in the security structure (A), and is provided in the main control unit 1310. The change operation means provided are a setting switch 1311a (hereinafter, also referred to as a “specific operation unit 1311a”) and a setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter, “another operation”) except for a power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c. And a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value. In this crime prevention structure (B), the setting switch 1311a as the specific operation unit and the setting switch button 1311b as the different operation unit are both small push button switches that can be turned on and off by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p. It does not have a security structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents foreign matter such as wire from entering.

The change suppression means 1312 of the security structure (B) covers at least a part of the change operation means to make the change operation of the game setting difficult, and a specific configuration will be described later. A first state in which the operation of changing the game setting is made difficult by covering the first section, and a second state in which the operation of changing the game setting is made possible by exposing the change operation means covered in the first state. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that not only the case where the change operation means is composed of a plurality of elements but also one element which is involved in a change operation essential for game setting among the plurality of elements may be used. I do. It also means that even if one element of the change operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gaps if it is difficult to change the game settings. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-described numerical and qualitative ones.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the security structure (B) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding), although the specific configuration will be described later. Is released by the release operation, and the change suppression unit 1312 is switched between the change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state.

[30-3-4-1. Change suppression unit and lock unit (first state holding unit)]
The change prevention unit 1312 and the lock unit (first state holding unit) 1313 of the security structure (B) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 261 has a flat plate shape that covers almost one half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 (that is, a part of the container). The specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a) and another operation unit 1311b (setting switching button 1311b) of the provided change operation means, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be collectively covered. The change suppressing means 1312 is rotatable in the form of a one-sided door by pivotally attaching one end to the bearing 1301a of the cover body 1301, and as shown by a solid line in FIG. And a second state in which the game setting changing operation is difficult by changing the game setting by exposing the specific operation unit 1311a and the like as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. (Rotation).

On the other hand, a lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. 261 is a cylinder lock 1313 a integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and a rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313 a. By engaging a lock member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with a lock receiving member 1301b projecting from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the first state change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the cover body 1301 are changed. To lock the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a using the unlock key K2, so that the lock member 1301b of the cover body 1301 moves from the lock receiving member 1301b to the lock member. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312 (D) is released by a specific release operation of removing 1313c to enable the change to the second state, and further, the state is changed from the second state to the first state. The changed change suppressing means 1312 (D) can be locked (held) by the unlock key K2.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having the change suppression means 1312 (D) and the security structure (B) of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) shown in FIG. Since the change can be performed only by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the change operation means does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, there is almost no security problem as in the security structure (A). .

  The change suppressing unit 1312 (D) is made of a synthetic resin having transparency (for example, transparency), and does not hinder the visibility of the change operation unit even if the change operation unit is covered in the first state. Further, each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppression means 1312 (D) is provided with a management number or a predetermined description at a position where they do not overlap each other when the change suppression means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301. An information display unit 1314 in which a sentence is described is provided. This makes it easy to find replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppression means 1312 (D) (collection of parts having good states) performed for the purpose of concealing unauthorized use, and furthermore, change operation means, particularly a specific operation unit. It is possible to easily visually confirm unauthorized manipulation of the 1311a.

  Further, the change suppressing unit 1312 (D) is made to have a size and a shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, but, for example, the change suppressing unit 1312 (D) is made to have a size and a shape that can entirely cover the main control unit 1300. In addition, the bearing 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on a fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the entire main control unit 1300 can be improved.

  The security performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is determined by providing the rotation center (bearing part 1301 a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. Even if the holding means 1313 (D) is destroyed, further security is possible. That is, as shown by the imaginary line in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) becomes a partition in an open state and forms a partition near the left side of the change operation means (specific operation part 1311a, another operation part 1311b). It is configured to play a role of guarding in a shape, and the act of illegally performing a change operation on the change operation means from the free end side of the main body frame 4 is changed to the change suppression means 1312 (D) opened. It can be blocked by itself. That is, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this manner, the change operating means can be protected in the first state, and of course, in the second state. As a result, an unauthorized change operation on the change operation means can be prevented. In order to maximize the effect, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) shown in FIG. 261 has a length (distance) protruding rearward from the pachinko machine 1 from the bearing 1301 a when the pachinko machine 1 is opened. ) Is larger than the length (distance) from the bearing unit 1301a to the position where the change operation unit (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is arranged, and the change suppression unit 1312 ( The change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is arranged rightward of D). Also, the position where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is arranged is located near the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation The access from above and below the portion 1311b) is made difficult, and the rotation of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is stopped (fixed) in a state of standing in a screen-like manner. In addition, although security performance can be improved by having some of these components, it is most preferable to satisfy all of them.

  Conversely, the change suppression unit 1312 (D) may be made smaller so that only the specific operation unit 1311a is covered, and another operation unit 1311b may not be covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing the protection target of the change operation means including a plurality of elements (specific operation unit and another operation unit) to those having high security importance, those having low security importance are opened to the outside. By doing so, the workability of setting changes can be improved.

  In addition, the axis of the change operation means described in the security structure (A) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea described above can be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) and the like.

Next, the change suppressing unit 1312 (E) in FIG. 262 is almost the same as the change suppressing unit 1312 (D) in FIG. 261, and thus the detailed description is omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) in FIG. 262 is provided with a perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppression means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301 side. A padlock 1313d that couples the protruding perforated lock receiving member 1316 with an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c. By engaging both perforated lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c, The first state change suppressing unit 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change suppressing unit 1312 (E) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) changes the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction by using the unlocking key K2, and thus the opening of the change suppressing means 1312 (E). The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312 (E) is released by a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the lock receiving member 1316 of the lock receiving member 1315 and the perforated lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301. The second state can be changed, and the change suppressing means 1312 (E) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the padlock 1313d.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d. Therefore, in the unlocked state, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) is detached from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301. . Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is detached from the cover body 1301 (container) in the unlocked state by being connected to the cover body 1301 by, for example, a wire-shaped or chain-shaped support portion 1317. Not to be. Accordingly, there is no danger that the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) will fall into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the removed lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) will not occur. You can avoid wasting time losing the place where you put it and searching for it at the lock stage.

  Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) in FIGS. 257 to 263 is swingable by pivotally attaching a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan in a substantially horizontal fan shape to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. 263, and may change to the first state covering the specific operation section 1311a of the change operation means as shown in FIG. 263, and to the second state exposing the specific operation section 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. Further, the change suppression unit 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when the specific operation unit 1311a is in the first state, and separates when the specific operation unit 1311a changes to the second state. The operation unit 1311b is covered. As described above, by selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppression unit 1312 (F), an erroneous operation of simultaneously operating the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b is less likely to occur.

  The change suppressing means 1312 (F) is constantly urged by a winding spring (not shown) provided at the swing center in a direction to cover the separate operation part 1311 b, and a lock part (first state holding means) 1313 (described later) When the lock (holding) of the first state by F) is released, the state changes to the second state due to the elasticity of the winding spring. By urging the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) toward the second state in this manner, there is no possibility that the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) stops at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. The biasing direction of the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state. However, if the biasing direction is preferably set toward the second state, the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) may be used. When the lock (hold) is released, the special operation section 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the change operation is easy to understand.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) in FIGS. 263 to 265 includes a mounting base 1301 d protruding from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313 a fixed to the mounting base 1301 d, A cam 1313e attached to the tip of a rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the circumferential surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e is slidably contacted with the upper surface of the change suppressing device 1312 (F). 1312 is pressed down against the bias of the winding spring to lock (hold) in the first state covering the specific operation section 1311a.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a by using the unlock key K2, and the change in the peripheral shape of the cam 1313e thereby changes the change suppressing means. A specific release operation of releasing the lock (holding) of 1312 (F) releases the lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppression unit 1312 (F) to enable the change to the second state (the embodiment). Since the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), when the lock (holding) in the first state is released, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) slides on the peripheral surface of the cam 1313 e. The state automatically changes to the second state while touching.) Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the unlock key K2. .

  In the setting value changing operation, when the change suppression unit 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the separate operation unit 1311b, if the separate operation unit 1311b needs to be operated, the change suppression unit 1311 (F) is required. The other operation unit 1311b may be exposed by manually pressing down the operation projection 1312m protruding from 1312 (F) with a finger or the like.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 having the change prevention means 1312 (F) and the security structure (B) of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) shown in FIGS. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the change operation means does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the crime prevention structure is the same as the crime prevention structure (A). There is almost no problem.

  Next, the change suppression means 1312 (I) in FIG. 266 is a form in which a portion corresponding to the setting change board 1310X of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is separated and made independent. By engaging its own key-shaped hinge portion 1312b with a key-shaped hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base member 1302, it is rotatable with respect to the base member 1302 and provided on the setting change board 1310Y. The specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b can be changed to a first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are collectively covered, and a second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are exposed to allow a change operation. The cover 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to a partition wall 1302b raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) in FIG. 266 is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) on the cover 1301 side, and the advancing / retracting shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip of 1313g with a lock shaft 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the first state change suppressing means 1312 (I) and the cover body 1301 are connected to each other to change the change suppressing means 1312 ( I) is locked (held) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates a plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313f according to the unlocking number to retreat the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313g, and thus the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. By a specific release operation of removing the advancing / retracting shaft 1313g from the through 1301f, the lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppression means 1312 (I) is released to enable the change to the second state, and further, the second state. The change suppressing means 1312 (I) changed from the first state to the first state can be locked (held) by the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having the change prevention means 1312 (I) and the security structure (B) of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) shown in FIG. Since the change can be performed only by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the same security problem as in the security structure (A). Is almost none. The first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the security structure (B) employs a relatively high security performance such as a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, and a dial lock 1313f. However, the security performance is lower than these. In any case, any structure may be used as long as the change suppression unit 1312 held in the first state is configured to be released by a specific release operation.
Further, since the change suppressing unit 1312 (I) in FIG. 266 is independent of the cover body 1301, even if it becomes necessary to replace the cover body 1301, the change suppressing unit 1312 (I) can be reused as it is. is there. When the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person breaks the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, unauthorized manipulation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppression means 1312 (I), that is, the unlock number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the change prevention means 1312 (I) can improve the function of preventing the cover body 1301 from being fraudulent.

[30-3-5. Security structure of change operation means (C)]
A third security structure (C) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is such that the security structure (B) sets the change suppression means 1312 in the second state and exposes the change operation means to the outside. In contrast to the above, the change operation means is directly operated, whereas the change suppression means 1312 is provided at a position over the change operation means on the side of the container (main control board box 1320), and the change operation of the change operation means is performed by itself. While making it difficult, the change suppression means 1312 is made to perform the operation of the change operation means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 267, the change prevention means 1312 (J) of the security structure (C) is on the side of the cover body 1301 which is the container, and on the specific operation section 1311a (or another operation section 1311b). It is provided with a cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a position to cover, that is, a position in a first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation section 1311a, and direct external control of the specific operation section 1311a is provided. Make change operations difficult.
The change suppressing means 1312 (J) presses the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a by a pressing operation slide so that a switch input can be mediated by a specific operation from the outside. There is provided a motion conversion mechanism for making the linear motion of the moving element 1313h, that is, the motion enabling the operation for switch input.
Then, when a specific operation of inserting the unlock key K2 into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) and rotating the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation section 1311a is performed by the above-described operation of the motion conversion mechanism. Is directly performed by the pressing operation slider 1313h of the change suppression unit 1312 (J), in other words, the external direct change operation on the specific operation unit 1311a is performed by the change suppression unit. This is executed via a pressing operation slider 1313h of 1312 (J).

According to the change suppression means 1312 (J), the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operation means is performed by the change suppression means fixedly provided on the cover body 1301 side at a position covering the change operation means. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game setting is illegally changed.
On the other hand, when the game setting is normally changed by the change operation means, a specific operation from the outside on the change suppression means 1312 (J) is, for example, an operation of inserting an unlocking key K2 from the outside and twisting. Then, a direct change operation to the change operation means is performed (intermediation execution) by the operation of the change suppression means 1312 (J), and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by terminating the specific operation on the change suppression means 1312 (J), it is possible to return to a state where it is difficult to perform an external direct change operation on the change operation means.

In addition to the case where the rotation lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated by the unlock key K2, for example, the change suppression unit 1312 (J) may change the dial lock 1313f of the change suppression unit 1312 (I) to the advance / retreat shaft 1313g. And the axis of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a are arranged so as to coincide with each other, and the respective dials of the dial lock 1313f are adjusted to the unlocking numbers, and the specific operation unit 1311a is moved through the advance / retreat shaft 1313g. The pressing operation unit 1311p may be configured to be pressed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 268, a shutter plate 1319 that covers another operation unit 1311b is integrally protruded from the end cam 1313i of the change suppression unit 1312 (J), and the end cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose another operation unit 1311b. This not only prevents unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b, but also prevents dust from entering the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (C) of the change suppression means 1312 (J) of FIGS. 267 and 268, the change of the setting value of the game setting by the change operation means has the unlock key K2. Or, it can only be performed by a specific person, such as knowing the unlocking number. Therefore, even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the security problem is the same as the security structure (A). Almost no.

  In addition, the axis of the change operation means described in the security structure (A) is set to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The reduced technical idea can be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppression means 1312 (J) and the like.

[30-4. About technical thoughts]
As is clear from the description so far, the above [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 including the main control unit 1300 according to the security structure (2) of the main control unit corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
"A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined profit to a player when a result of the lottery is a hit,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing a game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed such that an operation unit of the setting key cylinder faces the outside from an opening formed in the cover body.
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is configured such that a recess is formed by the operating portion and the opening so that the position of the operating portion is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body. ,
Further, the recess has a tapered surface inclined downward toward the center.
According to such a gaming machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the set value using the setting key, it is necessary to open the front door frame etc. and work quickly.However, first open the door frame etc. and then set the position of the setting switch of the main control board box. It takes some time to find. In addition, if the setting key is missed due to work, the setting key may slide on the operation unit and protrude into the resin part of the cover body. There is a risk of scratching.
On the other hand, the main control board box of the gaming machine of the above-mentioned technical idea has a concave depression formed by the operation part at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, and furthermore, an inclined taper descending toward the center of the depression. First, since the surface around the setting switch looks conspicuous due to the reflection of indoor lighting by the tapered surface of the depression, it is easy to intuitively understand. Therefore, the setting switch of the main control board box can also be arranged on the hinge side of a door frame or the like that is difficult to see with common sense and is easily shunned, and conversely, by doing so, the door frame and the like must be widely opened. The crime prevention performance can be improved by preventing impropriety.
Also, even if the setting key is missed, the setting key does not protrude to the surface of the cover body by hitting the tapered surface of the recess of the opening or jumps up along the tapered surface, so that the surface of the cover body is not easily rubbed. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover body is damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the clear transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long time (see, for example, paragraphs 2557 to 2579, FIG. 259, FIG. 260, etc.). ).
Note that the tapered surface of the dent may cause a decrease in visibility due to refraction of light. However, the size and the inclination angle of the tapered surface may be reduced by the circuit component itself or a check required for the circuit component. Necessary visibility is obtained by making the size larger than the size of the (display part such as the product number) or setting the inclination angle to be gentle (for example, a case where the inclination angle is made gentle to widen the tapered surface). Can be secured.

In addition, [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the main control unit 1300 described in [Criminal security structure of main control unit (2)] also includes the following technical idea. Note that the control units of the following technical concept include a peripheral control unit 1500, a payout control unit 620d, and the like, in addition to the main control unit 1300.
In addition to the main control MPU 1310a in which two rows of pins are provided on both front and rear surfaces of a plate-shaped package 1310ab, the specific electronic component T includes, for example, a four-sided pins provided in four sides of a square package. Is also included.
[Claim A1]
A gaming machine including a control unit containing a game control board in a control board box,
The control board,
A printed circuit board,
Circuit components including electronic components attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box,
A base body,
A cover body that forms an internal space between the base body and the base body together with the base body and has an opening that is opened to expose some of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is a specific electronic component, and when a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is a specific pin, the opening and the specific electronic component A gaming machine wherein the arrangement is such that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening can substantially overlap or obliquely intersect in a row direction of a pin group including the specific pin.
According to such a gaming machine, even if the wrongdoer inserts foreign matter into the internal space of the control board box from the gap between the opening and the circuit component, and aims at the specific pin of the specific electronic component from there, When a straight line (see reference numeral L1 in FIG. 254) connecting the specific pin and the opening overlaps in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin (see reference numeral L2 in FIG. 254), the specific pin is shielded with another pin. It is possible to protect from foreign matter, and if the straight line obliquely intersects the pin group, a sufficient contact load cannot be obtained even if the foreign matter touches the specific pin, so that the contact resistance increases and the specific electron Electrical access to parts becomes difficult. Therefore, impropriety due to foreign matter can be prevented.

[Claim A2]
A gaming machine including a control unit containing a game control board in a control board box,
The control board,
A printed circuit board,
Circuit components including electronic components attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board,
The control board box,
A base body,
A cover body that forms an internal space between the base body and the base body together with the base body and has an opening that is opened to expose some of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is a specific pin, the specific electronic component package is interposed therebetween. A gaming machine, wherein the specific pin is arranged on a side opposite to the opening.
According to such a gaming machine, since the specific pin is located on the rear side of the package of the specific electronic component when viewed from the opening, even if a foreign substance is inserted from a gap between the opening and the circuit component, the foreign substance is specified. It is practically difficult to make the pins come into contact with the pins.

[Claim A3]
The printed circuit board of the control board box is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, a row of pins of the specific electronic component is arranged substantially in parallel with a long side of the printed circuit board, and the opening is formed on a short side of the printed circuit board. The gaming machine according to claim A1, wherein the gaming machine is arranged in a game machine.
In such a gaming machine, the degree that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening crosses obliquely with respect to the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin can be increased, and the distance from the opening to the specific pin increases. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to control the foreign matter in the internal space.

[Claim A4]
A gaming machine including a control unit containing a game control board in a control board box,
The control board includes a circuit component including an electronic component,
The control board box,
A base body,
A cover body that forms an internal space between the base body and the base body together with the base body and has an opening that is opened to expose some of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
Provided is a gaming machine in which, when a specific one of the electronic components is a specific electronic component, the circuit component other than the specific electronic component is arranged between the specific electronic component and the opening. Examples of the specific electronic component include electronic components that can be a target of unauthorized manipulation.
According to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), since circuit components other than the specific electronic component are arranged in a barricade manner between the opening and the specific electronic component, the gaming machine is inserted into the specific electronic component through the opening. The directed foreign object hits a circuit component in between. Therefore, the arrival of the foreign matter to the specific electronic component is hindered.

The main control unit 1300 further includes the following technical concept.
[Claim B1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery by satisfying a predetermined condition, and provides a predetermined profit to a player when a result of the lottery is a hit,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing a game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed such that an operation unit of the setting key cylinder faces outside from an opening formed in the cover body.
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is configured such that a concave portion is formed by the operating portion and the opening so that the position of the operating portion is deeper than an outer surface of the cover body. A gaming machine characterized by the following.
According to such a gaming machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when setting values are changed using the setting keys, the setting keys that could not be inserted too quickly may slip on the operation unit and protrude into the resin part of the cover. May cause streak-like scratches on the surface of the surface.
On the other hand, in the main control board box of the gaming machine of the present invention, since the concave portion is formed by the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, the setting key cannot be inserted. However, the setting key hits the edge of the opening and does not protrude from the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover body is damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long time.
[Claim B2]
The gaming machine according to claim B1,
Attach a back cover that can be opened and closed and the main control board box to the rear side of the main body frame having a game board, and do not provide a cover for the opening in the main control board box. It is characterized in that it can be covered with a back cover.
In such a gaming machine, the security performance of the setting key cylinder (prevention of unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder by a duplicate key or the like) can be achieved by the back cover of the main body frame without providing a security cover at the opening of the main control board box. The depth of the gaming machine can be kept within the specified range without squeezing other elements because there is no protrusion of the setting key cylinder from the opening of the main control board box or extra protrusion of the cover. it can.
[Claim B3]
The gaming machine according to claim B2, wherein a bulging portion is provided on an inner surface of the back cover so as to fit (play) into a recess of the cover body.
In such a gaming machine, when the dent of the cover body does not match the bulge of the back cover, the bulge of the back cover interferes and does not close normally, so that a tampered product is found or the main control unit is installed. The above deficiencies can be prevented.

[Claim C1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery by satisfying a predetermined condition, and provides a predetermined profit to a player when a result of the lottery is a hit,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing a game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a cover body that covers the base body, and accommodates the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
The setting switch has an attachment portion attached to the main control portion, a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key in a cylindrical shape smaller in diameter than the top shape of the attachment portion, and is opened on the cover body. The top of the setting key cylinder is formed so as to face outside from the opening,
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted to a receiving cylinder portion protrudingly provided on the inner space side of the cover body,
On the other hand, by bringing the cylinder end on the side opposite to the opening of the receiving cylinder portion close to the top of the mounting portion that protrudes outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the position between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder is reduced. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to prevent a foreign object inserted in the gap from passing into the internal space.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a wire-like foreign object is inserted from the opening of the cover body into the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder, it hits the top of the mounting portion at the tip of the foreign material in the traveling direction and stops. Even if the direction of the tip of the foreign matter can be changed there, the passage is difficult because the movement is hindered by a narrow gap between the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder and the top of the mounting part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a wire-like foreign object aiming at a gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder from the opening portion of the cover body, thereby preventing an illegal act.
In addition, such a fraud prevention effect can be achieved by using the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, so that little special cost is required.

[Claim C2]
The gaming machine according to claim C1, wherein a distance between a cylinder end of the cylinder receiving portion and a top of a mounting portion of the setting switch is equal to or less than a dimension of a gap between the cylinder receiving portion and the setting key cylinder. A gaming machine characterized in that it is formed.
Usually, the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder is set to a minimum width (clearance) required to allow the setting key cylinder to pass through the receiving cylinder. Even if such a thin foreign matter passes through the gap t1, it is not easy to change the direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the portion of the gap t2 smaller than the gap t1 in that state. Also, even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control foreign matter toward the target point thereafter.

[Claim C3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the setting switch is mounted on a surface of the main control unit and near a joint with the main control board box.
The vicinity of the junction of the main control unit with the main control board box is unlikely to bend due to the rigidity of the main control board box even if the main control unit is pressed in the surface direction. Therefore, the provision of the setting switch in that portion makes it difficult to sink even when the setting switch is pressed from the outside, so that the pressing of the setting switch forcibly depresses the main control unit and forcibly expands the interval t2. It will be difficult for us. In addition, suppressing the deflection of the main control unit when the setting switch is operated is also effective in preventing the main control unit from cracking when used for a long time.

[Claim D]
A gaming machine including a control unit containing a game control board in a control board box,
The control board,
A printed circuit board,
A plurality of circuit components attached to the printed circuit board,
The control board box,
A base body,
A cover body that forms an internal space between the base body and the base body together with the base body and has an opening that is opened to expose some of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
At least one of the circuit components is a lower portion attached to the printed circuit board, and an upper portion having a bottom shape smaller than the top shape of the lower portion and having a height up to the opening smaller than the height of the lower portion. , And is formed so that the upper step faces the outside from the opening formed in the cover body,
The opening of the cover body has a receiving cylinder portion projecting from the inner space side of the cover body and surrounding the upper portion of the circuit component,
A gaming machine, wherein a cylinder end on the side opposite to the opening of the receiving cylinder is brought close to a top of the lower part of the circuit component.
Here, the bottom of the upper section does not mean the absolute bottom of the upper section, and when the upper section extends into the lower section, the side surface of the upper section and the top of the lower section are connected. The apparent part that intersects.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a linear foreign object is inserted from the opening of the cover body into the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the upper stage portion of the circuit component, the top of the lower stage portion at the end in the direction of travel of the foreign object. Hits a dead end. From here, even if the tip of the foreign matter is turned sideways and the narrow gap between the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder and the top of the lower part is forcibly expanded and pierced, the place is high in the internal space. Because of the position, the wrongdoer, for example, draws out a foreign substance that has broken through a narrow space into the internal space, makes the tip abut on the printed circuit board by bending due to its own weight, and aimed at the direction of the tip in the abutting state It is necessary to perform an operation of switching in the direction, but it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign object that is bent and has a long length drooping by its own weight, and the force is not transmitted well to the tip.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act due to a linear foreign object aimed at a gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the upper portion of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body.
The circuit components include a setting switch including a lower mounting portion and a setting key cylinder as an upper portion, a setting switching button including a lower mounting portion and a pressing operation portion as an upper portion, a RAM clear switch, and the like. Is mentioned.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments and other forms. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments and the like, and as shown below, in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. Various improvements and design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiments and the like, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 551a Top plate portion of payout base 551 (tank unit mounting portion)
551ah Opening notch 551c Right side plate of payout base 551 (tank unit attachment)
551d Upper part of back plate of payout base 551 (tank unit mounting part)
551t ridge 551z passage seat 552 ball tank (tank unit)
553, 553A Tank rail (tank unit, payout ball passage)
553h Falling port 553l Foreign matter discharge bypass passage 553m Support tube 553p Rail outlet 553q Inverted bulging portion 553r Arc-shaped portion 553s Short tube portion 553t Corner 553u Step 553v Ball stopper slit 553w Passage side wall 553x Gutter front wall 553y Gutter rear wall 553z passage Bottom wall 555b Protective wall 556, 556A Rectifying member 556a Rectifying piece 556b Oscillating shaft 557, 557A Ball stopper 557b Slot 557c Sliding base 557d Ball stopper 557e Operation knob 557f Elastic lock piece 557g Anchor 557h Flowing space 557i Detour 570a Guidance passage (payout ball passage)
570p Guidance entrance 580 Dispensing device 5530 Discharge port K Bend SS Gap Y Electric wire

Claims (1)

Door frame,
A body frame located after the door frame,
A ball tank provided above the main body frame and for supplying game balls to a payout device provided on the side of the main body frame,
A tank rail communicating with the ball tank and causing game balls in the ball tank to flow toward the payout device;
In a gaming machine comprising: a plurality of drop openings capable of discharging foreign substances, which are opened in the tank rail;
The tank rail,
A passage bottom wall forming a bottom;
When the side close to the door frame is the front and the opposite side is the back, a gutter front wall provided on the front side of the passage bottom wall,
A gutter rear wall provided on the rear side of the passage bottom wall,
The corner of the bottom wall of the passage and the front wall of the gutter are formed into an arcuate portion with an inner radius so that foreign matter that has entered the tank rail is easily moved, and the bottom wall of the passage is formed so that the foreign matter is difficult to move. The corner with the gutter rear wall is a valley-folded corner,
A gaming machine, wherein at least a part of the plurality of falling ports is arranged on the corner side of the valley-folding shape which is a corner between the passage bottom wall and the gutter rear wall.